Home

"user manual"

1. Top number of latch gt GO gt GO 2 END gt End number of latch gt GO gt 6 gt WDT value 2 input unit 10 ms ES gt gt CLEAR gt gt Setting for multiple items is also available End of writing is displayed 4 6 List of Operation Procedures 4 31 4 6 6 Operation in parameter mode P LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR oc O E m Li E 9 mr q 6 Ll 104 I H OVERVIEW SYSTEM MONITOR NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 4 6 7 Operation in other mode O Details Procedures key input sequence Operation that checks the error step number error code SHIFT gt OTHER R 2 gt Except AnA ANUCPU 2 Error check for the current error in the 2 gt 1P a AnA AnUCPU ACPU other than AnA and ls AnUCPU Check the program double E Program check coil command code END SHIFT OTHER gt LS gt t J gt GO command Step number SHIFT gt OTHER gt 3 gt 1 gt 2 gt y gt Top O SP Monitor the buffer memory number of unit Buffer memory batch l l o details of the special function monitoring init gt R Buffer memory gt gt address i E Monitor the clock data of the Clock monitor SHIFT gt OTHER gt 3 1 gt ACPU Clear all memories in the ACPU
2. E Ra QO HEX WLI Tne bale 4 5 6 Cl Dl a gt Tl 2 3 ELF EE O Enter Del AC 2 9 Test Operation 2 51 2 9 3 Information and set items displayed on each setting key window screen NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR No 2 Set items on the setting key window screen The table shown below describes details of the set items mentioned on the preceding page Description of setting MELSECNET H CC Link Computer Item Bus Direct CPU T Ethernet connection connection in connection Channel No Sets the channel number of the controller targeted to the test operation 0 Host loop Net No 1 to 239 7 0 1 to 255 Specified loop FF When the host station Is FF When the host Ea selected station is selected 0 When the 0 When the control l Station number FF 1 to 64 a master station station is selected is selected 1 to 64 When a normal at 1 to 64 Whena station is selected a local station is selected CPUN O to 4 This item must be set only when the system is connected to multiple QCPUs It is not necessary when 0 the system is connected to another CPU On Off setting Set 1 On Set 0 Off For further information about device numbers and names that can be entered GT Designer 2 Version O Screen Design Manual Decimal number 16 bit one word module Six digits including a digit for a sign are set Entry example 12345 32 bit two word module Ten digits including a digit f
3. Operation example lt Key operation gt lt Display gt Select the Delete mode 14 D20 SHIFT LY DELETE 14 K2Y0018 19 gt END 20 NOP Read the 6th step 5 LD TO a A 7 P 7 K80 E The GO key deletes the command at the cursor position The step number is brought forward Q The ANI MO command was deleted 4 24 4 5 Basic Operation 4 5 4 Deleting commands 4 5 5 Using the help function HELP is input to use the Help function Input of HELP displays the Help function menus in each mode Select the corresponding item for execution S am Lu 1 Reading the command in the sequence program E Example of reading the area using the MOV command in the sequence program Operation example 7 z O iu 2 09 lt Key operation gt lt Display gt CD Input the HELP key in the Read mode HELP MENU 1 READ READ HELP 2 COMMENT DISPLAY S O 6 1 Select Read 7 5 2 CLEAR END HELP MENU 4 2 Select INSTRUCTION READ S KEY IN INSTRUCTION S F CLEAR END HELP MENU Ez Set the MOV command READ 0 KEY IN STEP NO g MOY MOV S CLEAR END HELP MENU D2 oy Reading MOV D20 K2Y0018 _ 13 D20 of the 13th step 2 13 K2Y0018 is a 09 6 D20 a 13 gt MOV Z 0 13 D20 Message when the MOV NOT FOUND command is not present after the 13th step UU y kE Now reading the command with the Help function iti command specification i
4. Communication driver Ethernet YOKOGAWA 03 02 Communication driver MODBUS TCP 03 09 GT11 0 j GT Soft GOT1000 Bus Serial X O O x O fe Continued to next page App 11 SERVO AMPLIFIER CNC MONITOR BACKUP RESTORE FUNCTION MONITOR CNC DATA I O SFC MONITOR 7 ui 9 O Z m A o lt Item ALLEN BRADLEY PLC connection GE FANUC PLC connection LS IS PLC connection SCHNEIDER PLC connection SIEMENS PLC connection Microcomputer connection OMRON temperature controller connection SHINKO indicating controller connection CHINO controller connection FUJI SYS temperature controller connection App 12 GT11 Version of GT Soft Description GT Version of OS GOT1000 Bus Serial Designer2 Can use L device by MicroLogix 1000 Sp Communication driver 1200 1500 series AB MicroLogix 02 02 ES Communication driver 2 58L AB Control CompactLogix 03 03 l Communication driver Supporting the Ethernet connection 2 63R X EtherNet IP AB 03 07 Communication driver Supporting connection to GE FANUC PLC 2 82L GE Fanuc Automation SNP X 03 13 O Supporting connection to Control O CompactLogix X O Communication driver Supporting connection to LS IS PLC 2 90U LS Industrial Systems MASTER K 04 02 O Supporting connection to the Communication driver MODBUS TCP MODBU
5. File not found The file to be copied does not exist The GOT fails to communicate with the Timeout Directory illegal The directory is invalid C7 Z O Data protect The data is protected l The number of registerable programs is No of registration over exceeded The button is pressed even though a file is not specified SFC MONITOR File is not specified Some error found in file system Errors occur in file systems E The file cannot be written in the copy Can not write file o l destination device Can not read out file The file to be copied cannot be read Filename illegal The file name is invalid The GOT tries to copy ALL ORG to the CNC but the machining program with Program No duplicate the same number already exists in the CNC so the GOT cannot execute the CNC data UO Error Other errors 12 5 Error Messages and Corrective Actions Corrective action Set the correct connection and settings Check that a USB memory extended memory card or CF card is inserted into the GOT Check the USB memory Stop the operation of the PLC CPU built in the CNC and then execute the CNC data I O again Stop the CNC operation and then execute the CNC data I O again Make enough space in the CNC memory by operations including deleting machining programs and then execute the CNC data I O again Set the correct settings and then execute the CNC data I O again Check the conn
6. SHIFT gt OTHER gt 3 gt 2 gt GO gt 4 gt GO Clearing of all PC memories Clear all sequence program Clearing of all programs microcomputer program and SHIFT gt OTHER gt 3 gt 2 gt 2 gt 4 gt GO T C setting value areas Clear all details of the bit device and the word device in SHIFT gt OTHER gt 3 gt gt E gt the ACPU Clearing of all device memories SHIFT gt OTHER gt 3 gt 3 gt 111 Set the PLC No of other stations for access on the MELSECNET II B or gt MELSECNET 10 gt 2 gt PC No gt 3 gt Network No Station No gt PLC No setting Select the main sub program Main sub program switching displayed on the list edit SHIFT gt OTHER gt 3 gt 3 gt 2 f Ep eo screen embieminidiod Operate the run stop status of SHIFT gt OTHER gt 16 1 ER R the ACPU from the GOT A Specify the memory address absolute address of the SHIFT gt OTHER gt 3 gt 4 gt 3 gt SET gt Address GO GO gt Read write of machine hexadecimal ER ACPU Read the memory gt language o details and write the machine 4 language to the memory gt SET A
7. controllers are added Continued to next page Version of ee GT Soft Item Description GT l GOT1000 Designer2 o Wu L a Supporting connection to YAMATAKE Communication driver Z a 2 18U x x O of VAMATAKE temperature controller YAMATAKE SDC DMC 02 02 ae UU O temperature The functions to automatically stop PE controller monitoring faulty stations and to eN Communication driver connection disconnect communications with l YAMATAKE SDC DMC 03 03 O controllers are added Communication driver S Supporting connection to YOKOGAWA ES i l pan 2 43V YOKOGAWA GREEN UT100 O EG emperature controller ETT j UT2000 03 01 2 temperature 22 The functions to automatically sto controller OTa 7 p Communication driver l monitoring faulty stations and to connection l S j o 2 58L YOKOGAWA GREEN UT100 O disconnect communications with UT2000 03 03 controllers are added i O Communication driver D Supporting connection to RKC o x 2 18U RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS O S temperature controller 5 02 02 E RKC temperature E Supporting connection to SRZ controller o som edi n The functions to automatically stop Communication driver monitoring faulty stations and to 2 58L RKC SR Mini HG MODBUS O disconnect communications with 03 03 controllers are added Q lt Communication driver 2 Supporting connection to inverter 2 18U x x O E FREQROL 500 700 02 02 9 O Setting range for Timeout Time has b
8. m Program display gt HELP gt 1 gt 2 T i i gt S isan On Set the specified range in the n the Write mode E inuous write i l program to NOP Start step specification gt gt na Siep _ GO specification Start step specification gt o 2 SHIFT gt WRITE Tc Z Write modify change of Write the new program modify S program change S gt y S 09 4 6 3 Operation in read mode R z z Q Z E Details Procedures key input sequence A O XI ID WLW Read the command of the specified step number inthe READ gt gt Step number gt L program Command reading with the specified step number Read the command with the Read the specified command READ gt Command pone K Device number GOH gt GOL specified command in the program oc O E m ul E 9 mr q O Ll Q I H Read the command with the Read the command with the p l l READ gt Device gt Device number GO redadas specified device used in the vice i i program GO Read operation above X E Display the program with Automatic scroll gt SET gt Step number ose ere automatic scroll MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 4 6 List of Operation Procedures 4 29 4 6 2 Operation in write mode W 4 6 4 Operation in insert mode I Details Procedures key
9. 1274KB enhanced version Enhanced Version 7 e O JOJO OJOJOJO OOO OJO NETWORK MONITOR OJOIO G Advanced Recipe Advanced Recipe 1241KB Continued to next page O Q MOTION MONITOR 1 1 Before Using Each Function 1 7 1 1 2 Hardware and OS required for each function O Required x Unusable OS memory Option function board Extended function OS Function name space GT15 QFNB option OS name GT15 FNB GT15 MESB48M user area GT15 QFNBUIM an monitor for 592KB Ladder monitor MELSEC FX O Ladder monitor for 1082KB x O MELSEC Q QnA A list editor List editor for MELSEC A 1058KB Oo O O FX list editor List editor for MELSEC FX 1058KB o O O Intelligent module monitor Intelligent module monitor 384KB o o l o O Servo amplifier monitor Servo amplifier monitor 524KB oe l o O GOT Platform Library 100KB Not required ar SFG monitor 1373KB AE R E SFC monitor gt 2 HO Function Expansion 4728KB O con MES interface MES Interface 3196KB 95 1 Applicable to the GT1595 X GT1585V S GT1585 S GT1575V S and GT1575 S only 2 Applicable to the GT1585V S and GT1575V S only 3 Inapplicable to the GT1555 Q and GT1550 Q 4 This function is dedicated to Japanese version 5 A capacity of 8218KB in the add on memory 48MB of the GT15 MESB48M is used for the MES interface function operation 6 For using fonts install option fonts if necessary For how to use fonts and the setting method refer
10. Continued to next page 9 3 Display Select a function to monitor Select the servo amplifier monitor to use Point 0 From previous page How to display the utility For how to display the utility refer to the following gt GT16 User s manual 8 3 Utility Display GT15 User s manual 9 3 Utility Display Displaying communication setting window After turning on the GOT the communication setting window is displayed at the first startup of the servo amplifier monitor only For displaying the communication setting window at the second or later startup touch the button on the servo amplifier monitor screen 237 9 4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens If the project data has not been downloaded The servo amplifier monitor can be started from the utility even if the project data has not been downloaded to the GOT 9 3 Display 9 13 to oc uu a lt O gt oc Lu 0 oc O Z le CNC MONITOR FUNCTION BACKUP RESTORE SFC MONITOR CNC DATA I O IAPPENDICES NDEX Changing screens The following describes how to change the screen At the second or later startup Utility or user created monitor screen At the first startup Communication setting window Xx ChNO il Chio Comm Driver 4 gt End _ 1 MELSERVO JS J28 M 2 cCLink ID 4 Touch Ch Setup i i fa Go 1 ihe Kr ee Ladla T AA
11. For GT15 Continued to next page 4 3 1 Outline until the start Starting from the special function switch MELSEC A List editor For GT11 Starting from the ladder monitor Activate the MELSEC A list editor on the Ladder monitor function screen Touch List ee BB 8889 EM Ea Subsection 3 4 1 Information and key functions displayed on the Ladder monitor screen Communication setting window 1 When no keyword is entered in the target PLC Point 1 Continued from previous page When a keyword is entered in the target PLC m Enter the keyword T L gt Subsection 4 3 2 Utility display procedure S Initial information displayed in the display area e MODE SELECTION E READ INS PARAM O PRESS MODE KEY i 1 The communication setting window is not displayed when starting from the ladder monitor gt How to display the utility For how to display the utility refer to the following S Z L gt GT16 User s manual 8 3 Utility Display z SS ili i uE GT15 User s manual 9 3 Utility Display 33 Ww 2 GT11 User s manual 9 3 Utility Display Displaying communication setting window After turning on the GOT the communication setting window is displayed at the first startup of the MELSEC A list editor only For displaying the communication setting window at the second or later startup touch the button on the MELSEC A list editor screen oc
12. From previous page D Touch the gt lt 1 and keys to specify the following items listed under READ SECTION e Sequence program In the case of the MELSEC A ladder monitor Main program Subprogram 1 Da Subprogram 2 A4U NETHORK NO 0 240 Subprogram 3 A4U PLC NO PLC reading screen READ SELECTION COMMENT In the case of the MELSEC FX ladder monitor Main program fixed ce a o RR Jao SETTING NON SETTING for comment reading In the case of the FXCPU READ SELECTION CHANNEL NO 1 NETWORK NO 0 PLC NO FF Exit Ladder Break nnr T After the items under READ SECTION are specified touch the key Point P Displaying the ladder monitor screen The MELSEC FX ladder monitor screen displays the sequence program that was executed when the PLC was read If any of the set values of the sequence program is changed re read the PLC Changes to set values are displayed on the screen when the MELSEC A ladder monitor is executed It is not necessary to re read the PLC Continued to next page 3 22 3 3 Display 3 3 3 Display From previous page da Enter the keyword registered in the target controller In the case of the MELSEC A ladder monitor When no keyword is registered ime tater contort The data entered can be corrected with the following keys S R o key Used to delete a character of the entered infor gt When a keyword is ti O re
13. MOOI 30546 30746 7752 781A ane 30547 30747 7753 781B Tease aI 30148 30348 75C4 768C IES 30149 30349 75C5 768D E lala 30549 30749 E 02 Command o K ee 30550 30750 7756 781E E Heo Guus a ee 30151 30351 75C7 768F 30552 30752 7758 7820 30144 30344 75CO 7688 Pl car ron Teses QD75MH Servo parameter Ex setting i DRA g 164 A or 30565 30765 7765 782D prog eo 3 30166 30366 75D6 769E A TA pire 30567 30767 7767 782F O to 10000 r min 30568 30768 7768 7830 30570 30770 776A 7832 P M OVERVIEW N O Q E WwW e SYSTEM MONITOR LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC A LIST EDITOR MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR O UU gt Q G E uu 9 y JJ ul Z oc O E Z le NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 111 6 5 36 QD75MH module monitoring Buffer memory address Screen example 30174 30374 75DE 7646 30574 30774 776E 7836 E 30175 30375 75DF 76A7 EEE 30575 30775 776F 7837 30172 30372 75DC 76A4 30572 30772 776C 7834 30173 30373 75DD 76A5 30573 30773 776D 7835 QD75MH Servo parameter Ex setting 2 i Sarr re ruse dr ell ma Cno NO MOLON speca T Speed T e L speed ele S EL UST Currant command te Vie GITE TE gi Virgen yl Malaisia EOP SIE AI T T Spire nel SlENEOder IE A A L 444 Se al ER 4 J sj i 24 si 4 L 2 L E Ga Ds 3
14. O LL 7 APPENDICES INDEX 13 2 Specifications 13 2 1 System configuration This section describes the system configuration for the SFC monitor function For connection type settings and precautions on the communication unit cable and connection type refer to the following manual GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Target controller Controller QCPU Q mode 1 Eor creating a multiple CPU system with the QOOCPU Q01CPU Q02CPU QO2HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU and or Q25HCPU use CPUs with the function version B or later Connection type O Available x Unavailable Function Connection form between GOT and controller MELSECNET H CC Link Direct Computer l CC i 5 r Bus GFU a Ethernet connection nee connection on in SS Supl connection connection MELSECN P 0 E connection connection IE 2 connection monitor For the MELSECNET 10 connection use a QCPU and network module QJ71LP21 QU71LP21 25 QJ71LP21S 25 and QJ71BR11 with the function version B or later 2 Indicates the CC Link IE controller network connection 3 Indicates CC Link connection Intelligent device station 4 Indicates CC Link connection via G4 5 With the QOOJCPU the bus extension connector box A9GT QCNB can be connected to an extension base unit only The bus extension connector box cannot be connected to a main base unit 6 The Q12PRHCPU and Q25PRHCPU are not available 13 4 13 2 Specifications 13 2 1 System
15. cor1009 ET T 6 The system monitor function is capable of monitoring and changing the devices within a target controller It is intended to troubleshoot the controller system and to streamline maintenance operations By installing the system monitor an extended function OS from GT Designer 2 into the GOT you can monitor and test the devices of the controller and the buffer memory of the intelligent function module Any device on four dedicated screens can be monitored The system monitor function comprises four monitors entry monitor batch monitor TC monitor and BM monitor and you can monitor any device according to the application Entry monitor On the GT15 DEVICE MONITOR ChNo 1 NetNo OST FFICPUNO 0 The entry monitor function monitors up to 8 controller devices entered by the user in a single window U Section 2 5 Entry Monitor TC monitor On the GT15 To MON TOR ChNo 1 NetNo JST FFICPUNo 0 FILE NAME MAIN PG T 1 DU G SU E Operation start 1 P 30 W Products Line A Ie DL S L E Sealey U Sy Products Line C The TC monitor function monitors the present value set value contact point and coil of up to 8 controller timers T counters C from the device number specified by the user in a single window 2 gt Section 2 7 TC Monitor Monitoring Timers and Counters T T Products Line Batch monitor On the GT15 BATCH MONITOR Chio
16. gt CNC monitor from the Main Menu function switch For how to display the utility refer to the user s manual of GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual the GOT to be used 6 2 Touch Switch Set the channel oure t a S A a ea Set the channel number of the CNC connected to the GOT lo Comm Driver MELSEC FX _2 E71 Connection 3 A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 T Pl P gt olulefe rf fol ole fs 7 i o o als olefelal lel 4 a s Communication setting window Je e 1 1 ESE MONITOR 1 o CNC monitor startup w ee sd Ba E The CNC monitor starts after a channel number is selected MEMO MER IU y PTT TTT eon elelee e ole psy AEE EEE EEE x e e1 1 ESE 10 6 10 3 Display Point f 1 How to display the utility For how to display the utility refer to the following K gt GT16 User s manual 8 3 Utility Display GT15 User s manual 9 3 Utility Display a SERVO AMPLIFIER C3 MONITOR 2 Communication setting window display The communication setting window is displayed only at initial startup of the CNC monitor after turning on the GOT power To display the communication setting window at startup from the second time or after touch the button on the CNC monitor screen lt gt 10 4 Operation Procedures am O gt Z GQ 6 Oz Z o O L 3 Ifthe project data has not been downloaded The CNC monitor can be started from the
17. is displayed when no detail code exists Displays the error details Touching the item displays the Error details screen Displays the date and the time that the error occurs 6 Set the items to be displayed in the log list 2 gt This section 1 b Displays the operation status error information and others of the monitored PLC CPU Log list Type No Detail Displays the log types Ope Operation log Err Error log Displays the operation codes or error codes Displays the 4 digit detail codes of the operation logs or the error logs for the errors occurred in the CC Link Safety system remote l O module is displayed when no detail code exists Operation Error message Date Time Displays the operation details or error messages Displays BROKEN OPERATION ERROR LOG when the log data is damaged Displays the dates and the time of operations or the dates and time that errors occur Touching an operation log displays the Operation details screen 3 This section 2 Touching an error log displays the Error details screen 3 This section 3 6 4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen 6 19 6 4 3 Composition of PC Information monitor screen and key functions LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR OVERVIEW SYSTEM MONITOR MELSEC A LIST EDITOR O UU gt Q G E uu 9 y JJ ul Z oc O E Z le NETW
18. 0006 Ea ea A ES E AMES DU 0007 0008 0009 0 Coordinate Coordinate 18 to 37 0012 to 0025 CHS D A Digital Value 000E x1 CH1 A D Digital Value i i CH2 A D Digital Value H 00 Number of Points 00 Code 500 tesolution Setting O L 1 1 4000 2 1 8000 3 1 12000 l SET Data p END A DA Input Output itor Screen RESET Che MENU AAA Inputs X Outputs Y JU WOT Er re 30 10 CH3 Output i C 1 e READY i vop Centre 1 4 D Loop Control 05 5 8 ee ae 3 08 8 Resol Selectic 09 R on 9 9 Resol Selection j D 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 61 6 5 24 A1S63ADA module monitoring OVERVIEW SYSTEM MONITOR LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION 0 5 H E GM n MELSEC A LIST EDITOR AL Coordinate Designation MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR O UU gt Q G E uu 9 y JJ ul Z oc O E Z le LOT E C HSH A E E ER RR RR I 0 00 y C NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 6 5 25 AD75P A1SD75P module monitoring 6 62 Buffer memory address EIR TRE K a Tas 908 0390 1009 Ta Method Acc Dec E oe wle 0346 938 03AA 1038 040E 11 ii MAA EN CIRE ES apa CAE i CO Basic Parameter 1 Parameter Valid Range Oimm 1 inch Pulse Per Revolution Travel Per Revolution Rotation Direction 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 5 25 AD75P A1SD75P module monitoring Buffer memory address Secon ann wo mist az ms
19. 016C to 016D 0202 to 0203 6 89 6 5 35 QD75M module monitoring LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR OVERVIEW SYSTEM MONITOR MELSEC A LIST EDITOR O UU gt Q G E uu 9 y JJ ul Z oc O E Z le NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR Buffer s address Screen example eee QD75M OPR detailed parameters O gt ew e longue Lie CU Denia Bu le ee TET GON T s 10 Tey Ku PELS Ol to 2147263647 IR ag ES pu BE 0D75M OPR basic parameters cs ew ar 1 Jae Menon EES DISTER AGE SETT bata set 2 RAI G Ee Setti A ee 0 Ce eE EIS to non li eE E erp E ienaa IE Anen EUS 5 range Cleese iii E Zijl 1405 SE TM file LHD Giro SSII LET IL to 10000000 pulec E 6 90 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 5 35 QD75M module monitoring 1 229 00E5 379 529 017B 0211 2 82 232 0052 00E8 382 932 017E 0214 3 83 233 0053 OOEY 383 933 017F 0215 4 86 236 0056 OOEC 386 536 0182 0218 80 to 81 0050 to 0051 230 to 231 OOE6 to 00E7 380 to 381 017C to 017D 530 to 531 0212 to 0213 84 to 85 0054 to 0055 234 to 235 OOEA to 00EB 384 to 385 0180 to 0181 934 to 535 0216 to 0217 7 88 238 0058 OOEE 388 538 0184 021A 8 89 239 0059 OOEF 389 539 0185 021B 1 70 220 0046 00DC 370 520 0172 0208 2 71 221 0047 OODD 371 521 0173 0209 3 78 228 0
20. 4728KB 1 The OS memory space differs between the built in flash memory ROM and the user memory RAM User memory RAM 360KB 674KB 674KB 4170KB 1024KB 1024KB 770KB 370KB 770KB 770KB 770KB 200KB 1940KB 19381KB 100KB 100KB 84KB 13461KB A Required x Unusable Option function board GT16 MESB Not required Not required Not required Not required Not required Not required Not required Not required Not required Not required Not required Not required Not required Not required Not required Not required Not required O When writing data including the OS communication drivers and project data from the built in flash memory ROM to the user memory RAM the OS data size increases Make sure that the total data size does not exceed the user memory RAM capacity 2 For using fonts install option fonts if necessary For how to use fonts and the setting method refer to the following manual 237 GT Designer2 VersionL Screen Design Manual 2 3 Specifications of Applicable Characters 1 1 Before Using Each Function 1 1 2 Hardware and OS required for each function xr For GT15 O Required Either one x Unusable OS memory Option function board Extended function OS Function name space GT15 QFNB option OS name GT15 FNB GT15 MESB48M user area GT15 QFNBOIM Bar code 84KB Not required RFID RFID 166KB Not required System monitor 746KB Not required Pri
21. 8 4 1 System configuration screen layout This section describes the configuration of the System Configuration screen that is displayed after startup of the Q motion monitor and the functions of the keys displayed on the screen Displayed contents 2 otion Monitor 2 No Description The CPU numbers are displayed for CPUs and the control CPU number for the installed module 1 To choose the motion controller CPU for servo monitor servo parameter setting touch the respective display position 2 Displays the keys used with the operation on the System Configuration screen shown in ES Touch input Key functions The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operation on the System Configuration screen Key Function Displays the communication setting window Exits the monitor and returns to the screen where the Q motion monitor was started Selects the motion controller CPU where servo monitor servo parameter setting is performed Changes the System Configuration screen to the monitor menu screen Motion Monitor gt 8 4 2 Monitor Menu screen Changes the System Configuration screen to parameter setting screen Parameter Set lt 8 4 10 Parameter setting screen Scrolls the display one stage up or down to display the system configuration of the currently undisplayed stage immediately before after the currently displayed stage Scrolls down one stage Scrolls up one stag
22. AJAJAJ SA HEH U Ua K SEE SU 2 I lt gt E G Enter Del L l Chio 1 NetNo DIST FFICPUNO 0 2147483645 DW DEVICE MONITOR Point f 1 Retaining entered information nnn If the system monitor function is reactivated without turning off the power to the GOT the last displayed information will be retained If the power to the GOT is turned on again and the system monitor function is reactivated the last displayed information will be deleted 2 Entry unit of monitor devices Each monitor device is entered in a combination of a network number and a CPU station number If the CPU station number is changed the entered monitor device will become invalid 2 22 2 4 Operation Procedure Common to the System Monitor Screens 2 4 2 Entering monitor devices specifying monitor stations and devices 2 4 3 Key window setting columns and operation procedure Operating the key window OVERVIEW 7 Using the 4 and gt keys move the cursor to the item you want to set N The displayed keyboard depends on the position of the cursor as shown below Displayed position of cursor a k DIST FFICPUNo 0 7 7 16b 0 32b 1 0 oc O E Z O Lu E L gt nw Keyboard displayed when the cursor is placed on the device name E rr co T LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION x Chio Uel nag OST FFICPUNO 0 DEVICE 6b 0 32b 1 TLS TFS s 4 5 6 0 0 HHHH Keyboard displayed w
23. Channe oO J SET Data MONIT onitor Screen Chg END Inputs X DO WOT Error ul READY 2 SSS EES OSE J O S 0 Po MN MO 6 0 1 OO SET E MONITO Cun AGSAD Graph Monitor Screer Input Channe Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel Channel 8 WOT Error 6 28 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 5 2 A68AD module monitoring 6 5 3 A68ADN module monitoring Buffer memory address Screen example ii o Y e E th a IE SET Data MONIT END ABSADN Operation Monitor Screen Chg 0001 Channel 87654321 3 9 to 9 0002 to 0009 ting 0000011010100100 0 Disabled 1 Enab led R Samp le Average Count Time Samp le Average Count T ime En 10 to 17 000A to 0011 oc A O 8765432187 654321 0 Sa mp ling O Count Average 5 00001001 11000100 Averaging 1 Time Average O Count Time Input Status Input Status Input Status S Value Resolution 1 Resolution 2 Resolution 3 E op Channel 1 gt Channel 2 wn Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 oc a i a RA O Error Code O fesolution Selection 0 1 1 4000 2 1 8000 3 1 12000 E Z L gt o O DO A Z ir EN L AOSADN Input Output Monitor Screen S 2 z Q Inputs X U DO WOT Error 10 T 1 READY 11 2 Error 12 2 Error Reset a 03 13 C3 LU E 7 16 LU 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 7 x lt T T DI C LU So O Input
24. Continued to next page oc uu a lt O gt oc Lu N oc O Z le CNC MONITOR FUNCTION XxX JO BACKUP RESTORE O JO XJO O X X XJOJO O X CNC DATA I O SFC MONITOR X IAPPENDICES NDEX XxX IO IO IO JO IO JO IO JO X X 9 2 Specifications 9 5 9 2 1 System configuration O Monitoring is possible with the servo amplifier monitor X Monitoring is not possible with the servo amplifier monitor Function unavailable Servo Amplifier MR J2 a series MR J2M series MR J3 series Function MR J2S MRJ2S OA MR J2S LICP MR J2M P8A MR J2M LIDU MR J3 LJA mam SS ee Advanced ee disturbance compensation Set the baud rate and station number setting with Communication Settings Refer to the following manual for setting Communication Settings X X X X L gt GT Designer2 Version U Screen Design Manual 3 7 Communication Interface Setting Communication Settings 2 For the MR J3 series it is displayed with I O display in Diagnostic 9 6 9 2 Specifications 9 2 1 System configuration LO 7 Required special data The following special data is required a When using GT16 OO M X GT16 O O M S GT15 0 0 X GT15 0 0 V S and GT15 0 0 S Unavailable oc uu a lt O gt oc Lu N oc O Z le Memory space KB For MR For MR For MR For MR For MR J2S LIA J2S LICP J2M P8A J2M LIDU J3 LJA monitoring monitoring monitoring
25. Enter Del AC 13 5 2 1 Communication setting window w O IX L L E Program passwor d MW SFC 1 gt Fe pa E UL s Z a AJBICIOJEJFJGIH q ae 5 AT SIRI LY MIN 0 P 5 UE UH UW ea Y 1 7 4 el s e 13 7 3 p 13 5 1 1 Password inpu aa 2 Active step list 3 Step list window window window Q E o 13 5 How to Operate PLC Read Screen 2 Block No Step No MW device MM e O 1 8J9 AJBJCIDJEJF G H 4j5j6 lt IJ Ji KJ LIM Nf oP AE QI RJ S Ti uly jog 3 0 Enter De U Y Y Z AC Del Enter 13 73 37 13 7 3 2 Step No transition 1 Device contact coil 5 condition No search search window z window o LL Ww a eal 4 5 6 HAE i 0 Enter Dell AC gt 13 815 1 Bit devices gt 13 7 1 08 1 Zoom window k Q Z UU a lt 37 13 6 How to Operate Block List Screen gt lt ULU Q Z Vin of active stegs 1 a 13 7 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen Local device monitor not executed pF AAA Print Cancel Screen Print JUMP JUMP J ES 3 LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION 13 3 Display Operation 13 3 1 Outline before starting 13 11 13 3 2 Setting SFC data storage location Setting SFC data storage location 13 12 The selected drive of the GOT CF card can store up to 512 files of SFC data SFC programs device comments used for the SFC monitor function SFC data are stored in the storage location that stores ladder data for the ladder monitor function Only the A drive
26. INTELLIGENT MODULE LC E Step number 2 3 MOV LC E 6 SE O Z L ea Q Hint When the specified step number is the operand of an applied instruction S If the specified step number is a timer T or counter C set value or the operand of 6 an applied instruction that command section is displayed at the head O O 5 4 Operation Procedures 5 13 5 4 3 Sequence program display Display scrolling one screen at a time 1 Operation ass gt 80 Read mode 2 Example Displaying with scrolling one screen at a time ChNo 1 lt WRITE gt cor ChNo 1 lt READ gt d Set the READ mode Y Displaying with scrolling one screen ata time 5 14 5 4 Operation Procedures 5 4 3 Sequence program display 5 4 4 Searching commands and devices Displays a command or device by searching it in sequence program from Step 0 Lu gt Command search S S 1 Operation ed a AAA 9 MODE 1 Select the command y Input the device name and gt ze 1 to search for I 1 device number O Read mode bee ee ee ee ee S 1 If the command you want to search for is not on the keyboard touch the MORE key to switch to the other keyboard When searching for an applied instruction touch the key and input the applied instruction number 7 When searching for a label touch P or 1 and input the pointer number 2377545 Writing applied instructions
27. O 7 display display area Na Comment group can be used Comment group can be used can be used 2 NES Standard monitor OS 01 07 monitor OS Standard monitor OS 01 07 07 O a a Scrolling alarm displ The scrolling alarm display applicable 2 73B Standard monitor OS 01 07 O isplay Other functions added a E Version of GT GT GT F Item Description Version of OS Z Designer2 1050 1030 1020 O Installing Enables installing or uploading the OS uploading with communication drivers project data and others 2 77F x GT10 LDR with the GT10 LDR l Enables installing the OS without the OS l 5 Installing OS 2 77F Standard monitor OS 01 08 E installation screen of the GOT Z gt MELSEC FX list Function to display or edit a sequence program Pont O editor function read from the FXCPU in the list mode l s S 7 ui 9 O Z m o o lt App 33 MEMO App 34 INDEX SYSTEM MONITOR A ACCESS TM dad 2 14 B lona 2 36 BM Monitor Monitoring Buffer Memory 2 46 C Changing SCrECNS iia 2 30 D Deleting entry devices sese eee 2 35 Devices that can be monitored eee 2 14 DIS DIAY aid in 2 16 E Entering monitor devices specifying monitor stations and devices 2 20 Enty MONON raso 2 31 Error Messages and Corrective Action 2 56 1 Information and set items displayed on each Setting key WINOW ccoooccccoccocococnconanonoconnn
28. S E a r gt DEVICE No gt GO E DEVI gt SP H 4 Command a r MaAIAYSAO Ex When LD XO is input YOLINOW WALSAS LD gt X gt 0 GO NOILONNA or YOLIGA LSIT V OAS TAN YOLINOW 4300V1 F N MOV gt K gt 2 gt SP D gt 0 RN SPa K NB GO Input the key between the command and the device the source data and the destination data Ex 1 When FMOV K2 DO K5 is input For commands other than above 3 dolida IS X3 9IST3N Ex 2 When OUT T1 K10 is input YOLINOW ATINGOW LNADSITISLNI OUT gt T 1 P SP gt K gt lR 0 R G YOLINOW MHOMLAN YOLINOW NOILOW O 4 17 4 4 Operation Methods 4 4 5 Command input procedures Ex 3 hen MC N3 M5 is input KS 1 Ex 5 When ANDD lt H7FFFF D20 is input KZ 4 Handling of devices M L and S Devices M L and S in the Test Monitor Write and Insert modes change the display depending on the set parameters If LD LO is input for the parameter setting of MO to 999 and L1000 to L2047 the result is LD MO 4 18 4 4 Operation Methods
29. Shipment C No comments displayed Comments displayed oc O E Z O Lu E L gt nw 10 Displays a data range 11 Monitor display area For further information about items 1 to 11 shown above see the page that follows am E 6 2E a9 AAA Sl Point f Number of devices displayed on a single screen The number of devices displayed on a single screen depends on the setting of the S data range as shown below S E Word devices 16 bit 16 devices no comments displayed eight devices 7 comments displayed S Word devices 32 bit Eight devices no comments displayed four devices S comments displayed Bit devices 16 devices no comments displayed eight devices comments displayed For further information about the setting of the data range see the following D x lt lt Section 2 4 2 Entering monitor devices specifying monitor stations and Gs devices E 5 2 gt LU S E 35 JE ES Z gt am 6 SE o E 6 6 2 gt O 2 6 Batch Monitor 2 37 2 6 1 Information displayed on the Batch Monitor screen and key functions 2 38 2 The following table describes the key functions displayed on the Batch Monitor screen Key switch TEST MENU Function Activates the Quick test operation L gt Section 2 4 5 Quick test operation of monitor devices Switches the screen to the functional change menu screen to activate another monitor function or terminate the s
30. eae i x05 Posit Complete Pos Address P1 Jog Velocity O Zero Rtn Request Pos Address P2 Upper Limit 0 Zero Rtn Start Lower Limit x03 Zero Rtn Comple Pos Velocity V1 k 0 N Gear Ratio SYSTEM MONITOR Y1 Stop Pos Velocity V2 c BUSY Velocity Limit 5 In position Pos Pattern N o Accel Time Y1C V P Switchover VZP Mode Decel Time 0 Positioning Al 00 WDT Error 1 Velocity In Position Range Excessive Error x 8 Error Detection Error Code os Positioning Mode M NM NN LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC A LIST EDITOR MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR X05 Posit Complete Pos Address P Jog Velocity S s 16 1 X02 Zero Rtn Request Pos Address P2 Travel Dist After Near Zero 03 Zero Rtn cone Pos Velocity V1 BS A ana 17 06 In position os Patte YIC V P Switchover V P Mode ero Address S O k ou O Positioning x00 WDT Error 1 Velocity x07 Excessive Erro x08 Error Detect ior UU gt Q G E uu 9 y JJ ul Z oc O E Z le N o N A A A A NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 43 6 5 13 AD70 module monitoring Buffer memory address Screen example Inputs x WOT Error AD7O READY ttn Reques tn Comple ICO O1F Coho dy Point ernal Limit LS Limit LS YZP Swite PLC READY 1 1 1 1 19 1 SRL uy Re ar Len le 4 6 44 6 5 Intelligent
31. is about 2 seconds To Mode Selection Subsection 4 4 4 selection and operation of modes MODE SELECTION READ INS PARAM PRESS MODE KEY When the input keyword KEYWORD NG is not correct 1 1 When the input keyword does not match with the registered keyword only the following operations in subsection 4 6 7 can be allowed Other modes Error step reading Buffer memory overall monitor Time monitor PLC No setting Main sub switching 4 8 4 3 Display 4 3 2 Operation of keyword input Point f When you forgot the keyword entered in the ACPU e Even if you are unsure of the keyword entered in the ACPU you cannot delete it independently If deleting user data including sequence programs does not cause any inconvenience to you clear delete the entered keyword by lt PLC memory all clear gt Note that lt PLC memory all clear gt clears user data including sequence programs as well For further information about PLC memory all clear see the following OVERVIEW 37 Section 4 5 6 PLC memory all clear e When you know the keyword and want to change it or add a new keyword see the following SYSTEM MONITOR 3 Section 4 6 1 Common operation LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION oc O E m Li E 9 mr q 6 Ll 104 I H MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 4 3 Display 4 9 4 3 2 Operation of keyword input 4 4 Operation
32. 1618 to 1619 652 to 653 O meek ae ae tl eal 4 1718 to 1719 6B6 to 6B7 TEE 2 LHUT SS TU 1818 to 1819 71A to 71B oe a 5 1534 to 1535 BEE to BEE ae 1634 to 1635 662 to 663 a SG a 1734 to 1735 6C6 to 6C7 6 L 2909009 em i 1 E AA 11 s 6 1834 to 1835 72A to 72B es A SE Pang T seed e eel 1536 to 1537 600 to 601 Gritos T iat Rae ee to to NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 107 6 5 36 QD75MH module monitoring Buffer memory address Screen example No AO S e L j STT EA Diy 19 1366 to 1369 20 1370 to 1373 55A to 55D 21 1374 to 1377 55E to 561 24 56A to 56D 27 576 to 579 30 582 to 585 32 E IO ITE SADA SOS LS Users JA ete en D A P T Arad E B N GTGT RTT Ne T j 760 ma TE E 20090000 gt E C3 C3 C3 C3 C3 C3 C3 E 57 6 108 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 5 36 QD75MH module monitoring Ooo T ee Screen example 2000 to 2002 to 7D2 D SNN Positioning data DE TE E gt 2014 to 2019 7DE to 7E3 2020 to 2022 7E4 to 7E6 8004 to 8009 1F44 to 1F49 8014 to 8019 1F4E to 1F53 8024 to 8029 1F58 to 1F5D 14004 to 14009 36B4 to 36B9 14014 to 14019 36BE to 36C3 14024 to 14029 36C8 to 36CD 20004 to 20009 4E24 to 4E29 20014 to 20019 4E2E to 4E33 20024 to 20029 4E38 to 4E3D St Ll QD 5M Servo parameter Basic setting 7 a Aah 30502 30702 7726 77EE vada 30503 30703 7727 77EF E
33. 2 Input only when searching for commands requiring a device name and device number 3 After the search results are displayed you can continue searching with the same conditions by touching the key T kE Touching any key other than the key ends the search Z gt zZ ar 0 aS 2 Example E Searching for LD M8000 oc O E Q Search command z LD 2 E O Lu 4 Lu gt a gt S y 8 Set the 1 Select the command 1 1 to search for I E V m gt a Oo LU 9p KE m same conditions Continue to search with the INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR Point 7 Pointer P I searches For pointer searches only labels are searched Pointers specified as operands in applied instructions are not searched NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 5 4 Operation Procedures 5 15 5 4 4 Searching commands and devices Device search 1 Operation A S 1 Input the device name and 1 MODE gt gt 1 device number gt gt I I Read mode AAA 7 1 After the search results are displayed you can continue searching with the same conditions by touching the key Touching any key other than the key ends the search 2 Example Searching for LD M8000 Search device MS009 ChNo 1 S READ mode se gt Le Lo JLo JLo Continue to search with the same conditions Point Devices that cannot be searched The following devices cannot be searched e Pointers interr
34. App 5 SERVO AMPLIFIER CNC MONITOR BACKUP RESTORE FUNCTION MONITOR CNC DATA I O SFC MONITOR 7 ui 9 O Z m o o lt Version of GT11 ae GT GT Soft Item Description GT Version of OS GOT1000 Designer2 Bus Serial Supporting connection to Q172HCPU Ol Communication driver Q173HCPU l A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 01 02 l l Communication driver Supporting connection to FX3U series 2 18U MELSEC FX 02 02 OS Communication driver Supporting automatic system switching 2 32y A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 for QCPU redundant system MELDAS CG 03 00 o Communication driver Communication driver name has been 2 43V A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 changed 03 01 Supporting connection to Universal model QCPU Communication driver 2 63R O O A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 Supporting connection to Q17nDCPU Supporting connection to CNC C70 Communication driver Direct connection Supporting connection to CRnQ 700 A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 to CPU 03 09 2 73B Communication driver Supporting settings for the number of A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 retries the timeout time and delay time 03 09 MELSEC FX 03 09 l l Communication driver Supporting connection to Q13UDHCPU 2 77 A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 and Q26UDHCPU 03 12 Supporting connection to QO2PHCPU and QO6PHCPU Supporting connection to QOGUDECPU C S Roda QO4UDEHCPU QO6UDEHCPU ana A ie Q13UDEHCPU and Q26UDEHCPU an Supporting connection to QS001CPU Communication
35. Coil Sea Dec Hex Note Print I Screen Touch Step Sea X ME STEP 1 8 9 AJ Bl aly ALSI6I Cl DI Jj 9 H HT 15 O a Enter Dell Ab BMOV K4x20 G2 LDS eooo RMO 61 BMOY D20 Sea 0 le JUMP T PUMP 1 Print Cancel Screen Print CD Touch Menu Touch Step Sea Enter a step number Example Specify step No 40 QO After the step number is entered touch the key Input is completed and the keyboard closes 1 The data entered can be corrected with the following keys key Used to delete a character of the entered information key Used to delete all characters entered E The ladder block is displayed with the specified step number at the top Display example The ladder block of step No 40 is displayed 3 6 Search Operation 3 61 3 6 4 Step search OVERVIEW SYSTEM MONITOR O oc O E Z le oc T Q G lt l Z O H O Z LL MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR MELSEC A LIST EDITOR NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 3 6 5 Ladder end search Ladder end search displays the last ladder block of the sequence program lt Operation procedure gt TO E o ioe ED Touch Menu G G HHR EJES ES JUMP T F JUMP List Touch MENU Menu window D Touch End Sea TO CO D103 102 0 Dev Sea Xref nL 25 5 Cont Sea 16 32Bit Cnt 32 PLCRD EN ES 1 Coil Sea Dec Hex Note
36. Dec nex pes Hex Deo Hex n Ce oo 158 0096 006 TOST a oe to mt SRN A IAEA Parameter Valid Range Axis 2Axis 3Axis 8 0008 158 oo9E 308 0134 Z pe 2 50009 150 S 909 oras CECI 0008 0187 5 7 D op am e A s m s oo TSS Ts ors o 82 Anuncie sompensat ion x CE ia a i de S E D eee E 5 O A ee AN e ons 169 oons sia ome A OOO COIE na a oe a s a os in oom ser om g o 20 one 174 oae coe fora 8 ea E D E x Z O 36 0024 186 OOBA 336 0150 Extended Parameter 2 to to to to to 41 0029 191 OOBF 341 0155 42 002A 192 00CO 342 0156 to to to to to 47 002F 197 00C5 347 015B 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 63 6 5 25 AD75P A1SD75P module monitoring Parameter Valid Range Acce Time 1 Acce Time 2 msec UU gt Q G E uu 9 y JJ ul Z oc O E Z le Acce Time 3 msec Dece Time 1 msec Decel Timert2 Decel Timex3 aes tel NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR U ee Pa Tamas 225 ones srs Torr TS eose 226 one 076 Tore 9 f r eoan 227 ones a77 Tore o 7e foose 228 ones ars ora AD 5P OPR Extended Parameter 2 86 0056 236 00EC 386 0182 Parameter Valid Range Axis 2Axis S SAXIS NENE 230 380 OPR Duel Time rave nee After DOG 0 to 35999999 x 10 5 deg SET
37. Joe La al a a sl el z el ol ol Jon lt all Cel laal C i E ofufefefrfyfu fo r x 4 88 A afsfolrfelufol lt fo felt foo afsfolrfelofo lt fo felt foo 2 zlxfofufe nfu gt ely EZ 22 zlxfofufe nfu gt CE3 EZ 22 Tool Offset Monitor Program Monitor A L 2 Lt AE E R iF INC THACH LENEI i S e a E zZ O 5 ES E O GE a cin PUSH KEY SERCH PROG ye Menul amt Menu2 F Menu3 Menud Menub gt 4 Menul Menu2 Menu3 Menud Menud gt al als a sl el sl el ol jo La als a sl el sl o ol Joe all cle laal cT I efef ilef lelei il E 9 afsfolrfelufo lt fo left af afsfolrfelofo lt fo fie t i ae a lt le la lal eto zlxfofufe nfu gt elo 7 lt APLC function ww MS ro RS MITSUBISHI CNC JA D GA e SERIES OGRAMMING TOOLS MITSUBTS san ELECTRIC CORPORATION x ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 5 Z LADDER MEMU lt Menu E Menu2 Menu3 Menu4 Menu5 CEC TC EEOC efeler e ele iee A afsfo rfefo elas BRR US 10 1 Features 10 1 10 2 Specifications 10 2 1 System configuration This section describes the target CNC of the CNC monitor and the connection type between the GOT and CNC For connection type settings and precautions regarding the communication unit cable and connection type refer to the following manual lt gt GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Target CNC of the CNC monitor CNC C70 C6 C64 Connection type O Available X Unavailable Function Connection type b
38. NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 6 6 Operating I O Module Monitor Screen 6 113 6 6 1 Specifying the module to be monitored 6 6 2 Monitor screen configuration and key functions This section describes the configuration of monitor screens displayed by specifying the input module on the system configuration screen and explains the functions of keys displayed on the screen Displayed contents for an input module 1 a 4 The statuses of input and output signals are displayed after they are read out from the corresponding module The OS executes it automatically 3 Statuses for up to 64 points can be displayed Signal statuses OQ ON O OFF Item Description 1 Displays the type of object module input or output module 2 Displays the name of the signal being monitored X or Y 3 Displays the number and status of the I O signal 4 Displays keys used for the operations on the monitor screen shown in 2 Touch input Key functions The table below shows the functions of keys that are used for the operations on the monitor screen Key Function END Closes the monitoring and returns the screen to the one for starting the intelligent module monitor aa Closes the current monitor and returns to the System Configuration screen 6 114 6 6 Operating I O Module Monitor Screen 6 6 2 Monitor screen configuration and key functions 6 7 Error Messages and Corrective Action This section describes the error messages displayed
39. On the 3rd and 4th lines in the display area up to five significant digits in a step number are 32 displayed Displays significant digits in the lower four digits of a step number Displays up to five significant digits in a step number oc O E m Li E 9 mr q 6 Ll 104 I H Step number Device display Two or more device specifications attached to a basic or application instruction are displayed using D the same step number L For information on the step numbers see Paragraph 4 above HO W A 2 gt LU Display of data input from the keys Data input from the keys will appear at the cursor position As more characters are input the cursor moves to the right gt The cursor appears as W ZZ Example The user enters SET cl 1 0 o5 LC E 6 ie O l L E 6 6 2 O 4 4 Operation Methods 4 13 4 4 2 Display format of the display area 4 14 7 Shifting of data to the left during the input of a program When the user inputs a program the codes entered before a touch on the key will appear on the 4th bottom line of the display area If the codes cannot appear on a single line the display on the 4th line only will shift by a single character position to the left each time the user touches a key Each character that goes out of the display area by the left shift operation is retained in the memory L The user has entered DMOVP K2147483647 D1000 You can mov
40. Q a Version of GT ltem Description Version of OS Designer2 GT GT Soft T 15 GOT1000 11 Time setting for call key ON until the start up of utility can be set for 1 point 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 pressing Alarm can be set to be displayed in system language switching or battery 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 o Standard monitor OS 02 02 l l l Ss Option OS z KANJI Region Supporting Chinese Traditional 2 18U l x S Standard Font China Big5 O 2 02 02 TS nS System alarm information printer status information and GT SoftGOT1000 end 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 O GOT internal device are added device Standard monitor OS 03 02 a The devices for the trigger buffer of the O 2 472 Option OS x x gt MES interface are added z MES Interface 03 02 7 TEF oF Supporting vertical installation type l Se GOT Type 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 O display Screen switching ON and OFF can be set 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O function Lu oc Station No Designation of the channel No for which O o 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 x Switching Function station No is switched is possible cc Aa 2 00A Standard monitor OS 01 00 Isto x Language switching device can be used lt 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 lo MM O Language Switching Device Enables setting the column No of the comments to be display
41. Q MOTION MONITOR 1 1 4 Displayable languages for each function Languages available for each function are shown in the following table For details of font data and displayable language refer to the following GT Designer2 VersionO Screen Design Manual 2 3 1 Fonts O Displayed x Not displayed Eng Displayed in English l Chinese Chinese Function Japanese English German Korean Simplified Traditional Ladder monitor Title Note Ei monitor for Statement MELSEC Q QnA Ladder monitor for MELSEC A monitor for MELSEC A Ladder monitor for MELSEC A Other than the Ladder monitor for MELSEC FX monitor for MELSEC x o above Kd monitor for MELSEC Q QnA A list editor CNC monitor Monitorarea Monitorarea 1 For further information see the following O O O Eng Eng Eng Eng Section 3 5 7 Language switching of the sequence program MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor 2 The displayable language depends on the setting of the CNC side The language used on the monitor area is not linked to the language setting of GOT setup For the CNC settings refer to the manual of CNC C70 C6 C64 to be connected 3 Eor displaying the system screen for the function in English install the OS for the function on the GOT with the English version of GI Designer2 1 12 Before Using Each Function 1 1 1 1 4 Displayable languages for each function SYSTEM MONITOR 2 1 Features
42. Reading Sequence programs ee e e e 4 21 S Selection and operation of modes eee 4 15 SOCCINGCATONS T 4 3 Index 3 MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR A Action for an incorrect key Inputs see eee 5 32 C Changing operands Set Values eee eee 5 20 D Deleting commands sss sese eee eee eee 5 21 DIS DIY nera io 5 6 E Error Messages and Corrective Actions 5 33 H FHard copy output eee ei A 5 32 K Key arrangement and a list of key functions 5 9 Key WOKS censiaunehwa da 5 28 L ISTMO Mud a a on 9 30 0 Operation Procedures sss eee eee 5 9 P Parameter Setting eee eee 5 25 PEG CIAQNOSUGCS veia cada 5 23 S Searching commands and devices sse eee 5 15 Selection and operation Of modes css eee 5 12 Sequence program all Clear eee 5 22 Sequence program display eee eee e oo 5 13 o A A 5 3 System Configuratio nosine tii 5 3 W Writing COMMANAS oense a aa 5 17 Index 4 INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR A PCCCSS cene O iraa Mwerdctiueeticaetne a mubstintas a bctu ta 6 6 C Composition of PC Information monitor screen and key functions only when using QCPU OMA iio 6 18 Composition of the intelligent module monitor screen ANG Ki 6 23 Composition of the system configuration screen and key fUNC IONS cccccooccncccnnccncnnnnconnnnnos 6 15 Composition of the unit detail info screen and key functions only when using QCPU mode usan aa il 6 22 D ISP italia ic
43. Station number setting IFU station number setting 9 4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens 9 4 6 Parameter setting de 9 4 7 Test operations This function performs the following test operations on the connected servo amplifier e JOG operation The servo motor rotates while the Forward or Reverse key is touched oc uu a lt O gt oc Lu 0 oc O Z O e Positioning operation This operation starts We the Forward or POVEO Koya is touched and the servo motor rotates by the preset distance 4 e Motor less operation Simulates me motion of the servo motor Ea the servo amplifier even when the e DO forced output Forcibly turns the output signals ON OFF dls of the output conditions of am i O the servo amplifier output signals lt 53 gt This section ZZ Ov sE o2 AD 1 Changing screens seal The screen changes as follows after Test is selected on the function selection menu screen Depending on the model of the connected servo amplifier some screens may not be displayed Refer to the following for the screens that cannot be displayed S re i ii A 9 2 1 EA List of servo amplifier types that can be monitored and functions i T 2 SE O lt a Q Function selection menu screen 4 O te S O S K 4 m Positioning 5 O S mi nam fetang S ln Es E JOG operation screen JOG DO_ForcedQut put 2 i
44. e When the cursor is in the step No transition condition No input area Enter Searches for a step or transition condition in the set block When the searched step or transition condition is found the step No transition condition No search window closes and the GOT displays data of the step or transition condition on the SFC diagram monitor screen The step or transition condition is highlighted 7 De Deletes an input value or character O Q Z o A Deletes all the input values and characters a x lt ULU Q 13 7 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen 13 31 13 7 3 Menus 13 32 3 Step list window The GOT displays steps in a block a Displayed screen Step List 2 Active step List 3 FFE A A eins Ca Conveyor operation The following table shows the displayed contents No Item Description 1 Block No Displays the block No of the displayed block Keys Keys for operations in the step list window shown in b Touch input Displays the step numbers and step comments of the steps in the displayed block 3 Step list Selecting a step searches for the step and the GOT displays the step data on the SFC diagram monitor screen Active steps are highlighted 13 b Key functions Key Function Displays the active step list window Active step List U This section 2 Active step list window A Y Scrolls the display area up and down by one line 13 7 How to Operate SFC Di
45. l ejejejejejejeajejejeln bo ooo Ol corpo OT 0 PO O 0 00 kb 21000 GED E L a oD OD i oD LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION SYSTEM MONITOR 021F to 026E 01CE 5 Start Error Start y Start Error History Start History No Ax Start Mode ime es No Ax Start Mode Time O OU 0 90 all 10 00 UU ESTO 00 0 021D a p Sie ene ie A IS 00 UU 1 OF L 00 OU o MELSEC A LIST EDITOR WP m 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 UU SGG l Gall GUL G l 00 5 OH OR n O G l CB LH E C PO aaa ajaja la lobo ooo 00 MELSEC FX LIST O EDITOR UU gt Q G E uu 9 y JJ ul Z oc O E Z le NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 6 5 26 AJ711D1 1D2 R4 A1SJ711D1 1D2 R4 module monitoring Screen example Ye 030H1_1D BUSY GO J O1F G Po amp cy oO NmMO O UT 21 Data 0 0 O 0 0 O TT TE TE E TE E E E TE E E E EEE H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H H 6 68 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens R S 7 w E pba ele e LE E E ZE ELE SE SE SE Se 1B 1CCH2 ID Command Exe 1D 1E 1F SET Data MONIT ESET Chg MENU SET ma MONIT Data 0 0 O 0 0 0 O 0 0 0 U 0 0 U 0 0 FEI TT Se a SC SE Se SE Se Se SSE SE SE END Data 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Buffer memory address X axis Y axis UH oo
46. lt 13 7 3 E Display menu INDEX 13 4 Setting Display Format 13 15 13 4 1 Switching languages of SFC programs 13 16 13 4 5 Setting automatic scroll mode The automatic scroll can be switched between enabled or disabled states In the automatic scroll mode the GOT displays active steps on the SFC diagram monitor screen by automatically scrolling the screen when all the following conditions are satisfied e No active step is displayed on the SFC diagram monitor screen e The displayed block has an active step The step status becomes inactive An active step in the block is displayed by automatically scrolling the screen For setting the automatic scroll mode refer to the following K gt 13 7 3 24 Display menu For the SFC diagram monitor screen refer to the following gt 13 7 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen 13 4 Setting Display Format 13 4 5 Setting automatic scroll mode 13 5 How to Operate PLC Read Screen o On the PLC read screen the GOT reads SFC programs and comment files used for the SFC monitor z function from the PLC E The following describes how to operate the PLC read screen EZ n 13 5 1 Displayed contents The following describes the configuration of the PLC read screen displayed after the SFC monitor starts and ce key functions on the screen 23 25 1 5 2 92 O lL FRE 5 Zn E O E A O 6 3 No Item Description 1 Displays the label set in the PLC n
47. sss sees eee Switch ae ZS Test mode request error sese eee eee eee Test a Manual pulse generator setting error eee eee e Manual e POPU p gO cheer mr nmr te co A P WDT oc SOUNET EHO sss Communication error O 5 Error Definition The definitions of the errors that occurred are displayed O 6 Set Data The program number in error is displayed if the set data has any errors S O kE LULU Z 00 oc O E Z O Z O E O O 8 4 Operation Procedures 8 4 5 Error List screen Key functions The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operation on the Error List screen Function Returns to the monitor menu screen Stores the displayed screen to the memory card in BMP JPEG file format or prints it with a printer For further information about hard copies refer to the following Screen C gt 8 4 11 Hard copy output ey The touch operation of this key is invalid Fr init K w Exits the Error List screen and returns to the screen where the Q motion monitor was started Can 8 14 8 4 Operation Procedures 8 4 5 Error List screen 8 4 6 Error List Designated Axis screen This section describes the display data of the Error List Designated Axis screen and the key functions displayed on the screen gt pr gt Displayed contents O In real mode In virtual mode LC O Z O L Error Definition gt E EA Lu kE 2 SV ERR a Program No 0 R
48. 912 to 913 0390 to 0391 1012 to 1013 03F4 to 03F5 1112 to 1113 0458 to 0459 6 830 930 033E 03A2 1030 1130 0406 046A 7 831 931 033F 03A3 1031 1131 0407 046B OVERVIEW SYSTEM MONITOR LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC A LIST EDITOR MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR O UU gt Q G E uu 9 y JJ ul Z oc O E Z le NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 91 6 5 35 QD75M module monitoring Buffer memory address Screen example No 1 827 927 033B 039F QD75M Axis monitor data 2 ce ew ar 1027 1127 0403 0467 ope G lT GSG specia EZL E El C 2 828 928 033C O3A0 fi cial STET O D L DS DIET 1028 1128 0404 0468 3 829 929 033D 03A1 1029 1129 0405 0469 4 834 934 0342 03A6 1034 1134 040A 046E 5 835 935 0343 03A8 1035 1135 040B 046F 6 836 936 0344 03A8 1036 1136 040C 0470 7 837 937 0345 03A9 1037 1137 040D 0471 8 832 932 0340 03A4 1032 1132 0408 046C 9 833 933 0341 03A5 1033 1133 0409 046D 848 to 849 0350 to 0351 948 to 949 03B4 to 03B5 1048 to 1049 0418 to 0419 1148 to 1149 047C to 047D Ya MEL ber S Oy 3 Aa Arm hana Ch EEE 850 to 851 0352 to 0353 950 to 951 03B6 to 03B7 1050 to 1051 041A to 041B 1150 to 1151 047E to 047F 852 to 853 0354 to 0355 952 to 953 03B8 to 03B9 1052 to 1053 041C to 041D 1152 to 1153 0480 to 0481 8
49. Channel 3 y 0018 Lo 02 04 05 10 12 8 14 1C Writing Data Error CH Code OVERVIEW SYSTEM MONITOR EE WDT Error Module 1 Fault s 2 Fault s 3 Fault gt 4 Fault LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION 2to5 0002 to 0005 32 34 36 38 0024 0026 33 35 0021 0023 37 39 0025 0027 0020 0022 Processing Mode Bes Count A Time Samp le Average MELSEC A LIST EDITOR O Count 1 Time kE Y x lt O UU 09 j ULU Outputs Y H1 Enabled 2 Enabled 10 WOT Error READY 2 CH1 Mod Fault P2 3 CH2 Mod Fault P3 J O Ol wr 3 Mod Fault p 5 CH4 Mod Fault g RR T 5 T gt O 00 Ss ASE O CO EI a 2 gt le O E a ox 29 E LC O Zz O XxX LC O kE LU Z Q MOTION MONITOR 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 31 6 5 5 A84AD module monitoring Buffer memory address Screen example No 10 to 13 000A to 000D 18 to 21 0012 to 0015 Input Output 50 OU 28 to 31 001C to 001F npu Te N DU 0 OR 50 5 OU G Co sr gt Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Top Scale 0 For module codes 06 0 Bottom Scale 0 For all other module Channel 432 1 WDT Error Module 1 Fault ees Module 2 Fault 0 Effective Module 3 Fault 1 Invalidity Module 4 Fault 6 32 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 5 5 A84AD module monitoring 6 5 6 A616AD module monitoring are Of e IN Sa ets H H EIT
50. Del key Used to delete a character of the Z gt entered information key Used to delete all characters entered S 6 Q A search for the device begins and the E o research result is displayed Q kE LULU To cancel a defect search touch ESC z During a defect search all key operations except and are invalid x Z O gt Z O kE O gt O 3 6 Search Operation 3 63 3 6 6 Defect search Point Operation before a defect search In the case of the MELSEC A FX ladder monitor touch before starting a defect search If you touch without touching Mon the message NO MONITORING will be displayed 1 Search result Search results reveal any occurrences of the search device They are useful when you determine whether a defective device is conductive or nonconductive If any occurrence of the search device is not found as a result of the search a message appears on screen telling that PROGRAM NOT FOUND a When an occurrence of the search device is found If an occurrence of the search device is found as a result of the search the search for another defective device will automatically be started Example After searching for Device M120 that is in the OFF state M669 will be displayed as a device that caused a failure After searching for Coil M120 that is in the OFF state M669 is displayed as a device that is not conductive Example Teo After searching for a device that is in the ON state a device that is co
51. Description Displays the CH No network No station No and CPU No of the target PLC CPU as Target controller shown below e CH No network No station No CPU No 2 Displays the file name of the displayed program 3 Block No Displays the block No of the displayed block 4 Block title Displays the block title of the displayed block 5 Keys for operations on the SFC diagram monitor screen shown in section 13 7 2 Touch eys l input Displays the block No of the block displayed in the SFC diagram display area 6 Block switching tab Touching a tab displays the corresponding block data in the SFC diagram display area Tabs displayed to the right of the touched tab are removed Displays the block information of the displayed block l l When the displayed block is in any status of the block information the corresponding 7 Block information display area a device is highlighted When the block information is set the set devices are displayed 8 Displays the column numbers Continued to next page 13 7 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen 13 25 13 7 1 Displayed contents SERVO AMPLIFIER CNC MONITOR MONITOR FUNCTION BACKUP RESTORE de CNC DATA I O oc O E Z Oo O LL 7 APPENDICES INDEX Displays a SFC program in the SFC diagram format e Step display Step No Step Operation output sequence program oLO Kb Product counter Comment Work carrier c
52. Displays the energization time of the servo amplifier until alarm occurrence on the assumption that the time at 4 Time hour l l factory shipment is 0 5 Detail hex Displays the code for detailed alarm information L O 2 Key functions lt The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for operations of the alarm history LL screen 0 Key Function Clear Clears the alarm history stored in the servo amplifier POS 3 AlarmDisp Changes to the Alarm Display screen 3 This section ZS a lt Menu Returns to the function selection menu screen End Exits the servo amplifier monitor Stores the displayed screen to the memory card in BMP JPEG file format or prints it with a printer E For further information about hard copies refer to the following ii Screen Z T 9 4 8 Hard copy output S The touch operation of this key is invalid 9 4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens 9 21 9 4 4 Alarm function 9 45 Diagnostics function This function performs the following various diagnostics on the connected servo amplifier e DI DO display Displays the ON OFF status of the external I O signals gt This section 9 22 1 Function device display Displays the ON OFF status of the I O function devices 2 gt This section 2 e Amplifier information Displays the model name ID and encoder resolution of the servo motor display connected to the servo amplifier This section E e
53. E am O E D LL H 2 pa lt O LU 9p m kE is O C UU Ae a 3 Q O gt kE i LC 75 m Z zS L O Z O gt X L O m Zz oc O Z O gt Z O kE O gt O 4 7 Error Messages and Corrective Actions 4 35 4 7 1 Error messages and corrective actions in direct CPU connection 4 7 2 PLC CPU error messages and troubleshooting When the error step read in other mode is performed the error message and the error step of the current error in the ACPU are displayed Error messages error details and corrective actions are displayed below If an error message appears take the following actions to resume operation Check the error message If the error code is not displayed check the error code of special register D9008 with the system monitor function Refer to Chapter 2 Remove the cause of the error Display 1 Example of display for an error in the CPU other than AnA and AnU Mode is displayed other mode Error step number is displayed step number of D9010 Error message is displayed Error code is displayed error code of D9008 2 Mode is displayed other mode Error step number is displayed step number of D9010 Error message is displayed Error code is displayed error code of D9008 Error detail code is displayed error code of D9091 Error history if available is displayed 3 Example of next display for the display of
54. E SIG SE EE AEC DID re ei cer L l III 09 ell Rvs JUG IA A ll OA ie SN ag Wilkie RUE JOC vel stop IS FWD JOG xis stoy BDA RYS JOG DOES M code GN lAs BUSY OE ic FD Jac O ART DAA SA BUSY Litas RYS JOG el Poe done E ly iAxiis2 Pos done a lies Pos done e a MA Pos done AA Exe R 0000 0096 0 150 300 450 012C 01C2 ETA ENTE 0004 009A a y IS ODA 494 0130 01C6 direction UU gt Q G E uu 9 y JJ ul Z oc O E Z le ab d Cpu oo oo db 012D 01C3 5 OF E A Pe D 0 odas E p Pempe E X A p B p multipl j 2 152 302 452 012E 0104 E S B Sper SERA ee oe 0003 0099 L 200 0 00 Sins 012F 01C5 2 O fe 2000000000 O 0005 009B RAEI LEE EGA 6 5 155 305 455 A ps DONA 0131 0107 0006 009C O 6 156 306 456 0132 01C8 O a Z O kE O gt O 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 77 6 5 34 QD75P QD75D module monitoring Buffer memory address Screen example No QD75P QD75D Basic parameters 2 OOOO EA ZE E sE fk AR _ lt x am IRE Setting range tG SsoobUolTises 164 to 165 00A4 to OOA5 314 to 315 013A to 013B 464 to 465 01D0 to 01D1 1 17 167 0011 00A7 0D75P 0D75D Detailed parameters 1 1 gt M 317 467 013D 01D3 B 18 to 19 0012 to 0013 Setting Range SE mE 2 10 ty E GZ EZ ip Higa iy lied Hea 4 ENEE j 1 4 H TEI ERG SEE EZ ORANG setti pies 470 to 471 01 S to 01D7 p14 10920 umi nehy g
55. ER Tent REO ERACMOO7S 13 35 1 300 oxrespondirg axis mas operating or drirg servo OFF BS Qos chart Beton ty inzoco 2 25 eT i 0 ee E E 13 35 1 300 Crespndine axis was operatire or dire srw OF L G S E 4 26 Min neat le ar ms mail te Un s SV22DR W CHG Statu M2044 gt 13 42 1 300 corresponding axis was operating or during servo OFF oia si ao cea 4 26 CHG MG turn ON fron OFF men necta prog isn t registered SUZ2I4 MSda Cont Op Warn lon 13 46 512 ath of sys setting doesn t ratch with ay R T cut mdle 17 16 182021 222521 2526 27 8 28 3031 S2 4 26 Min Apresent value charge was nade ahi le the SSS ETS z 13 47 1 300 corresponding axis mas operating or daring servo OFF no S x lt PTT Cancel E ee S s 09 pisha and displays the feed current values and actual e Displays the history of errors that occurred on and after the m G S UU current values of all running axes leading edge of PLC ready M2000 L 8 4 3 Present Value Monitor screen gt gt 8 4 5 Error List screen Positioning Monitor Error List Designated Axis gt Q O gt Positioning Monitor Real Error List Designated Axis YON Val T Status _ O signal er ErrorDefimition Gi pe Feed PV O PLS MIPOS StartComplet on Stop Command Min ERR 0 O POS Completion Rapid Stop Command LE E R In Position Forward JOG Start Maj ERR 0 is pyt Counter __ 9 PLS Command n Position phates eee 5 O Min Major SYVER Spoed ee ee Loe Enable S
56. G E uu 9 y JJ ul Z oc O E Z le NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR Screen example QD75MH Detailed parameters 2 1 Vaina Setting Mnane ep LE mange eee ae Setting Kange MEIE JUE arca bine select we JUE deca Elie se lecr JS SL LIIS ranga EE to IEEE QD 5MH Detailed parameters 2 2 DARTE STE ASE POSTE SIII start arral speed ame radies to 327680 PL5 D an L Restart QD75MH OPR detailed parameters Sane gis ENEE 7 ae UFOS Online canceled ERETON posh iionitter A E L SR i 16 5 gior OR retry vettineln 4p 4 494 E E Sl sit a Aaa Aas henge degree st pulse i 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 5 36 QD75MH module monitoring y Buffer memory address O 336 to 337 486 to 487 150 to 151 1E6 to 1E7 338 to 339 488 to 489 152 to 153 1E8 to 1E9 340 to 341 490 to 491 154 to 155 1EA to 1EB 342 to 343 492 to 493 156 to 157 1EC to 1ED 344 to 345 494 to 495 158 to 159 1EE to 1EF 346 to 347 496 to 497 15A to 15B 1F0 to 1F1 348 to 349 498 to 499 15C to 15D 1F2 to 1F3 32 08 156 1F4 O OER EIH ET 354 to 355 504 to 505 162 to 163 1F8 to 1F9 59 200 59 609 3B D1 167 1FD 60 to 61 210 to 211 3C to 3D D2 to D3 ET E 3E D4 16A 200 EN ee 86 236 386 536 56 EC 182 218 87 237 387 537 57 ED 183 219 380 to 381 530t0531 17C to 17D 212 to 213 84 to 85 234 to 235 54 t
57. HART SoH Recto oA E al neal al Daal SART 5 1504 1604 0 5E0 0644 UPONDIEved PREGUES WE BE to 104 1704 1804 06A8 070C 2 E 6 1512 1612 05E8 064C al E A E la a T 1712 1812 06B0 0714 AM en A 1516 1616 05EC 0650 1716 1816 06B4 0718 Bee OVERVIEW SYSTEM MONITOR LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION 1610 to 1611 064A to 064B 1710 to 1711 O6AE to O6AF 1810 to 1811 0712 to 0713 10 1520 1620 O5FO 0654 1720 1820 06B8 071C 11 1521 1621 05F1 0655 1721 1821 06B9 071D 1522 to 1523 05F2 to 05F3 1622 to 1623 0656 to 0657 1722 to 1723 O6BA to 06BB 1822 to 1823 071E to 071F 13 1524 1624 05F4 0658 1724 1824 O6BC 0720 14 1525 1625 05F5 0659 1725 1825 O6BD 0721 1 1538 1638 0602 0666 QD75M Axis control data 3 ce frau ar 1738 1838 O6CA 072E Een eds fared A Pet pres on ea EE te 2 1548 1648 060C 0670 os change GT o Bob A brat apes 1748 1848 06D4 0738 aac s 1549 1649 060D 0671 2 a E Gimiddmess Are data AXI SS 1749 1849 06D5 0739 salsa IGT UE 259 AS aa ist A 1550 1650 060E 0672 E o 1750 1850 06D6 073A MELSEC A LIST EDITOR MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR O UU gt Q G E uu 9 y JJ ul Z oc O E Z le 1540 1640 1740 0604 0668 06CC 41 e TEE 1840 1541 1641 0730 0605 0669 E A A 5 1741 1841 1542 06CD 0731 0606 O 1642 1742 1842 066A 06CE 0732 z 1543 1643 1743 060
58. If the monitored CNC unit does not include the APLC release function the screen turns blank nothing is displayed In this case use a function switching key to switch the monitor to another function Sn sbi Displays the communication setting window x For bus connection The button does not function Specify the monitoring target in the communication setting window For Ethernet connection Switches the monitor among the CNC units when connected to multiple CNC units The MELDAS C6 C64 units are switched in the order set in the Ethernet setting of GT Designer2 For MELSECNET 10 connection Cannot be operated because only control station can be monitored switching not required Terminates the CNC monitor function and returns to a monitor screen or the utility of the GOT Functions such as Position Display Monitor Alarm Diagnosis Monitor Tool Offset Param and Program Monitor Monitor area equivalent to the MELDAS dedicated display are available The graphic and ladder editor functions are not available Switches to the monitor that corresponds to the items in the menu area In the case of the above screen the menu items are as follows ia Relative value PLC switch Common editing Menu4 Local variable Menu switching Mene When the MELDAS dedicated display is valid the Other display operating message and Key operation right menu are displayed Select the Key operation right menu when operating
59. JE ES Z gt am 6 SE Z o E 6 6 2 gt O 2 4 Operation Procedure Common to the System Monitor Screens 2 29 2 4 5 Quick test operation of monitor devices 2 4 6 Changing screens This subsection takes the entry monitor as an example to describe how to change screens Functional change menu screen Section 2 3 Display of the system monitor The screen returns to the screen on which function the system monitor function was activated Start from the utility screen The screen returns to the Main Menu screen of the utility Start from the user created screen The screen returns to the User created screen Functional change menu screen PRESS SET KEY SELECT ITEM THEN ENTER DEVICE TYPE Ho Display format change menu screen 2 30 2 4 Operation Procedure Common to the System Monitor Screens 2 4 6 Changing screens 2 5 Entry Monitor The device monitor is a function to enter devices to be monitored in advance and monitor only entered devices This section describes how to activate the entry monitor when the system monitor function is executed 2 5 1 Information displayed on the Entry Monitor screen and key functions 1 The information displayed on the Entry Monitor screen is described below For the key functions see the page that follows 4 2 3 4 Displays a channel No Displays a network No Displays a station No Displays a CPU No a O o o DEVICE
60. Lu I m e 10 11 000A 000B AIS62RD Graph Monitor Screen Chg a 0000 e oc 0 1 0000000010011010 pl e m 1 Enabled 0 Disabled E AN 0001 Z Z D r 0000000000000001 5 t 1 Completed 0 Not Completed oc r Average Samp le e Count e 0 21 l E Tl e LL l rac ee eee 1 Averaging 1 Time Average oc 80 z 0 Sampling O Count Average Q E Channel 1 disconnected LU Channel 2 disconnected Z WDT Error Temp Sensor Type O Error Code O O New JIS DIN 1 01d JIS Ar O Zz O gt Z O kE O gt a 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 59 6 5 22 A1S62RD module monitoring 6 5 23 A1SJ71PT32 53 module monitoring Refer to the following for further information about the screen for A15J71PT32 S3 and the buffer memory address L gt 6 5 17 AJ71PT32 S3 module monitoring 6 60 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 5 23 A1SJ71PT32 S3 module monitoring 6 5 24 A1S63ADA module monitoring Buffer memory address AC f w e A AISGSADA Operation Monitor Screen Cha OOOF Enable 0 Disable 1 Enable A D Conversion 0 Not Completed 1 Completed 0001 Settit 0100 S 0 001011000 eee a ee 11 12 000B 000C a 0 Sampling O Count Average 0004 00000011 11101000 Averaging E ime Average er aput Status U Tae A U I 0005 Value eso i esolution 2 tesolution 3 G 008 0 2 0 1 5 Jo E CA E 000D Error Code 500 Resolution Setting 0 1 1 4000 2 1 8000 3 1 12000 Pro simple Loop Control Monitor Screen Che BY A
61. O Z O Lu kE 09 gt ep GO E Touch Cont Sea Dev Sea Xref Cmnt 16 32Bi t Cmnt 32 Print Screen oc O E Z le oc T Q G lt l Z O H O Z LL LUC O Using the lt and gt keys switch the input z arnan E area and enter a device name and its U T h LTB aly number H EU HU H al K Example Specify X1 Le I E E EIR Enter Del AC E After the device name and its number are entered touch the key Input is 7 completed and the keyboard closes is O 1 The data entered can be corrected with the 7 S following keys o key Used to delete a character of the entered information UU ae key Used to delete all characters oh entered z o e Se gt The ladder block containing the specified 02 contact point is displayed Se The contact point is highlighted as shown in the display example below cc DO Display example E ae xt S 1 o 2 z S 6 E S O 3 6 Search Operation 3 57 3 6 2 Contact point search Point P 1 Continuous read based on the same contact point nns After a search a continuous search can be performed based on the same contact point by touching on the screen If you touch another key the continuous read function will be canceled 2 Ladder monitor display after a search The ladder block containing the searched contact point is displayed Example 1 When the entered contact point you want to sear
62. Print JUMP T T JUMP l Screen 3 50 3 5 Switching the Display Format 3 5 5 Displaying notes 3 5 6 Displaying statements Statements in the sequence program can be displayed when the MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor is executed This subsection describes the operation procedure for displaying statements z Statements cannot be displayed when the MELSEC A FX ladder monitor is executed gt The following statements cannot be displayed and are represented by gt e Peripheral statements e statements peripheral and P statements peripheral T Touch Menu 25 Z Local device monitor not executed O G IED H S Menu window DC E 6 p Touch Statement SS a AO AN ra T Dev Sea Xref Cunt 35 Cont Sea 16 32Bit Cunt 32 Coil Sea Dec Hex Note H F Step Sea Test Statement oc Screen End Sea Local Dev 2 Q Touch Statement S lt O Lu S gt Peripheral Integrated statements are Peripheral statement Integrated statement dstlaved _ l Isplayed Peripheral statements are represented by kE U E gt lt O rr Lu T 0 25 Local device monitor not executed Q Kn Z 35 a P statement peripheral 02 statement peripheral 22 P statement integrated statement integrated AING SOSTEP E I P statements are displayed lt 103 gt O statements peripheral and P statements z peripheral are represented by ln Zz Local d
63. Step Sea Test Statement a J MEE A eee rint End Sea Local Dev Touch End Sea Screen The last ladder block of the sequence program is displayed MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor The ladder block of the end command is displayed MELSEC A FX ladder monitor The last ladder block is displayed the end command is not displayed The message CIRCUIT_END will be Exit J PLCRD ff Mon 1 1 p o 1 displayed Back Print JUMP T f JUMP J Screen 3 62 3 6 Search Operation 3 6 5 Ladder end search 3 6 6 Defect search Defect search searches the ladder block for the status of conductive non conductive of the contact point that turned on or off the coil on the sequence program lt Operation procedure gt 3 Touch Mon 5 Z 7 gt 09 O Touch Menu 3 evice monitor not executed oc STATE a Lu E D G Az Sr O E Touch Xref S kE lt O UU S ULU ae Statement l i gt pie fence QO Select a coil if necessary Using the 4 and gt keys switch the input area and enter the device name and its kE y 0 number of the selected coil E L Example Specify M120 De AY WILY E 29 Q SIRET DIU RI G E gt i SSI I T C EIR After the device name and its number are EJ 6 4 Enter Del K entered touch the key Input is Q completed and the keyboard closes lt kE The data entered can be corrected with the S following keys 2 ES
64. The device is highlighted as shown in the display example below Display example R O bo a e E S Z o O L Z O zZ O kE O O 3 6 Search Operation 3 55 3 6 1 Device search Point 1 Continuous read based on the same device After a search a continuous search can be performed based on the same device by touching on the screen If you touch another key the continuous read function will be canceled 2 Ladder monitor display after a search The ladder block containing the searched device is displayed Example 1 When the entered device you want to search is as O FF 0 Program Memory PLS M400 OOOO Print Screen The ladder is displayed on the following line Print Screen When searching multiple files with the MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor displaying the ladder ASO of the subsequent sequence US S the previous display O FF 0 Program Memory 149ST M210 Only the ladder block s found in the subsequent sequence file is displayed Sea Print Cance JUMP T f JUMP 1 Screen Print 3 Indirect specification device read Indirect specification devices index register Z cannot be specified and read when the MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor is executed 3 56 3 6 Search Operation 3 6 1 Device search 3 6 2 Contact point search Contact search displays the ladder block that contains a specified contact point l bu lt Operation procedure gt E gt O CD Touch Menu LL
65. Up to 28 characters are displayed as the directory File name Displays the file name selected in the list INDEX 12 4 Operation Procedures 12 7 Item Above the list List Area chg Refresh fe 1 Description The display details differ depending on the setting for Device e For CNC Entry Remain Displays the number of programs registered and the number of registerable programs left as user created machining programs Character Remain Displays the number of characters registered and the number of registerable characters left as user created machining programs The number of registerable characters left is displayed by 250 characters e For E USB Drive 1 B Extend Memory card or A Bulit in CF card Used KB Remain Displays the used space and available space of the memory card Displays the data in the target selected for Device When E USB Drive 1 B Extend Memory card or A Built in CF card is selected the directory is displayed as lt gt Touching lt gt displays the data in the directory Touching lt gt displays the upper directory The copy source device is set to E USB Drive 1 B Extend Memory card or A Built in CF card the directory for the file is displayed in the directory field of the copy destination device CNC Scrolls the list up by one page Scrolls the list down by one page Switches the setting targets blue frame in the left side of the screen up and
66. Z 8 When a QCPU redundant system is used data of the set value cannot be changed 9 The QSCPU does not support the connection type 2 S O 2 2 Specifications 2 7 2 2 1 System configuration 2 When the GOT is connected to a QnACPU Name Entry monitor Batch monitor TC monitor BM monitor Data change by test operation Quick test Display switching O Available A Partly restricted x Unavailable Function Connection form between GOT and controller Ethernet MELSECNET 10 CO Hnk connection connection connection ID GT16 GT16 GT16 GT16 GT16 GT16 GT16 T11 T11 T11 T11 T11 T11 T11 Monitoring present values by entering devices to be 25 monitored in advance Monitoring the present value of n T devices from a specified device Monitoring the present value set value contact S point and coil of m i devices from a specified device Monitoring the present value of x devices in specified S buffer memory of a specified intelligent function module Setting Resetting bit devices Changing the NS A A A aA A present value of word devices and buffer memory Changing the 29 present value of TC possible during TC monitoring Changing the set value of TC possible during TC 2 3 monitoring Changing device values by See performing a quick test Displaying device comments Displaying word device and buffer 2 4 4 memory values in decimal
67. a O a n e r O 200 r min 0 5175 Motor speed 200 r min 0 5175 a l a Rec dec time 1000 m 0 20000 1 Acc dec time 1000 ms 0 20000 1 peer a RSIS 131072 pulse 0 9999999 x y G n so 0 vo rey ot ZR S 26 S S oo 3 gt o w S ise R oo 09 Z vo o gt ag a a ee Ee srana operation screen Pas YT anns Motorless operation screen JOG DO forced output screen 1 Not displayed for MR J2M P8A monitor 2 Not displayed for MR J2M LJDU monitor NDEX Point P If the JOG operation screen data has not been downloaded to the GOT Monitor _ data not found is displayed and the subsequent screens are not displayed 9 4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens 9 35 9 4 7 Test operations Precautions for test operations The following describes the precautions when performing a test operation of the servo amplifier monitor D AN G ER e Do not operate the servo amplifier switches with wet hands Doing so can cause an electric shock Do not perform operations with the front cover of the servo amplifier removed Doing so can cause an electric shock since the high voltage terminals and live parts are exposed Do not open the front cover of the servo amplifier when the power is on or during operation Doing so can cause an electric shock e Be sure to read the precautions for test operation in the manuals of the servo NCAUTION amplifier be
68. after reading writing the input contents E Write the command again 2 gt 5 4 5 Writing commands Commands finalized by writing and inserting operations are revised overwritten with the program writing m z a Remark When the key is input in the parameter mode the GOT stops the process E l To continue the operation carry on the key input E O z O 4 4 Operation Methods 4 19 4 4 6 Hard copy output 4 4 8 List of functions The table below shows the functions available for each mode Mode mode display Write W Read R Insert 1 Delete D Parameter P Others O Function Writes adds or modifies a program Changes a device used at the selected step in the program Displays a list of instructions that start with the specified character and allows the user to choose from them Reads a program after allowing the user to specify a step number Declares the specified part of the program NOP Displays a comment for the specified device Reads a program after allowing the user to specify a step number Reads a program after allowing the user to specify an instruction used Reads a program after allowing the user to specify a device used Automatically scrolls the display of a program that has been read up to a specified step Corresponds to program read and automatic scroll functions described above Displays a comment for the specified device Inserts a new program into the displayed program Displays
69. aoo f oro o on o o P e f ooo aoe ore a e ooo sos oras e oe we oree sme GA oe oo aoo o 9 s f eoo 400s f oras of o om 14 000E 4014 OFAE 8 to to to to 18 0012 4018 OFB2 6 5 26 AJ71ID1 ID2 R4 A1SJ711D1 ID2 R4 module monitoring 6 5 27 A1S68DAV module monitoring Buffer memory address Screen example tu ec eo a UU SI H SET Data MONIT AIS68DAY Movement Monitor Screen Che END 1 to 8 0001 to 0008 a 10 to 17 000A to 0011 S l 0 Enabled 10 to 17 000A to 0011 E Analog Output O 1 Disabled E 3 Output Status x Up Limit Low Limit 70 m m Lu it a L o e TE O G 0 O E O 7 O o F OLO 30 Aa O O Oc OO o Error 2 Z S lt bZ QO az Ir LUC O i Q UU 10 10 CH1 Enable T 1 S 11 11 CH2 Enable J 92 Error Detect 12 2 CH3 Enable lt 03 13 3 CH4 Enable O 14 4 CH5 Enable a 15 5 CH6 Enable 2 16 6 CH Enable Lu 17 7 CH8 Enable 18 18 Error Reset 19 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 7 E gt lt T O rr UU BE UU Si O SET a MONIT exp AIS68DAY Graph Monitor Screen Out put INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR Ar O Z E x Ar Q o EA AO WDT Er ror AA 0 Enabled m 1 Disabled Error LC O Zz O Z O kE O O 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 69 6 5 27 A1S68DAV module monitoring 6 5 28 A1S68DAI module monitoring Refer to the following for further information about the
70. is selected Raag 0 When the control station oe A 3 Station No FF 1 to 64 MEAN station is is selected CEGO 1 4 Wh ie l E S 1 to 64 When a station is selected o local station is selected OVERVIEW N oc O Z le LL E LS gt dp oc O 6 4 CPU No O to 4 This item must be set only when the system is connected to multiple QCPUs It is not necessary when the E i system is connected to another CPU E S as O O ON Si 5 Bit device ON OFF O OFF 6 c Displays a comment maximum number of characters 16 one byte characters T ommen E A comment is displayed when DISPLAY is selected for comment display on the display format switching screen O kE Decimal number 2 16 bit one word module Six digits including a digit for a sign are displayed Display example 12345 a 32 bit two word module Ten digits including a digit for a sign are displayed Display example 123456789 R 7 Word device value a Hexadecimal number S 16 bit one word module Four digits are displayed Display example H AB12 32 bit two word module Eight digits are displayed Display example H ABCDE123 8 Up to 16 devices can be entered when the data range is word 16 bits Up to eight devices can be entered when the data range is two word 32 bits E 9 Device name For further information about device numbers and names that can be entered gt GT Designer 2 Version O x Screen Design Manual r UU
71. lt gt Minus key in command source data For further information about the display of valid keys see the following gt Section 4 4 2 Display format of the display area 3 Valid command device keys after setting each mode Valid command device keys after setting each mode are shown below a Valid keys after setting read write and insert modes The upper functions of the command device keys are valid If necessary switch the upper and lower functions of necessary keys for operation b Valid keys after setting parameter other and help modes The lower functions of the command device keys are valid If necessary switch the upper and lower functions of necessary keys for operation 4 4 4 Selection and operation of modes Select appropriate modes of the MELSEC A list editor for the operations described in Sections 4 5 and 4 6 You can change modes as you desire during any of the operations described in Sections 4 5 and 4 6 so that you can continue operations while changing modes READ e Read mode WRITE A a Write mode INSERT ams Insert mode DELETE 2 Delete mode PARAM s Parameter mode OTHER FE ae eee 82 X RRR Other mode E a Remark Mode key input is always valid Input of the mode key clears the input data except for the step numbers The display returns to the initial status of the mode selection 4 4 Operation Methods 4 15 4 4 3
72. reverse loop Loop switching frequency Parameter settings Designation of reserved station Communications mode Designation of transmission Transmission status Communication status of each station Communications status of each station Parameter status of each station CPU action status of each station CPU RUN status of each station Loop status of each station Monitoring is only possible when connected to a MELSECNET II local station 2 Monitoring is possible only when using a MELSECNET H or MELSECNET 10 loop system 3 Indicates the CC Link IE controller network connection A olololol lo lololo O 4 The loop names vary depending on the network system to be monitored as shown below MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 MELSECNET II network systems CC Link IE controller network Forward loop OUT side loop Reverse loop IN side loop 7 2 Specifications 7 2 2 Network information that can be monitored 7 2 3 Access range In bus connection direct CPU connection computer link connection or Ethernet connection only the host station can be monitored In MELSECNET H connection or MELSECNET 10 connection only the control station can be monitored gt In CC Link connection Intelligent device station only the master station can be monitored gt In CC Link connection via G4 only the host and master stations can be monitored When the GOT is connected to the remote I O station in MELSECNET H network s
73. specification file Device initial value File register Sampling trace file Programmable controller user data File for storing device data Universal model QCPU Description File name Parameter for operating a programmable controller PARAM QPA Parameter for intelligent function modules IPARAM QPA Program that the CPU operates Including SFC program QPG Device comment to be stored in a programmable controller QCD Batch file for starting programs stored in ROM and others AUTOEXEC QBT Setting the device initial value QDI Data stored in file registers QDR Sampling trace data that the specified device data is OTD continuously collected with the specified timing l Any user created data stored in a memory card kkk KKK Optional Device data used for the SP DEVST and S DEVLD instructions DEVSTORE QST 1 The GOT restores file register data in the Flash card installed in the CPU module without checking if the data are overwritten 2 The item can be backed up only 11 2 Specifications 11 2 1 System configuration 11 5 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR J CNC MONITOR Y FUNCTION LLI GC O E 7 LLI 2 oa Y O lt m SFC MONITOR CNC DATA I O APPENDICES INDEX 11 6 4 CNC C70 Item Description File name Machining program All programs for operating a machine tool with a CNC ALL PRG Parameter Parameter for operating a CNC ALL PRM Offset data of the to
74. standard CF card or B drive extended memory card is available for storing SFC data For setting the storage location for ladder data refer to the following manuals When setting with GOT utility K gt GT16 User s Manual Section 11 2 1 Q QnQ Ladder Monitor GT15 User s Manual Section 11 7 Q QnQ Ladder Monitor When setting with GT Designer2 K gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual Section 3 8 Setting of GOT Display and Operations GOT Setup 13 3 Display Operation 13 3 2 Setting SFC data storage location 13 3 3 Reading comment files from CE card The SFC monitor function uses comment files stored in a CF card installed in the GOT Procedure for using comment files stored in CF cards The following shows the procedure for using a comment file stored in a CF card 1 When displaying comments in language set for language switching of GOT utility Store comment files in a CF card on the PLC read screen For how to store comment files in a CF card on the PLC read screen refer to the following 3 13 5 How to Operate PLC Read Screen 2 When displaying comments in any language regardless of language set for language switching of GOT utility Removable Disk E File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Back 1 K pa Search K Folders s Address S E a SEQCMNT File and Folder Tasks Y Other Places Details S Removable Disk Es E 5 SEQCMNT g fe le Siek eee Channel No g
75. touch Debug amp self check Debug gt MELSEC FX List editor from the main menu For how to display the utility refer to the user s manual of the GOT to be used Turn on the power to the GOT set in the project data Touch the special function switch Refer to the following manual for how to set the special function switch GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual Starting from the special function switch MELSEC FX list editor When starting the List editor for MELSEC FX from the ladder monitor Activate the MELSEC FX list editor on the Ladder monitor screen Touch List 6 2 Touch Switch gt Subsection 3 3 Display Set the Channel No Set the channel number of the controller targeted to the MELSEC FX list editor Communication setting window When a keyword is registered in the connected FX PLC When no keyword is registered in the connected FX PLC Enter the keyword gt 5 4 11 Keywords The MELSEC FX list editor is started End 5 6 5 3 Display Point f 1 How to display the utility For how to display the utility refer to the following 23 GT16 User s manual 8 3 Utility Display S gt GT15 User s manual 9 3 Utility Display if O GT11 User s manual 9 3 Utility Display GT10 User s manual 8 2 Utility Display o 2 Displaying communication setting window After turning on the GOT the communication sett
76. with 4 or y 5 Z x lt Read gt LU kE N Parameter setting F Keyword setup List Monitor oc O Z Qs o O BO az Sar O Error message Detail Step I O configuration error 1010 T PC HPP communication error 6201 7 lt O LU LL gt 9 E Pad PLC diagnostics screen LL The following describes the contents displayed on the PLC diagnostics screen and the function of on screen key 1 Displayed contents Q S Error message Detail Step 0 configuration error 1010 ie PC HPP communication error 6201 SIS LU Z gt LC O Z O SE LC O m Z Displays the error message I O configuration error PLC hardware error PC HPP com 1 Error message munication error Serial communication error Parameter error Syntax error Circuit error Operation error g gt 3 Ste Displays the step number in the sequence program at which the error occurred Z P This is displayed only for a syntax error circuit error or operation error 2 S O 5 4 Operation Procedures 5 23 5 4 9 PLC diagnostics a Remark Error details ES For details on an FX PLC error refer to the manual below lt Programming manual for the FX CPU used 2 Key functions The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operation on the PLC diagnostics screen Key Function x Exits the PLC diagnostics 5 24 5 4 Operation Procedures 5 4 9 PLC diagnostics 5 4
77. zs AN V lhe ted a im IT RYTER AI Dy R 151 AAT 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 5 35 QD75M module monitoring Sa 2s DS SS 5 6 7 N a 2 30114 30214 075A2 07606 30314 30414 0766A 076CE 3 30115 30215 075A3 07607 30315 30415 0766B 076CF 4 30116 30216 075A4 07608 30316 30416 0766C 076D0 5 30112 30212 075A0 07604 30312 30412 07668 076CC 6 30117 30217 075A5 07609 30317 30417 0766D 076D1 7 30119 30219 075A7 0760B 30319 30419 0766F 076D3 8 30120 30220 075A8 0760C 30320 30420 07670 076D4 30121 30221 075A9 0760D 30321 30421 07671 076D5 10 30118 30218 075A6 0760A 30318 30418 0766E 076D2 11 30122 30222 30322 30422 2 El 30113 30213 30313 30413 30123 30223 30323 30423 30124 30224 30324 30424 30125 30225 30325 30425 075A1 07605 07669 076CD 075AA 0760E 07672 076D6 075AB 0760F 07673 076D7 075AC 07610 07674 076D8 075AD 07611 07675 076D9 30129 30229 30329 30429 30130 30230 30330 30430 30131 30231 30331 30431 30132 30232 30332 30432 1 30127 30227 075AF 07613 30327 30427 07677 076DB 2 30128 30228 075B0 07614 30328 30428 07678 076DC 075B1 07615 07679 076DD 075B2 07616 0767A 076DE 075B3 07617 0767B 076DF 075B4 07618 0767C 076E0 Buffer memory address HEX Screen example No ES m
78. 1 30133 30233 075B5 07619 0D75M Servo extended parameter Part2 O a r to 30333 30433 0767D 076E1 Car fey ey L tAm L Arata D By 2 L L L 4 E senlial comunication baudrate SAD Control EWE OVE O HE il al GEGONS l XL 30134 30234 075B6 0761A T RSS IEIZ SOTO s E xisi Wal 5 30334 30434 0767E 076E2 O Or ANT EHS 2 6 30136 30236 075B8 0761C mae Tve lLO naar pr JO 30336 30436 07680 076E4 7 30138 30238 075BA 0761E or Neoder GULDUL pulse EE DET 30338 30438 07682 076E6 2 EEZEIEIESIET PUSS SEmi Z NES T kE 2 gt N oc O Z O 72 1 30143 30243 075BF 07623 QD75M Servo extended parameter 2 crew ar 30343 30443 07687 076EB a Z LL 7 S S selection 1 SNE A changime ratio 30144 30244 075C0 07624 a Rene epee eae RATED K PET Z Rae as ae OF ice AS Bis lear 30344 30444 07688 076EC 30145 30245 075C1 07605 S TR O 30345 30445 07689 076ED A 4 30149 30249 075C5 07629 0 mZ 30349 30449 0768D 076F1 lt Saren ET YA STT 5 30150 30250 075C6 0762A J 30350 30450 0768E 076F2 m 6 30151 30251 075C7 0762B 30351 30451 0768F 076F3 7 30152 30252 075C8 0762C 30352 30452 07690 076F4 N 8 30153 30253 075C9 0762D 2 30353 30453 07691 076F5 R oc 9 30154 30254 075CA 0762E n O 30354 30454 07692 076F5 e 10 30155 30255 075CB 0762F 6 30355 30455 07693 076F6 Ww 11 30160 30260 075D0 07634 gt 30360 30460 07698 076FC Q 12 30161 30261 075D1 07635 z 303
79. 10 Error Messages and Corrective Action 3 LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION JS 6116 6 cr15 6715 07000 E y Sua pa oo Y ie 3 1 Features The ladder monitor enables you to monitor the sequence program within the target controller and change device values It is intended to troubleshoot and maintain the PLC system efficiently The features of the ladder monitor are shown below The program with ladder symbols can be monitored You can monitor PLC CPU programs in ladder diagram format and save displayed screens in BMP or JPEG format gt Section 3 4 Operation Procedure Common Display example Uog MOV GO K4Y40 K2 Uog MOY G2 D102 K4 L U7Z BOT 0102 G1 K4 device monitor not execute nn Print Cancel JUMP T JUMP 1 Screen Print 3 1 Features 3 1 OVERVIEW SYSTEM MONITOR O oc O E Z le oc T Q G lt l Z O H O Z LL MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR MELSEC A LIST EDITOR NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR The display format device comment display and language can be switched The following can be switched gt Section 3 5 Switching the Display Format e Display format of device values timer and counter values e Comment display non display of the target device e Language used for items of the sequence program such as file name and comments Display example 1 O FF O Program Memory TO 0 25
80. 10 Parameter setting Sets FX PLC parameters Parameters that can be changed and change targets 1 Parameters that can be changed The parameters that can be changed with the MELSEC FX list editor and the target FX PLCs are as follows O Can be set changed x Cannot be set changed Target CPU Item Memory space setting eee px o po o RUN terminal seting eee ete ate riiaizaon ofparameters O o o o o o o 1 When connecting an FX0 S set 0 Setting other than 0 causes a parameter error 2 When the parameters are initialized the display on the MELSEC FX list editor is different from the FX PLC default values but do not change the latch range Changing the latch range causes an error OJOJO O 2 Change targets When a memory cassette is mounted the parameters in the memory cassette are targeted for changes Operation Stop the FX PLC 3 gt Parameter setting 3 gt Parameter setting Keyword setup List Monitor 5 OUT Y 010 5 OUT Y 020 7 OUT Y 030 8 LDI Y 010 9 MOV Memory capacity File reg capacity 0 block Lateh range M 500 M1023 C 100 C 199C16bi ts S 500 599 C 220 C 2b5 3ebit D 200 D 511 RUN terminal input 1 When checking parameters not changing it is not necessary to stop the PLC 5 4 Operation Procedures 5 25 5 4 10 Parameter setting OVERVIEW SYSTEM MONITOR LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC A LIST EDITOR al E V m g
81. 11 2 Specifications 11 9 11 2 2 Access range SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR Y CNC MONITOR Y FUNCTION LLI oc O E 7 LLI G o Y O lt a SFC MONITOR CNC DATA I O APPENDICES INDEX 11 10 e Controller operations Controllers may malfunction by changing set values device values and others during the restoration Check that data to be restored is the appropriate data and then execute the restoration with paying attention to the controller operations Precautions for multiple CPU system For the multiple CPU system including a QCPU Q mode at the factory default setting or with a formatted memory the GOT cannot restore data to multiple controllers simultaneously Restore data to the controllers respectively by referring to the following procedure Restoring data to Restoring data to controller No 1 controller No 2 ra Resetting Resetting controller No 1 controller No 2 3 Operations for backup restore a Precautions for GT Designer2 Do not execute the following operations with GT Designer2 during the backup restore Operation with GT Designer2 OS installation BootOS installation CoreOS installation Project download Special data download When the above operations are executed the backup restore is stopped b Precautions for GX Developer Do not access the target controller of the backup restore with GX Developer during the backup restore Doing so stops the backup restore D
82. 2 The following table shows the displayed contents 1 Displays the selected device 2 Keys for operations in the device test window shown in b b Key functions Key Function Turns on the bit device and writes the device state to the PLC CPU ON Turns off the bit device and writes the device state to the PLC CPU 13 38 13 8 Test Operation 2 Word devices a Displayed screen i m Z 1 2 3 1 2 3 AG E X x as Device CC HE DEC Device CO f IME HE jejo jm LC SIS S 6 fo ft 3 4 5 9 112131 fof SS 25 O lL 0 Enter Del AC Monitoring mode 16 bit integer DEC Monitoring mode 32 bit integer HEX The following table shows the displayed contents T 1 Displays the selected device 2 Set the value to be written into the selected device E Displays the current input mode DEC decimal number HEX hexadecimal num 3 Input mode ber 4 Keys for operations in the device test window shown in b e E Q O zZ O oc O E Z Oo O LL 7 APPENDICES INDEX 13 8 Test Operation 13 39 13 40 b Key functions Enter SE 13 8 Test Operation Function Closes the device test window Switches the input modes DEC HEX Writes the value input in the device value input area into the PLC CPU Deletes an input value or character Deletes all the input values and characters 13 9 Error Messages and Corrective Action The following shows the error me
83. 2 27D 2 27D an alarm and function to output the 2 32J corresponding comment No to a device The comment group application 2 73B Standard monitor OS 03 09 O MON O Continued to next page App 22 Item Scrolling alarm display Advanced Alarm Parts Display Parts Movement Panelmeter Level Trend graph Line graph The scrolling alarm display applicable Function for detecting alarm even at the fall of bit device with Advanced User Alarm Function to display a cursor by touching an alarm and to output the corresponding comment No to a device The binary format file output can be converted to CSV Unicode format file by external control For the advanced alarm display the title row can be set to be hidden For the advanced alarm display the alarm information in the top row is output if the external output trigger is on when the cursor is hidden Function for using BMP JPEG data in memory card as parts Settings for BMP JPEG file parts can be made on each object When Bit Trigger is not met whether to enable Hold Display can be selected Enables specifying the transparent color of a figure when using an image file as a figure Windows fonts applicable Stroke font applicable Up to 101 points can be set for scale value number Meter Attribute and Core can be set When Bit Trigger is not met whether to enable Hold Display can be selected Up to
84. 2 7 TC Monitor Monitoring Timers and Counters Performs buffer memory monitoring in the BM Monitor window E BM MON gt Section 2 8 BM Monitor Monitoring Buffer Memory x The system monitor function is deactivated and the screen returns to Main Menu 7 T kE END of the utility wa If the system is activated from the User screen the screen returns to it 5 Q O gt kE im oc ae m Z zS LLC O E Z O gt SE X O m Z aa O Z O gt zZ O kE O gt O 2 4 Operation Procedure Common to the System Monitor Screens 2 19 2 4 1 Functional change menu screen 2 4 2 Entering monitor devices specifying monitor stations and devices This subsection describes how to specify network numbers monitor stations and monitor devices by taking the Entry Monitor window as an example The procedure for specifying network numbers monitor stations and monitor devices is the same even if other items than the entry monitor Example Entering a monitor device when the entry monitor is used Functional change menu screen When no device When devices are is entered already entered DEVICE MONITOR TES JEMENU ORM Chio 1 NetMo 0lST FF CPUNo O Touch SET PRESS SET KEY SELECT ITEM TREN ENTER DEVICE TYPE amp Ne A yp wd L a DEVICE MON TOR ChNo 1 NetNo lT FFI CPUNe 0 Continued to next page 2 20 2 4 Operation Procedure Common to the System Monitor Screens 2 4 2 Ent
85. 3 2 A G a 5 lt 16 to 23 0010 to 0017 Channel 5 4 C Channel 6 5 D Channel 7 5 E Channel 8 1 E oc Channel 9 O Channel A l Channel B WDT Error Z Channel C Error 2 Channel D Digital Val Err Channel E Temp Val Err Channel F D Channel No FEDCBA9S 76543210 op Data Format 0000000000000000 Conversion 0 Scale A 0 1 Scale B 0 Enable 0 Disabled 1 Enabled LUC O Z S lt GF QO A Z S o O E Q TT kE EA 3 O UU op zj UU kE EA a x lt T O r UU E Lu o O UU gt Q G E uu 9 y JJ ul Z oc O E Z le NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 37 6 5 7 A616TD module monitoring 6 5 8 A616DAV module monitoring Buffer memory address Screen example Mec e SET Data MONIT AG16DAV Operation Monitor Screen Che END T 0001 Channel No FEDCBA98 765432 10 EN 1019 81 0010 to 001F D A Conwersion 0000000000000000 O Disabled 48 to 63 0030 to 003F Output Enable 000000000000000 1 Enabled 48 to 63 0030 to 003F Output A EN KE U Gn A h MO H dW MVOUron Y E UGP A H lel E G beg BSS SSB By G Over Under Error O Norma ERROR SET Data MONIT ABI6DAV Input Output Monitor Screen Che an pe U O 00 l DD O P G P A COU DO WOT Error 1 9 READY Je 2 Error B Output Enable PG PH SS HS HP PR S ER aa MO O e SET Data MONIT ABI6DAV Graph Monitor Screen Chg
86. 3 3 Security and password Restoration a Communication status between GOT and target controllers For restoring data enable the target controllers of the restoration to communicate with the GOT When the target controllers of the restoration cannot communicate with the GOT the restoration cannot be executed b STOP status during restoration CPUs for the programmable controller and motion controller are in the STOP status with the remote STOP before the restoration For the CNC C70 the CNC ladder is in the STOP status The CPUs and CNC ladder remain in the STOP status after the restoration is completed Restart the controllers c When restoration is canceled When the restoration is canceled all the data are not restored to the controllers and the controllers may not correctly operate When the restoration is canceled be sure to execute the restoration again The CPUs and CNC ladder remain in the STOP status after the restoration is canceled Restart the controllers d System configuration with controllers for restoration Set the same system configuration with the controllers for the restoration as those for the backup Failure to do so disables the GOT to restore data to the controllers When the system configuration with the controllers for the restoration is the same as those for the backup the GOT can restore data to the controllers even if the connection type and CH No for the restoration differ from those for the backup
87. 3 Utility Display GT11 User s Manual 9 3 Utility Display Displaying the start screen on the GT16 and GT15 If you reactivate the system monitor function without turning off the power to the GOT the last displayed screen appears Displaying communication setting window After turning on the GOT the communication setting window is displayed at the first startup of the system monitor only For displaying the communication setting window at the second or later startup touch the ENTRY button on the system monitor screen If the project data has not been downloaded The system monitor can be started from the utility even if the project data has not been downloaded to the GOT 2 3 1 Outline until starting the system monitor 2 4 Operation Procedure Common to the System Monitor Screens 2 4 1 Functional change menu screen OVERVIEW N This subsection describes the configuration of the functional change menu screen and the functions of the keys displayed on it oc O E Z O Lu E L gt nw oc O Z z rO AO as Sir The table below describes the functions of the keys displayed on the functional change menu screen Key Function 5 E Performs entry monitoring in the Entry Monitor window T DEV MON Y Section 2 5 Entry Monitor Performs batch monitoring in the Batch Monitor window 7 BAT MON Zz Section 2 6 Batch Monitor g Performs TC monitoring in the TC Monitor window TC MON oo Section
88. 4 2 Entering monitor devices specifying monitor stations and devices Test operation gt Section 2 9 Test Operation Scroll displayed information upward or downward by a line to display the preceding or next monitor device that is not currently displayed When five or more monitor devices are entered these switches are available when their A M comments are displayed Al Scrolls information upward by a line Y Scrolls information downward by a line The following table below describes the range of display of items 1 to 8 displayed Description of setting MELSECNET H CC Link Item Bus Direct CPU ahaa Ethernet connection connection i i i MELSECNET 10 connection connection RECON connection y E connection ID G4 Channel No Sets the channel number of the controller targeted to the BM monitor 0 Host loop Network No 1 to 239 0 FF When the host station is FF When the host station is selected baung 0 When the control station SHETE Station No FF 1 to 64 o station is is selected a 1 to 64 When a normal 1 to 64 When a station is selected oe local station is selected CPU No 0 to 4 This item must be set only when the system is connected to multiple QCPUs It is not necessary when the l system is connected to another CPU Decimal number four digits including a digit for a sign are displayed Display example 1234 Hexadecimal number four digits are displayed Display example H AB12 Up to 16
89. 4 8 Hard copy output The touch operation of this key is invalid 9 4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens 9 27 9 4 5 Diagnostics function Unit composition list display screen The following describes the display data of the unit composition list screen and the key functions displayed on the screen 1 Displayed contents Unit Composition List piro O AR sas Si SP Pr HS sn sas iP dP TSS w a e S Screen Print No hen O Description 1 Displays the model name of the drive unit DRU interface unit IFU and option unit installed in each slot 2 Displays the axis number of the drive unit DRU and interface unit IFU 3 Displays status of the drive unit DRU and interface unit IFU and the alarm warning number 4 Displays the model name of the motor connected to the drive unit DRU 5 Displays the software number of the drive unit DRU and interface unit IFU 2 Key functions The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations of the unit composition list screen Key Function Changes to the DI DO display screen gt This section ER Changes to the ABS data screen gt This section 4 1 Changes to the amplifier information screen U This section EJ Changes to the function device screen This section ES Returns to the function selection menu screen Exits the servo amplifier monitor Stores the displayed scree
90. 5 7 Language switching of the sequence program MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor From previous page CHNo 1 NETWK No O ST FF CPUNo O A PRO MAINI PROG MAIN COMM A Z Exit Ladder Break PRD Se MEMORY R 7 7 Ba AR Qs A MAINS MAIN4 Paget Exit Ladder Break PLCRD SetUp Drive SELS READ p agel Select Cancel CFCmnt List 411 AlI Read The setting window appears Perform the PLC READING DATA DISPLAY The settings shown below switch with every E touching of the key SYNCHRONIZED WITH LANGUAGE Default Japanese S JIS Korean KS The language set at GOT setup is displayed O After completing the setting touch the button to close the setting window E The display is switched 3 5 Switching the Display Format 3 53 3 5 7 Language switching of the sequence program MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor oc O E Z le oc T Q G lt l Z O H O Z LL MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR Go SYSTEM MONITOR OVERVIEW MELSEC A LIST EDITOR NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 3 6 Search Operation This section describes device search contact point search coil search step search ladder end search defect search and touch search Point P 1 Searching among multiple programs Search can be performed to multiple sequence programs read from PLC CPU For searchable items a
91. 6 Name Entry monitor Batch monitor TC monitor BM monitor Data change by test operation Quick test Display switching Function Description Monitoring present values by entering devices to be monitored in advance Monitoring the present value of n devices from a specified device Monitoring the present value set value contact point and coil of m devices from a specified device Monitoring the present value of x devices in specified buffer memory of a specified intelligent function module Setting Resetting bit devices Changing the present value of word devices and buffer memory Changing the present value of TC possible during TC monitoring Changing the set value of TC possible during TC monitoring Changing device values by performing a quick test Displaying device comments Displaying word device and buffer memory values in decimal or hexadecimal When the GOT is connected to a MELDAS C6 C64 O Available A Partly restricted x Unavailable Connection form between GOT and controller Bus Direct CPU Computer link Ethernet MELSECNET connection connection connection connection 10 connection CC Link connection et GT16 aoe aoe GT16 S ee S T11 T11 T11 1 Indicates CC Link connection Intelligent device station 2 Indicates CC Link connection via G4 2 2 Specifications 2 2 1 System configuration xX x HH x
92. 664 Positioning M A DRU 28 665 Positioning 33 A me Motor less 666 Motor less op SWJBzA 9 Fe operation 667 Motor less op M A DRU T 669 DO Forced Out S A PEI O O ee 670 DO Forced Out S CP OE oa ee DO forced output q ee E 672 DO Forced Out M A D01 i 36 673 DO Forced Out J3 A es RECURS ee IIED 9 2 Specifications 9 2 1 System configuration Unavailable For MR J3 OA monitoring 2 1 2 1 1 9 2 0 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 2 8 3 3 1 9 Co oc uu l a lt O gt oc Lu 0 oc O E Z le CNC MONITOR FUNCTION BACKUP RESTORE SFC MONITOR CNC DATA I O IAPPENDICES NDEX 9 10 1 Special data Download the special data indicated in the table above to the GOT Refer to the following manual for the procedure for downloading the data K gt GT Designer2 Version O Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual 8 TRANSFERRING DATA Memory space for special data The available memory space shown in the table above is required in the user area to download the special data to the GOT Refer to the following manual for the procedure for checking the available memory space of the user area and information about the data using other user areas K gt GT Designer2 Version O Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual 8 TRANSFERRING DATA 9 2 Specifications 9 2 1 System configuration 9 2 2 Access range The access range is the same as the ac
93. 8 e O i a elas 13 8 13 3 Display Operation 13 9 0 341 HT lt berre starting TTT 13 9 13 3 2 Setting SFC data storage location sse eee eee 13 12 13 3 3 Reading comment files from CEC lata 13 13 13 4 Setting Display Format 13 15 13 4 1 Switching languages of SFC programs see eee ee e eee ee e eee ee 13 15 13 4 2 Setting display mode Of SFC Programs sees eee 13 15 13 4 3 Setting zoom comment display mode sees 13 15 13 44 Switching display formats between decimal and hexadecimal numbers sese eee 13 15 13 45 Seting automatic Scroll Mode cc ade 13 16 13 5 How to Operate PLC Read Screen 13 17 13 02 Displayed COMES meninin aaa 13 17 1382 Ky TCMACTIONS aan a inal nadia nena tan atidnion sia a Gian 13 20 13 6 How to Operate Block List Screen 13 23 13 6 1 Displayed contents eee eee eee 13 23 t362 EV IUACION Sun a ON AN 13 24 1303 NENU ao iO 13 24 13 7 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen 13 25 Ta DIS OIAV SC COMES ic 13 25 Ilar KEV UNCION Sara it sica 13 28 S e A a e RO Game atucecnncoae E aescaacee 13 29 13 8 Test Operation 13 38 13 9 Error Messages and Corrective Action 13 41 APPENDICES App 1 to App 34 Appendix1 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series App 1 Appendix 1 1G 116 GT15 GT SoftGOT1000 and G111 seene App 1 PID OSTIOIG 12 ie Ol GT TTT App 31 INDEX Index 1 to Index 8 About Manuals The following manuals are also related to this
94. 8 Hard copy output S lt uw Q Z The touch operation of this key is invalid 9 4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens 9 41 9 4 7 Test operations 6 DO forced output screen The following describes the display data of the DO forced output screen and the key functions displayed on the screen 1 Displayed contents CNTA 19 CN1A 18 CN1B 19 _CNIB 6 CN1B 4 CNIB 18 CN1A 14 Screen Print No Description ON OFF status of output Displays the ON OFF status of the servo amplifier output signals signals e After this screen has been switched to another screen all external I O signals are turned off 2 Operation When the name of an output signal is touched the ON OFF status of that signal is inverted and written to the servo amplifier 3 Key functions The table below shows the functions of the keys used for the operations of the DO forced output screen Key Function Touching the signal name of an output signal sets or resets the status for that signal CNTA 19 e If the present output signal is ON then the signal is turned off RESET Output signal name e If it is OFF then it is turned on SET 001 Displays the external output signals of the extension I O unit JOG Changes to the JOG operation screen U This section EJ Changes to the positioning operation screen U This section EJ Changes to the motor less operation screen U This section BJ Returns to the func
95. A A Oe a Display Operation Procedures 8 4 1 System configuration screen layout eee ee eee ee S42 WIOMMOrMENU SCIECN a a ook 8 43 Present Value Monitor screen see eee ee e eee e 8 1 to 8 26 8 1 8 3 TEE OS 8 3 A A 8 5 S 8 5 8 6 8 44 SFC Error History screen eee ee eee 8 4 5 Error List Screen eee eee 8 4 6 Error List Designated AXxiS Screen eee 8 4 7 Positioning Monitor Screen eee ee ee ee eee 8 4 8 Servo Monitor screen ese ee eee 8 4 9 Present Value History Monitor Screen eee ee eee e 8 4 10 Parameter Setting screen ese eee ee eee 8 4 11 Hard COPY output sitio e 8 5 Error Messages and Corrective Action 9 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR 9 1 Features 9 2 Specifications 9 2 1 System configuration esse eee eee eee 922 ACCOSS LANG L 923 FPrecaulohS a aa 9 3 Display 9 4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens 9 4 1 Servo amplifier monitor see eee e eee DAZ D a T JAS Montor TIN GCHOMS T 9 4 4 Alarm function sss sees 945 DIAGNOSTICS TUNCHON ici ii id io 9 4 6 Parameter setting css 94 7 TeStODCTAIONS T 9 4 8 Hard CODY ee 9 5 Error Messages and Corrective Action 10 CNC MONITOR FUNCTIONS 10 1 Features 10 2 Specifications 10 2 1 System configuration see ecce e eee eee e eee eee 10022 wACCESS TANG LTTE 10 23 yee 191 eT 10 3 Display 10 4 Operation Procedures 10 5 Error Messages and Corrective Action 11 BACKUP RESTORE 11 1 Features 11 2 Specification
96. Basic mode When lO module is selected Touch sys conf When intelligent function module is selected l l Touch on Monitor menu display screen monitor menu for specified module See Sec 6 4 6 Touch END Go to user created monitor screen or utility screen 6 14 6 3 Display Touch and PC Information screen See Sec 6 4 3 Unit Dtail info screen See Sec 6 4 4 Key window display screen for test See Sec 6 4 7 DataChg SET RESET Monitor screen for specified monitor menu See Sec 6 4 5 6 4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen This section describes the operations of the screens when using the intelligent module monitor 6 4 1 Composition of the system configuration screen and key functions This section describes the configuration of the System Configuration screen that is displayed after startup of the intelligent module monitor and the functions of the keys displayed on the screen When using the QCPU Q mode or QASCPU 1 Displayed contents The model name of the module and related data are displayed at the end of the module data readout from the PLC CPU The OS executes it automatically When connected to the MELSECNET H or MELSECNET 10 the screen in Section 6 4 2 is displayed Item Description 1 Displays the network number and station number of the monitored stati
97. C nperature e in S input range Hardware error occurs Alert alarm 1 is turned on Alert alarm 2 is turned on a Alert alarm 3 is turned on Alert alarm 4 s turned on The heater disconnection alarm is detected rent error E when the output is off isdetected cll SIlSlala sb R 0 Raaya ank Buffer memory address o Screen example Ta 32 020 ss poso ss oso 120 000 lt 2 ee ooo ea Jooso ss Juoso 120 oowo E Co ur e fome 2 Teal a Jooo 8 a unos EE 0225 42 ee uns 1300032 L wo be PP Cm 000D x e ovsa son oosa fae fome S gt D E E ea Gte Lower 0 0 MEALEN EACS 0026 O 13 to to BH ue 7 gt z 160 00A0 la it 14 to to to 25 163 00A3 pa 00A3 Q x 7 2 D E it 4S gt 0 O UU gt Q G E uu 9 y JJ ul Z oc O E Z le NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 73 6 5 30 A1S64TCTT BW A1S64TCRTI BW S1 monitoring 6 5 31 Q68ADV Q68ADI Q64AD module monitoring Buffer memory address Screen example No w o T oo EE E E eel aan i lo completed T yy J Sr C L JL 1 a AC HES range setting 31 33 35 37 39 41 ESAME READY O8 righ resteron 08 Men damt Genie DIS Operation set cn cond seb reg DB GERZ E Fann mode Use range Wite Ln change done LAR change red OC 0D Sr Mint vel Rell aD Conve done OE OF Error flag Wa Eats En
98. CNC of CNC data UO CNC CNC C70 Connection type O Available X Unavailable Function Connection type between GOT and CNC Bus ses ST siren EEES a en Name Description link connection connection connection connection 10 connection connection ID 1 G4 2 CNC data Data I O between the ia UO CNC and GOT O A a 1 Indicates CC Link connection Intelligent device station 2 Indicates CC Link connection via G4 3 Applicable only with the Display I F connection Required extended function OS The following extended function OS is required OS memory space user area GT16 Extended function OS Option function board Built in flash User memory GI15 memory ROM RAM CNC Data I O 210KB 383KB 437KB Not required GOT Platform Library 77KB 200KB 100KB 1 Extended function OS Install the extended function OS shown in the above table on the GOT For how to install the OS refer to the following manual C gt GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual Chapter 8 TRANSFERRING DATA 2 OS memory space For installing the extended function OS the available space shown in the above table is required in the user area For checking the available space in the user area and the data that uses other user areas refer to the following manual K gt GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual Chapter 8 TRANSFERRING DATA 12 2 12 2 Specifications 12 2 1 System configurat
99. CPUNo 0 E K Touch HEX DEVICE MONITOR ChNe 1 NetNe O ST FF CPUNO 0 DEW ICE MONITOR Chio 1 MetWo L 02T FFICPUNO 60 ANA Es TEN FORME Chio 1 NetNo 02T FF CPUNo 0 ChNo 1 NetNo 8 ST FF ICPUNOo 0 H OCBESO00S DW 7 16 GUL Shipment C U OT 3 products units R 50 1380 RI Link status DN y in 0 Product line E 2 24 2 4 Operation Procedure Common to the System Monitor Screens 2 4 4 Switching the display format DEC HEX and comment no comment display mb A Changing the comment or comment capacity of the controller If you change a comment or comment capacity of the controller after the system monitor function is activated the comment may not be properly displayed on each monitor screen After a comment or comment capacity is changed turn off the GOT and turn it on again 2 Switching the display format DEC HEX The present value of word devices and the present value and set value of timers counters will be displayed in decimal or hexadecimal numbers Point OVERVIEW N 3 Switching comment no comment display The comments written to the target controller will be displayed or not be displayed Priority of comment display Extension comment gt Comment oc O E Z O Lu E L gt nw 4 Comment No comment display a The BM monitor does not display comments b Comments will not be displayed when any of the CPUs listed below is
100. DATA 2 OS memory space The available memory space shown in the table above is required in the user area to install the option OS to the GOT Refer to the following manual for the procedure for checking the available memory space of the user area and information about the data using other user areas 3 GT Designer2 Version O Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual 8 TRANSFERRING DATA 3 Option function board a For GI16 No option function board is required 6 4 6 2 Specifications 6 2 1 System configuration b For GT15 Mount one of the option function boards in the above table on the GOT For the GOTs with a built in option function board refer to the following L gt 1 1 2 Hardware and OS required for each function 7 For how to mount an option function board on the GOT refer to the following manual S GT15 User s Manual 8 10 Option Function Board A Required memory space for use of the intelligent module monitor z The memory space of the intelligent module monitor data is indicated below lt The memory space required for storing data into the internal memory of the GOT is the same as the memory space required for storing data into the hard disk of a personal computer 5 09 For QCPU A mode QnACPU and ACPU For QCPU Q mode Stored screen data Memory space KB Storedscreendata Memory space KB Intelligent module monitor data common 516 Intelligent module monitor data common 13d cc informat
101. Date Manual Number Revision Mar 2005 SH NA 080544ENG A First edition Oct 2005 SH NA 080544ENG B Compatible with GT Designer2 Version2 18U Partial corrections Abbreviations and generic terms in this manual Chapter1 Section 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 3 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 3 1 2 4 2 2 4 3 2 4 4 2 4 5 2 5 2 5 1 2 5 3 2 6 1 2 7 1 2 8 1 2 9 2 2 9 3 2 9 4 2 9 5 3 1 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 2 3 3 3 3 4 1 3 8 4 1 4 2 1 4 3 4 3 1 4 3 2 4 4 1 4 4 2 4 4 7 4 7 3 App 1 INDEX Partial additions Section 2 6 2 7 2 8 3 4 3 5 4 Additions Section 2 2 3 3 2 3 3 2 4 4 2 2 4 4 6 Chapter 5 6 7 8 9 10 Jan 2006 SH NA 080544ENG C Compatible with GT Designer2 Version2 27D Partial corrections About Manuals Abbreviations and generic terms in this manual How to read this manual Section 3 1 3 4 2 4 4 6 5 4 12 7 4 1 8 4 11 9 2 1 9 4 8 10 2 1 Appt a on N J Jun 2006 SH NA 080544ENG D Compatible with GT Designer2 Version2 32J Partial corrections Chapter 1 Section 2 1 3 2 4 8 2 3 9 2 1 Nov 2006 SH NA 080544ENG E Compatible with GT Designer2 Version2 43V Partial corrections Section 2 2 4 3 1 3 2 4 3 3 2 3 6 3 8 6 2 2 7 2 3 8 2 2 Partial additions 7 J Cp D O O 5 CLO CLO k CLO oo oo oo IN a Y Continued to next page Print Date May 2007 Aug 2007 Dec 2007 Feb 2008 Manual Number Revision SH NA 08
102. E Z le NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 6 2 3 Precautions GOT to be used The intelligent module monitor function cannot be used with the GT1555 Q and GT1550 Q Special function modules that cannot be monitored Modules displayed as SP on the System Configuration screen cannot be monitored using the intelligent module monitor To monitor these modules use the system monitor function BM MONITOR Display when connecting the small building block type CPU This precaution pertains to a situation where an extension base unit for a large building block type is connected to a small building block type CPU such as the A1SCPU in the station connected to the GOT In this case the intelligent function module on the large extension base unit is displayed on the System Configuration screen with the model name of the same type of the small building block type intelligent function module If there is no small building block type intelligent function module SP is displayed and the object module cannot be monitored Example Installed module Model name displayed AD72 gt A1SD71 AJ711D gt A1SJ71ID AJ71PT32 S3 gt A1SJ71PT32 S3 AD75P gt A1SD75P A68ADN CH1 to CH8 gt A1S64AD CH1 to CH4 A68RD CH1 to CH8 gt A1S62RD CH1 to CH2 Monitoring intelligent function modules with restrictions 1 When monitoring AD71 S1 S2 S7 When the previous slot of the AD71 module is an empty slot monitoring is performed in the follo
103. EI patono ron H H ESO AC AC IC H ooro H ooreo pa o 72700 Forces osea or a G H HH i 9 8 9 2 Specifications 9 2 1 System configuration Unavailable For MR J3 DA monitoring 2 7 2 9 5 2 5 2 5 2 5 2 3 8 4 3 2 7 4 0 c When using GI155 O V Memory space KB For MR For MR For MR For MR Function details Stored screen data J2S JA J2S OCP J2M P8A J2M 0JDU monitoring monitoring Monitoring monitoring Servo amplifier monitor data common information 42 0 G H IRC IO ERC noos ooo a o woos H H IEC GO H H HH GH H HHH 622 Func Dev In2 M A IFU Ba o 623 Func Dev Out1 M A IFU NO EN ley Ta ure Dev GS NAT oo ar 625 Func Dev Int M A DRU A 626 Func Dev In2 M A DRU O EN 627 Func Dev Out1 M A DRU O EN 628 Func Dev Out2 M A DRU O SN oase ATI FAC FE EEE COCTEAU a CT o information display 633 ua inf M A DRU fet amo nea samp soa PP 50 ABS data Car SARA ve G 20 GH H f GH H HH E H H fe ea 650 Parameters S 651 Parameters M A IFU 652 Parameters M A DRU e Diagnostics function Parameter setting 653 Parameters Basic setting J3 A 654 Parameters Gain Filter J3 A O ee ee 655 Parameters Ext setting J3 A Fe 656 Parameters VO setting 33 A JOG operation 660 og operation Sra RT 661 Jog operation M A DRU 663 Positioning S Oo za ES oo Aie
104. Example Path of QPG file to be stored in CF card 5 23 2 characters 1 character Extension 4 characters 1 1 Drive name 1 character eS Max 78 characters LLI oc O E 7 LLI G o Y O lt a SFC MONITOR CNC DATA I O APPENDICES INDEX 11 5 Backup Data Conversion Tool 11 33 11 5 3 How to use Backup Data Conversion Tool Operation flow 11 34 The following shows the operation flow for Backup Data Conversion Tool 1 Editing backup data with GX Developer GOT Back up setting data with the backup restore function on the GOT Copy the backup data to the personal computer Specify Backup Data Folder Specify Target Drive Backup Data Specify Drive Name in Workspace Drive Setting Conversion Tool Specify Folder to be assigned to a workspace drive Click the Import GOT GX Developer button GX Developer Execute Read IC memory card with GX Developer 2 Restoring data edited by GX Developer GX Developer Execute Write IC memory card with GX Developer Specify Backup Data Folder Specify Target Drive Backup Data Conversion Tool a Specify Drive Name in Workspace Drive Setting Click the Export GX Developer GOT button Store the backup data in a CF card and then insert the card into the GOT Restore the backup data with the backup restore function on the GOT 11 5 Backup Data Conversion Tool 11 5
105. Fault 00 C JT Link Working 1 91 i 5 Test Mode as 3 16 Link Error Detect 16 J6 6 Link Comms Error O 7 9 JS 8 Link Comms Start DE B 1B Faulty ar LE E JL ile UD JD D Error Reset ao o f o EA INE A MN ICAC AE a 00 No remote unit or no 48 33 a E initial communication 64 LIL j partiga refre Ive ut de etectio Na ee mot e dii a or Pa KELE Refr Eg 10 to 41 000A to 0029 2 110 to 141 006Eto008D to 008D 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 53 6 5 17 AJ71PT32 S3 module monitoring OVERVIEW oO AMO0wW gt 0wW JORDI SYSTEM MONITOR LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC A LIST EDITOR MELSEC FX LIST UU gt Q G E uu 9 y JJ ul Z oc O E Z le NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR Buffer memory address Screen example No 300 to 363 012C to 016B 600 to 663 0258 to 0297 Station 0 Invalid Data Either Transmission or Receive Data Valid 6 54 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 5 17 AJ71PT32 S3 module monitoring 6 5 18 A1SD61 module monitoring Count Enable emental Count set Command ing Counter Samp ling Per iodic OA External Preset Y16 Reset Ext Preset 1 Error Reset Samp ling Per od ae a ee ar ST Screen example vey Lp mit Swite h Output AE C Function Start Counter Setting 5 No setting TES counter Samp l i ing counter Periodi 4 Count d 0 1 Pdi 2 pu I se counter
106. GOT and break WIRING PRECAUTIONS O Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before wiring Failure to do so may result in an electric shock product damage or malfunctions WIRING PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Always ground the FG terminal LG terminal and protective ground terminal of the GOT power to the protective ground conductors dedicated to the GOT Not doing so may cause an electric shock or malfunction O Terminal screws which are not to be used must be tightened always at torque 0 5 to 0 8 N m Otherwise there will be a danger of short circuit against the solderless terminals Use applicable solderless terminals and tighten them with the specified torque lf any solderless spade terminal is used it may be disconnected when the terminal screw comes loose resulting in failure Correctly wire the GOT power supply section after confirming the rated voltage and terminal arrangement of the product Not doing so can cause a fire or failure O lighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT Exercise care to avoid foreign matter such as chips and wire offcuts entering the GOT Not doing so can cause a fire failure or malfunction Plug the bus connection cable by inserting it int
107. Graph Time Action Logging Function Device data transfer function Recipe function App 24 o Version of GT Description E Version of OS Designer2 Up to 101 points can be set for scale 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 O value number Function to collect data only when display l l l 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 O trigger is met is added Q GT GT Soft T 15 GOT1000 11 When Bit Trigger is not met whether to l l 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O enable Hold Display can be selected Up to 101 points can be set for scale l 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 O value number Function to collect data only when display 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 O trigger is met is added When Bit Trigger is not met whether to l 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O enable Hold Display can be selected Standard monitor OS 02 02 2 18U Option OS Logging 02 02 Function to collect and accumulate device values EIN ECC IE E NC The binary CSV Unicode format files output can be stored to another folder by 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 external control Function to read the device value and o l l Extended function OS write in the other device when the trigger 2 73B Sa o Device data transfer 03 09 condition is satisfied Number of devices settable for one recipe Standard monitor OS 02 04 in GT11 is extended to the same as GT15 2 27D Option OS
108. HIDIC H 04 02 HITACHI HIDIC H Protocol 2 04 02 HITACHI PLC Communication driver Supporting connection to HITACHI PLC 2 90U E connection HITACHI S10mini S10V 04 02 l l l Communication driver FUJI FA PLC connection Supporting connection to FUJI FA PLC 2 90U FUJI MICREX F 04 02 MATSUSHITA PLC Communication driver Supporting connection to MATSUSHITA PLC 2 90U connection MATSUSHITA MEWNET FP 04 02 Communication driver YASKAWA GL CP9200 SH H CP9300MS 04 02 Ethernet YASKAWA 04 02 TOSHIBA MACHINE Supporting connection to TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC PLC connection HITACHI IES PLC connection Supporting connection to HITACHI IES PLC 2 90U YASKAWA PLC Supporting connection to YASKAWA PLC connection 2 90U Continued to next page App 3 SERVO AMPLIFIER CNC MONITOR BACKUP RESTORE FUNCTION MONITOR CNC DATA I O SFC MONITOR 7 ui 9 O Z m o o lt ae Version of GT Item Description Version of OS Designer2 Communication driver YOKOGAWA FA500 FA M3 2 90U STARDOM 04 02 Ethernet YOKOGAWA 04 02 MODBUS TCP 04 02 YOKOGAWA PLC connection Supporting connection to YOKOGAWA PLC Communication driver AB SLC500 AB 1 N 04 02 2 90U AB MicroLogix 04 02 AB Control CompactLogix 04 02 EtherNet IP AB 04 02 ALLEN BRADLEY PLC Supporting connection to ALLEN BRADLEY PLC connection Communication driver 2 90U GE Fanu
109. HSS 30104 30304 7798 7660 a Pin 30508 30708 772C 77F4 30509 30709 772D 77F5 30510 30710 772E 77F6 30514 30714 7732 77FA 30515 30715 7733 77FB OVERVIEW SYSTEM MONITOR LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC A LIST EDITOR MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR O UU gt Q G E uu 9 y JJ ul Z oc O E Z le NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 109 6 5 36 QD75MH module monitoring H T re ee cee Screen example No QD75MH Servo parameter Gain Filter 1 30519 30719 7737 71FF Tape AAA eT 30520 30720 7738 7800 30522 30722 773A 7802 30524 30724 773C 7804 30525 30725 773D 7805 30526 30726 773E 7806 30527 30727 773F 7807 30528 30728 7740 7808 30529 30729 7741 7809 30531 30731 7743 780B 30533 30733 7745 780D 30536 30736 7748 7810 mb Y S o ESA gt gt i o NI 13 13 30141 30341 75BD 7685 30541 30741 774D 7815 1 30132 30332 75B4 767C QD75MH Servo parameter Gain Fi lter 2 2 30532 30732 7744 780C i BRS g 30134 30334 75B6 767E K 30534 30734 7746 780E 3 o O Invalid 1 Walid 30537 30737 7749 7811 30538 30738 774A 7812 5 8 30142 30342 75BE 7686 7 8 l a 6 110 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 5 36 QD75MH module monitoring AO a s oe Screen example 30145 30345 7689 OD75MH Servo parameter Gain Fi Iter 3 U TE
110. Hardware CF card 13 6 13 2 Specifications 13 2 1 System configuration 13 2 2 Devices and range that can be monitored O Possible x Impossible l Device monitor i y intemal ratay Mione C a y o o See T File register ee S aa 11 mesons S o AI C O CI Extended data register E II CI Extension file register EI CN CI ink direct device Joovoo oa x SERVO AMPLIFIER CNC MONITOR MONITOR FUNCTION BACKUP RESTORE oO CNC DATA I O X oc O E Z le O LL 7 X x XxX OJOJO O O OJO OJO X O X O X OJO O JOJO O O O OJO O JOJO X Module access device Aa E x i Usen 0 O O O a Network No specification device J0t0255 to 255 OZ O N x oo l UO to 1FF I O No specification device 3E0 to 3E3 Macro instruction argument device VDO to xo if xo x 1 M8192 to 61439 are applicable to Universal model QCPU only 2 B2000 to FFFF are applicable to Universal model QCPU only 3 ZR1042432 to 4184063 are applicable to Universal model QCPU only 4 Z16to 19 are applicable to Universal model QCPU only 5 When a ZZ device is used ZZ can be displayed rat x INDEX 13 2 Specifications 13 7 13 2 2 Devices and range that can be monitored 13 2 3 Access range The access range is the same as the access range when the GOT is connected to a controller Refer to the following manual for details of the access range K gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 2 7 Controllers that can be
111. I O oc O E Z le O LL 7 APPENDICES INDEX 13 22 2 Program list window The GOT displays the read SFC programs in a list a Displayed screen Program List Wane E E The following table shows the displayed contents Displays the file names and execution statuses of the read SFC programs 1 SFC program file list The execution statuses show execution types set for the programs A touched SFC program file is highlighted 2 Keys for operations in the program list window shown in b Touch input b Key functions Key Function A F Scrolls the display area up and down by one line Displays the blocks of the SFC program file selected in the SFC program file list on the block Display O list screen lt L 13 6 How to Operate Block List Screen 13 5 How to Operate PLC Read Screen 13 5 2 Key functions 13 6 How to Operate Block List Screen o ULU L On the block list screen the GOT displays blocks within the read SFC program in a list a The following describes how to operate the block list screen a6 az uj O n 13 6 1 Displayed contents The following describes the configuration of the block list screen menus and key functions on the screen oc ist 6 Device Test Display O MA SFE Y 25 MG MG Hit OL mo mo mo A per pepe H NS T H H H O O O H IEEE ES ES Se IO A AO IA S H p E E H ES H H T HT T H a Y O H H E z PE T E eS T lt a O O A B H p p
112. IE controller Supporting connection to CC Link IE controller network network connection CC Link connection a l Communication driver CC Link Ver2 ID 04 02 Supporting connection to CC Link Intelligence device Intelligent device 2 90U station station Communication driver CC Link G4 04 02 CC Link connection Via G4 Supporting connection to CC Link Via G4 2 90U Communication driver 2 90U Ethernet MELSEC Q17nNC CRnD 700 04 02 S 2004 Communication driver MODBUS TCP Supporting connection to the MODBUS TCP MODBUS TCP 04 02 OMRON PLC Communication driver Supporting connection to OMRON PLC 2 90U connection OMRON SYSMAC 04 02 Communication driver KEYENCE PLC Supporting connection to KEYENCE PLC 2 90U connection KEYENCE KV700 1000 04 02 Communication driver KOYO El PLC l Supporting connection to KOYO El PLC 2 90U connection KOYO KOSTAC DL 04 02 l Communication driver SHARP PLC connection Supporting connection to SHARP PLC 2 90U SHARP JW 04 02 Communication driver TOSHIBA PLC l 2 90U TOSHIBA PROSEC T V connection 04 02 Ethernet connection Supporting connection to the Ethernet Supporting connection to TOSHIBA PLC Communication driver 2 90U TOSHIBA MACHINE TCmini 04 02 l l Communication driver JTEKT PLC connection Supporting connection to JTEKT PLC 2 90U JTEKT TOYOPUC PC 04 02 Communication driver HITACHI
113. L gt Subsection 3 6 5 Ladder end search Searches the ladder blocks for the status of continuity non continuity of the contact point that turned on or off the coil on the sequence program Subsection 3 6 6 Defect search Switches the word device and timer counter values displayed on the ladder monitor 16 32Bit screen to the 16 bit one word or 32 bit two word module 77 Subsection 3 5 1 Display switching of 16 bit one word 32 bit two word modules Switches the word device and timer counter values displayed on the ladder monitor screen to decimal or hexadecimal numbers lt gt gt Subsection 3 5 2 Display switching of decimal numbers hexadecimal numbers moa Switches whether to display the comments added to the word and bit devices displayed on the mnt ladder monitor screen lt 7 Subsection 3 5 3 Switching comment no comment display Displa e Displays the 32 characters of the comments to the word and bit devices displayed on the ladder switching Cmnt 32 monitor screen For further information see lt 5 Subsection 3 5 4 Displaying 32 characters of comments This key is not displayed when the MELSEC A and MELSEC FX ladder monitor Switches whether to display integrated notes on the sequence program Peripheral notes are represented by lt 5 Subsection 3 5 5 Displaying notes This key is not displayed when the MELSEC A and MELSEC FX ladder monitor Switches whether to display integrated statements on the sequence program State
114. LO ZiavyaAssady IIT es longue Pie 7 5 Dto 39999999 degree x10 set value T T 172 0016 A 322 472 0142 01D8 5 23 173 0017 OOAD 323 473 0143 01D9 a 26 176 001A 00BO 326 476 0146 01DC i 27 177 001B 00B1 327 477 0147 01DD o EE T gt 28 178 001C 00B2 G T ns z A G pi z Al 328 478 0148 01DE speed hsi DRAE 5 29 179 001D 00B3 a e ats J 329 479 0149 01DF E RS T Boshee 24 to 25 0018 to 0019 ENERO 174 to 175 OOAE to OOAF O la Neg Neg mae 324 to 325 0144 to 0145 ee meo 474 to 475 01DA to 01DB Setting E ere C dle A IE CU al Lame i y A E it E New Nes 30 180 001E 00B4 Zo CINEMA nee 330 480 014A 01E0 5 Neg Neg 6 32 182 0020 00B6 332 482 014C 01E2 7 31 181 001F 00B5 331 481 014B 01E1 T e lt es TYT 6 78 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 5 34 QD75P QD75D module monitoring Buffer memory address Screen example No 36 to 41 0024 to 0029 336 to 341 0150 to 0155 o III 186 to 191 00BA to OOBF 486 to 491 01E6 to O1EB 2 Ta T E 42 to 47 002A to 002F laige Clea ii ash j Setting range ES rere ee aad 192 to 197 00C0 to 00C5 Flo BSB8B0B msec ps 342 to 347 0156 to 015B SELL INE kange aoe DIORA l menn MEO EIR IZRI l 4 50 200 0032 00C8 350 500 015E 01F4 5 51 201 0033 00C9 351 501 015F 01F5 1 52 202 0034 00CA QD75P GD75D Detailed parameters 2 2 A 392 502 0160 01F6 Gath
115. Left right 2 Use the numeric keys to specify the value to be changed 2 The DEL key can be used to clear individual characters among those input SET RESET All of the following operations can be carried out by touching the keys in the displayed key window Touch input confirmation When you touch X at the upper left of the key window the key window closes and the display returns to the monitor screen 1 Use the alphabetic character keys to specify the name of the device Test ends to be tested and then touch LE 1 2 Use the numeric keys to specify the device number and then touch When is touched tests the I O signal Test continues Touch 3 Use the numeric keys to specify Set or Reset 2 o OFF 1 ON 1 Do not perform the following tests If these tests are performed the module may not operate correctly or the buffer memory input signal may return to the output value output status from the intelligent function module 1 Testing of read only buffer memory from the PLC CPU 2 Testing of input signals from the intelligent function module to the PLC CPU 2 When testing buffer memory data specify the change value in the following way 1 For data where 16 32 bits are displayed with one number specify a new value in decimal format 2 For data where one number of 16 32 bits is displayed as a percent such as with an A D conversion module specify
116. Local device monitor not executed S E Sea Print Cancel JUMP Y f JUMP 1 Screen Print 1 Switching the display format The present value of a word device is displayed in a decimal of hexadecimal number in the lower area of the screen L gt Subsection 3 5 2 Display switching of decimal numbers hexadecimal numbers 2 Device comment display Comments of the devices used in the sequence program comments written in the controller are displayed 237 Subsection 3 5 3 Switching comment no comment display Comment file data stored in a CF card can also be displayed when the MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor is used Subsection 3 3 5 Reading comment files from CF cards 3 Language switching for MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor only In the MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor language switching Japanese Korean is available for displaying the following items of a sequence program To switch the language register the following items with the language Japanese Korean used for the PLC READING DATA DISPLAY To display Korean for example register the following items with Korean on GX Developer e File name e Title e Comment e Note e Statement ltems other than the above such as menu are displayed with the language set on GOT setup L gt Section 3 5 7 Language switching of the sequence program MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor 3 2 3 1 Features Other stations can be monitored You can use the ladder monitor on other station in the data link
117. MONITOR DEV ILE MONITOR TESTENN IT ORME Chio 1 MetNo 01857 FF CPUNO 0 ile LU 16 30 ent E N LL z products units 200 00 R 50 nA ror Aes des ID Link status 3 OU E 1 O Product line B No Comments displayed 5 Displays a comment 6 Displays a data range No comments displayed 7 Displays a word device value 8 Displays bit device on off 9 Displays a device No 10 Displays a device name 1 11 Displays a monitor display area For further information about items 1 to 11 shown above see the page that follows 2 5 Entry Monitor 2 31 2 5 1 Information displayed on the Entry Monitor screen and key functions OVERVIEW NO LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR oc O E Z O Lu E L gt nw MELSEC A LIST EDITOR NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 2 32 2 The following table describes the key functions displayed on the Entry Monitor screen Key switch Function Activates the Quick test operation Section 2 4 5 Quick test operation of monitor devices Switches the screen to the functional change menu screen to activate another monitor function or terminate the system monitor function L 3 Section 2 4 6 Changing screens Switches the screen to the display format switching screen to change the value display format DEC HEX on the Entry Monitor screen or comment no comment display Section 2 4 4
118. Module Monitor Screens 6 5 13 AD70 module monitoring 6 5 14 AD7OD module monitoring Buffer memory address Screen example No Posit Start Forward Start 3 Reverse Start Y14 Fwd Jog Start 15 Rev Jog Start 16 Vel Pos Restar x05 Posit Complete Feed Position Actual Position Error Counter os Address P1 x02 Zero Rtn Request Pos Address P2 10 Zero Rtn Start x03 Zero Rtn Comple YI Stop X04 BUSY X06 In position Y1B Servo OFF 1C VZP Switchover x00 WDT Error x08 Error Detection X06 In postion Servo OFF Y1C V P Switchover x00 WDT Error x08 Error Detection Pos Velocity Y os Velocity V2 os Pattern LP Mode Feed Position Actual Position Error Counter Creep Ve loc i ty7 Zero Rtn Dist Near Zero Dist Near Zero Set VZP Mode 10 Torque Control Mode 0 Pos 1 4 0 Pos 1 Ve Present Value Travel Dist Velocity Jog Velocity Torque Limit LS s Motor Speed S Swi tech Present Value Travel Dist Jog Velocity Tor que Limit Motor Speed Motor Current Max Torque Test Mode 8765432 1 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens to HE 104 105 61 62 65 66 l 003C 0077 120 0078 121 0079 122 007A 86 87 19 ga 0059 006E 006F 112 0070 113 0071 125 007D ETA E E 30 31 32 33 106 107 120 121 123 80 81 86 87 3 009 a 111 006F 112 0070 113 0071 007D 007E 6 45 6 5 14 AD7OD
119. N Buffer memory address 0 Ring Counter Va lue Pulse P Mode A Phase P and ase and B Phase Pal EC IC AC 0008 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 5 18 A1SD61 module monitoring 0004 6 55 LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR OVERVIEW SYSTEM MONITOR MELSEC A LIST EDITOR O UU gt Q G E uu 9 y JJ ul Z oc O E Z le NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 6 5 19 A1S64AD module monitoring 6 56 A1S64AD Operation Monitor Screen RESET Che A1S644D Input Output Monitor Screen RESET Che Input Channe Channel 2 Channel 3 Channe Screen example SET S T Setting O 1 1 4000 2 1 8000 3 1 1 END 2000 SET acai sl 1 2 Error Reset 3 Resolution Setting 0 Error WDT Error 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 5 19 A1S64AD module monitoring END Me ec A 0 a zws oos Sr ek T an 6 5 20 A1S62DA module monitoring Channel No Analog Output Enable Disable Screen example Channel 2 Digital Channe ie 2 Digital I F 21 0000011010100100 WDT Error Flag D A Conversion READY Error Flag Y Output Channel 1 0 lf 4000 8000 1 12000 Channel 2 U 17 40 AE AO CH1 Check Code CH2 D A Output Enable Fla CH1 D A Output Enable Flag Error Reset AC Output Channel 1 0 1 4000 CH2 Check Code Resolution Se 6 5 Intelligen
120. NAME MAIN Hassi T PY 2 Py A Py 5 PY G PY 7 PY 3 Pu MIES EL ORM ChNo 1 NetNo ST FF CPUNO 0 Bi Touch KEY WORD Keyword Release screen f 0 l lt O Enter the password entered in the sequence program KEY WOR at 1 ie O E MANOS I SIS BO J I A 0j AG Del Enter s described below When a password is entered in the sequence program KEY WORD ERR will be displayed key Touch this key to enter alphabetic characters A to Z uppercase x key Touch this key to enter alphabetic characters a to z lowercase x key Touch this key to enter numbers 1 to 9 e key Use this key to delete an entered character key Use this key to delete all characters under the cursor Entry is completed by touching the key and the keyboard closes 2 7 TC Monitor Monitoring Timers and Counters 2 45 2 7 3 Procedure for canceling TC monitor keywords OVERVIEW N LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR oc O E Z O Lu E L gt nw MELSEC A LIST EDITOR NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 2 8 BM Monitor Monitoring Buffer Memory The BM monitor buffer memory monitor is a function to monitor the buffer memory of special function modules This section describes how to operate the BM monitor when the system monitor function is executed 2 8 1 Information displayed on the BM Monitor screen and key functions 1 The
121. O Function selection menu screen UU LC O kE E gt X O Diagnostics O lt x Q O zZ O 1 Setup iii a Selects the servo amplifier type to monitor the station number setting station number selection and lt 9 4 2 the IFU station number 2 MONINO 2 068 ese oa Displays all monitor data of the servo amplifier in real time O Z lt 3 9 4 3 O T IAM earrannan Displays the alarm that is currently occurring and the history Also resets the alarm and clears the S gt 9 4 4 history 4 Diagnostics Performs the following various diagnostics on the connected servo amplifier lt gt 9 4 5 DI DO display Displays the ON OFF status of the external I O signals 25 O Function device display Displays the ON OFF status of the l O function devices UU Amplifier information display Displays the model name ID and encoder resolution of the servo a motor connected to the servo amplifier ABS data display Displays the absolute position data of the absolute position detection system Unit composition list display Displays a list of servo amplifier unit composition 5 Parameters Displays the parameter data and changes the parameter settings E x lt gt gt 9 4 6 O JA a gaa Performs various test operations JOG operation positioning operation motor less operation and lt gt 9 4 7 DO forced output 9 4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens 9 15 9 4 1 Servo amplifier monito
122. PJ Manuals describing how to connect an option function board GOT Reference manual GT16 GT16 User s Manual GT15 GT15 User s Manual GT11 GT11 User s Manual S Manuals describing how to install each OS OS Reference manual Extended function OS GT Designer 2 Version O Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual Option OS 1 1 Before Using Each Function 1 1 1 Each function and related manuals LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR L gt Ec m gt O SYSTEM MONITOR MELSEC A LIST EDITOR NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 1 1 2 Hardware and OS required for each function To use each function extended function OS or option OS and option function board is required For installing the extended function OS or option OS on the GOT make sure that the user area of the specified drive has enough free space for the OS memory space shown on the next page For details of data transfer refer to the following K gt GT Designer 2 Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual Subsection 8 1 2 Drive capacity required for data transfer The following shows the option function boards applicable to each GOT GOT Option function board GT16 GT16 MESB GT15 GT15 FNB GT15 QFNB GT15 QFNB16M GT15 QFNB32M GT15 QFNB48M GT15 MESB48M GT11 GT11 50FNB GT10 Not required An option function board GT15 FNB or GT11 50FNB is built in the following GOTs GT15 All models GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155
123. PTE CAUSA oc ULA 7 7 S SPECIFICATIONS e e ee 7 3 System CONfIQgUratiON ooccccooccnccccnnccconnccononcnnncnnnnas 7 3 Q MOTION MONITOR A ACCESS MANI sonnera va 8 5 D DISDIAY aimara 8 6 E Error List Designated Axis Screen eee 8 15 EGLO LIST GGG DT aaa aaa aaah aN a Tant 8 13 Error Messages and Corrective Action 8 26 H Hard COPY OUtpDUt occccconccncccccccnnccnoncnnconnnonnnnnanennnnnos 8 25 M Monitor Menu screen sse eee eee ee eee ee eee eee 8 10 0 Operation Procedures sirsenis 8 9 P Parameter setting screen eee ee ee ee 8 22 Positioning Monitor Screen see ee eee eee 8 17 PICCAULONS ica 8 5 Present Value History Monitor screen 8 20 Present Value Monitor Screen eee ee e ee 8 11 S Servo Monitor screen eee ee e 8 19 SFC Error History SCreen orici reirte ona 8 12 SPECIFICATIONS eee ee e ee 8 3 System CONTIQUIATION iii 8 3 System configuration screen layout oo coo 8 9 Index 5 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR CNC MONITOR FUNCTION BACKUP RESTORE CNC DATA I O SFC MONITOR 0 U O G Z T o o lt SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR A ACCESS TAMOS ia is 9 11 ANUNCIO s25cehsceacscue thes aera ace eee tacentenetens 9 19 D Diagnostics function sia 9 22 LIS DAY a a a a teoat dhs 9 12 E Error Messages and Corrective Action 9 44 H Hard copy OUIDUL esse 9 43 M Monitor fUNnCtIONS ss ee id 9 17 0 Operations o
124. Piped R HID copes T RIKER LS Big ee RATIS SK e E Somana Cmmi Wes sr SEE MEM Sonning ange EErEE my 2 1 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 5 35 QD75M module monitoring Z O U m O 1530 to 1531 1630 to 1631 1730 to 1731 1830 to 1831 817 917 1017 1117 817 917 1017 1117 1532 1632 1732 1832 1506 to 1507 1606 to 1607 1706 to 1707 1806 to 1807 1514 to 1515 1614 to 1615 1714 to 1715 1814 to 1815 1513 1613 1713 1813 1544 1644 1744 1844 1545 1645 1745 1845 1546 1646 1746 1846 1547 1647 1747 1847 1505 1605 1705 1805 Buffer memory address HEX 05FA to 05FB 065E to 065F 06C2 to 06C3 0726 to 0727 0331 0395 03F9 045D 0331 0395 03F9 045D 05FC 0660 06C4 0728 05E2 to 05E3 0646 to 0647 O6AA to 06AB 070E to 070F O5EA to 05EB 064E to 064F 06B2 to 06B3 0716 to 0717 05E9 064D 06B1 0715 0608 066C 06DO 0734 0609 066D 06D1 0735 060A O66E 06D2 0736 060B 066F 06D3 0737 05E1 0645 06A9 070D Buffer eae address Screen example 1600 0640 QD75M Axis control data 2 ME 1700 1800 06A4 0708 lla a ey 2 1501 1601 O5DD 0641 gle I lee AAA 1701 1801 06A5 0709 i Fs eles AN JUG oo a vendes IEC 3 1502 1602 O5DE 0642 Pa in oC 1702 1802 O6A6 070A acuer y ie Sted 1 BReguest oe 1503 1603 O5DF 0643 O Completed Redes iae UEP esida Era quese 1703 1803 06A7 070B E paa AR ET
125. RESTORE The read parameter values within the servo amplifier are displayed on the screen CNC DATA I O mn OMA AAFP QM Oo Function selection 1 ae ea Parameters that cannot be written or read are Com pulse multiply denom x In position range not displayed on the parameter setting screen Position control gain 1 Pos com acc dec time cons Internal speed command 1 Internal speed command 2 Internal speed command 3 Acceleration time constant Deceleration time constant S pattern acc dec time cons SFC MONITOR Pr it TEETH QO Select the item whose parameter is to be set with eru ea rl the A or 9 key and touch the key Com pulse multiply numer Com pulse multiply denom In position range Position control gain 1 Pos com acc dec time cons Internal speed command 1 Internal speed command 2 mn OMA AMNFWhM oo IAPPENDICES Internal speed command 3 Acceleration time constant Deceleration time constant S pattern ace dec time cons NDEX To next page 9 4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens 9 33 9 4 6 Parameter setting From previous page A ooo As the parameter setting window appears enter Auto tuni i s setting field gt MING 0001 042 PV 010F Seetting the parameter setting with alohanumeric keys TBA ers and touch to confirm the setting 41516 0 DL ale To cancel the parameter setting operation touch MATARA to
126. Set Continued on the next page 8 6 8 3 Display From preceding page Parameter setting 7 E Lu Monitor menu screen appears 5 Has the motion parameter changing password been registered oc 5 2 Enter the parameter changing password 2 7 7 gt ep Select the menu item a E The monitor screen of the selected 6 E function appears O LU e 22 Perform operation for the selected S monitor function LC Present Value Mon f lt 8 4 3 E a SFC Error History lt 8 4 4 Select the servo parameter to be set K7 8 4 10 z Eror List h 8 4 7 UU ep Error List Axis 237 8 4 6 m Positioning Monitor 137 8 4 7 Change the servo parameter setting ss 17 8 4 10 Servo Monitor h 8 4 8 7 Write the new servo parameter setting ee L 6410 Present Value Hist C 8 4 9 D it O Point 7 1 How to display the utility SS For how to display the utility refer to the following K gt GT16 User s manual 8 3 Utility Display O GT15 User s manual 9 3 Utility Display z or 2 Displaying communication setting window 02 After turning on the GOT the communication setting window is displayed at the Sis first startup of the Q motion monitor only For displaying the communication setting window at the second or later startup O l l touch the button on the Q motion monitor screen lt s 8 4 Operation Z gt Procedures Z O l 3 If the project data has not been
127. Supporting connection to Universal model QCPU Communication driver l 2 63R x X Supporting connection to Q17nDCPU MELSECNET H 03 07 Supporting connection to CNC C70 Continued to next page App 7 GT11 GT Soft GOT1000 Bus Serial Version of GT Item Description GT Version of OS Designer2 l Communication driver Supporting connection to CRnQ 700 2 73B MELSECNET H 03 09 Supporting connection to Q13UDHCPU gt 77F Communication driver and Q26UDHCPU l MELSECNET H 03 12 MEL ee Supporting connection to QO2PHCPU and connection QO6PHCPU to PLC network 2 82L X x Supporting connection to QO3UDECPU Q04UDEHCPU QO6UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU and Q26UDEHCPU Communication driver MELSECNET H 03 13 Supporting connection to QS001CPU Communication driver Supporting connection to CC Link IE 2 77F CC Link IE Controller controller network Network 03 12 CC Link IE Supporting connection to QO2PHCPU and controller network Q06PHCPU connection Supporting connection to QO3UDECPU S OMMUNCANON ative Q04UDEHCPU QOBUDEHCPU 2 82L CC Link IE Controller Q13UDEHCPU and Q26UDEHCPU Network 03 13 Supporting connection to QS001CPU S Supporting connection to CC Link Intelligence device station Communication driver 2 09K 7 x x Supporting connection to Q172HCPU CC LINK ID 01 02 Q173HCPU X X o o EN e L Lanni l Supporting connection to CC Link Ver 2 2 32
128. Switches to the CPU RUN status monitor for other stations 7 5 CPU RUN U gt 7 4 8 Other station CPU RUN status monitor UU Switches to the loop status monitor for other stations O 6 Loop U gt 7 4 9 Other station loop status monitor z on 1 This cannot be selected when a MELSECNET II local station is selected using the line monitor a E 2 This cannot be selected when a MELSECNET II master station or local station is selected using the line monitor 59 3 This cannot be selected when a remote I O station is selected using the line monitor 4 The other station loop status monitor is not available in the following conditions 1 When a local station on the MELSECNET II network system is selected using the line monitor When a MELSECNET network system with coaxial cables is used When a station on the CC Link IE controller network is selected using the line monitor 2 Key functions The table below shows the function of keys to be used for the other station monitor operations ec O Z G x GC GO LI zZ Key Function Switches to each monitor for other stations Returns to the line monitor EN Exits the other station monitor screen and returns to the screen where the network monitor function was started Q MOTION MONITOR 7 4 Operation Procedures 7 23 7 4 3 Other station monitor 7 4 4 Other station communication status monitor This section describes the screen configuration of the ot
129. Switching the display format DEC HEX and comment no comment display Switches the screen to the Device entry screen to enter monitor devices or delete or test entry devices Entering monitor devices Section 2 4 2 Entering monitor devices specifying monitor stations and devices Deleting entry devices gt Section 2 5 3 Deleting entry devices Test operation Section 2 9 Test Operation Scroll displayed information upward or downward by a line to display the preceding or next monitor device that is not currently displayed When five or more monitor devices are entered these switches are available when their comments are displayed A Scrolls information upward by a line Y Scrolls information downward by a line 2 5 Entry Monitor 2 5 1 Information displayed on the Entry Monitor screen and key functions 3 The following table below describes the range of display of items 1 to 11 displayed Description of setting A MELSECNET H CC Link No Item Bus S G Ethernet connection connection in connection connection MELSECNET 10 connection connection ID G4 2 connection 1 Channel No Sets the channel number of the controller targeted to the entry monitor 0 Host loop 2 Network No 1 to 239 1 to 255 Specified 0 loop FF When the host FF When the station is host station is selected selected 0 When the control 0 When the 3 Station No FF 1 to 64 station is master station selected is se
130. Switching valid keys upper lower functions LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR oc O E m Li E 9 mr q 6 Ll 104 I H OVERVIEW SYSTEM MONITOR NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 4 45 Command input procedures Command input procedures can be classified as follows 1 Input the command key to use the command on the key 2 Input the alphanumeric keys corresponding to each character of command sequentially 3 Select and input the command to be used from the Help function Command input procedures for 1 and 2 above are as follows For command input procedure 3 from the Help function refer to Section 4 4 5 Command input procedures Point P When the command is input the input details are displayed at the 4th line the bottom line on the display In the following description the input of key may be omitted when a blank space between the input command and the cursor position is automatically inserted Refer to the example in each description 1 For command code only a When the command available on the keyboard is input Command GO Ex When END is input b When the command not available on the keyboard is input Ex When FOR K5 is input 4 16 4 4 Operation Methods 4 4 5 Command input procedures For command code and device 1 2
131. System monitor System monitor Not required lt E OKB kE 09 A list editor List editor for MELSEC A O d FX list editor 2 List editor for MELSEC FX O 1 Inapplicable to the GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ and GT1150 QLBDQ ES 2 Inapplicable to the GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDQ GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDO and GT1150 QLBDA 5 O 5 For GT10 23 OS memor l Extended function OS l O Function name l capacity Option function board G Option OS name E user area D Bar code Not required E Not required S 09 Recipe Not required po Not required m FX list editor Not required NS Not required 1 Inapplicable to the GT1030 and GT1020 D S o Lu O z 35 JE W Z Ze am Z ZZ O SE LU O i Zz o E Z O Z O kE O O 1 1 Before Using Each Function 1 9 1 1 2 Hardware and OS required for each function 1 1 3 Outline of procedure to the operation of each function Before operating each function download the required Extended function OS or Option OS into the GOT according to the procedure shown below and connect required hardware to the GOT Mount the option function board or multi color display board As necessary When transferring data from PC to built in flash memory and starting GOT with built in flash memory Connect GOT and PC with a USB cable or RS 232 cable Transfer the OS and project data to be installed on the GOT from the PC to the GOT When transferring d
132. Target Stop Pos Corre Err SI FEDCBA98 76543210 OSI E Ene Op Mode 43210 Error Scaling BIN Pos OFF MAX ON OFF MAX ON OFF MAX ON OFF SYSTEM MONITOR O O O0 O 101 190 0 DRAMAS O 00 J O UN E Po c cO l JO ee z o b gt LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION Inputs X Outputs CY O WDT Error Online o rection Err P5 sition Error MELSEC A LIST EDITOR dd D 0 WM C H K i a X 28 P2 Disable O gt o e r ee ee ee ee e MA 0 U h OMS 0 00 Jl O O CG PO Ps 1 py TUN L 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Sy Rn Le la Gy 15 Status MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR O UU gt Q G E uu 9 y JJ ul Z oc O E Z le NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 41 6 5 11 A62LS module monitoring 6 5 12 AD61 module monitoring 6 42 Screen example Set Value Count Greater 10 0 O CH1 Equal Reset Count Equa i C Count L Ext Preset Cmd Equal O P Down Count L ount 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 5 12 AD61 module monitoring w e 0004 0005 0024 0025 0006 0007 0026 0027 6 5 13 AD7O module monitoring Buffer memory address Screen example No T E C H o EIH NET Y aa SES Travel Dist E 14 OVERVIEW Feed Position Present Value ice Actual Position Travel Dist sek E Error Counter Velocity k al
133. Test operation procedure Test operation takes place by setting on the setting key window screen the name and number of a device initial device number of the buffer memory and the initial I O of the module or entering change values This subsection takes a change of set values as an example to describe the test operation procedure ZS Touch the key on the test menu screen The setting key window screen appears OVERVIEW NO E Using the 4 and gt keys move the cursor to the item you want to set The keyboard displayed depends on the position of the cursor as shown below oc O E Z O Lu E L gt nw ka The position of the cursor displayed i DIST FF CPUNO 2 a IE SS Keyboard displayed when the cursor is placed in the device name box LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION LU E m x 7 Chio 1 NetNo ST FFICPUNo 0 DEVICET TICA IHI S 09 Keyboard displayed when the cursor is gt placed in the device number box D O ae gt a necessary enter numbers or characters on the keyboard gt e key Use the key to delete an entered character 2 e key Use the key to delete all characters under the cursor y e The a w and the keys on which nothing is displayed are not available e For further information about the setting ranges see the following zg gt Section 2 9 3 Information and set items displayed on each setting key window screen Entry is completed by
134. U O G Z T o in lt INDEX 13 7 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen 13 29 13 7 3 Menus 1 Device contact coil search window The GOT can search for devices in a SFC program a Displayed screen x E we 1 Devicel M L 1 AJBICIDIEJFI GIA 7 8J9 AJBJY JPA ASSIKJ LU U U E 4 5 6 C D Yal 0 TH VIH WIK YIZ A Dl Enter 1 2 3 EJF JA OJ TH Del Enter For alphabet input For numerical input The following table shows the displayed contents No Item Description 1 Device input area Set a device to be searched 2 K Keys for operations in the device contact coil search window shown in b Touch eys input b Key functions Function Deletes all the input values and characters Deletes an input value or character Switches the key type to the value Switches the key type to the alphabet Searches for the input device in the upward direction When multiple blocks are set the GOT searches for the device in descending order of the operation output transition condition sequence program corresponding to the step or transition condition with the device in the zoom window Del H Al block No al When the device is found without the MELSAP L program display mode the GOT displays an Search for the input device in the downward direction Ce When multiple blocks are set the GOT searches for the device in ascending order of the block No When the device is found witho
135. V_CHG ERR Info H 0000 PC Link COM ERR Bee a Motion CPU WDT ERR Min ERR O MAN PLS Axis ERR Each 1 Pulse Z IM Error 17 18 192021 2223 24 2526272829303132 or MAN PLS Ax ERR O Each MAN PLS SM ERR BIJE PC Link COM ERR C Test Mode Req UI TIE Motion CPU WDT ERR as Ww y O E m 1 Displays the axis number currently being monitored l S O 2 Out Module Displays the output module axis number currently being monitored m l 3 Displays the virtual axis number currently being monitored g 4 Displays the synchronous encoder axis number currently being monitored Displays the servo program numbers that were being executed when the error 5 Program No occurred Displays the error codes of the minor major servo error servo program setting D 6 Err Cod error real virtual switching error information error code hexadecimal fs rr Code personal computer link communication error code and motion CPU WDT error 7 5 kE that are currently occurring m a 7 Error Definition Displays the definitions of the errors that occurred Each 1 Pulse l l l l Displays the axes where a 1 pulse input magnification setting error occurred UU 1M Error gt Q l MAN PLS Ax Displays the errors of the axis numbers set to the manual pulse generators P1 2 8 MAN PLS Axis ERR z ERR to P3 z E t ee a Each MAN Displays the errors of the smoothing magnifications set to the manual pulse 2 PLS SMERR generators P1 to P3 ES 9 Test REQ ERR Displays the
136. _ gt Section 5 4 12 List monitor E 3 Z gt Displays the contents of errors that occur with the MELSEC FX list editor 3 Error message 5 5 Error Messages and Corrective Action o Displays the sequence program in list format 12 digits 5 4 List display area o l as oh The position line that can be edited is displayed with a bar Z 5 Displays the keys that can be used with the MELSEC FX list editor S O m Z L O E Z O gt zZ O kE O gt O 5 4 Operation Procedures 5 9 5 4 1 Key arrangement and a list of key functions Key functions The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operation on the MELSEC FX list editor screen Key Chio 1 Function Displays the communication setting window The communication setting window is not displayed if the MELSEC FX list editor is started from the ladder monitor Selects a mode for MELSEC FX list editor 2_77 5 4 2 Selection and operation of modes Displays the PLC diagnostics parameter setting and keyword selection menu Switches between command keyboard 1 and command keyboard 2 C Keyboard switching in this section When inputting commands Cancels the key input when only part of the command has been input gt Section 5 4 14 Action for an incorrect key input When option menu is displayed Closes the option menu Commands cannot be deleted with this key lt gt 5 4 7 Deleting commands Space key T
137. a new value corresponding to the percentage in decimal format Example When the set value of the offset or gain is 0 to 2000 and you intend to change it to 50 input 1000 3 For data where 16 bits are displayed with 0 or 1 for each bit specify a new value with changing the data to a decimal x 6 26 6 4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen 6 4 7 Testing of the intelligent function module 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 5 1 A62DA S1 module monitoring Lu gt Ar LU gt O Buffer memory address andi i O A O EX 2to 5 0002 to 0005 E O Ooo Channel 1 Output Voltage check Channel 2 Output milla chec L Current check 2 E op gt aaa op Inputs xX DO WOT Error 10 d READY IN 12 13 14 15 oc 16 O 17 E gt Z 18 O 19 A 1A A xO 1B 3 Output Enable m 5 1c az 1D lt 12 T 1 C IS LC O Q LU 7 Une der Ov fer S 0 OF 15 UL Channel 1 Channel 2 WDT Error n 3 x lt T O C LU AE LU Si O UU gt Q G E uu 9 y JJ ul Z oc O E Z le NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 27 6 5 1 A62DA S1 module monitoring 6 5 2 A68AD module monitoring Buffer memory address 0001 Samp le A a Saeko come El 10 to 17 000A to 0011 Screen example Count Time Input Status Ee Va lue No of Channels Used 4 Writing Data Error 00 Popup ne C Shanne
138. about hard copies refer to the following Sereen 37 8 4 11 Hard copy output a E Z Cancel The touch operation of this key is invalid eS Pr itt e ao az iT LC O E Q UU kE E O UU 2 ULU gt kE Y x lt G O C ne 2 Q O gt kE im oc 22 m Z ZS oc O Z O SE LC O kE LULU Z 00 oc O E Z O Z O E O O 8 4 Operation Procedures 8 21 8 4 9 Present Value History Monitor screen 8 4 10 Parameter setting screen You can set the servo parameters basic parameters adjustment parameters of the connected motion controller CPU This section describes the display data of the parameter setting screen and the key functions displayed on the screen Displayed screen Param Setting AxNo 1 Sit NS Auto Gain Adjustment Manual Mode2 SY Response Setting 1 Load Inertia Ratio 7 0 To Motor Position Ctrl Gain1 70 rad sec Speed Ctrl Gain1 1200 rad sec Position Ctrl Gain2 25 rad sec Speed Ctr1 Gain2 600 rad sec Speed Integral Comp 20 rad sec Notch Fi Iter Not Used Feed Forward Gain 0 Print Cancel Screen Pr tit Key functions The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used with the operation on the parameter setting screen Key Function Changes the servo parameter setting of the selected item Selects the servo parameter setting item Changes the axis whose parameter setting will be made Returns to the System Configuration scre
139. above error history is available Mode is displayed other mode Error history number is displayed history control No of ACPU Error step number is displayed Error message is displayed Error code is displayed Error detail code is displayed Second minute hour date month and year of the error are displayed Displayed if other error history is available Point 7 When an error message of the PLC CPU appears refer to the ACPU programming pnn manual Common Command and the user s manual for each CPU for corrective actions 4 36 4 7 Error Messages and Corrective Actions 4 7 2 PLC CPU error messages and troubleshooting 4 7 3 Error using list editor function on the link system When the MELSEC A list editor is used on the link system the PLC communication error may appear In this case check the error details and the corrective actions Error No Error message Corrective action 2 Time out error No response to the request Check the cable wiring Process cancel 4 New process request was given to the list editor function while Perform correct key operations on the GOT the CPU is processing The EEPROM cannot be written due to EEPROM failure E Sum check error There may be noise interference A sum check error from the link communication has occurred Check the system again a PLC No error Check the PLC number setting There is no station corresponding to the PLC number Set the correct n
140. automatically Option OS Ladder monitor for MELSEC Q QnA 03 09 2 73B reflect the set value of TC changed in the test function Option OS Ladder monitor for MELSEC Q QnA 03 12 Supporting connection to CC Link IE 2775 controller network l Supporting the safety function block display when using the QS001CPU Only the FB definition name is displayed in the Option OS Ladder monitor for MELSEC Q QnA 03 13 2 82L application instruction format Option OS Ladder monitor for MELSEC Q QnA 03 13 The ranges of M and B devices that can 2 82L be monitored are expanded M M J U Continued to next page App 28 Q nae Version of GT ltem Description Version of OS Designer2 GT GT Soft T 15 GOT1000 11 o Function to monitor and change the data if te 9 Option OS of intelligent function module buffer 2 18U x x g l Intelligent module monitor 02 02 S memory using a dedicated screen O 2 Z l Supporting connection to CC Link IE Option OS i Q Intelligent module 2 77F x x controller network Intelligent module monitor 03 12 monitor function When using the QS001CPU the PC information monitor screen Operation gar Option OS details screen Error details screen is l Intelligent module monitor 03 13 E displayed 2 26 List editor for Function for displaying editing sequence 00 Option OS E MELSEC A program saved from ACPU with list mode l Li
141. axis numbers that are being started at a test mode request oc O Z O SE LC O kE LULU Z 00 oc O E Z O Z O E O O 8 4 Operation Procedures 8 4 6 Error List Designated Axis screen Key functions The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operation of the Error List Designated Axis screen Ke Function lt Only in the real mode SS OPP Only in the virtual mode Switches the axes to be monitored Display example When axis 1 is monitored Returns to the previous screen Returns to the monitor menu screen Exits the Error List Designated Axis monitor screen and returns to the screen where the Q motion monitor was started Stores the displayed screen to the memory card in BMP JPEG file format or prints it with a printer For further information about hard copies refer to the following 8 4 11 Hard copy output The touch operation of this key is invalid 8 16 8 4 Operation Procedures 8 4 6 Error List Designated Axis screen 8 4 7 Positioning Monitor screen This section describes the display data of the Positioning Monitor screen and the key functions displayed on the screen S Lu Displayed O S Displayed contents O In real mode In virtual mode TA ine Positioning Monitor Real BOS LIGNITE Honiton O 1 MON Val Status CMD Signal MON Val Status CMD Signal Z Feed PY O PLS DUS StartCompletion Stop Command Speed Li
142. be used for reading the comment file in Q QnA ladder monitor of the utility or GOT Setup of GT Designer2 GT16 User s Manual 11 2 1 Q QnA Ladder Monitor GT15 User s Manual 11 7 Q QnA Ladder Monitor GT Desinger2 Version O Screen Design Manual Setting of GOT Display and Operations GOT Continued to next page Setup For reading comment files from CF cards refer to the following Subsection 3 3 5 Reading comment files from CF cards Point Multiple ladder data storable Multiple sequence and comment programs can be read For the PLC read setting refer to the following manuals 77 GT16 User s Manual GT15 User s Manual GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual 3 28 3 3 Display 3 3 3 Display From previous page When no password is entered in the target controller in the target controller Time Title COMMENT COMM MAIN COMM ON Program Password i MAIN E n a SEE Exit Ladder Break PLCRD Sea ee S T A243 E O JAG Del Enter CHNo 1 NETWK No O ST FF CPUNo 0 Program Memory 4 2007 04 03 16 49 M4 2752 2007 04 03 14 55 Ex MAIN COMM MAINI PROG L Pagel Exit Ladder Break PLCRD SetUp Drive SEIS READ Pa gel Select Cancel CFCnmnt List aly All Read Continued to next page When a password is entered E Enter the password entered in the target controller In the case of the QCPU a password is entered in the sequence and
143. been reached operation stops Touching the key pauses the operation If touch the key again after the operation is paused the remaining distance is erased NDEX 9 4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens 9 39 9 4 7 Test operations 3 Key functions The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations of the positioning operation screen Key N N 1 sajili Function Runs the servo motor in the forward rotation CCW direction Runs the servo motor in the reverse rotation CW direction Stops the rotation of the servo motor temporarily Resumes the rotation of the paused servo motor Deletes the remaining distance of the paused servo motor Changes the rotation speed of the servo motor Changes the acceleration deceleration time constant Changes the distance Changes to the JOG operation screen 3 This section EJ Changes to the motor less operation screen lt _ gt This section EJ Changes to the DO forced output screen This section EJ Returns to the function selection menu screen Exits the servo amplifier monitor Stores the displayed screen to the memory card in BMP JPEG file format or prints it with a printer For further information about hard copies refer to the following lt 7 9 4 8 Hard copy output The touch operation of this key is invalid 1 This is displayed only when the MR J2 Super series or MR J2
144. can be monitored When connected to a remote I O station on the MELSECNET H network system the remote I O station on the MELSECNET H network system is displayed as QCPU in the system configuration display of the intelligent module monitor A diagnosis of the remote I O station on the MELSECNET H network system is not performed Intelligent function modules on the base of remote I O stations other than those on the MELSECNET H network system are not monitored When using MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 or CC Link IE controller network connection e The intelligent module monitor can monitor intelligent function modules on the bases of the control station and normal stations e To monitor another network routing parameters have to be set to the GOT side and PLC side Only with the MELSECNET H communication unit or CC Link IE controller network communication unit For routing paramater setting refer to the following manuals Routing parameter setting for the GOT GOT1000 Series Connection Manual 6 2 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring Routing parameter setting for PLC CPU For MELSECNET H communication unit Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual PLC to PLC network For CC Link IE controller network communication unit 2 CC Link IE Controller Network Reference Manual When using CC Link connection Intelligent device station via G4 e The intelligent module monitor can monitor intelligent function mo
145. clear PLC diagnostics RUN STOP Display Set A x only RUN Keyword STOP 5 2 Specifications 5 2 1 System configuration Reference Section 5 4 3 Section 5 4 4 Section 5 4 5 Section 5 4 6 Section 5 4 5 Section 5 4 7 Section 5 4 8 Section 5 4 9 Section 5 4 10 Section 5 4 11 1 The operation is available only when the protect switch is OFF 2 The available memory differs depending on the FX PLC being used For further information see the following manual 77 The hardware manual of the FX PLC being used 5 2 2 Access range The access range is the same as the access range when the GOT is connected to a controller Refer to the following manual for details of the access range lt gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 2 7 Controllers that can be monitored and the Access Range 5 2 3 Precautions 1 2 GOT to be used The FX list editor function cannot be used with the GT1030 and GT1020 Using other peripheral equipment for sequence program parameter change When using the MELSEC FX list editor do not change programs or parameters in the PLC CPU from other peripheral equipment If you make a change temporarily exit the MELSEC FX list editor after the change is made then start the MELSEC FX list editor again If you carelessly change the program on one PLC from multiple units of peripheral equipment including GOT the contents of the program in the PLC CPU and the peripheral equi
146. close the parameter setting window O a Enter JR A The parameter setting is changed on the parameter setting screen Select the changed parameter item and touch the key If there are multiple parameter items with 0 Cntl mode reg brake select 1 Function selection 1 Auto tuning i Al cer changed settings touch the Write All key to 4 Com pulse multiply denom 3 s S a 5 Imposition range 10 puls write all parameter items with changed settings 7 ina E cons i 8 Internal speed command 1 i S nternal speed command 2 i E ree mi A confirmation window appears Acceleration time constant De leraro ed Touch the key to write the parameter xiCycle amplifier power to initiate changes setting s to the Servo amplifier To cancel writing of the parameter setting s touch Cancel key This completes the writing operation of the parameter setting OK to write parameter Execute Point 1 The changes to the parameter setting are written to the E2PROM of the servo amplifier Consequently the written parameter setting is retained even if the power of the amplifier is off 2 If the following parameter settings are changed on the servo amplifier be sure to also change the settings on the GOT setup screen C 39 4 2 in the same way If the settings on the setup screen and the servo amplifier do not match normal communications with the servo amplifier may not be performed
147. comment files When entering passwords for multiple files When reading multiple files with passwords set enter passwords for respective programs Canceling an entry cancels the reading of the file Point key key Lowercase alphabetic characters The data entered can be corrected with the following keys Uppercase alphabetic characters key Used to delete a character of the entered infor mation key Used to delete all characters entered The sequence program is read e The message READING PROGRAM is displayed e The entire size of the program and the portion already read are displayed Portion already read entire program size e The reading of the PLC stops by touching the key E After sequence programs are read the message OPERATION COMPLETE is displayed 3 3 Display 3 3 3 Display 3 29 OVERVIEW SYSTEM MONITOR O oc O E Z le oc T Q G lt l Z O H O Z LL MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR MELSEC A LIST EDITOR NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR From previous page CHNo 1 NETWK No O ST FF CPUNo 0 READ SELECTION Program Menory Name Type Size Time Title MAIN COMM 314 2007 04 03 16 49 MAINI PROG 55 MAIN PROG 80 353 MAIN PROG Exit Ladd r Brea ME MM Z SEL SelectiCancel Delete 1 PAGET PAGE S VAI PATA E j j l Name Type Title AINI PROG Production
148. contents Displays the parameter status by station number 1 The station numbers displayed do not indicate the number of station numbers in the network rather the maximum number of communication stations 2 Any station whose parameters are monitored is highlighted 3 Any station in an abnormal condition is highlighted 4 Reserved stations are displayed as normal stations 1 Only Parameter Err Sta is displayed when connecting to a MELSECNET II master station 2 Key functions The table below shows the function of keys that are used for the operations of the other station parameter status monitor Key Function Returns to the other station monitor Exits the other station parameter status monitor screen and returns to the screen where the network monitor was started VO Switches the screen display of stations 1 to 80 stations 81 to 120 stations 7 26 7 4 Operation Procedures 7 4 6 Other station parameter status monitor 7 4 7 Other station CPU operation status monitor This section describes the screen configuration of the other station CPU operation status monitor and the function of on screen keys z This screen cannot be displayed for a remote l O network system gt Lu gt 1 Displayed contents S 2 LC O Z O Lu kE 09 gt ep oc O E A S lt rO No Display contents 2 Displays the CPU operation status by station number OK ERR 1 The station number displa
149. data storage to the GD device is Clock function 2 73B Standard monitor OS 01 07 O possible Numerical Display Format String setting is possible 2a TE Standard monitor OS 01 08 O Numerical input Continued to next page App 32 Version of GT Item Description Version of OS Designer2 GT GT 1050 1030 1020 o U ASCII input The ASCII input can be set ASCII The ASCII input can be set can be set 2 MES Standard monitor OS Standard monitor OS 01 03 03 O Ze Comment 09 The simple comment is added 2 77F Standard monitor OS 01 08 O Display me nS Lamp Display Comment Comment Group can be used can Comment Group can be used used 2 NES Standard monitor OS 01 08 monitor OS Standard monitor OS 01 08 08 O Auto repeat can be used 2 Standard monitor OS 01 07 Hs O Comment Group can be used 2 77F Standard monitor OS 01 08 O h switch O KOHE SiG The device monitor and debug function can be E set for the action setting of the special function 2 82L Standard monitor OS 01 09 O 2 S switch and the multi action switch 25 O lL The statistics bar graph can be set 2 58L Standard monitor OS 01 03 pe fe O Graph The statistics pie graph can be set 2 58L Standard monitor OS 01 03 INS O Enables selecting whether to set the scrolling S Alarm history comment display suitable for the message 2 63R Standard monitor OS 01 06
150. device current values use the advanced recipe function For how to use the advanced recipe function refer to the following manual L gt GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual Section 12 3 Advanced Recipe Function For collecting data stored in device memories use GX Developer 2 Names of files to be backed up When characters other than the characters defined in the shift JIS code and ASCII code are used for file names the file names may not be correctly displayed with the data backed up on the GOT For using the backup restore function use characters in the JIS code and ASCII code for file names 3 Backing up data stored in file registers Because backing up data stored in file registers takes a long time some file register data may have different time stamps in one backup data Therefore synchronism of the data is not assured When file register data with the same time stamp are required take actions with the PLC system For example execute a sequence program that stops updating file registers and then back up data stored in the file registers 4 Editing CNC data The backed up CNC data includes machining programs parameters and others Those data are related one another Therefore when any of the data is changed with a text editor and others the GOT cannot restore the backed up CNC data to the CNC For editing CNC data use the CNC data lO function 12 CNC DATA I O 11 2 Specifications 11 7 11 2 1 Sys
151. devices to be monitored 2 5 in advance A A Monitoring the present value of n Batch monitor 2 6 devices from a specified device Monitoring the present value set TC monitor value contact point and coil of m 2 7 devices from a specified device Monitoring the present value of x devices in specified buffer memory of a specified special function unit block Setting Resetting bit devices Changing the present value of word devices and buffer memory Data ESS by test Changing the present value of 29 SIE TC possible during TC monitoring Changing the set value of TC possible during TC monitoring Changing device values by ck test 2 2 Display switching Displaying word device and buffer memory values in decimal or A A hexadecimal 1 The set value and coil of T C cannot be monitored 2 V Z and A cannot be monitored or their present values cannot be changed BM monitor 2 10 2 2 Specifications 2 2 1 System configuration Name Entry monitor Batch monitor TC monitor BM monitor Data change by test operation Quick test Display switching 5 When the GOT is connected to a remote I O station of MELSECNET H system O Available A Partly restricted x Unavailable Function Connection form between GOT and controller MELSECNET CC Link connection Link connection Direct CPU Computer link Ethernet H connection Bus connection i l MEE connection connection connection MEL
152. display position during the l l 2 82L Standard monitor OS 03 13 ASCII input can be set to Left or Right Standard monitor OS 04 02 Option OS Supporting the Kana kanji conversion 2 90U enhanced version KANA KANJI JPN Enhanced Version 04 02 Enables setting the TrueType Numerical Clock display 2 90U Standard monitor OS 04 02 for the font When Bit Trigger is not met whether to l Data List 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 enable Hold Display can be selected When Bit Trigger is not met whether to l E 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 Comment Display enable Hold Display can be selected The simple comment is added 2 77F Standard monitor OS 03 12 Advanced alarm Enables setting whether to enable or C 2 90U Standard monitor OS 04 02 O popup display disable the display position switching Standard monitor OS 02 04 O User alarm 8192 alarms When Bit Trigger is not met whether to l l 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O enable Hold Display can be selected Number of alarms settable for GT11 is extended to the same as GT15 Up to Standard monitor OS 02 04 O 3072 alarms Function to save alarm history data to the 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 O Alarm history A drive standard CF card for GT11 Function to display the cursor by touching Standard monitor OS 03 00 O X Number of alarms settable for GT11 is extended to the same as GT15 Up to
153. displayed on the current monitor screen S This section describes the operations for changing the current value of the buffer memory and turning on and S off the output signal from the PLC CPU to the intelligent function module gt Point f 1 Perform testing for the buffer memory that can be written from the PLC CPU and DS output signals that are output from the PLC CPU ce O 2 It is recommended that testing be performed with the PLC CPU in STOP status 3 If the PLC CPU is tested during RUN status the test monitor display returns to GF display values output from the sequence program and output statuses 2 Operation procedure Display monitor screen 7 09 lt im S gt MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR Data SET Chg RESET Touch y 6 UU gt Q G E uu 9 y JJ ul Z oc O E Z le NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 6 4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen 6 25 6 4 7 Testing of the intelligent function module When 2 is touched changes current value of buffer memory All of the following operations can be carried out by touching the keys in the displayed key window When you touch X at the upper left of the key window the key window o ii j E NTE MEEA closes and the display returns to the monitor screen 1 Move the cursor to the position where the data to be tested is displayed 1 A w Up down P 4
154. displaying transition condition sequence program The transition condition number and transition condition comment are displayed Displays an operation output transition condition sequence program Ladder program display Comments and notes are displayed in the zoom comment display mode U 13 7 3 Display menu 3 Keys Keys for operations in the zoom window shown in b Touch input area b Key functions Key Function A hd Scrolls the display area up and down by one line A 2 Scrolls the display area up and down by one page 13 7 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen 13 27 13 7 1 Displayed contents SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR CNC MONITOR FUNCTION BACKUP RESTORE de CNC DATA I O oc O E Z le O LL 7 APPENDICES INDEX 13 7 2 Key functions The following shows the functions of keys used for operating the SFC diagram monitor screen Key Back Device Test search Display honi toring Mode x aA y i y Function Returns the screen to the last screen that is displayed right before the SFC diagram monitor screen appears The key is disabled when the last screen is the GOT utility screen or user created monitor screen Sets the device test mode Touching the key in the device test mode cancels the device test mode 13 8 Test Operation Displays menus used for operations on the SFC diagram monitor screen 235 13 7 3 Search menu Displays menus used
155. driver Supporting connection to FX3G series 2 90U MELSEC FX 04 02 Supporting connection to Q172HCPU Sage Communication driver Q173HCPU l A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 01 02 l Communication driver Communication driver name has been ranae 2 43V A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 03 01 id AJ71QC24 MELDAS C6 03 01 baina DHS Supporting connection to Universal model connection QCPU 2 63R MELDASC6 03 07 X Communication driver A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 Supporting connection to Q17nDCPU Supporting connection to CNC C70 Supporting the redundant system with the MELDASC6 03 07 redundant type extension base unit O e LL Continued to next page App 6 Version of GT11 nae GT Soft ltem Description GT Version of OS oc GOT1000 Bus Serial m Designer2 Aa Communication driver cc Supporting connection to CRnQ 700 A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 X O gt 5 03 09 WS Communication driver 2 73B A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 Supporting settings for the number of 03 09 retries the timeout time and delay time AJ71QC24 MELDAS C 6 O er O 03 09 Ez Computer link AJ71C24 UC24 03 09 oF connection l O z Supporting connection to Q13UDHCPU Communication driver SP and Q26UDHCPU 2 77F A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 x O Supporting connection to QJ71CMON 03 12 Supporting connection to QO2PHCPU and m QO6PHCPU Communication driver S UU Supporting connection to QO3UDECPU 2 82L A QnA QCPU QU71024
156. dying servo WF 4 26 Min L present value charge was nade shi le the 13 35 1 200 corresponding axis was operating or ding servo OFF 4 26 Min reai value charge was nade ahi le the 13 42 1 300 corresponding axis was operating or ding servo OFF 4 26 CHG HMS turn OW fron OFF sen necta prog isn t registered 13 46 512 ax of sys settirg desn t match with ax No of out mode S 4 26 Min A present value charge ms nade whi le the SZ Bap i 300 corresponding axis ms operating or during servo WF e 2 MA 23 QO Z iT ET T sergen I Print LC 1 2 3 4 6 O a UU 1 M D H M The dates and time when errors occurred are displayed a S A UU The eight latest errors are displayed 3 The axis numbers and axis types of the axes where errors occurred are displayed 2 Ax Virtual axis Virtual Synchronous encoder axis Sync S E The servo program numbers that were being executed when the error occurred are displayed ff 3 SV P No An on The execution destination of the servo program in error is not displayed Using WG er 2S the servo program number refer to the execution destination wa Displays the types and error codes of the errors that occurred The error types are displayed as indicated below UU MINOC po aaaea sinago 3 Egan o Minor Q e MAOT Lo O ee o anane aAA Major 2 it CNV Cll Ole PO UU e Servo 5 ULU 4 Err Code Servo program Setting errOr see eee eee Servo P 2 O s y S a Real virtual switching
157. e No comment files are stored in the CF gt card O z USE BY OTHER MACHINE The sequence or comment is being used Perform file read again after completion of read write ate PLEASE CANCEL by the peripheral device GX Developer from to the peripheral device GX Developer 2 LU zZ l EO OS Onis OMIY ANI bytes S ine comment MENAR Reduce the comments to bring the size of the comment a were read since they read because its size is greater than 2M l file down below 2 Mbytes exceeded 2M bytes bytes Outside CPU reset device range The accessed special module is faulty or Check the system configuration cc special module illegal access does not exist E Zz When the storage location of ladder data is set to A 2 Standard CF Card or B Extended Memory Caral ON E a The access error to file has occurred check that the CF card is properly inserted Q i e Check if the CF card is properly inserted in the drive E Z set for reading comment files INSUFFICIENT SAVING DRIVE Capacity of free disk of saving destination Confirm the capacity of free disk of saving destination CAPACITY is insufficient increase the amount of free disk g O FILE ACCESS lt DO NOT PULL OUT EI accessed Do not turn off the power during message display 5 THE PLUG gt g l Wait until the message display goes out 2 Zz j O Continued to next page O 3 9 Error Messages and Corrective Action 3 73 Error message The sequence program has no END instruction T
158. fe ME TOO usaron Network No g 3 C ise Station No fes e CPU No Create a SEQCMNT folder in a CF card When the SEQCMNT folder already exists creating anew SEQCMNT folder is not required e In the SEQCMNT folder create folders for CH No network No station No and CPU No of the monitored controller with a hierarchy as shown left Item Folder name CH No CH Network No NET Station No ST CPU No CPU Assign numbers to marks When the CH No is 1 the folder name is CH01 When the monitor target is the host station the folder name is ST255 Continued to next page 13 3 Display Operation 13 13 13 3 3 Reading comment files from CF card SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR CNC MONITOR FUNCTION BACKUP RESTORE oO CNC DATA I O oc O E Z le O LL 7 APPENDICES INDEX 13 14 E fes 9 S T CPU No Po takeessoeaveaadiee For storing comments with a en ASCII code Tes KS ia For storing comments with g S code H T For storing comments with SJIS code File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Back 7 y Search j Folders ROL IO D Project01lResource Others Scan For Viruses Address File and Folder Tasks y Other Places y Send To K Create Shortcut File Tools Help Back i pa Search C Folders ROL Address C EASEQCMNTICHO1 METODO ST2551CPUOOASCII File and Folder Tasks Y E lt COMMENT we Other Places ER d Detai
159. files with SJIS code n Korean Comment files with KS code o Other than the above Comment files with ASCII code E 13 4 2 Setting display mode of SFC programs The display mode of SFC programs on the SFC diagram monitor screen can be set C 13 7 3 B Display menu O The MELSAP L program display mode is available regardless of the read SFC program format MELSAP3 E MELSAP L F In the MELSAP L program display mode operation output transition condition sequence programs are 6 displayed as when the GOT displays a SFC program with the MELSAP3 format 3 The following shows how the GOT displays sequence programs with and without the MELSAP L program display mode Item With MELSAP L program display mode Without MELSAP L program display mode l l a l The GOT displays a sequence program in the Displayed operation output transition The GOT displays a sequence program on oc O E Z le O LL 7 7 l zoom window by touching a step or transition condition sequence program the SFC diagram monitor screen 7 condition on the SFC diagram monitor screen 13 4 3 Setting zoom comment display mode Whether to display or hide comments and notes in the zoom window can be set 13 7 3 13 4 4 Switching display formats between decimal and hexadecimal numbers APPENDICES aj Monitoring Mode menu The display formats of word device values on the SFC diagram monitor screen can be switched between decimal and hexadecimal numbers
160. first searching is started to the next file and the result is displayed O Touching the searches consecutively Touching the button completes searching halfway Point Ladder display during consecutive TT search When displaying the ladder block in the next sequence file the previous search results are cleared 2 gt Section 3 6 3 Coil search 1 O FF O Program Memory Local device monitor not executed Print Cancel JUMP T f JUMP l Screen Print If the searched device is not found in all read programs the message DEVICE NOT FOUND appears and searching is completed After searching the program that has been read first is displayed on the ladder monitor screen 3 3 Display 3 33 3 3 4 Searching from the monitor screen OVERVIEW SYSTEM MONITOR O oc O E Z le oc T Q G lt l Z O H O Z LL MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR MELSEC A LIST EDITOR NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 2 When displaying searching result with Alarm List History The following explains the procedure from touching the Key Code Switch for user alarm display and performing coil search of sequence program to display of a ladder block Point f Program to be searched In Alarm List History coil search is performed to the sequence program that has been displayed on the ladder monitor last among the read sequence programs However when no ladder programs have not been disp
161. for operations on the SFC diagram monitor screen Displays menus used for operations on the SFC diagram monitor screen 3 13 7 3 E Monitoring Mode menu Exits the SFC monitor and returns the screen to the SFC monitor startup screen Scrolls the display area up and down by one line Scrolls the display area up and down by one page K i Scrolls the display area right and left by one column lt i al ps Scrolls the display area right and left by one page 13 28 13 7 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen 13 7 2 Key functions 13 7 3 Menus a LU The following shows operations for the menus displayed on the SFC diagram monitor screen L a 25 Search menu 25 UU O n Device Search Step No Search S 26 Transition No Search i O Be Condition Search Coll Search Step List S kE 1 Block List cr gt Device Search Displays the device contact coil search window This section MA Step No Search Displays the step No transition condition No search window This section 7 O Transition No Search Displays the step No transition condition No search window This section W 5 iti i i i i 9 Condition Search Displays the device contact coil search window This section Z Z Coll Search Displays the device contact coil search window This section 3 Step List Displays the step list window this section 3 S Block List Displays the block list screen 13 6 z 1S LL 104 0
162. forward loop 5 LoopBK Info Displays when the loopback is operating normally RLoop Back Station Indicates the station number of a station that executes the loopback along the reverse loop Displays when the loopback is operating normally of Loop Switching Indicates the cumulative number of times for which loops have been switched Parameter Setting Common Param Common Spec if Default Param Default Specif x Reserved Sta Indicates the availability of a reserved station Have None 6 TsSt Sta Communication Mode Indicates either Normal mode or Constant LS Transmission Mode _ Indicates either Normal Trans or Multiple Trans 2 Transmission Stat Indicates either Normal Trans or Multiple Trans 2 1 This is not displayed when the CPU type of the GOT connection target is ANNCPU or AnACPU 2 is displayed when coaxial bus connections are established 2 Key functions The table below shows the function of keys that are used on the detailed monitor Key Function RET Returns to the line monitor Exits the detailed monitor and returns to the screen where the network monitor function was ao executed 7 4 Operation Procedures 7 4 2 Detailed monitor Display contents and keys functions acting as a MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 remote master station This section describes the screen configuration of the detailed monitor and the function of on screen keys when the host a
163. gt dp MELSEC A LIST EDITOR NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 2 7 2 Procedure for TC monitor basic operation When no devices are entered Display example when devices are already entered Cho 1 NetNo G ST FF ICPUNO 0 MAIN OPE pole L J PRESS SET KEY SELECT TEM THEN ENTER DEVICE TYPE amp No cd L LILIA Re G HI EE A 26 So E If necessary perform Quick test operation If necessary switch the screen display Subsection 2 4 5 Quick test lt 3 Subsection 2 4 4 Switching operation of monitor devices the display format DEC HEX and comment no comment display If necessary perform the following Entering monitor devices Enter the initial device name and a device number you want to monitor lt gt Subsection 2 4 2 Entering monitor devices specifying monitor stations and devices Test operation lt gt Section 2 9 Test operation Canceling keywords lt L 3 Subsection 2 7 3 Procedure for canceling TC monitor keywords 2 44 2 7 TC Monitor Monitoring Timers and Counters 2 7 2 Procedure for TC monitor basic operation 2 7 3 Procedure for canceling TC monitor keywords When the target controller is a QCPU and a password is entered in the sequence program the keyword must be canceled to display the set values of timers and counters The procedure for canceling keywords TC HCNT TOR TES T ORM s Touch SET EJCPUNO ChNo 1 NetNe G ST FILE
164. in file registers frequently changes When Check the file register changes is set to Execute the GOT backs up data stored in the file cc registers every time the trigger condition is met even if the other setting data for the controller are lt not changed o As a result the number of backup data increases in the CF card When the number of backup data exceeds the maximum number of backup data old backup data are deleted For obtaining data stored in file registers only use the advanced recipe function For how to use the advanced recipe function refer to the following K gt GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual Section 12 3 Advanced Recipe Function APPENDICES 6 Backing up data when CNC and motion controller CPU are on one base unit When the CNC and or the motion controller CPU are on one base unit the GOT does not compare the previous backup data with current setting data for the controllers As a result the GOT executes the backup even if the setting data for the controllers have no changes For backing up setting data only when the data are changed set the trigger type to Rise Create a sequence program so that the trigger device turns on only when the setting data are changed Therefore the number of backup data can be minimized INDEX 11 3 Display Operation 11 23 11 3 4 Trigger backup 11 24 7 Screens that trigger backup can be executed The trigger backup can be executed only when the GOT display
165. information according to the operation log information stored in the QSCPU b Key functions Key Function Closes the monitoring and returns the screen to the one for starting the intelligent module monitor SES Returns the screen to the PC Information monitor screen 6 20 6 4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen 6 4 3 Composition of PC Information monitor screen and key functions 3 Error details screen a Displayed contents Lu gt LC Lu gt Display switch O LC O Z O Lu kE 09 gt l ep Example Error details screen for Example Displaying individual error safety CPU error information for safety remote I O station Item Description ES 1 Displays the channel number network number and station number of the monitored station O 2 Displays the keys that are used for the operation on the System Configuration screen shown in z ee N Displays the common error information and the individual error information according to the lt P information stored in SD4 and subsequent devices of the QSCPU For the common error information and the individual error information refer to the following z manual a 3 lt QSCPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals 2 op When the individual error information for the safety remote l O station is displayed the numerical notation of the displayed data can be switched between decimal and hex
166. input C Inputting in the order P D is also possible 2 When a command specifies multiple devices for operations input the key followed by the device name and device number Point f 1 Moving the cursor to the position to write the command O rs 2 i Z When starting to write a command place the cursor on the command line the line S l O on which the step number is displayed it l l G You cannot write a command with the cursor on any other line an Command line Place the cursor on this line pl O Operand set value line Cannot operate on this line Q D E M 1 Commands using a text string constant for a command operand such as ASC 2 command With the MELSEC FX list editor text string constants cannot be written as operands such as ASC commands Use GX Developer for writing such commands al 2 Example Input DMOVP DO D2 E V m gt a Oo LU 9p KE m gt Q O gt kE im oc 22 uz EO 1 zs Lo 2 P gt se Set the ChNo 1 lt READ gt WRITE or L INSERT O mode Z With 4 or move the gt cursor to the position to 5 overwrite insert the command B o 5 gt 2 2 Ea L O Z O gt Z O kE 1 The MOV command is FNC12 2 O 5 4 Operation Procedures 5 19 5 4 5 Writing commands 5 4 6 Changing operands set values Changes the operand section of an applied instruction and OUT T C command set value Op
167. ja Return 1 oe Return Es Backup function Progress screen backup Input the password Lo Subsection 11 3 3 Security and password 11 12 11 3 Display Operation 11 3 1 Outline before starting GOT data package acquisition TENA ye RI dat TE ito tis vd Data list restoration Restoration function Data list Setting SYS1BEUP Data list Ch Nw PC Unit name K 01 000 FF 1 025HCPU 01 000 FF 2 01 000 FF 3 01 000 FF 4 End of List Touch data name RIE Touch unit name to select to select Return Execute Foun Execute Progress screen restoration Restoration function Progress Setting SY51BRUP Data 01011405 Ch Nw PC Unit name Status Message 01 000 FF 1 Q25HCPU Restoring 01 000 FF 1 025HCP0 01 000 FF 2 PARAM OPA 01 000 FF 3 MAIN QPG 01 000 FF 4 End of List Input the password ee Subsection 11 3 3 Close Security and password 11 3 2 Setting storage location for backup data LC Set the storage location that backup data are stored S Set the storage location for backup data in the backup restoration setting of the utility ae OF D fn Z Display procedure aS 1 For GT16 Select Debug Debug setting Backup restoration setting from the utility 2 ForGT15 ES Select GOT setup Backup restoration setting from the utility 58 o Settings ein 1
168. loss gt e gt Z Absolute encoder data pulse Absolute encoder data el CYC Motor edge pulse value CYCO Motor edge pulse value O 9 125473 0 Sir Number of motor rotations rev Number of motor rotations 19824 ABSO 0 T LC O kE op UU E Aa 2 X O lt a Description Displays the absolute position data in the absolute position detection system with the following items e Motor edge pulse value e Command pulse value Displays the encoder data with the following items O Current position lt e Absolute encoder data S e CYC Motor edge pulse value z e CYC Command pulse value e Number of motor rotations ABS Position at power loss e Absolute encoder data e CYCO Motor edge pulse value e CYCO Command pulse value 5 e Number of motor rotations ABSO O gt 2 Key functions 2 x 09 The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations of the ABS data display screen Key Function Changes to the DI DO display screen 2 3 This section Z S 7 gt Changes to the function device screen This section 2 a lt Changes to the unit composition list screen Changes to the amplifier information screen _ 3 This section MP Returns to the function selection menu screen S lt ULU Exits the servo amplifier monitor 2 Stores the displayed screen to the memory card in BMP JPEG file format or prints it with a printer For further information about hard copies refer to the following C gt 9
169. lt a Subsection 3 5 3 Switching comment E I FOY KO 6256 K6 no Comment ai 5 Subsection 3 5 4 Displaying 32 characters of comments 1 ON OFF status display for ladder monitor s LC F a ONstatus F 444 O BMOV GO K4Y40 K2 gt OZ OFF status lt J O BMOY 02 D102 K4 7 F M gt 2 E BMOY D102 Gl The MCR command is normally displayed as 4F S op 3 d O Screen d GOT with SVGA or higher resolution cc O E Z O cc Lu m m 5 6 7 8 4 lt Z O H O Z LL For the number of characters of comments and comment display see the following Subsection 3 5 3 Switching comment s no comment display E SET M20 aber Subsection 3 5 4 Displaying 32 Nha oipte gt characters of comments 2 y AN R ON OFF status display for ladder monitor z E au SUL l TA O are ONstatus TAL JE 7 OFF status 4 K lt gt E The MCR command is normally displayed as AF kE U 2 is 3 mae 3 onito execu 2 T The information shown in the table below is displayed No Function Q 1 Sequence program is displayed A maximum of 11 contact points is displayed in one line of a ladder for 12 contact points or more move to the next line When Comment Display is specified comments are also displayed D a For the method of displaying comments see the following z z T Subsection 3 5 3 Switching comment no comment display ZS 2 A maximum of eight devices is displayed fo
170. master station itself is M9227 Loop test status and reverse loop executing the forward loop test or the reverse loop test test are being executed 4 7 Error Messages and Corrective Actions 4 37 4 7 3 Error using list editor function on the link system LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR oc O E m Li 9 q O uu Q H OVERVIEW SYSTEM MONITOR NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 2 When connected to the local station Device nae j Description Details number The control depends on whether there is an error at the Link card error Normal M9211 hardware of the link card The link card in the CPU link unit for local station Error pe l l is judged at the CPU Replace the link unit Online ect l l The control depends on whether the local station itself is Offline station to M9240 Link status online or offline or in the station to station mode or the self station test or self l loopback mode Check the mode switch loopback test Not executed Forward loop test KA l The control depends on whether the local station itself is M9257 Loop test status and reverse loop executing the forward loop test or the reverse loop test test are being executed 3 When connected to the CPU in MELSECNET 10 An error in the MELSECNET 10 is reported using a four digit hexadecimal error number For details of the errors and correcti
171. monitored e FXCPU e QnACPU or Q series motion controller CPU whose date on the rating plate is earlier than 9707B c Comments will not be displayed when any of the devices listed below is monitored e Internal device of the GOT GB GD GS e Host device B W SB SW when the MELSECNET H or MELSECNET 10 is connected e Host device X Y WW WR when a CC Link is connected d Displaying the comments of QCPUs Q02CPU QO2HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU Q02UCPU QO3UDCPU QO4UDHCPU QO6UDHCPU Comments will not be displayed when the following PLC parameters PLC file settings are set e When the comment file is set to Not used e When the comment file is set to Use the same file name as the program e When a password is set to the comment file e When a comment file is stored in program memory e Displaying the comments of QCPUs QO0JCPU QOOCPU Q01CPU Comments will not be displayed when the following PLC parameter PLC file setting is set e When the comment file MAIN does not exist in the program memory f Displaying the comments of QnACPUs LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC A LIST EDITOR MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR With a QnACPU whose date on the rating plate is earlier than 97076 S A ZZ comments cannot be displayed O Use a QnACPU whose date on the rating plate is 9707B or later S Also comments will not be displayed when the following
172. monitored and the Access Range 13 2 4 Precautions 13 8 1 2 GOT to be used The SFC monitor cannot be used with the GT1555 Q and GT1550 Q Precautions for operations during SFC monitor startup Do not operate the following with the GOT during the SFC monitor startup Doing so may delete stored data and cause the SFC monitor to operate incorrectly e Turning on or off the CF card access switch e Inserting or removing a CF card Precautions for devices a The GOT cannot search for indexing devices b The GOT cannot monitor local devices Precautions for setting Locus for line graphs The SFC monitor function is not available when Locus is set for line graphs For using the SFC monitor function do not set Locus for line graphs Precautions for file names program names of comment files to be read Only files with the file names program names with one byte alphanumeric characters are applicable to the GOT When project data are created on GX Developer use only one byte alphanumeric characters for file names program names 13 2 Specifications 13 2 3 Access range 13 3 Display Operation This section describes procedures for displaying the SFC monitor operation screens after turing on the GOT 13 3 1 Outline before starting Operations before displaying The following describes the outline for displaying the SFC monitor operation screens after installing GOT Platform Library extended function OS SFC
173. number OK NO A O 1 The station numbers displayed do not indicate the number of station numbers in the network rather the maximum number e of communication stations 2 Any station to which data link is not performed is highlighted 5 3 Reserved stations are displayed as having a data link established m kE E 2 Key functions 9 g LU The table below shows the function of keys that are used for the operations of other station data link status monitor Key Function RET Returns to the other station monitor D x lt Exits the other station data link status monitor screen and returns to the screen where the T 2 UU network monitor was started S 2 Q Z UU VA Switches the screen display of stations 1 to 80 stations 81 to 120 stations 5 Q O gt kE im oc 32 m Z 2 am e Z G x DC e m oc O E Z O gt zZ O kE O gt O 7 4 Operation Procedures 7 25 7 4 5 Other station data link status monitor 7 4 6 Other station parameter status monitor This section describes the screen configuration of the other station parameter status monitor and the function of on screen keys This screen cannot be displayed for a MELSECNET II local station 1 Displayed contents 2 3 Ul 2 186 16 db ls 17 de 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 4 b2 53 b4 55 56 57 58 59 60 2 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 TS H T TE Eu 1 Reversing part is Reversing part is connecting station an abnormal station No Display
174. number of word device and timer counter values displayed on the ladder monitor screen and z whether to display the comments to the target devices gt S 3 5 1 Display switching of 16 bit one word 32 bit two word modules During monitoring the present values of word devices except timers and counters are displayed in the 16 bit or 32 bit module These modules switch alternately each time you press the key O Point f Displaying timers and counters z T d You cannot switch the 16 bit one word or 32 bit two word module with regard to the present and set values of timers and counters The GOT automatically selects to display them in the 16 bit one word or 32 bit two word module 3 xX O Operation example Switch 16 bit one word module display to 32 bit two word module display z O O Touch ao 7 G E EaR LUC Touch Mon D lt Device values displayed O 2 U E H Touch Menu gt S E 9 i JA cal device monitor not executed ke A A i 28 92 2 gt W G Touch 16 3281 a 2 gt O MON El LAY ko i y 02 6 Ke O EE A e Dev Sea xref Cmnt G 3 Cont Sea Cmnt 32 Z Coi l Sea Y E Note Step Sea End Sea O Z O E The word devices are displayed in the 32 bit S two word module E Z device monitor not executed xi enu Sea Benge serie Fane z E O kE O O 3 5 Switching the Display Format 3 45 3 5 1 Display switching of 16 bit one word 32 bit t
175. number of station numbers in the network rather the maximum number lt O of communication stations m l 3 Any station that stays in an abnormal condition is highlighted 4 Reserved stations are displayed as normal stations E 2 Key functions gt The table below shows the function of keys that are used for the operations of the other station loop L LC status monitor BO wo Z UU Key Function RET Returns to the other station monitor l Exits the other station loop status monitor screen and returns to the screen where the network a monitor was started Z E 32 W Z 2 md ec O Z G x GC GO LI zZ Q MOTION MONITOR 7 4 Operation Procedures 7 29 7 4 9 Other station loop status monitor 7 5 Error Message and Corrective Action The following shows the error messages that are displayed during the network monitor operation and how to handle them Error message Communication channel setup error Can not Communication Key Word error Contents of error Action to take There is no channel for a i vi Set the channel number in the Communication Settings of the utility communication oes Check the connections between the controller and the GOT for Communication could not be established with the PLC CPU disconnected connectors and cables Check if an error has occurred in the controller A keyword has been set in the parameter when monitoring the MELSECNET II mas
176. oc O E Z le oc T Q G lt l Z O H O Z S LL LC O E m l 32 characters of comments No comments displayed Comments displayed l o displayed O Maximum Maximum Maximum E GOT Number of lines E T b number of Number of lines number of Number of lines number of g at can be i contact points displayed contact points displayed contact points displayed l E displayed displayed displayed GT1695M X GT1685M S 7 GT1595 X is GT1585V S 15 11 11 5 6 D E 09 GT1585 S nia Z UU GT1575V S GT1575 S GT1575 V GT1575 VN O GT1572 VN 11 3 11 2 6 GT1565 V 95 kE GT1562 VN Ez Z gt LC S Z S SE oc O LULU Z L e Z S Z O kE S O 3 5 Switching the Display Format 3 49 3 5 4 Displaying 32 characters of comments 3 5 5 Displaying notes Notes in the sequence program can be displayed when the MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor is executed This subsection describes the operation procedure for displaying notes Notes cannot be displayed when the MELSEC A FX ladder monitor is executed Peripheral notes are represented by Touch evice monitor not executed pane Touch K Dev Sea Xref Cunt Cont Sea 16 32Bit Cunt 32 1 Coil Sea Dec Hex e Step Sea Print Cancel J Screen Print End Sea Peripheral note Is displayed Integrated note I gt Peripheral Integrated notes are displayed Local device monitor not execu 0 L 3103 1102 0 a ll 0 25 5 ted
177. of that module is performed Touch input 3 Display keys used for the operation on the System Configuration screen shown in 2 Touch input 2 Key functions The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operation on the System Configuration screen Key Function END Closes the monitoring and returns the screen to the one for starting the intelligent module monitor AL Displays the communication setting window Module a o Switches to the screen where the intelligent module monitoring for that module is performed display position Scrolls the display one stage up or down to display the system configuration of the currently undisplayed stage immediately before after the currently displayed stage Operations can be performed when the system configuration has three or more extension bases Scrolls one stage up Scrolls one stage down 6 16 6 4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen 6 4 1 Composition of the system configuration screen and key functions 6 4 2 Setting method for other station monitoring The setting method to perform other station monitoring during intelligent module monitoring is described below E m gt lt Intelligent module monitor gt 29 S When using MELSECNET 10 connection Touch Intelligent module monitor to display the System Configuration _ screen an ESE Depending on the connection method the screen that is first displayed dE dis different as indicat
178. operating status error information and other information of the targeted PLC CPU Up to 100 error information events can be displayed 3 Displays keys used for the operations on the PC Information monitor screen shown in 2l Touch input 2 Key functions The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operation on the System Configuration screen Key Function Closes the monitoring and returns the screen to the one for starting the intelligent module monitor E Switches the screen to the System Configuration screen Refer to Section 6 4 1 Scrolls the display one page up or down A v A Scrolls one page up y Scrolls one page down 6 18 6 4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen 6 4 3 Composition of PC Information monitor screen and key functions When using the QSCPU 1 PC Information monitor screen a Displayed contents Description 1 Displays the channel number network number and station number of the monitored station Displays the keys that are used for the operation on the System Configuration screen shown in b 3 Displays the QSCPU operation status RUN STOP 4 Displays the safety CPU operation mode Safety mode Test mode Displays the error being occurred Touching the error displays the Error details screen L 7 This section 3 No 5 Detail Error cause Date Time Displays the error code Displays the detail code of the error log
179. operation Touch the key 9 4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens 9 4 7 Test operations 9 37 to oc O Z le oc uu a lt O gt oc Lu 0 CNC MONITOR FUNCTION BACKUP RESTORE SFC MONITOR CNC DATA I O IAPPENDICES NDEX 9 38 3 Key functions The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations of the JOG operation screen Key Function Runs the servo motor in the forward rotation CCW direction Runs the servo motor in the reverse rotation CW direction Changes the speed of the servo motor Changes the acceleration deceleration time constant Touching this changes the operation mode momentary operation no momentary operation Momentary Switch Operation Selecting Momentary The servo motor rotates while the or key is touched Releasing your finger from these keys stops the operation Momentary Switch Operation Not Selecting Momentary The servo motor rotates while the or key is touched stops when the key is touched Changes to the positioning operation screen 2 This section EJ Changes to the motor less operation screen U This section EJ Changes to the DO forced output screen This section EJ Returns to the function selection menu screen Exits the servo amplifier monitor Stores the displayed screen to the memory card in BMP JPEG file format or prints it with a printer For furth
180. or hexadecimal 1 When the GOT is connected to the MELSECNET 10 use a QCPU and a network module QJ71LP21 QJ71LP21 25 QU71LP21S 25 QJ71LP21G QJ71BR11 of function version B or a later version 2 The present value of Z cannot be changed None of the connection forms supports V 3 When the GOT is connected to a QnACPU whose date shown on the rating plate is earlier than 9707B device comments cannot be displayed 4 Indicates CC Link connection Intelligent device station 5 Indicates CC Link connection via G4 Bus Direct CPU Computer link Reference connection connection section connection Description 2 2 Specifications 2 2 1 System configuration 3 When the GOT is connected to a ACPU QCPU A mode or A series motion controller CPU O Available A Partly restricted x Unavailable Function Connection form between GOT and controller Ethernet MELSECNET 10 CC EINK connection connection connection ID we we cat GT16 ae pales ae ye GT16 ae T11 T11 T11 T11 T11 T11 T11 Bus Direct CPU Computer link Reference connection connection section connection OVERVIEW Name Description 2 Entry Monitoring present n monitor values by entering 2 devices to be 2 5 5 monitored in advance A A E Batch Monitoring the d monitor present value of n 26 devices from a l specified device TC monitor Monitoring the O present value set Z lue co
181. or malfunction Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit CAUTION Do not disassemble or modify the unit Doing so can cause a failure malfunction injury or fire Do not touch the conductive and electronic parts of the unit directly Doing so can cause a unit malfunction or failure The cables connected to the unit must be run in ducts or clamped Not doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged due to the dangling motion or accidental pulling of the cables or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault When unplugging the cable connected to the unit do not hold and pull the cable portion Doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault Do not drop the module or subject it to strong shock A module damage may result Do not drop or give an impact to the battery mounted to the unit Doing so may damage the battery causing the battery fluid to leak inside the battery lf the battery is dropped or given an impact dispose of it without using Before touching the unit always touch grounded metal etc to discharge static electricity from human body etc Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply of the GOT and the controller in the case of a bus topology and r
182. os o eoe oasa eo oso eos f oas eos f 0250 Ca oe IE os eR f s EE E WOT Err M K set o 8 60 0258 6o 0259 a O 0000 012C EEE X Axis Zero Data 348 Y Axis Zero Data S 602 604 H Mech S i R 341 i N Screen example pe e a Buffer memory address 6 50 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 5 16 AD72 A1SD71 module monitoring Screen example No Y axis CA a IU CE Se N Axis Axis X 3 7873 1EC1 7893 L EDS 23 VA Jere e a 0 B Type ET i Code Ti Ss O et S OVERVIEW SYSTEM MONITOR LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC A LIST EDITOR s M Code SI Axis M Code x Axis 21 Posit Start 0 7 Execut ing Interpolation 02 Data No X13 Posit Compl O Pointer Error Coc Status X18 X19 Pos Started 12 7 Execut ing A 15 BUSY Data No M G ode o MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR Pointer Error Code O Status UU gt Q G E uu 9 y JJ ul Z oc O E Z le NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 51 6 5 16 AD72 A1SD71 module monitoring Screen example Address Speed Dwell M Code Address Speed Dwell M Code 6 52 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 5 16 AD72 A1SD71 module monitoring 6 5 17 AJ71PT32 S3 module monitoring Buffer memory address ere PMA Pope mex AJAPTSZ 0 Monitor Scr 1 0 Dedicated Mode Inputs X Outputs CY JU Hardware
183. read from the controller the sequence program to be monitored For further information about PLC reading see the following Subsection 3 3 3 Display Starts monitoring the displayed sequence program Displays the Menu window for ladder monitor 2_ gt 7 This section 2 Starts the list editor for A FX For details on the A FX list editor refer to the following 237 Chapter 4 MELSEC A LIST EDITOR Chapter 5 MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR Scrolls the information upward by a ladder block Scrolls the information downward by a ladder block When the number of devices whose present and set values are within the display range shown in 2 on the preceding page is nine or more the devices to be displayed are switched Scrolls the information downward by a screen In search operation a search is continuously performed under the same conditions Stores the displayed screen to the memory card in BMP JPEG file format or prints it with a printer For further information about hard copies see the following Subsection 3 4 2 Hard copy output The operation of this key is invalid 3 4 Operation Procedure Common 3 4 1 Information and key functions displayed on the screen 2 When the MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor is executed a Display screen GOT with VGA resolution 5 6 1 8 For the number of characters of comments 7 and comment display see the following TT O FF Ofrrogran Henory MANS 1OcSTEP gt
184. recipe function in the Import Export CSV file format and other format Items that can be imported or exported with the advanced alarm observation and gt 77F alarm history are added Device No comment No detail No and others Print Enables printing of header and footer Enables printing of header and footer of header and footer 2 SU O Enables duplicating and consecutive Edit 2 90U O copying of figures and objects Enables changing of the settings for the Data View l l l 2 18U O respective objects in grouped objects l Enables global replacement of channel Batch Edit 2 18U No Enables checking for security level Screen Preview switching and language switching in 2 18U O image after switching Wizard for setting the GOT type controller Wizard type and communication settings when 2 18U O creating a new project l Settings on the Script Edit dialog are Screen script l l l available for screen script and project 2 27D project script script Setting of maintaining screen numbers of the screens being displayed System Auxiliary setting nie 2 27D O Information during screen switching is added Supports expansion reduction when 2 32J O multiple objects and shapes are selected Expansion Supports automatically zooming in and Reduction out objects and figures suitable for the screen size when the GOT type is 2 73B m changed to a GOT type with different resolution Function for capturing the specified range S
185. screen for A1S68DAI and the buffer memory address L gt 6 5 27 A1S68DAV module monitoring 6 70 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 5 28 A1S68DAI module monitoring 6 5 29 A1S68AD module monitoring Buffer memory address Screen example OVERVIEW SET Data MONIT me 3 LC 0 Sampling gt Averaging Z o mo EA 10 to 17 000A to 0011 L L 0 Number Time 3 2 EN 20 to 27 0014 to 001B S Q Incomplete Complete 0001 m 1 T 6 R E Z 2 C3 i eeseet 5 C7 es Joel 6 C eT EN F G IE o E cet A D O LJ l _ gt O Error Code i Z Qs o O BO az Sar Ar O Q LU kE XA n i el O 2 Error Detect 12 LL A LU is 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 7 1E j 1F is Or LU ne LU Sf O SET S MONITO exp INTELLIGENT MODULE AISGSAD Graph Monitor Screen oc Le L Input 1 S A S CH CH 2 CH 3 er CH 2 i Z C a NY o l O C P E C Z WDT Error o O Z O 2 6 O O 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 71 6 5 29 A1S68AD module monitoring 6 5 30 A1S64TCTT BW A1S64TCRI BW S1 monitoring Buffer memory address 0 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Ty 2 ozo 6 oso o6 oso 128 soso a 52 ozo 64 000 se oso 128 fooso STs ro coon coos 12 woo EA ICI 7 8 RIE e oos 7 0007 a focos 6 72 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 5 30 A1S64TCTT BW A1S64TCRT BW S1 monitoring Screen example m m
186. screen is switched to the full mode the GOT displays a monitor screen displayed on the upper left in the quad mode in the full mode When starting the system monitor HANNA An the GOT displays the monitor ChNo 1 NetNo ST FFICPUNO 0 screen in the full mode The button for switching the number of monitor screens The monitor screen is switched ChNo 1 NetNo a AENA 01 ChNo 1 NetNo a kan ON 0 0 8 0 between the full and quad modes 5 5 OW oD 8 with the button for switching the le 2 o number of monitor screens 250 e L ACTA TEZ TR MENUNFORMMNISET_ MUSEE SET T ChNo 1 NetNo O ChNo 1 NetNo 0 STIFF CPUNo 0 BILE NAME MA IN PG WO NOL a i 1 The monitor screen in the full mode is four times bigger than each monitor screen in the quad mode For displaying screens commonly used in the system including the key window the monitor screen size in the full mode is the same as each monitor screen size in the quad mode 2 3 Display 2 3 1 Outline until starting the system monitor 2 17 OVERVIEW N LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR oc O E Z O Lu E L gt nw MELSEC A LIST EDITOR NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 2 18 Point o mb lt 2 3 Display How to display the utility For how to display the utility refer to the following 37 GT16 User s Manual 8 3 Utility Display GT15 User s Manual 9
187. screen whose display has been updated to the new parameter setting is displayed 8 4 11 Hard copy output This section describes how to store a screen to the memory card in BMP JPEG file format or print it with a printer when executing the Q motion monitor Hard copy methods differ depending on the GOT to be used 1 GOT with VGA or higher resolution Hard copy output operations are performed by touching the Print Screen or Cancel Print key displayed on the screen Present valie Monitor E ELEL PC READY M2000 PCPU READY M5074 A 11 Ax Servo ON M2042 MAN PLS 2 Enabl e M2052 MAN PLS 3 Enable M2053 MAN PLS Axis ERRCMSO77 PLS PLS SVZ2IR V CHG Request M2043 SV223R W CHG Statu M2044 SV2Z22 R V CHG Error M2045 SV2230ut OF SYN Warni ne M2046 CSS MM Mode Cont iene All Ax SV ON Acpt M2049 00000 Ext EMG Stop Input M5076 1 inch ST Acpt 1238 45 6 7 B 8101112151415 16 VEBBAZI2ZSBASSAIBADSIN 3 SFC ERR Detect M2039 PLS SV P Setting MS079 ies Module Fault Det M2047 H System Setting ERRC M2041 PLS WOT Error M89073 JOG Simul Star t M2048 h L n debug mode M2038 PLS I n test mode M95075 Test REQ ERR M5078 fi 158 Start Buffer Ful 1 M2050 MAN PLS 1 Enab le M2051 Axi sNo 12Sa56F 2 15 14 15 16 TIR 102021 2 RARA OT OR op NI Scree Wi Touch Print Screen Print A BMP JPEG file will be stored on the The Q motio
188. set to A Standard CF Card the GOT startup time with the A drive takes longer than that with the C drive The GOT startup time with the A drive differs depending on the CF card type the numbers of extended function OSs and option OSs and project data size Handling CF card during booting OS Do not remove the CF card and do not turn off the CF card access switch during booting the OS Doing so causes the boot to fail As a result the GOT does not start correctly Corrective actions when OS cannot be booted The OS cannot be booted in the following conditions Take the following corrective actions and then boot the OS again Condition Corrective action Select the same GOT type as the GOT to be used in The type of the GOT to be used differs from the the Communicate with Memory Card screen Select GOT type data set with GT Designer2 stored in OSs and project data to be downloaded and then the CF card download the selected data to the CF card o Mount an option function board with add on memory The OS boot drive has insufficient free space on the GOT or delete unnecessary data The CF card access switch is off Turn on the CF card access switch 1 1 Before Using Each Function 1 11 1 1 3 Outline of procedure to the operation of each function LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR L gt Ec m gt O SYSTEM MONITOR MELSEC A LIST EDITOR NETWORK MONITOR
189. solely at our discretion Microsoft Windows Windows NT Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Adobe and Adobe Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Pentium and Celeron are a registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Co Ltd in the United States MODBUS is a trademark of Schneider Electric SA Other company and product names herein are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners SH NA 080544ENG K MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V German Branch Gothaer Stra e 8 D 40880 Ratingen Phone 49 0 2102 486 0 Fax 49 0 2102 486 1120 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V CZECH REPUBLIC Czech Branch Radlick 714 113a CZ 158 00 Praha 5 Phone 420 0 251 551 470 Fax 420 0 251 551 471 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V French Branch 25 Boulevard des Bouvets F 92741 Nanterre Cedex Phone 33 0 1 55 68 55 68 Fax 33 0 1 55 68 57 57 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V Irish Branch Westgate Business Park Ballymount IRL Dublin 24 Phone 353 0 1 4198800 Fax 353 0 1 4198890 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V Italian Branch Viale Colleoni 7 1 20041 Agrate Brianza MI Phone 39 039 60 53 1 Fax 39 039 60 53 312 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V Spanish Branch Carretera de Rubi 76 80 E 08190 Sant Cugat del
190. switches FX list monitor the list monitor can be started on the monitor screen When the list monitor is started on the monitor screen the list editor cannot be used For how to set special function switches refer to the following manual C GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual 6 2 Touch Switch 5 3 Display 5 4 Operation Procedures This section describes the contents of the MELSEC FX list editor and the key functions displayed on the screen a The display screen of the MELSEC FX list editor varies slightly with the GOT used This chapter mainly uses if the screen of the GT1575 V for explanation E 5 4 1 Key arrangement and a list of key functions O The arrangement and functions of the keys displayed on the MELSEC FX List Editor window are described S below A gt Displayed contents S 1 Chio 1 z 3 Net found Ss OLD a UOU 22 1 QUT Y 000 Si D 0 E Do 10 z 8 LD M 10 SOUT T 10 Y K 100 l2 LD A 002 12 UR 4 0 14 AND M 100 al No Description E V m gt a Oo LU 9p KE m Displays the currently selected channel number Touching ChNo displays the communication setting window The communication setting window is not displayed if the MELSEC FX list editor is started from the ladder monitor O a a Displays a mode for MELSEC FX list editor gt 5 4 2 Selection and operation of modes ST ace JE Monitor is displayed when the list monitor is executed lt
191. system containing the GOT or GOT connected station network system or CC Link system For further information about the connection forms available for the ladder monitor see the following 37 Subsection 3 2 1 System configuration Enhanced interaction with objects 1 One touch ladder jump function Only by touching an object on a user created screen a target device can be searched and displayed In addition in the case of the Q QnA ladder monitor searching is performed only when the monitor target of the sequence program that has been read and the monitor target that is set on the object match enabling more accurate search Even a person who is not the operator familiar with the equipment inside can trace the source of the equipment error without fail by simple operations reducing time to stop the error Example Coil searching by touching a touch switch User created screen O on A The ladder monitor starts and searchs for coil M53 it automatically Lifter lower end Hand close X13 M52 M54 M53 Lifter up Al A E M53 Lifter upper end Y Lifter up Touch the button of error process Forward Forward operation M54 was not turned on since the lifter upper end sensor X10 was not turned on k m eee ee ee A ee m m m ee m m O O O O ee m m m m 2 Real time program searching from advanced alarm display touch switch for the Q QnA ladder monitor only PLC data can be read
192. tes Built in flash User memory GI15 memory ROM RAM Backup Restore 420KB 766KB 820KB Not required 1 Extended function OS Install the extended function OS shown in the above table on the GOT For how to install the OS refer to the following manual GT Designer2 Version O Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual Chapter 8 TRANSFERRING DATA 2 OS memory space For installing the extended function OS the available space shown in the above table is required in the user area For checking the available space in the user area and the data that uses other user areas refer to the following manual gt GT Designer2 Version O Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual Chapter 8 TRANSFERRING DATA Required hardware The following hardware is required GOT Hardware GT16 CF card USB memory GT15 CF card Data to be backed up and restored The following shows data to be backed up and restored Data other than the the following data cannot be backed up and restored 1 Basic model QCPU ltem Description File name Parameter Parameter for operating a programmable controller PARAM QPA Intelligent function Parameter for intelligent function modules IPARAM QPA module parameter Sequence program Program that the CPU operates MAIN QPG SFC program Sequence program with the SFC programming format MAIN SFC QPG File register Data stored in file registers MAIN QDR Device comment Device comment to be stored in a programmable controller
193. the CNC data I O screen lt 12 4 Operation Procedures 3 Ifthe project data has not been downloaded The CNC data I O can be started from the utility even if the project data has not been downloaded to the GOT Changing screens The following describes how to change the screen Utility or user created monitor screen At the second or later startup At the first startup Communication setting window SS X ChNO U NETWK NO STATION CPUNo 0 4 ChNo Comm Driver d gt 1 E 1 Connection 2 A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 For exiting the CNC data I O by touching Rtn the last exited screen is displayed when the CNC data lO starts next time 12 6 12 3 Display 12 4 Operation Procedures E LL T a l Displayed contents OF a oc zZ This section describes the display details for the CNC data lO and the functions of the keys displayed uS on the screen H o Function Cape St 1 Unit name M01 e Entry 60 Remain 4 Z Character 4245 Remain 2500 ALL PRG 9 2 Device CNC ake Si Select a copy source 3 PRG device or the target to be Directory Machine program ight A deleted 6 PRG Bs File name o 11 PRG List u AL 16 PRG O 23 PRG E 26 PRG EH 27 PRG Y oc Device A Built in CF card gi o 30 PRG 31 PRG x Select a copy Directory PS tee lt destination device Area chg 2 Item Description Q lt x a O
194. the GOT are deleted when data are read from the PLC g Without changing the monitor target PLC CPU files stored in the drive of the GOT will not be deleted by changing the read target drive When all files are read from the monitor target PLC CPU with the automatic PLC read setting made therefore the programs to be searched and the monitor target programs may not match In such a case delete unnecessary files on the file list window h Up to 512 files of ladder data including those displayed on the GOT up to 3 files can be stored in the storage destination drive When 511 files of ladder data are stored and another ladder data is displayed on the GOT therefore storing a new ladder data is not allowed Reading comment files a Comment data can be read from a CF card only with the MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor b Only files with the file names program names with one byte alphanumeric characters are applicable to the GOT When project data are created on GX Developer use only one byte alphanumeric characters for file names program names c When the data save location is set to None save only one comment file in a CF card Multiple comment files cannot be read 3 2 Specifications 3 2 4 Precautions 7 Monitoring local devices a When a sequence program stored in a PLC CPU is changed be sure to read the program with the GOT When the sequence program in the PLC CPU is changed after reading the sequence program S w
195. the data using other user areas LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION GT Designer2 Version O Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual 8 TRANSFERRING DATA MELSEC A LIST EDITOR 8 2 2 Access range In bus connection direct CPU connection or computer link connection only the motion controller CPU on host station can be monitored Monitoring of other stations cannot be performed For the MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 and CC Link IE controller network connections the GOT can monitor the motion controller CPU on the control station only In CC Link connection Intelligent device station only the motion controller CPU in master station can be monitored In Ethernet connection only the motion controller CPU in host station can be monitored The access range other than that mentioned above is the same as the access range when the GOT is connected to a controller Refer to the following manual for details of the access range MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 2 7 Controllers that can be Monitored and Access Range INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR 8 2 3 Precautions 1 Main OS software package for motion controller The only Main OS software package that can be used is SV13 or SV22 NETWORK MONITOR 2 When using GT1555 Q and GT1550 Q The present value history monitor is not supported 00 3 When setting parameters for Q172HCPU or Q173HCPU When setting parameters for Q172HCPU or Q173HCPU after
196. the device test mode Device Test Touching the key in the device test mode cancels the device test mode L gt 13 8 Test Operation Displays menus used for operations on the block list screen Display rera 237 13 6 3 Display menu x Exits the SFC monitor and returns the screen to the SFC monitor startup screen d Y Scrolls the display area up and down by one line A 3 Scrolls the display area up and down by one page 13 6 3 Menus The following shows operations for the menus displayed on the block list screen Display menu Key Function Reference section Comment Change Displays the comment file list window Program List Displays the program list window PLO Pear Displays the PLC read screen 13 5 13 24 13 6 How to Operate Block List Screen 13 6 2 Key functions 13 7 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen On the SFC diagram monitor screen the GOT monitors and displays data of the block selected on the block list screen in the SFC diagram The following describes how to operate the SFC diagram monitor screen 13 7 1 Displayed contents SFC diagram monitor screen The following describes the configuration of the SFC diagram monitor screen menus and key functions on the screen 1 2 3 4 11 SFC Monitor PLC nameQ0 CH 1O F D SFC Hak Start of bloks 1 2 5 Search Display Monitoring Mode TRAN Ear STOPMODE CCONT Step status display W101 W102 H103 H104 EZ Active E Inactive W
197. the following GOT e Check if the cable is correctly connected to the GOT e Check if the correct communication driver is installed on the GOT e Check if the communication settings are correctly set Controller e Check if the parameters are set e Check if the cable is correctly connected to the controller e Check if the controller is turned on e Check if the system configuration for the restoration is the same as that for the backup e Check if the target controller of the restoration is the same as that of the backup or the same kind of controller Check with the administrator of the system regarding the passwords for files of the controller 12 CNC DATA I O SS cr Machining programs parameters and others of the CNC connected to the GOT can be copied or deleted 12 1 Features CF card USB memory Copy or delete the CNC data 12 1 Features 12 1 SERVO AMPLIFIER CNC MONITOR MONITOR FUNCTION N BACKUP RESTORE Q lt x a O Z O SFC MONITOR APPENDICES INDEX 12 2 Specifications 12 2 1 System configuration This section describes the target CNC of the CNC data I O and the connection types for connecting the GOT to the CNC For connection type settings and precautions regarding the communication unit cable and connection type see the following manual lt 37GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Target
198. the previous backup data the GOT backs up setting data for all the controllers on the same base unit When the current setting data for all the controllers are the same as the previous backup data the GOT does not execute the backup Therefore the GOT does not store the same backup data 11 3 Display Operation 11 19 11 3 4 Trigger backup SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR CNC MONITOR 2 Y FUNCTION LLI oc O E 7 LLI G o Y O lt a SFC MONITOR CNC DATA I O APPENDICES INDEX How to set trigger backup 1 Flow of settings The following shows the flow of settings for using the trigger backup Execute the first backup Trigger type Time Set the password for the backup restore L gt Subsection 11 3 3 Security and password Trigger type Rise Set the trigger backup Set the devices to be used for with GT Designer2 the trigger backup Download project data to the GOT Set the trigger backup Set the days and time that the GOT executes with the GOT utility the backup For setting the trigger backup for the first time input the password for the backup restore The trigger backup settings are completed Point Inputting password for backup restore The GOT automatically executes the backup when the trigger condition is met The password authentication with the password for the backup restore is not executed By executing the password authentication with the password
199. the step line displayed by the ladder monitor E V m gt a Oo LU 9p KE m INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR NETWORK MONITOR G Screen 100 est eur al nor il Q MOTION MONITOR 5 1 Features 5 1 Errors that occur during list editing can be checked easily Error messages error codes and number of steps for errors that occur in the FX PLC can be checked Details can be checked immediately even for errors that occur during list editing Detail Step Error message 1010 70 configuration error PCHPP communication error 620 Commands and devices can be searched and displayed Commands and devices used in sequence programs can be searched The correction position can be searched for cases such as when you want to correct a specific device Searched device M800 Displays the searched device N Y LD M 800 OUT T 105 K 100 LD X 002 100 O02 O20 100 5 2 5 1 Features 5 2 Specifications 5 2 1 System configuration This section describes the system configuration of the MELSEC FX list editor For further information about communication units and cables for each connection form see the following gt GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Controllers that can be edited with the MELSEC FX list editor Target controller FXCPU 22 Connection forms O Available x Unavailable Function name Connection form between GOT and PLC B A Computer TERN MELSEC CC Link us irec e
200. to 10 error information events can be displayed Displays keys used for the operations on the System Configuration screen shown in El Touch input Key functions The table below shows the functions of keys that are used for the operations on the System Configuration screen Key Function Closes the monitoring and returns the screen to the one for starting the intelligent module END monitor S Switches the screen to the System Configuration screen Refer to Section 6 4 1 6 22 6 4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen 6 4 4 Composition of the unit detail info screen and key functions 6 4 5 Composition of the intelligent module monitor screen and key functions This section describes the structure of the monitor screen that is displayed by specifying a module on the System Configuration screen in Basic mode when the QCPU Q mode is used and the key functions displayed on the screen Displayed contents for AG8RD 3 All data are displayed when the readout from the intelligent function module is completed The OS executes it automatically Channe Channe ltem Description 1 Displays the model name of the module being monitored Displays the buffer memory data of the module in its current form or in a graph 2 The status of I O signals to and from PLC CPU is monitored When testing execute testing after moving the cursor to the display position of the target data Touch input 3 Displ
201. to 3B5 3B6 to 3B7 3B8 to 3B9 418 to 419 41A to 41B 41C to 41D 47C to 47D 47E to 47F 480 to 481 854 to 855 856 to 857 356 to 357 358 to 359 954 to 955 956 to 957 3BA to 3BB 3BC to 3BD 1056 to 1057 420 to 421 1156 to 1157 482 to 483 es IEEE II 879 979 1079 1179 36F 3D3 437 49B 880 980 1080 1180 370 3D4 438 49C Buffer memory address Screen example No 814 to 815 32E to 32F QD75MH Speed position control 914 to 915 392 to 393 SE ents HE Ea Kae L ET 1014 to 1015 3F6 to 3F7 POST Oli switching latch R 1114 to 1115 45At0o45B to 45B SHE II 8 PAE Eo eia UNE CI degree 107 STE lie lara TEE 1626 to 1627 65A to 65B inch 10 pulse 1 6 1726 to 1727 6BE to 6BF 1826 to 1927 122 to 723 817 917 1017 1117 330 395 3F9 45D a 1528 1628 5F8 65C G A 1728 1828 6CO 724 1530 to 1531 5FA to 5FB QD 5MA Position speed control Ean na for END pie T 1830 to 1931 726 to 727 PTD Ta st eee i aA 4 1532 1632 5FC 660 1732 1832 6C4 728 ae Riese Axo Ae Position speed S later E ENEE E S S srl STT GTGT 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 105 6 5 36 QD75MH module monitoring OVERVIEW np SYSTEM MONITOR ae J cP LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC A LIST EDITOR MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR O UU gt Q G E uu 9 y JJ ul Z oc O E Z le NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR Buffer memory add
202. to the following manual 237 GT Designer2 VersionL Screen Design Manual 2 3 Specifications of Applicable Characters 7 For using the SFC monitor function a capacity of 6201KB or more is required in the user area of the specified drive for installing the extended function OS and option OS For using the GOT with the built in flash memory of 5MB set the OS boot drive to A Standard CF Card For operating GOT Function Expansion Library option OS a capacity of 8192KB is required in the user area of the GOT memory A total memory capacity of 14393KB is required for using the SFC monitor function Therefore the following settings are required depending on the GOT to be used GOT Required setting e Setting the OS boot drive to A Standard CF Card GT1575 VN GT1572 VN l l l e Memory expansion Installing an option function board with add on GT1562 VN memory e Memory expansion Installing an option function board with add on Other than the above memory For setting the OS boot drive refer to the following MES GT Designer2 VersionL Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual Chapter 8 TRANSFERRING DATA Before Using Each Function 1 1 1 1 2 Hardware and OS required for each function S Eor GT11 O Required Unusable OS memory Option function board space user area RFID RFID Not required l Extended function OS Function name L gt Ec m gt O Option OS name GT11 50FNB am O
203. to the host Continued to next page 4 34 4 7 Error Messages and Corrective Actions 4 7 1 Error messages and corrective actions in direct CPU connection KS The value exceeding the range of the program capacity Reduce the program capacity by K steps for over by K steps was attempted to be set setting The value exceeding the range of the file The value exceeding the range of the file register l i KP over l register capacity by K points was attempted Lu capacity by K points was attempted to be set E to be set m O Not available for QnACPU C Set the PLC number and change the station for The CPU at the list edit destination is QAnACPU Set the PLC No access Set the PLC number and change the station for The keyword is not input The GO key was pressed without input of the keyword l l l oc l list edit Or select the same station and input O Set the PLC No on the keyword input screen the keyword 5 gt The PLC parameter was The PLC parameter exceeding the file R l l E changed l Restart the GOT system if required 2 l E register capacity was set 0 Read the ladder monitor again The PLC parameter was D l l Read the ladder monitor on the PLC again if changed The capacity of the file R register was set red required Restart the GOT system S O S The PLC program was edited Read the ladder monitor on the PLC again if oe Edit the PLC program l O Read the ladder monitor again required mi 32
204. to the object property Key codes for increment key and decrement key are added Key code for historical trend graph is added Key code used for Kana Kanji conversion is added Key codes for user ID ascending descending order movement of cursor are added Key codes used for the Kana kanji conversion enhanced version are added 2 43V 2 58L 2 09K 2 00A 2 73B 2 73B 2 77F 2 18U 2 90U 2 18U 2 18U 2 18U 2 27D 2 90U Standard monitor OS 03 01 Standard monitor OS 03 03 Standard monitor OS 03 09 Standard monitor OS 03 09 Standard monitor OS 03 12 Option OS Object Script 02 02 Option OS Object Script 04 02 Standard monitor OS 02 02 Standard monitor OS 02 02 Standard monitor OS 02 02 Standard monitor OS 02 04 Standard monitor OS 04 02 GT 15 GT Soft GOT1000 Standard monitor OS 02 02 Jol x Standard monitor OS 01 00 o 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 lol o The file operation functions are added 2 77F Standard monitor OS 03 12 Loa 2 00A Standard monitor OS 01 00 lol o 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 lol o 0 T 11 X X Other functions added LC U 1 ForGT16 T Aa Ze de Version of GT l of Item Description Version of OS oe Designer2 m O All GT15 functions added by GT Designer2 Version2 90U or Other function 2 90U Standar
205. unit for each parameter 5 l Z O gt O LL 09 09 UU 9 Q Z UU A A lt S lt ULU Q Z 9 4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens 9 31 9 4 6 Parameter setting T Key functions The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used with the operations on the parameter setting screen II Function Selects the servo parameter setting item Displays the parameter items with scrolling a page up down Changes the servo parameter settings read to the GOT internal memory Writes the servo parameter settings of the selected items to the servo amplifier Matches all parameter values presently displayed on the GOT with the servo amplifier parameter values Writes all parameter values presently displayed on the GOT to the parameters of the servo amplifier Reads all parameter values from the servo amplifier to the GOT and displays those values Returns all parameter values to their initial values Switches between the parameter display for the drive unit DRU and interface unit IFU each time this is touched Selects the slot number of the drive unit DRU Changes the gain filter parameter Changes the extension setting parameter Changes the I O setting parameter Returns to the function selection menu screen Exits the servo amplifier monitor Stores the displayed screen to the memory card in BMP JPEG file format or prints it with a printer For further information about hard copie
206. used for a password 2 Operations a Inputting the password Touch 0 to 9 and A to F to input the password After inputting the password touch to set the password To edit the input characters touch to delete the characters and then input the new characters b Canceling password input Touch X to return to the monitor screen 9 30 9 4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens 9 4 6 Parameter setting 9 Parameter setting screen DC x x LU The following describes the display data of the parameter setting screen and the key functions E a displayed on the screen z OE 22 ATAR AS Point f Parameters with an asterisk preceding the name become valid after the parameters are set and the power of the servo amplifier is turned off and then on again 1 Display screen S 26 OY 26 o Z5 O lL 0 1 0001 2 Auto tuning 010F 3 Com pulse multiply numer 16384 4 Com pulse multiply denom LU 5 In position range pulse 5 6 Position control gain 1 rad s i 7 Pos com ace dec time cons ms LU 8 Internal speed command 1 00 r min 9 Internal speed command 2 r min 10 Internal speed command 3 JO r min 11 Acceleration time constant J ms a 12 Deceleration time constant O ms 13 S pattern ace dec time cons ms PRE Cancel kE lt Q O Displays the parameter number Displays the parameter name Displays the present set value of the parameter Displays the setting
207. when the intelligent module monitor is executed and corrective action Error message Description Corrective action er There is no channel for Check that the channel number is correctly set in the Communication channel setup error communication Communication Settings Check the connection status between the PLC CPU and the GOT disconnected or cut cables Communication could not be established with the PLC CPU Communications error Has an error occurred in the PLC CPU The special data intelligent module Download the special data intelligent module Monitor Data Can Not Find monitor data has not been l monitor data to the GOT downloaded to the GOT 6 7 Error Messages and Corrective Action 6 115 LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR OVERVIEW SYSTEM MONITOR MELSEC A LIST EDITOR O UU a 2 m G E uu 9 y mr m E Z oc O E Z G NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR MEMO 6 116 7 NETWORK MONITOR S f GT SOFT l S A crl6 crl5 GOT1000 crl 1 erl U l J 7 O 1 Features S 7 The network monitor function enables the GOT to monitor and display the statuses of the MELSECNET H b MELSECNET 10 MELSECNET II and CC Link IE controller networks The features of the network monitor are described below oc selectable from detailed monitoring or other station monitoring for a desired network by the line monitor e The line monito
208. x O QO4UDEHCPU QO6UDEHCPU 03 13 Q13UDEHCPU and Q26UDEHCPU 5 O ECM ES Supporting connection to MELSECNET H 2258 A PLC to PLC network azaj Communication driver x S MELSECNET H 03 00 Supporting routing parameter setting with Communication driver Q 2 43V x x x lt GT Designer2 MELSECNET H 03 01 E Q Supporting connection to Universal model 9 O QCPU Communication driver l 2 63R X X Supporting connection to Q17nDCPU MELSECNET H 03 07 MELSECNET H Supporting connection to CNC C70 connection PLC E eee Rap Communication driver fe upporting connection to CRnQ to PLC network pene MELSECNET H 03 09 a es E Supporting connection to Q13UDHCPU gt 77F Communication driver S O and Q26UDHCPU MELSECNET H 03 12 a ES 7 Supporting connection to Q02PHCPU and QO6PHCPU Supporting connection to QOIUDECPU peo Communication driver X X Q04UDEHCPU QO6UDEHCPU l MELSECNET H 03 13 I Q13UDEHCPU and Q26UDEHCPU O m Supporting connection to QS001CPU al o lz x G o Supporting connection to MELSECNET S 10 PLC to PLC connection Communication driver 2 09K a x X Supporting connection to Q172HCPU MELSECNET 10 01 02 Q173HCPU EN Supporting automatic system switching TR Communication driver MELSECNET 10 for QCPU redundant system l MELSECNET 10 03 00 w connection PLC l l aa Supporting routing parameter setting with Communication driver to PLC network 2 43V x x x GT Designer2 MELSECNET H 03 01
209. 0 When the 0 When the controlstation master station is selected is selected STATION dd 1110B4 1 to 64 When a 119 169 1 to 64 When a normal station local station is is selected selected CPU No 0 to 4 Set this item only for the MELSEC Q ladder monitor 1 When the station No is set to the host station FF set the network No to 0 For the operation of the key window see the following Subsection 2 4 3 Key window setting columns and operation procedure O Entry is completed by touching the key and the key window closes Point 7 In the case of Ethernet connection Set a monitor target using GT Designer2 in advance For further information about the setting of monitor target see the following 377 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual From previous page PLC reading screen CHNo 1 NETWK No O ST FF CPUNo 0 READ SELECTION MAIN COMM PROG Paget Exit Ladder Break PLCRD SetUp Drive SEL READ Pa gel Select Cancel CFCmnt List ail All Read CHNo 1 NETWK No O ST FF CPUNo 0 READ SELECTION Name Type MAIN COMM MAINI PROG MAIN PROG A DISPLAY USE OF EXISTING DA SELECT USE OF CLEAR j Exit Ladder Break n E Cer ee ML PLC READING DATA DISPLAY Ex gt CODE ANG AACE 1 NETWK No O ST FF CPUNo 0 READ SELECTION Name Type MAIN COMM MAINI PROG MAIN PROG Paget Exit Ladder Break PLCRD SetUp Drive SEL READ Pa gel S
210. 0 90 ASFADMOGUIE MAMI lia lied dada 6 31 696 AGTOAD Module MOMONG acena reece eee ic acted orien a a 6 33 65 7 AGCTETD module MONO ei nata dia 6 35 6 5 8 A616DAV module monitoring sss sese sese eee eee eee 6 38 609 AGTEDA module MON ION ir lla isa 6 39 60 10 AGUS MOGUIE MONITORING pairere an a aa aoa canes 6 40 8011 AGZLS Mod le MONTON 10 A A A A AA 6 41 625 12 ADG 1 module Monto ascitis iad 6 42 6 5 13 AD70 mod le Montorng a a di 6 43 6 5 14 AD OD module ielas e 6 45 60 19 AD Fl MOAUCMONMONN esana a de e tad 6 47 6 5 16 AD72ATSD71 Mod le dd ol 6 50 6 517 AJ71PT32 59 module MONTON sica ii 6 53 6918 ATSDO I Moqule TIO MOM sacd oi lic 6 55 6 5 19 A1S64AD module monitoring sss sees eee eee eee 6 56 6 520 AlooZDA module Monto G dl 6 57 6 5 21 A1SD7O module MONItOTINQ cccoooccncccccccnncnnoconnnnnnncnnononcnnnononnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnrnnonnanennnnnarinennnaness 6 58 65 22 A1S62AD module Monto diia add 6 59 6 6 6 5 23 A1SJ71PT32 S3 module monitoring iiciin 6 5 24 A1S63ADA module monitoring sees sees eee eee 6 5 25 AD75P A1SD75P module monitoring e sese eee ee eee 6 5 26 AJ711D1 1D2 R4 A15J711D1 1D2 R4 module monitoring 6 5 27 A1S68DAV module monitoring sese esse ee eee 6 5 28 A1S68DAI module monitoring sss eee ee eee eee 6 5 29 A1S68AD module monitoring sese ee eee eee 6 5 30 A1S64TCTT BW A1S64TCRT BW S1 monitoring eee 6 5 31 Q68ADV Q68ADI Q64AD module monitoring sss s
211. 00000 VLC oooooooo S PC o0000000 INP o0000000 Encoder resolution 131072 pulse rev Slot 2 RES oOoooooog WNG ooo00000 Slot 3 CR oo000000 SALM oo000000 2s SP1 oo000000 OP oo000000 Slot 4 SP2 o0000000 MBR o0000000 Slot 5 SPS 1090000000 BING 00000000 A STI goooooo00 Slot 6 ST2 o0000000 TT M jooo00000 Slot CM2 o0000000 Slot 8 EMG ooooooog 000000000 Option RST o0000000 RS2 0000000 S S aril Function device display screen Amplifier information display screen Unit composition list screen Absolute position data Value of each motor edge pulse Command pulse value 1696721441 59469128 Encoder data lt Current position gt lt Position at power loss gt Absolute encoder data pulse Absolute encoder data CYC Motor edge pulse value CYCO Motor edge pulse value 125473 0 Number of motor rotations rev Number of motor rotations ABS 19824 ABSO 0 D00 agn a ee ABS data display screen 9 4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens 9 4 5 Diagnostics function 9 23 de oc uu a lt O gt oc Lu 0 oc O Z le CNC MONITOR FUNCTION BACKUP RESTORE SFC MONITOR CNC DATA I O IAPPENDICES NDEX Point P If the DI DO display screen data or function device display screen data only when AAA A monitoring the MR J2M O DU has not been downloaded to the GOT Monitor data not found is displayed and the subsequent screens are not displayed DI DO displa
212. 01ST FFIJCPUNo 0 ise DW 43 68378428 G DS IICA TES TR ENR ONRSE T ChNo 1 NetNo 0 ST FFICPUNO 0 TC MONITOR TESTRMENUIFORMN SET E ETO TESTREMENUJIFORMIA SETA Chio OE T FF CPUNO 0 ChNo 1 NetNo O ST FF CPUNo 0 FILE NAME MAIN PG IZO NO 0 T O PY U o 25 L Operation start 1 PY 0 S Products Line A 4901 2 2 PV SV z T 12600 T OS Pro MER Line C O J HD O1F Qu PO Pr GOT with VGA or higher resolution GOT with QVGA resolution e For GT 1555 VTBD a Full mode When starting the system monitor the GOT displays the monitor screen in the full mode The GOT displays one of the four monitor screens The screen display size differs depending on the monitor screen to be displayed b Quad mode With the button for switching the number of monitor screens the monitor screen is divided into four windows The GOT can simultaneously display the four kinds of monitor screens DOTA ESTI MENU FORMMNSET_ le Edna O AO o ee Z E PEO QPG 1 T a E R w 4 Full mode Quad mode 4 The monitor screen in the full mode is four times bigger than each monitor screen in the quad mode For displaying screens commonly used in the system including the key window the monitor screen size in the full mode is the same as each monitor screen size in the quad mode For details of switching the number of the monitor screens refer to the following Section 2 3
213. 0202 30402 75FA 76C2 30602 30802 778A 7852 30203 30403 75FB 76C3 30603 30803 778B 7853 30204 30404 75FC 76C4 30604 30804 778C 7854 GEG S E Ai A Lets ek dynamic IKE 6 112 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 5 36 QD75MH module monitoring 6 6 Operating I O Module Monitor Screen This section describes the operation of the various screens in the intelligent module monitor function when itoring input or output modul a monitoring input or output modules a E oe E 5 6 6 1 Specifying the module to be monitored This section describes how to start monitoring for an input or output module with the intelligent module Z monitor function o 6 gt Operation procedure 7 Display the System Configuration screen See Sec 6 4 1 Specify the module to be monitored Touch the position at which the module is displayed O 6 gt zZ 1 From among the modules installed in the corresponding ce base unit specify the module whose Input or Output aS is displayed Ir Refer to Section 6 4 1 for the way to specify the intelligent function module O T Display the monitor screen for the specified module 2 For information on confirming the displayed contents and 7 subsequent operation please see Sec 6 6 2 lt Tests cannot be conducted on input or output modules O ep m D O S 2 O To Sec 13 2 UU gt Q G E uu 9 y JJ ul Z oc O E Z le
214. 0219 8 88 238 0058 OOEE 388 538 0184 021A 9 89 239 0059 OOEF 389 539 0185 021B 1 70 220 0046 00DC QD75P QD75D OPR basic parameters ec ew ar 370 520 0172 0208 DS Hae HMw OO BIS RI 71 221 0047 00DD 1 IE ie MAE 3 1 521 0173 0209 SiS Cole T E S LO 200000 0000 Cr J 3 is as an ee E dire ies Zi 2 0 378 528 017A 0210 E aro E J to 35999399 D 1 i to 1000000 ATT A 6 80 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 5 34 QD75P QD75D module monitoring Buffer MD a address Screen example PO 916 A 0394 QD75P QD75D 1 0 signal amp Status OOOO a eo 1016 1116 03F8 045C e E 817 917 0331 0395 ope MES Sd Aa ao la 1017 1117 03F9 045D 6 830 930 033E 03A2 1030 1130 0406 046A 7 831 931 033F 03A3 1031 1131 0407 046B OVERVIEW lowen ane signal Upper imihia Si etre Ye l es oi ere E Beia Units pE DEL T DAS OO 2 a fe eat EEN CEP LEO zi Are Wear PON Sena Jey counten clear Speed change Ul ae SYSTEM MONITOR LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION Areeta TET TETE E A h J L D A HIE DT QG C E deus ETLE Ciena 19 Col 1 areetan ene Reena Le MELSEC A LIST EDITOR Arm DAI eE Ma EA iil cy x 10 BIT Sec I MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR O UU gt Q G E uu 9 y JJ ul Z oc O E Z le NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 81 6 5 34 QD75P QD75D module monitoring Buf
215. 029 1F58 to 1F5D 14000 to 14002 36B0 to 36B2 O 3 14004 to 14012 36B4 to 36BC Z 14014 to 14022 36BE to 36C6 14024 to 14029 36C8 to 36CD S op 20000 to 20002 4E20 to 4E22 gt 4 20004 to 20012 4E24 to 4E2C 20014 to 20022 4E2E to 4E36 20024 to 20029 4E38 to 4E3D Po JE O Z 1 30100 30200 07594 075F8 25 30300 30400 0765C 076C0 cr Z Q gt 30101 30201 07595 075F9 25 30301 30401 0765D 076C1 3 30102 30202 07596 075FA 4 30302 30402 0765E 076C2 5 5 30103 30203 07597 075FB Q 30303 30403 0765F 076C3 7 6 30104 30204 07598 075FC 30304 30404 07660 076C4 m i 7 30105 30205 07599 075FD 30305 30405 07661 076C5 o e lo 8 30106 30206 0759A 075FE El TA ae La AXI Ser 30306 30406 07662 076C6 9 30107 30207 0759B 075FF L 30307 30407 07663 076C7 10 30108 30208 0759C 07600 S mn 30308 30408 07664 076C8 ne wa u 11 30109 30209 0759D 07601 30309 30409 07665 076C9 O UU gt Q G E uu 9 y JJ ul Z oc O E Z le NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 97 6 5 35 QD75M module monitoring Buffer memory address Screen example No QD75M Servo regulation parameter Part 1 ACI 857 Padel Tas PT maanimena AEA AIT i L gpt enz a la ve F i zi Ey 07 CHE AXIS ts vey QD75M Servo regulation parameter Part2 1 PEr
216. 04E 00E4 378 528 017A 0210 72 to 73 0048 to 0049 222 to 223 OODE to OODF 372 to 373 0174 to 0175 522 to 523 020A to 020B 74 to 75 004A to 004B 224 to 225 OOEO to 00E1 374 to 375 0176 to 0177 524 to 525 020C to 020D 76 to 77 004C to 004D 226 to 227 00E2 to 00E3 3 6 to 377 0178 to 0179 926 to 527 020E to 020F Buffer MO a address Screen example E 916 E 0394 QD75M 1 0 signal amp Status OOOO AMES 1016 1116 03F8 045C Se S 2 817 917 0331 0395 1017 1117 03F9 045D Sp r PES Y LC oyen att Sita m speed cont Tag ay i TL malt KT G aul ZLEE f Upper imina Sierra SS EE Qt gt i ona er Thane PLO pal a Lar y 7 L ot D NET Sienan BIS complete Tiag HAY m EZ D A H DH r tA aji L OE OW G PAE MA TIME Gevect speed Change Wl jag 818 to 819 0332 to 0333 0D75M Axis monitor data 1 e 918 to 919 0396 to 0397 1 Fret bb es STER ee TED ps els y Peres a EI eee 1018 to 1019 O3FA to 03FB TALS ns DEEA ont flag A 1118 to 1119 045E to 045F che prac Vln 802 to 803 0322 to 0323 pd 319 degree 10 902 to 903 0386 to 0387 Cinema Om APUESTA 1002 to 1003 O3EA to 03EB 1102 to 1103 044E to 044F 820 to 821 0334 to 0335 920 to 921 0398 to 0399 Cri Al oh ETLE Acer ES MINTY E 19 1020 to 1021 O3FC to O3FD Then Mien D PUES it 1120 to 1121 0460 to 0461 810 to 811 032A to 032B 910 to 911 038E to 038F 1010 to 1011 03F2 to 03F3 3 4 5 1110 to 1111 0456 to 0457 812 to 813 032C to 032D
217. 0544ENG F Compatible with GT Designer2 Version 2 58L Partial corrections Section 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 5 1 2 6 1 2 7 1 2 8 1 2 9 3 3 1 3 2 1 3 2 4 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 4 3 4 1 3 4 2 3 5 1 to 3 5 7 3 6 1 to 3 6 7 3 7 1 4 2 1 5 2 1 5 3 5 4 9 to 5 4 11 7 1 8 2 1 8 4 11 9 2 1 9 4 8 Partial additions Section 5 2 3 5 4 1 Additions Section 3 3 5 3 8 5 4 12 14 10 Chapter 11 Section 3 8 gt 3 9 Section 5 4 12 gt 5 4 13 Section 5 4 13 gt 5 4 14 SH NA 080544ENG G Compatible with GT Designer2 Version 2 63R Partial corrections Section 3 2 1 8 2 3 8 3 8 4 1 8 4 6 Partial additions Chapter 1 Section 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 4 2 2 3 3 2 2 3 2 3 3 2 4 6 2 2 6 2 3 8 2 1 8 4 4 10 2 1 10 2 2 10 2 3 10 4 10 5 11 2 1 Appt Additions Section 11 5 Chapter 12 Section 11 5 gt 11 6 SH NA 080544ENG H Compatible with GT Designer2 Version 2 72A Partial corrections Section 1 1 3 1 1 4 3 2 1 3 3 3 10 2 10 2 1 11 3 1 11 3 2 11 4 1 11 5 2 11 5 3 12 4 Partial additions Section 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 3 1 3 2 4 3 4 1 11 1 11 2 1 11 2 3 11 3 3 Additions Section 11 3 4 SH NA 080544ENG I Compatible with GT Designer2 Version 2 77F Partial corrections Section 1 1 3 2 2 3 3 2 3 7 2 3 Partial additions Chapter 1 Section 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 4 2 2 1 3 1 3 2 1 6 2 1 6 2 2 7 1 7 2 1 7 2 2 7 2 4 7 4 1 to 7 4 9 8 2 Appt Additions Chapter 13 Continued to next page Pr
218. 0BO 326 476 0146 01DC 1 27 177 001B 00B1 327 477 0147 01DD 2 28 178 001C 00B2 328 478 0148 01DE 3 29 179 001D 00B3 329 479 0149 01DF 24 to 25 0018 to 0019 174 to 175 OOAE to OOAF 324 to 325 0144 to 0145 474 to 475 01DA to 01DB 5 30 180 001E 00B4 330 480 014A 01E0 6 34 184 0022 00B8 334 484 014E 01E4 7 31 181 001F 00B5 331 481 014B 01E1 EEIZ HER nso TE Eel RES MN EEZ IW SEEMS LAZ Pto 10900000 SO sees d ad ad is io JIS GES tine Select SELLE kange T DIORA we nt iG EEIT EH 0D75M Detailed parameters 2 2 Eie E EE a EEE DE ia DIEG L S DS LA er SE Catt ine medir 1 QG LC LC Ms 5 re GODOY AD i 2 Age j SSuaden SLOP 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens Buffer memory address Screen example No QD 75 Detailed parameters 2 1 E oe eu r k l gt 4 50 200 0032 00C8 350 500 015E 01F4 5 51 501 0033 01F5 351 501 015F 01F5 1 52 202 0034 00CA 352 502 0160 01F6 2 53 203 0035 OOCB 353 503 0161 01F7 3 56 206 0038 OOCE 356 506 0164 O1FA 57 207 0039 OOCF 357 507 0165 01FB 5 58 208 003A 00DO 358 508 0166 01FC 94 to 55 204 to 205 0036 to 0037 00CC to 00CD 354 to 355 0162 to 0163 504 to 505 01F8 to 01F9 359 509 0167 01FD 362 512 016A 0200 64 to 65 0040 to 0041 214 to 215 00D6 to 00D7 8 mb 364 to 365 514 to 515
219. 1 GOT setup Backup restoration setting Drive for backup setting A Build in CF card Drive for backup data A Build in CF card LLI oc O E 7 LLI G o Y O lt a O lt x Q O zZ O LC O E Z O gt T ep Item Description Specify the drive for storing backup settings including parameters and passwords for Drive for backup setting controllers Drive for backup data Specify the drive for storing backup data EH O The GOT automatically backs up data when triggers Rise Time specified for each 2 Trigger backup setting Ll backup setting are met a Set the maximum number of backup data to be stored Max of backup data D When 0 is specified the GOT does not check the number of backup data to be stored Point Backup restoration setting The backup restoration setting can also be set in the GOT setup on GT Designer2 gt lt For the GOT setup of GT Designer2 refer to the following manual z K gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual Section 3 8 Setting of GOT Display and Operations GOT Setup 11 3 Display Operation 11 13 11 3 2 Setting storage location for backup data 11 3 3 Security and password By setting the passwords the password authentication is available when the backup restore is executed The password authentication uses the password for the backup restore and passwords for controllers Authentication of the password for the backup restore Automatic authentication of passwords f
220. 1 When connected to a QnACPU and the master station of the MELSECNET II monitoring cannot be done with the keyword being defined When the CPU type of the connection target of the GOT is ANNCPU or AnACPU Even when using the network module of the MELSECNET 10 the network information that can be monitored is the content of the MELSECNET II 7 2 Specifications 7 2 4 Precautions 7 3 Display Operations for display z This section describes the flow until the operation screen for the network monitor is displayed after the S network monitor Option OS is installed in the GOT 5 Z S Turn on the power to the GOT Starting from the special function switch Network monitor set in the F Starting from the utility project data Display the utility Touch the special function switch LC O Me E o 39 After the utility is displayed touch Debug amp self check Refer to the following manual for how to set the special SS ie Debug Network monitor from the Main Menu function switch For how to display the utility refer to the user s manual 237 GT Desi gner2 Version L Screen Design Manual or of the GOT to be used 6 2 Touch Switch 2 T kE 0 ot O UU 2 ULU gt Set the channel number Xx Set the channel number of the Sa E ChNo Comm Driver 4 controller targeted to the network 3 oot D _2 A QnA QCPU QJ71024 ft T
221. 1 Indicates that the device value is a 32 bit two word module 5 Data range 0 Indicates that the device value is a 16 bit one word module 6 Device name Set the name and number of the device to be monitored 7 1 Device number 8 I O number When the initial I O signal of module is displayed with three digits specify the first two digits Initial device number Set the initial device number of the buffer memory in decimal 1 Eor devices that can be set see the following GT Designer 2 Version O Screen Design Manual Section 2 9 Devices that can be set 2 Indicates CC Link connection Intelligent device station 3 Indicates CC Link connection via G4 4 When the station No is set to the host station FF set the network No to 0 Point f Displaying the data range The Entry Monitor Batch Monitor TC Monitor and BM Monitor screens display the data range as shown below e DW 32 bit two word module e Nothing displayed 16 bit one word module Continued to next page 2 4 Operation Procedure Common to the System Monitor Screens 2 21 2 4 2 Entering monitor devices specifying monitor stations and devices OVERVIEW N LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR oc O E Z O Lu E L gt nw MELSEC A LIST EDITOR NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR From previous page DEVICE ENTRY Chio A dl FFICPUNO 0 DEW ICE TBD al
222. 1 NetNo JST FF CPUNG 0 St 3234 The batch monitor function monitors up to 16 controller devices from the device number specified by the user in a single window L Section 2 6 Batch Monitor BM monitor monitoring Buffer memory On the GT15 EM MONITOR TES TEENUI OF Chio 1 NetNo GIST FFICPUNO 0 O NOL 0 BM The BM monitor function monitors up to 16 devices from the initial device number in the buffer memory of the intelligent function module specified by the user in a single window U Section 2 8 BM Monitor Monitoring Buffer Memory 2 1 Features 2 1 OVERVIEW N LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR oc O E Z O Lu E L gt nw MELSEC A LIST EDITOR NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR Point P 1 Displaying the system monitor screen of the GT16 or GT15 nnes Display methods differ depending on the GOT For the GOT with VGA or higher resolution the monitor screen is divided into four windows The GOT can simultaneously display four different kinds of monitor screens For the GT1555 VTBD the monitor screen can be switched between the full and quad modes with the button for switching the number of monitor screens For the GOT with QVGA resolution the GOT can display one of the four monitor screens as a full screen NATALIA TES MENOR SETENTA TES MENOR SET ChNo 1 NetNo O ST FF ICPUNO 0 ChNo 1 NetNo
223. 1 Outline until starting the system monitor 2 2 2 1 Features 2 Displaying the system monitor screen of the GT11 The GOT can display one of the four monitor screens as a full screen CANA TEST MERC FORM Chio 11NetNo 0 ST FFICPUNo LO OVERVIEW N 490 oc O E Z O Lu E L gt nw LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC A LIST EDITOR MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 2 1 Features 2 3 Data can be changed by test operation For further information see the following Section 2 9 Test Operation Test example When turning ON MO When changing the present value of DO On the GT15 On the GT15 AAA A EhNo eT oe EEN 1 Chia 1 Ne LNG a FF CPUNG 0 DEVICE TR RST eh aa le DEVICE i YLID UY Ls jajw 2 jsf yi BF ip _ _ DY WY R lt gt ATA AA D SIS S S TT I 6 Enter Del At EJ6 4 Enter Del A 1 Testing a bit device A device specified by the user is turned on and off 2 Testing a word device A specified value is written to a device specified by the user 3 Testing a timer counter Specified values are written as the present and set values of a device specified by the user 4 Testing buffer memory A specified value is written to buffer memory specified by the user The display format and device comment no comment display can be switched For further information see th
224. 101 points can be set for scale value number Function to collect data only when display trigger is met is added Up to 101 points can be set for scale value number Function to collect data only when display trigger is met is added When Bit Trigger is not met whether to enable Hold Display can be selected Q Version of GT l GT GT Soft T l Version of OS Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 2 73B Standard monitor OS 03 09 O 2 09K Standard monitor OS 01 02 DEN X 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 DEN x 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 DEN x E AL 2 82L Standard monitor OS 03 13 ao x et pean ME X 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 lolo X 2 47Z Standard monitor OS 03 02 2 09K Standard monitor OS 01 02 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 2 27D 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 1 Standard monitor OS 02 04 2 27D O X Standard monitor OS 02 04 O 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 lolo O 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 fo o O Continued to next page App 23 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR CNC MONITOR FUNCTION BACKUP RESTORE CNC DATA I O SFC MONITOR 7 ui 9 O Z m o o lt Item Bar graph Statistics graph Scatter graph Historical Trend
225. 119 45E to 45F 1102 to 1103 44E to 44F 820 to 821 334 to 335 810 to 811 32A to 32B 812 to 813 32C to 32D 920 to 921 398 to 399 910 to 911 38E to 38F 912 to 913 390 to 391 3FC to 3FD 3F2 to 3F3 3F4 to 3F5 460 to 461 1020 to 1021 1010 to 1011 1012 to 1013 1120 to 1121 1110 to 1111 456 to 45 7 1112 to 1113 458 to 459 9 830 930 1030 1130 33E 3A2 406 46A 831 931 1031 1131 33F 3A3 407 46B 6 103 6 5 36 QD75MH module monitoring LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR OVERVIEW SYSTEM MONITOR MELSEC A LIST EDITOR O UU gt Q G E uu 9 y JJ ul Z oc O E Z le NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR Screen example QD7BMH Axis monitor data 2 QD7BMH Axis monitor data 3 TAO Mne ao EGEZ 10 dear D PESE DTS Axis monitor data 4 13 to or re a E fey A IS Lo e ej UO SAO Bo PBDI REEE 7 PDOT 7 lt PEGI PSG bey RAIG Lo Pb45 LO PISE to PUSZ Lo EAU LO RSSA value 1S character codes iiss Codey Resenerat ive negeneral lve padrao Acta Cad TT GST Jejete pete fe 6 104 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 5 36 QD75MH module monitoring 848 to 849 850 to 851 852 to 853 948 to 949 950 to 951 952 to 953 1048 to 1049 1050 to 1051 1052 to 1053 1148 to 1149 1150 to 1151 1152 to 1153 350 to 351 352 to 353 304 to 355 3B4
226. 16 80SLTT GT15 70VLTT GT15 VHNB GT15 QFNB GT15 MESB48M GT16 90PSCW GT16 80PSCW GT15 90PSCW GT15 80PSCW GT15 70PSCW GT15 60PSCW GT15 50PSCW GT11 50PSCW GT10 50PSCW GT10 30PSCW GT10 20PSCW GT05 70PCO GT11 50UCOV GT15 70STAND GT15 60ATT 97 GT15 50ATT 95W GT15 90XLTT GT15 70VLTN GT15 QFNB16M GT11 50FNB GT16 90PSGW GT16 80PSGW GT15 90PSGW GT15 80PSGW GT15 70PSGW GT15 60PSGW GT15 50PSGW GT11 50PSGW GT10 50PSGW GT10 30PSGW GT10 20PSGW GT05 60PCO A9GT 50STAND GT15 60ATT 96 GT15 50ATT 85 GT15 80SLTT GT15 60VLTT mw Software Abbreviations and generic terms Description SWOD5C GTWK2 E SWZ D5C GTWK2 EV SWLID5C GTD2 E SWOD5C GTD2 EV Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer2 for GOT1000 GOT900 series GT Works2 Version GT Designer2 Version GT Designer2 GT Converter2 GT Simulator2 GT SoftGOT1000 GT SoftGOT2 Abbreviation of data conversion software GT Converter2 for GOT1000 GOT900 series Abbreviation of screen simulator GT Simulator 2 for GOT1000 GOT900 series Abbreviation of monitoring software GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviation of monitoring software GT SoftGOT2 GX Developer Abbreviation of SWLJD5C GPPW E EV SWLID5F GPPW E type software package Abbreviation of SWLJD5C LLT E EV type ladder logic test tool function software packages SW5D5C LLT EV or later versions GX Simulator Document Converter Abbreviation of document data c
227. 2 gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual Section 13 2 Hard Copy 5 4 14 Action for an incorrect key input If an incorrect key is input cancel the input contents Operation 1 Before touching the key before reading writing the input contents Before touching the key touch the key 2 After touching the key after reading writing the input contents Write the command again U 3 5 4 5 Writing commands Commands finalized by writing and inserting operations are revised overwritten with the program writing 5 4 Operation Procedures 5 4 13 Hard copy output 5 5 Error Messages and Corrective Actions This section describes the error messages displayed when the MELSEC FX list editor is executed and l corrective action im gt O Error Messeage Corrective action ds AS Check the protected operation rotected i j iari i ie air ops a Om all Clear the keyword protection or delete the keyword T Can not operate while or incorrect write protect keyword is set E protected L 3 Section 5 4 11 Keywords 2 PLC parameter error An FX PLC parameter is defective Set correct parameters in the FX PLC C gt Check the FX PLC cable and GOT for abnormality o The communication with the FX PLC is PLC communications error Check whether the communication settings are correct defective or not LC A writing operation etc has been made 2 PLC is running Stop the FX PLC A wh
228. 2 10 Error Messages and Corrective Action 2 56 3 LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION 3 1to 3 74 3 1 Features gai 3 2 Specifications 3 4 SAT SVSiem congu al OM AA A sue eaelladarauaionmna Gls 3 4 3 2 2 Devices and range that can be monitored esse sees 3 9 323 ACCESS LING LT 3 11 32A oo AAA nee ee ee ee eee eee eee ee 3 11 3 3 Display 3 15 3 3 1 Outline until the start eee 3 15 3 3 2 Setting and deleting media for saving ladder data sss 3 20 DIS U Doa ofi 3 21 3 3 4 Searching from the monitor screen eee e eee eee eee eee 3 31 3 3 5 Reading comment files from CF Cards sese eee eee eee 3 36 3 4 Operation Procedure Common 34 37 3 4 1 Information and key functions displayed on the Screen sese eee eee eee 3 37 yA Fal CODY OU OUT ai Ad 3 44 3 5 Switching the Display Format 3 45 3 5 1 Display switching of 16 bit one word 32 bit two word modules sss sese eee eee 3 45 3 5 2 Display switching of decimal numbers hexadecimal numbers sse eee eee eee 3 46 3 5 3 Switching comment no comment display sss sees ee eee eee 3 47 3 5 4 Displaying 32 characters Of COMMENTS oocccccooccnnccnnccnncnoncconnnnnncnconnnncnnnnnnrnnnnnnnrnnennnarinnnnaness 3 48 2907 DISPO MO OS T 3 50 395 6 DISDIAVING statemen S at ido R Ea aG 3 51 3 5 7 Language switching of the sequence program MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor 3 52 3 6 Search Operation 3 54 3 6 1 R lt Le lt e Te 0 THT 305 36 2 OCOMACH point SANG T 3 57 316 3 COINS E AG iis an
229. 2 Specifications 6 2 3 Precautions 6 3 Display g x x x LU Operation procedure until the start of the intelligent module monitor gt Lu This subsection describes the flow until the operation screen for the intelligent module monitor is S displayed after the intelligent module monitor Option OS is installed in the GOT LC O Z O Turn on the power to the GOT Starting from the special function switch intelligent module monitor z set in the project data Se Starting from the utility a Display the utility Touch the special function switch oc O i y 4 O 2E 39 After the utility is displayed touch Debug 8 self check gt Refer to the following manual for how to set the special fie Debug gt Intelligent module monitor from the function switch MANEN a GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design oc For how to display the utility refer to the user s manual Manual 6 2 Touch Switch O of the GOT to be used O kE D q O UU 2 ULU Set the channel number network gt number station number STATION taal SNN L Set the channel number network number S L and station number of the PLC CPU Fal eee D connected to the GOT 3 A QnA OCPU QU7IC24 z _4 MELSECNET 10 EN nis 09 Communication setting window m L UU O Continued to next page UU gt Q G E uu 9 y JJ ul Z oc O E Z le NETWORK
230. 2767 Touch e screen E 100 68378428 DW 3 DW DEVICE MONITOR SETH E Touch TEST ChNo 1 NetNo OJST FFICPUNO 0 ouc y Test menu screen DEVICE MONITOR aU uc oils The test menu screen appears ChNo 1 NetNo O ST FF CPUNO 0 pp _ gt r Touch SET RST SET VAL VALUE 16 VALUE 32 BM VAL 16 or EEE HHHH EEE BM VAL 32 2 EEE Operation example touch SET VAL For a detailed description of each key function see the following Setting key window screen Section 2 9 2 Information displayed on the test menu screen and key functions x l t ChNo 1 NetNo O ST FF CPUNo 0 The setting key window screen appears Device A ee Display example set value operation screen of T timer and jal yi C counter ES eee EL For further infomation about each setting key window see the JT CIA following EA Enter Del AC Section 2 9 2 Information displayed on the test menu screen and key functions For further information about the test operation procedure see the following lt gt Section 2 9 4 Test operation procedure 2 9 Test Operation 2 49 2 9 1 Procedure for displaying the test menu screen and the setting key window screen OVERVIEW NO LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR oc O E Z O Lu E wn gt wn MELSEC A LIST EDITOR NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 2 9 2 Inf
231. 3 10 1520 1620 5FO 654 1720 1820 6B8 71C 11 1521 1621 5F1 655 1721 1821 6B9 71D 1522 to 1523 5F2 to 5F3 12 1622 to 1623 656 to 657 1722 to 1723 6BA to 6BB 1822 to 1823 71E to 71F 13 1524 1624 5F4 658 1724 1824 6BC 720 14 1525 1625 5F5 659 1725 1825 68D 721 6 106 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 5 36 QD75MH module monitoring Buffer memory address Screen example No 1 1538 1638 602 670 QD75MH Axis control data 3 1738 1838 6CA 72E LU Z Ej H Z DTE 2 1 548 1 648 60C 670 gt m E 1748 1848 6D4 738 gt ata n ei 1549 1649 60D 671 pe lect J oGhess Ane data 3 SE Axisd 1749 1849 6D5 739 POSIT ENON ETZ SEVENE s is 1550 1650 60E 672 7 BA Bean ape D R bes Seca EZ D DTE H RES TEE 1 7 5 0 1 8 50 6 06 7 3 A O y S ESTO 7 Tr Z ie aera e E S 5 1540 1640 604 668 O it put 1740 1840 6CB 730 ZU eh gt op 1541 1641 605 669 1742 1842 6CE 732 1743 1843 6D0 733 1551 1651 60F 673 LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION 1736 to 1737 6C8 to 6C9 7 1836 to 1837 72C to 72D 8 UU gt Q G E uu 9 y JJ ul Z oc O E Z le 1552 to 1553 610 to 611 lo 1652 to 1653 674 to 675 1752 to 1753 6D8 to 6D9 O 1852 to 1853 73C to 73D O kE a 1559 1659 617 67B do 1759 1859 6DF 743 ES LL o o E gt 1517 1617 5ED 651 QD75MH Axis control data 4 1717 1817 6B5 719 3 1518 to 1519 5EE to 5EF
232. 3 03 2 00A Standard monitor OS 02 02 HEN x Comment Comment group can be used 2 SU Standard monitor OS 02 02 lo Enables setting the background color of Part 2 47Z O the figures in the Parts Editor screen User defined key window display can be switched in synchronization with the 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 O language switching device In the user defined key window input Key Window range maximum value and input range 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 O minimum value are displayed The current value is displayed in the key d 2 82L Standard monitor OS 03 13 O window 65 or later station numbers in the MELSECNET G network system can be Device setting 2 63R Standard monitor OS 03 07 set with using Universal model QCPU as a relay station Continued to next page X App 20 Item Object rename Lamp Touch switch Touch switch Version of GT Description Designer2 Function to allow setting of object name 2 32J Windows fonts applicable 2 09K Stroke font applicable 2 43V Figure created as a part can be used to a lamp Comment Group can be used 2 43V 2 43V Enables specifying the transparent color of a figure when using an image file as a 2 472 figure Windows fonts applicable Stroke font applicable Figure created as a part can be used to a touch switch The toutch switch on the ladder monitor PX Developer Function call is added t
233. 3 How to use Backup Data Conversion Tool 11 6 Errors and Corrective Actions LC m L gt x aa Common to backup and restoration of The extended function OS of the backup The backup restore function cannot be used Install the extended function OS on the GOT restore is not installed on the GOT The backup setting is not stored in the CF card Install a CF card or USB memory with the 5 oo or USB memory in the GOT backup setting stored 5 3 The backup setting is not found o l 2 No CF card or USB memory is installed to the e Check the storage location for the backup 92 drive specified for storing the backup setting setting with the utility Si The backup data are not stored in the CF card e Install a CF card or USB memory with the 1 1 or USB memory in the GOT No CF card or USB memory is installed to the backup data stored The backup data are not found l e Check the storage location for the backup drive specified for storing the backup data data with the utility e Check with the administrator of the system The backup restore cannot be executed regarding the password for the backup LLI GC O E O LLI 2 ou Y O lt m The user does not remember the password because the user does not know the password restore for the backup restore The password is incorrect The communication settings and communication driver for the GOT are e Execute the backup again by using a formatted or new CF ca
234. 31 2 5 1 Information displayed on the Entry Monitor screen and key functions ccooocccnccocccnccnn 2 31 2 5 2 Procedure for entry monitor basic Operation eee eee eee 2 34 25 3 Deleting ent Y COV COS ie ao 2 35 2 6 Batch Monitor 2 36 2 6 1 Information displayed on the Batch Monitor screen and key functi0NS ccooonccnccnnccnccn 2 36 2 6 2 Procedure for batch monitor basic operation sse ee eee eee 2 40 2 7 TC Monitor Monitoring Timers and Counters 2 41 2 7 1 Information displayed on the TC Monitor screen and key functions sse eee eee 2 41 2 2 Procedure for TC monitor basic Operations sees ee eee ee eee eee 2 44 2 3 Procedure for canceling TC monitor keywordS cccooocccnccoonccccnonccnnnnncconcnnnancnononcconcnnanennnns 2 45 2 8 BM Monitor Monitoring Buffer Memory 2 46 2 8 1 Information displayed on the BM Monitor screen and key functions oooccccccoonncncccnocon 2 46 2 8 2 Procedure for BM monitor basic operation oocccccconccnccooncccconnnccnnonnnnnnononaronnnnnanononnnnrinnnnnneos 2 48 2 9 Test Operation 2 49 2 9 1 Procedure for displaying the test menu screen and the setting key window screen 2 49 2 9 2 Information displayed on the test menu screen and key functions ooccccoonnnccccnccnconancnnns 2 50 2 9 3 Information and set items displayed on each setting key window screen sese eee 2 51 2 9 4 Test operation procedure sss sese 2 53 2 9 0 Testoperati n basic eiee e B 2 55
235. 3CC 1072 1172 0430 0494 873 973 0369 03CD 1073 1173 0431 0495 874 974 036A 03CE 1074 1174 0432 0496 2 877 977 036D 03D1 1077 1177 0435 0499 3 878 978 036E 03D2 1078 1178 0436 049A 4 879 979 036F 03D3 1079 1179 0437 049B 5 880 980 0370 03D4 1080 1180 0438 049C 824 to 825 0338 to 0339 924 to 925 039C to 039D 1024 to 1025 0400 to 0401 1124 to 1125 0464 to 0465 826 926 033A 039E 1026 1126 0402 0466 1 se 2 oo 816 916 0330 0394 03F8 045C 1016 1116 ae lL 032E to 032F 0392 to 0393 03F6 to 03F7 045A to 045B O5F6 to 05F7 065A to 065B O6BE to O6BF 0722 to 0723 1 2 817 917 0331 0395 1017 1117 03F9 045D 817 917 0331 0395 1017 1117 03F9 045D 1528 1628 05F8 065C 1728 1828 06C0 0724 6 9 oo 6 5 35 QD75M module monitoring LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR OVERVIEW SYSTEM MONITOR MELSEC A LIST EDITOR O UU gt Q G E uu 9 y JJ ul Z oc O E Z le NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR Screen example QD 5M Position speed control te 2 3 6 94 EG LS O setting ATEA a E IE ein ee GI EEE fi to 10000000 pullee seq 1 BEI WiGh espero TEME ELE ii speed TTT EST D BG EEZ EIS HEE E L Un 5 data NG MAS PUN ey a G to 35999999 Udegrecy i SEE ELEZE EET Step start MOTO Beer
236. 4 4 5 Command input procedures 5 For extension timer extension counter of AnA and AnUCPU When the extension timer 1256 to T2047 and the extension counter C256 to C1023 are input as the first device of the command input the first device and the device number Ex When OUT T256 D500 is input S E gt o OUT T 2 gt 5 6 GO 6 fi The device D500 for the T256 setting value 2 on the parameter is automatically displayed S O Point 7 When the extension timer and the extension counter are used be sure to set the 257 points or more and the setting value device D W R on the parameter for 3 both the timer and the counter 29 Sire 4 4 6 Hard copy output Screens of the MELSEC A list editor can be stored to a memory card in BMP JPEG file format or printed with a printer Refer to the following for the hard copy e Starting the MELSEC A list editor from the ladder monitor _ gt 3 4 2 Hard copy output oc O E m Li E 9 mr q 6 Ll 104 I H e Setting the hard copy with GT Designer2 L gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual Section 13 2 Hard Copy Gs A os o 4 4 7 Action if an incorrect key is input If an incorrect key is input cancel the input contents 2 Operation 35 1 Before touching the key before reading writing the input contents Before touching the key touch the key o 2 After touching the key
237. 40 1740 0604 0668 06CC 1840 1541 1641 0730 0605 0669 1741 1841 1542 06CD 0731 0606 1642 1742 1842 066A 06CE 0732 1543 1643 1743 0607 066B O6CF 4 direction in degrees PSone 45 eit 2 Lett re 6 84 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 5 34 QD75P QD75D module monitoring Screen example No 1717 1817 06B5 0719 pl 1618 to 1619 0652 to 0653 1718 to 1719 O6B6 to 06B7 1818 to 1819 071A to 071B 1534 to 1535 O5FE to O5FF 1634 to 1635 0662 to 0663 1734 to 1735 06C6 to 06C7 1834 to 1835 072A to 072B 1536 to 1537 0600 to 0601 1636 to 1637 0664 to 0665 1736 to 1737 06C8 to 06C9 1836 to 1837 072C to 072D OVERVIEW TE AAA SNE P U 19 a acn a eee TA Oe to 2113307 Ange Maisa a E SEAE Sumy 107 Cinch 57 5 J DAA PANE SET S A SoG operation sange Clases L I T 2 FABS LOS TOPS LRT H O PI MIO CA alo Seung SISTER SEEE ine EA 2 nange EEE ale Ange AECE E SYSTEM MONITOR 1212 to 1291 04BC to 050B LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION EDITOR 050D to 054C 054E to 058D 1293 to 1356 1358 to 1421 D O le Jens Rae a H ha De cea JeJelelelelelejs ein Fae ze TT oes HE Y ee UU gt Q G E uu 9 y JJ ul Z oc O E Z le EI 1 Es FENE 000000600 Z pia a Ne fa a lee TS La S El TS A S oococoocoot S S MELSEC FX LIST MELSEC A LIST EDITOR NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Scr
238. 50 PL 32 083 Balice Phone 48 0 12 630 47 00 Fax 48 0 12 630 47 01 Sirius Trading amp Services srl Aleea Lacul Morii Nr 3 RO 060841 Bucuresti Sector 6 Phone 40 0 21 430 40 06 Fax 40 0 21 430 40 02 Craft Con amp Engineering d 0 0 Bulevar Svetog Cara Konstantina 80 86 SER 18106 Nis Phone 381 0 18 292 24 4 5 Fax 381 0 18 292 24 4 5 INEA SR d 0 0 Izletnicka 10 SER 113000 Smederevo Phone 381 0 26 617 163 Fax 381 0 26 617 163 AutoCont Control s r o Radlinsk ho 47 SK 02601 Dolny Kubin Phone 421 0 43 5868210 Fax 421 0 43 5868210 CS MTrade Slovensko s r o Vajanskeho 58 SK 92101 Piestany Phone 421 0 33 7742 760 Fax 421 0 33 7735 144 INEA d o o Stegne 11 SI 1000 Ljubljana Phone 386 0 1 513 8100 Fax 386 0 1 513 8170 Beijer Electronics AB Box 426 SE 20124 Malmo Phone 46 0 40 35 86 00 Fax 46 0 40 35 86 02 Econotec AG Hinterdorfstr 12 CH 8309 Niirensdorf Phone 41 0 44 838 48 11 Fax 41 0 44 838 48 12 GTS TURKEY Dar laceze Cad No 43 KAT 2 TR 34384 Okmeydant Istanbul Phone 90 0 212 320 1640 Fax 90 0 212 320 1649 CSC Automation Ltd 15 M Raskova St Fl 10 Office 1010 UA 02002 Kiev Phone 380 0 44 494 33 55 Fax 380 0 44 494 33 66 MOLDOVA NETHERLANDS NORWAY POLAND ROMANIA SERBIA SERBIA SLOVAKIA SLOVAKIA SLOVENIA SWEDEN SWITZERLAND UK
239. 54 to 855 0356 to 0357 954 to 955 O3BA to 03BB 1054 to 1055 041E to 041F 1154 to 1155 0482 to 0483 896 956 0358 03BC 1056 1156 0420 0484 216 G S U 1 4 2 5 3 857 957 0359 03BD 1057 1157 0421 0485 6 i a L C e caracte coden ISS Codey 899 959 035B 03BF 1059 1159 0423 0487 860 960 035C 03C0 1060 1160 0424 0488 861 961 035D 03C1 1061 1161 0425 0489 862 962 035E 03C2 1062 1162 0426 048A 863 963 035F 03C2 1063 1163 0427 048B 864 to 869 0360 to 0365 964 to 969 03C4 to 0309 1064 to 1069 0428 to 042D 1164 to 1169 048C to 0491 858 958 035A 03BE 1058 1158 0422 0486 6 92 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 5 35 QD75M module monitoring Buffer memory address Screen example No II e DE Che T END QD75M OPR REA Coa om 2 1 pulser i j L degree 105 is S T A i 12300 le om 3 s830 Te e o E L Hm i0 degree 107 Cinch 10 pulse DE lo risa Tis l Ching 107 ae EEE R all Ez Regeneratie load ratio Bemal ISE ET Peak load ratio SET Data MONIT RESET Che Menu END Speed poe Mon eyiienineg late ear SI IE IES NOS Speed pos On EOS 102 SWI EZ bET enabled OEA TERA 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens HEX 870 970 0366 03CA 1070 1170 042E 0492 871 971 0367 03CB 1071 1171 042F 0493 1 872 972 0368 0
240. 595 XTBA Standard monitor OS 02 02 GT1595 XTBD Standard monitor OS 03 00 GT1585 STBD Standard monitor OS 02 02 GT1585V STBA GT1585V STBD Standard monitor OS 03 00 GT1575 STBD Standard monitor OS 02 02 GT1575V STBA GT1575V STBD Standard monitor OS 03 00 GT1575 VTBD 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 Continued to next page App 1 Target Models GT1575 VNBA GT1575 VNBD GT1572 VNBA GT1572 VNBD GT1565 VTBD GT1562 VNBA GT1562 VNBD GT1555 VTBD GT1555 QTBD GT1555 QSBD GT1550 QLBD GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDQ GT1150 QLBDA GT1155 QTBD GT1155HS QSBD to GT1150HS QLBD GT SoftGOT1000 GT15 QBUS 2 GT15 ABUS 2 GT15 RS2 9P GT15 RS4 9S GT15 RS4 TE GT15 J71GP23 SX GT16M V4 GT16M R2 GT16M V4R1 GT16M ROUT GT16M MMR GT15 CFCD GT15 CFEX CO8SET GT15 SOUT GT15 DIO GT15 DIOR Added connection types 1 For GT16 Bus connection Supporting connection to BUS Direct connection to Supporting the direct CPU connection CPU Computer link Supporting the computer link connection connection App 2 Version of GT Designer2 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 Version of OS 2 58L Standard monitor OS 03 03 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 2 58L Standard monitor OS 03 03 2 73B Standard monitor OS 03 09 2 18U Sta
241. 6 11 E Error Messages and Corrective Action 6 115 1 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens sss see eee 6 27 M Monitor screen configuration and Key TUNCHONS ar daba 6 114 0 Operating I O Module Monitor Screen 6 113 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Sereen a a 6 15 P Precautions e eee eee e 6 8 S Setting method for other station monitoring 6 17 SDCCILICALIONS in a et ch do 6 3 Specifying a module to monitor and selecting monitor MENU eee eee eee ee e e e ee ee ee eee 6 24 Specifying the module to be monitored 6 113 System CONfiguUratiON occcccooccnnccconcnnnonononnnonancnnnonos 6 3 T Testing of the intelligent function module 6 25 NETWORK MONITOR A ACCESS TAN tai dis 7 7 D Detailed montt 7 15 A a T 7 9 E Error Message and Corrective Action 7 30 L BIS MORO tt idas 7 12 N Network information that can be monitored 7 5 0 Operation Procedures sese eee 7 12 Other station communication status monitor 7 24 Other station CPU operation status monitor 7 27 Other station CPU RUN status monitor 7 28 Other station data link status monitor 7 25 Other station loop status monitor eee eee 7 29 Other station MONitOF oooooonnnnnnnnncccconnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 7 23 Other station parameter status monitor 7 26 P
242. 6 User s Manual Chapter13 DATA CONTROL LLI oc O E 7 LLI G o Y O lt a O GT15 User s Manual Chapter13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY E gt O Backing up or restoring system without personal computer for reducing downtime Setting data for a controller connected to the GOT can be backed up and the data can be restored to the controller With backing up setting data for a controller the data can be restored to the controller with the GOT a connected to the controller even though the controller has to be replaced because of problems lt including failures As a result the system can be easily restored S Back up setting data for the controller in a CF card or USB memory CF card USB memory APPENDICES Restore the backup data to the controller INDEX Enabling creating the same system without personal computer With restoring the backed up setting data to controllers in other systems the same system can be created without a personal computer 11 1 Features 11 1 Improving security When the backup restore function is used browsing and changing setting data is limited with a password and the security is improved Password authentication CF card USB memory A Password authentication Automatically backing up data with trigger By setting the trigger device or the days and time the GOT can automatically back up settin
243. 61 30461 07699 076FD G d Z oc O E Z le NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 9 6 5 35 QD75M module monitoring CLO 6 5 36 QD75MH module monitoring R NE bec ex QD 5MA Operation Monitor Een ST T ee ESTI E ECT tee e aS QD75MH Input Output Monitor Z ATS READ lal Error PO ren Ay JUG Spenco lon EASA meee UAII Axis Servo Oh LE E 7 VUE OA ies era OA Ale SA te OU OB 2 EGEZ 1 Wie JUG lal M sod ohi Ax SUS D SESI 4 DIOS AY e UN J x BUS aj Shah OD 2 3 ue 5 JUG dE Mo code ON Axi sS3 BUSY ixis3 stor Soe TN UG Ax Of Axis4 BUSY Axis4 stor CIRA SA WS JUG Ky lel Starte Mac l el Pos start AX s done i Exe prohibint je s done Nd Exe ore sit E Axis3 Pos done x3 Exe prohibit ITS Pos done x4 Exe prohibit ls 0 150 300 450 0 96 12C 1C2 2 2 to 3 152 to 153 2 to 3 98 to 99 302 to 303 452 to 453 12E to 12F 1C4 to 1C5 fi L SALINE Iemm TZ T HG 2 degree 3 gt pulse 1 151 301 451 1 97 12D 103 4 4 to 5 154 to 155 4 to 5 9A to 9B 304 to 305 454 to 455 130 to 131 1C6 to 1C7 E p 7 fi 4 l L 1 4 See VAG AG07 ESTEE OA 6 100 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 5 36 QD75MH module monitoring QD7BMH Basic parameters 1 Buffer S O o address Screen example 160 to 161 i AO to Al QD75MH Basic parameters 2 310 to 311 460 to 461 136 to 137 1CC to 1CD LU 2 12
244. 66 5 Switching the Menu key switch When the defect serch starts change into ESC Touch during the defect search to stop the defect search and display the search result Further touch to change into and display the normal ladder Screen display during a defect search 1 If the display data exceeds one screen during the defect search The screen is scrolled automatically 2 If the ladder step searched during the defect search exceeds one screen e MELSEC A FX ladder monitor The screen is scrolled automatically to the last line of the ladder step e MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor The screen is not scrolled automatically to display the ladder step Screen display when you touch the key Touching can stop the defect search Search results are continuously displayed on screen until is touched The ladder step searched last is displayed as described below e MELSEC A FX ladder monitor ON OFF display is not provided e MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor ON OFF display is provided 3 6 Search Operation 3 6 6 Defect search 3 6 7 Touch search Touch search is a function to search the coil of the same device by touching a contact point displayed on the ladder monitor screen or to search the contact point of the same device by touching a coil You can search sequence program from the first to last steps S This function is valid whenever a ladder monitor is normally displayed T S Point P e Touch search is not available when the MELSEC
245. 7 066B 06CF 1843 0733 cc spo Po i Z oc O E Z O gt PTA O kE O gt O 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 95 6 5 35 QD75M module monitoring Screen example No 1717 1817 06B5 0719 1618 to 1619 0652 to 0653 1718 to 1719 O6B6 to 06B7 1818 to 1819 071A to 071B 1534 to 1535 O5FE to O5FF 1634 to 1635 0662 to 0663 1734 to 1735 06C6 to 06C7 1834 to 1835 072A to 072B 1536 to 1537 0600 to 0601 1636 to 1637 0664 to 0665 1736 to 1737 06C8 to 06C9 1836 to 1837 072C to 072D o ASIS SEE Hm 5 1 e ION AR AA oo xe a Z S H LX skin nange DT S S CUA ena lO STET aE KESE Uri lar ax e 006 AO a Tero setting EMIR GS ERS HL Ti ange LEMA ma Tid Si en Var el we 1212 to 1291 04BC to 050B 050D to 054C 054E to 058D 1293 to 1356 1358 to 1421 A HA 00000000 2 A Il oe e QD75M Error amp Warning History E Z gt frau ar U U 0 U U 0 U U U U U 0 U U 0 0 SERRE S in S IT L T TS G H H ETT E 6 96 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 5 35 QD75M module monitoring Buffer memory address BR 2000 to 2002 07D0 to 07D2 QD75M Positioning data B es cre au ar 1 2004 to 2012 07D4 to 07DC gt 2014 to 2022 07DE to 07E6 i FAES edi SEAGER 2024 to 2029 07E8 to 07ED m i gt 8000 to 8002 1F40 to 1F42 O gt 8004 to 8012 1F44 to 1F4C 8014 to 8022 1F4E to 1F56 8024 to 8
246. A 4 OSOS Je L DAATADODA7 O A DT E PUESTA 4 a ata al Cal al al noron U Le STII ldsurs i MENESES EEZ 2 SARRAR GOSA myo 19 He oes ESTEE gi E EEZ A eta E E 0 to SU 3 AVEC Util t 4 data Wo Z O U E 1530 to 1531 1630 to 1631 1730 to 1731 1830 to 1831 817 917 1017 1117 817 917 1017 1117 1532 1632 1732 1832 O 1506 to 1507 1606 to 1607 1706 to 1707 1806 to 1807 1514 to 1515 Buffer memory address I m X lt 05FA to O5FB 065E to 065F 06C2 to 06C3 0726 to 0727 0331 0395 03F9 045D 0331 0395 03F9 045D 05FC 0660 06C4 0728 05E2 to 05E3 0646 to 0647 O6AA to 06AB 070E to 070F O5EA to 05EB 5 1614 to 1615 064E to 064F 6 1714 to 1715 06B2 to 06B3 1814 to 1815 0716 to 0717 7 3 1513 1613 05E9 064D 8 1713 1813 06B1 0715 4 1544 1644 0608 066C 1744 1844 06D0 0734 5 1545 1645 0609 066D 1745 1845 06D1 0735 6 1546 1646 060A 066E 1746 1846 06D2 0736 7 1547 1647 060B O66F 1747 1847 06D3 0737 8 1505 1605 05E1 0645 1705 1805 06A9 070D 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 83 6 5 34 QD75P QD75D module monitoring LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR OVERVIEW SYSTEM MONITOR MELSEC A LIST EDITOR O UU gt Q G E uu 9 y JJ ul Z oc O E Z le NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR Buffer M n address Scr
247. A FX ladder monitor is SO executed E e Touch search is not available for commands or word devices except contact E points and coils S e Touch search is not available when defect search is used z To use touch search touch to deactivate defect search O 1 Contact point search coil search Touch a contact point on the screen Touch example M120 oc O E Z le oc T Q G lt l Z O H O Z LL o O Q Lu kE 1 lt O Sereen 7 UU m The coil of the same device in which the contact point E mo exists is searched and the ladder block containing _ ft es the searched coil is added to the ladder blocks ah 0 ae ss displayed T The searched device is highlighted 2 Display example IIS Print Q Screen O kE Z 35 i S 3 You can continuously search the ladder in the 02 D D E RST m downward direction by touching SET M41 am O Z O it O G ES 2 LU z O QO When there is no more contact point of the same E 7 O T device in which the touched contact point exists the message DEVICE NOT FOUND will be displayed O 3 6 Search Operation 3 67 3 6 7 Touch search 2 Operation procedure coil touch contact point search Print Screen Print Cancel Screen Print UO BMOV K4xX20 6256 K2 x60 U6Y e oG D K BMOV D202 6258 Print Screen When searching multiple files with the MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor displayin
248. ABCDDEFF Y nt lation ABCDDEFF X02 X03 Posit C se S ro Request J Z Start O B Type 1 A Type O WITH Mode 1 AFTER Mode Upper Limit Lower Limit 0 OFF O Fwd Batt Errk S eee T 00 mm 01 inch Error VR i sab lelMCode FFLOde i 10 deg 11 PLS Execut ing Data No Pointer Error Code Exec cut ing Dala o Pointer Error Code Status a aja e IC IMC EC INICIA NC af o o o os E ee I eee of e mm mm 6 48 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 5 15 AD71 module monitoring Buffer memory address 1 LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION SYSTEM MONITOR OVERVIEW Inputs X Outputs Y o Request ro Request sit Started t Started r Detection LY ae gt X Zero Complete TN ri Comp lete ON e ON TMO9D0 2 0 0 0 01 5072 13D0 1072 1BAO to to to to Address Speed Duell N Code Y Address Speed Dwell M Code 5871 16EF 7871 1EBF O 002 4272 10B0 6272 1880 m to to to to D 4671 123F 6671 1A0F a 4672 1240 6672 1A10 gj to to to to 5071 13CF 7071 1B9F 3872 0F20 5872 16FO to to to to 4271 6271 187F D 3872 0F20 5872 16FO L to to to to 7 S 4271 10AF 6271 187F o O UU gt Q G E uu 9 y JJ ul Z oc O E Z le NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 49 6 5 15 AD71 module monitoring 6 5 16 AD72 A15D71 module monitoring axis O axis Y axis oso mec oso a a IUCN INC ACI af e E
249. ABS data display Displays the absolute position data of the absolute position detection system 23 This section PP e Unit composition list Displays a list of servo amplifier unit compositions gt This section display 1 Changing screens The screen changes as follows after is selected on the function selection menu screen Depending on the model of the connected servo amplifier some screens may not be displayed Refer to the following for the screens that cannot be displayed gt 9 2 1 List of servo amplifier types that can be monitored and functions 9 4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens 9 4 5 Diagnostics function Diagnostics Function selection menu screen l H OFF Input Signal Output Signal CNIB 16 CNIB 1 HESS CNIB 5 CNIB 14 CNIA 8 CNIB 7 CNIB 8 CNIB 9 MR J2M LJDU monitor up To AsSdata DI DO display screen e Hi Input ot Number Output Number i iti 1 ites ee 12345678 Function Func 12345678 Amplifier Firmware Version BCD B26W000 B4 gt Ae arcilla LUG a ON o0000000 m 0N R o0000000 gt c S B 0FF LP oooooooo D 0FF SA o0000000 Motor model HC PQ13 MF S 13 Slot Type name AxNo State Motor model SM version SN DODODODO ZSP Oooo0o0000 IFU TL 00000000 TLE 1000009000 Motor ID 02FF 1300 Slot 1 TLT o00
250. ACPUs and displaying device comments The T C set values of QnACPUs whose date on the CPU rating plate is after 9707B can be changed and device comments can be displayed lt Information on the rating plate gt OVERVIEW MELSEG NO PROGRAMMBLE CONTROLLER DATE 9707 B oc O E Z O Lu E L gt nw Function version Date of manufacture 4 Programs capable of changing timer counter set values e Only the main program can change the timer counter set values of ANNCPUs AnACPUs and AnUCPUS e When executing multiple programs with the QCPU Q mode and QnACPU setting values of timer counter can be changed only to the program scan execution type program set at the lowest number among them in parameter settings of GX Developer whose file name is displayed on the TC Monitor screen Note that a file to be displayed cannot be changed on the GOT 5 ZO of QCPUs and QnACPUs and Z0 and VO of ACPUs e ZO of QCPUs and QnACPUs and Z0 and VO of ACPUs are displayed as Z and V respectively LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC A LIST EDITOR MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 2 2 Specifications 2 15 2 2 4 Precautions 2 3 Display This section describes the operation procedure from turning on the power to the GOT to system monitor display 2 3 1 Outline until starting the system monitor This subsection describes the flow until the system monitor fun
251. Borov 69 CZ 58001 Havl k v Brod Phone 420 0 569 777 777 Fax 420 0 569 777 778 Beijer Electronics A S Lykkeg rdsvej 17 1 DK 4000 Roskilde Phone 45 0 46 75 76 66 Fax 45 0 46 75 56 26 Beijer Electronics Eesti OU P rnu mnt 160i EE 11317 Tallinn Phone 372 0 6 51 81 40 Fax 372 0 6 518149 Beijer Electronics OY Jaakonkatu 2 FIN 01620 Vantaa Phone 358 0 207 463 500 Fax 358 0 207 463 501 UTECO A B E E 5 Mavrogenous Str GR 18542 Piraeus Phone 30 211 1206 900 Fax 30 211 1206 999 MELTRADE Ltd Fert utca 14 HU 1107 Budapest Phone 36 0 1 431 9726 Fax 36 0 1 431 9727 Beijer Electronics SIA Vestienas iela 2 LV 1035 Riga Phone 371 0 784 2280 Fax 371 0 784 2281 Beijer Electronics UAB Savanoriu Pr 187 LT 02300 Vilnius Phone 370 0 5 232 3101 Fax 370 0 5 232 2980 AUSTRIA BELARUS BELGIUM BULGARIA CROATIA CZECH REPUBLIC CZECH REPUBLIC DENMARK ESTONIA FINLAND GREECE HUNGARY LATVIA LITHUANIA e MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC INTEHSIS srl bld Traian 23 1 MD 2060 Kishinev Phone 373 0 22 66 4242 Fax 373 0 22 66 4280 Koning amp Hartman b v Haarlerbergweg 21 23 NL 1101 CH Amsterdam Phone 31 0 20 587 76 00 Fax 31 0 20 587 76 05 Beijer Electronics AS Postboks 487 NO 3002 Drammen Phone 47 0 32 24 3000 Fax 47 0 32 84 85 77 MPL Technology Sp z 0 0 UI Krakowska
252. C FX list editor depend on the keyword protection level O Available x Unavailable Keyword protection level Read Incorrect write protection Incorrect write Function All operation protect Keyword not Reference All on line operation protect Write registered keyword protect 2 ESET BELEE protect 2 protection canceled Displaying sequence Reading programs A s Riaz sequence programs Searching commands 544 devices l Writing Writing commands 5 4 5 ee Changing operands set 5 46 programs vaes 4 Deleting commands Pox fF ooo 5 4 7 o Sequence program all clear Inserting commands 1 When the 2nd keyword is set to an FX PLC that supports 2nd keyword it becomes x cannot be used 2 The names within the parentheses are for when a keyword 2nd keyword is set Operation gt Keyword setup gt Select Keyword setup with 4 or w Parameter setting Keyword setup List Monitor The keyword of MELSEC FX is operated Regist Delete Clear Protect 5 28 5 4 Operation Procedures 5 4 11 Keywords Keyword screen and protection level When Keyword setup is selected with the MELSEC FX list editor the keyword screen is displayed Refer to the following manual for the procedure for keyword operations 3 GT16 User s Manual 10 2 3 Display contents of communication detail settings S GT15 User s Manual 10 2 3 Display contents of communication
253. Changes to T C set values are reflected on the ladder monitor display only when they are made with the system monitor or test function When a value is changed by numerical input or other object the change is reflected on the display after the GOT is restarted When reading multiple files a Continuous searching in multiple sequence programs is allowed only for device search contact search coil search and touch search b For searching in multiple sequence programs the GOT can display search results of the previously searched program by touching the Back key The GOT cannot display search results of multiple programs on one screen When programs are switched the currently displayed search results of the program disappear from the screen Sea c For returning to the search results of the previously searched program by touching the Back key during searching in multiple sequence programs the touch operation is canceled when the previously searched program is deleted d For defect search when multiple sequence programs have been read searching is performed continuously in the program that is searched and displayed first Continuous searching in multiple programs is not performed e Automatical reading and seaching of a specified sequence program is allowed only for the special function switch and advanced alarm display f If the monitor target is changed to another PLC all the files that have been stored in the drive of
254. Channel 1 INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel Channel LC s A O Channel 6 Z Channel XxX Channel S anne Q WDT Error Lu Z LC O Z O PL O kE O gt O 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 29 6 5 3 A68ADN module monitoring 6 5 4 A68RD module monitoring Buffer memory address E DIOS HER 1 10 to 17 000A to 0011 S Operation Monitor Screen Che 18 to 33 0012 to 0021 1 Enabled 0 Disabled alo 0 0000 Conversion Se io 0023 Completed 0 Not Completed of 0001 Sethe Bo ie WOT Error emp Sensor Type 0 H3 d 7 A SI onn Error Code 00 O New JIS DIN 1 01d JIS CHA disconn HS disconn s ol a AG8RD Input Output Monitor Screen Chg READ 1 L E at y O y Z E rror Reset J 2 cted i f i ected 9 09 9 10 to 17 000A to 0011 Grar itor Screen Che 5 n 400 1 Enabled 0 Disabled S NE 0001 M M Y 5 1 Completed 0 Not Completed 0022 ES 1 Averaging Time Average 80 O Sampling O Count Average WDT Error _ Ten Sensor Type 0 disconn disconn Error Code 00 O New J WN 1 01d JIS i ais sconn C 3 disconn 6 30 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 5 4 A68RD module monitoring 4 5 6 CON RRR Le la em lo 6 5 5 A84AD module monitoring Buffer memory address S No L memory address 10 to 13 000A to 000D 18 to 21 0012 to 0015 28 to 31 001C to 001F 22 to 25 0016 to 0019 22 to 25 0016 to 0019 A 001A
255. Corrective action 1 Check the communications between the GOT and PLC CPU and make sure that the GOT communi cates with the PLC CPU 2 Check if the target device is writable with prameters of the target PLC CPU Check the communications between the GOT and PLC CPU and make sure that the GOT communicates with the PLC CPU 1 When no CF card is installed install a CF card 2 When the CF card access switch is off turn on the switch 3 Check if the CF card is formatted with FAT 16 When the CF card is not formatted with FAT 16 for mat the CF card with FAT16 and install the card in the GOT Check the communications between the GOT and PLC CPU and make sure that the GOT communicates with the PLC CPU 1 Delete files in the CF card 2 Install a large capacity CF card 1 Do not select broken files 2 Overwrite the broken file with the unbroken file 1 When no CF card is installed install a CF card 2 When the CF card access switch is off turn on the switch 3 Check if folders and files within the SEQDAT folder in the CF card are writable When the folders and files are not writable make sure that the folders and files are writable 4 Check if the CF card is formatted with FAT 16 When the CF card is not formatted with FAT 16 for mat the CF card with FAT16 and install the card in the GOT Set Data save location to A Built in CF card or B Memory card in the MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor
256. DUC TION ene ren tere a amen nA ae ene dais A 10 CONTENTS 5 a er Seen ro re dida A 10 POUT MS dasadenvassdemsscausehedsacaasteasascaesdenca nese e AEE A 18 ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS TTT A 20 FOW ta read tails Man li eases cel dete ID A 24 1 OVERVIEW 1 1to1 12 1 1 Before Using Each Function 1 2 11 1 Each tincion and related mana TTT 1 2 1 1 2 Hardware and OS required for each FUNCTION esse eee eee eee 1 4 1 1 3 Outline of procedure to the operation of each function cece eeeeee eee 1 10 1 1 4 Displayable languages for each function coocccconncccnncncnoncnnnoncnnonannnnnoncnonnnnnnnnnnnononnnnnonnnnonas 1 12 2 SYSTEM MONITOR 2 1to 2 56 2 1 Features 2 1 2 2 Specifications 2 6 2 2 System coniguratior A dd 2 6 2 2 2 Devices that can be MOntOred sisi id 2 14 De ACCESS AMO HT 2 14 E A O AA A A A ft cena A 2 14 2 3 Display 2 16 2 3 1 Outline until starting the system monitor eee eee eee eee eee 2 16 2 4 Operation Procedure Common to the System Monitor Screens 2 19 2 4 1 Functional change Menu Screen eee ee eee eee ee eee 2 19 2 4 2 Entering monitor devices specifying monitor stations and devices esse sees eee 2 20 2 43 Key window setting columns and operation procedure sese eee eee ee 2 23 2 4 4 Switching the display format DEC HEX and comment no comment display 2 24 2 4 5 Quick test operation of monitor devices sees eee eee 2 26 246 CHANGING SCIOCINS TTT 2 30 2 5 Entry Monitor 2
257. Data MONIT Che MENU END ON OFF OFF ON tse lag OFF ON OFF OFF 0 OFF Sp g OFF erna z IN 0 OP er 0 OFF YZP Switch IN 0 0 OP ABS Under 0 OFF DCC Signal Output 6 64 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 5 25 AD75P A1SD75P module monitoring Buffer memory address Secon ann wo mist mse ms Poco nex pes Hex peo Hex Ta lose ors ose rie osa lt a A a ae Mo Z S S 0 d x E Z S lt GF o o Ta eao Ts 1020 oaro 83 dara R 00 owe oie for i IO PE S a e Current 3_inch 7 o i 0 Speed L 3 d nl 0 0 0 S Axis x 10 3 i n z p A h Speed x 10 3 deg min E L 4 m PLS sec D E it n O Tn oaz 1204 0064 1254 es 155 iss osas 1205 owes 1288 lne ri lms 1206 oane 1266 seo A Te osas 1207 0487 1257 ses gt EMOn a EA IS 0494 1222 once 1272 oare UU gt Q G E uu 9 y JJ ul Z oc O E Z le e et ay 155 0495 1225 0407 1273 oaro ee OM as Teer 1205 Tes vars ms gt S H a ENEE AE ENEE 6 Skip Command Gi eier 0 0 0 E 7 a eee le 9 T S 0 0 0 HEE S z O E 6 6 5 gt O 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 65 6 5 25 AD75P A1SD75P module monitoring S aires cron ea vo aer med no ree wax bec nex 080 HEC JAAA PE e osor ozs nn 102 aser x 10 5 inch 234567800 D i S rar ees ossa s26 one Ti
258. Displays the restoration progress status Restoring The restoration is in processing Aborting The restoration cancellation is in processing 5 Completed The restoration is completed Abort The restoration cancellation is completed 9 Comm error The restoration is failed with the communication failed 2 Data error The restoration is failed with backup data errors S A 6 Displays the file name in processing Key functions Key Function X lt Return Switches the screen to the Backup restoration function Main menu screen Cancel Cancels the restoration Close Ends the backup restore and then the screen is switched to the backup restore startup screen 11 4 Operation Procedures 11 29 11 4 4 Progress screen restoration 11 5 Backup Data Conversion Tool Backup data are created by the backup restore function and the backup data are stored in a CF card Backup Data Conversion Tool enables the backup data to convert into data editable with GX Developer The tool also enables backup data edited by GX Developer to convert into data for the restoration on the GOT Point Data to be converted Only backup data created by the backup restore function can be converted with Backup Data Conversion Tool The following data cannot be converted with Backup Data Conversion Tool e Newly created data by GX Developer e Backup data with new files added by GX Developer 11 5 1 Operating environment Use Backup Data Conversion Tool i
259. Dvt Counter Difference between feed present value and S actual present value 5 l l gt EXE Prog No Servo program number in execution Min Major SV ERR Error code of the latest minor major servo o E error m Z M Code T Limit The M code and torque limit of the servo Z2 program in execution 3 EXE Cam No Displays the cam number currently controlled oc 4 EXE Stroke Displays the stroke amount currently controlled O R Z 5 Cam Ax 1 Rev Displays the present value within one cam axis revolution pulse O Displays ON and OFF of the symbols that represent the axis by axis control S O 6 Sa statuses Z atus it Inthe ON status the symbol is lit green Z At error or servo error detection the symbol is lit red 8 7 CMD Sianal Displays ON and OFF of the positioning command signals igna l L In the ON status the signal is lit green oc O E Z O Z O E O O 8 4 Operation Procedures 8 4 7 Positioning Monitor screen Key functions The table below shows the functions of the keys used for operation of the positioning monitor screen Key Function Data Item 14x Display example When axis Changes the axes to be monitored 1 is monitored Returns to the previous screen Returns to the monitor menu screen Exits the positioning monitor and returns to the screen where the Q motion monitor was started Stores the displayed screen to the memory card in BMP JPEG file format or prints
260. E 6 OUT EY 020 7 OUT WY 030 o LU Y Ug Y E cc D e PZ Sz rO AO A zZ s iT No Then Display contents 1 List display area The status of contacts and coils is displayed on the left of device displays E O The same operations as in the READ mode of the FX list editor can be executed 2 Keys 37 Section 5 4 3 Sequence program display 7 lt Ends the list monitor O 3 x When the list monitor is executed on the FX list editor screen the screen is switched to 2 the FX list editor screen al 1 The status of contacts and coils is displayed as below Type of instructio Description W Displayed E Not displayed LD AND ORC ontact instruction Normal open OFF LDI ANI ORI Contact instruction Normal close ON OUT SET E V m gt a Oo LU 9p KE m UU Except TC Contact OFF z O Z RST 9 Except TC and word ee F OFF ON z 2 device Contac LDP ANDP ORP LDF ANDF ORF l oc Not monitored Always gg not displayed El Rise or fall contact instruction Z gt NE o O i Z o O E Z O gt zZ O kE O gt O 5 4 Operation Procedures 5 31 5 4 12 List monitor 5 32 5 4 13 Hard copy output Screens of the MELSEC FX list editor can be stored to a memory card in BMP JPEG file format or printed with a printer Refer to the following for the hard copy Starting the MELSEC FX list editor from the ladder monitor 2_773 4 2 Hard copy output e Setting the hard copy with GT Designer
261. E Enron OA Error UCERO D E DZ e BUSY SAX so BUST LAist BUSY MELSEC A LIST EDITOR irme Started EA Stared lAxis3 Started Es Started l4 sisl Pos dons l Ez Bos done D Ax Exe poi 1Ax1e3 Pos done 13 AS Exe prohibit ai A Poe done T E Exe prohibit MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR O UU gt Q G E uu 9 y JJ ul Z oc O E Z le 0001 0097 012D 01C3 1 151 301 451 NETWORK MONITOR 0004 to 0005 4 to 5 154 to 155 009A to 0096 304 to 305 454 to 455 0130 to 0131 01C6 to 01C7 E pl to 200000000 1Gral inch degree pues l 4 Q MOTION MONITOR 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 87 6 5 35 QD75M module monitoring Buffer memory address Screen example No 0D75M Basic parameters 2 OOO gt u eo Cie alo ee fi a Ore ee en er QDI TRA Spay Setting range te Ssosb0olnees Setting range to TEIR EI 0D75M Detailed parameters 1 1 AREA UM AO Eo 5147483047 pulse 10 to 35999999 Erre EE mode Zane E fai AE NANA deeree 10 puea A 1 Seung range OF HHS piia asomo tp NEA py 4 D j Ien Ge y 2 MA ESTA Ed oy limit L BOK 6 BELL Ie longue Wii zar Yale Revere bie Uppers Immi 6 88 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 5 35 QD75M module monitoring 317 467 013D 01D3 4 22 172 0016 00AC 322 472 0142 01D8 5 23 173 0017 OOAD 323 473 0143 01D9 6 26 176 001A 0
262. ESS2003 and MSDE2000 are added to the applicable database 2 47Z The trigger buffering function is added Enables setting Do not sample for the sampling setting in the device tag settings Industrial SQL Server 9 0 and Microsoft SQL Server 2005 are added as an 2 58L applicable database T database 2 82L Function to send resource data stored in the GOT to the database Extended function OS CNC Data l O 03 07 Extended function OS GT GT Soft 15 GOT1000 GOT Platform Library 03 12 Option OS SFC Monitor 03 12 GOT Function Expansion Libra 03 12 Standard monitor OS 02 02 Communication driver Use the communication driver 02 02 or later for each connection Option OS Gateway function Mail 01 02 ry Gateway function Server Client 01 02 Option OS Gateway functionFTP 02 02 Option OS Gateway FTP 03 00 Standard monitor OS 03 00 Option OS Document Display 03 00 Standard monitor OS 03 01 Option OS MES Interface 03 01 Standard monitor OS 03 02 Option OS MES Interface 03 02 Standard monitor OS 03 03 Option OS MES Interface 03 03 Standard monitor OS 03 13 Option OS MES Interface 03 13 fet X X x X Q T 11 Appendix 1 2 For GT10 LC l S Lu GT Designer2 Version 2 43V or later is applicable to GT1020 L GT Designer2 Version 2 58L or later is appli
263. Encoder error 2 236 07 a 4 AL20 Encoder error 2 236 07 a 5 AL20 Encoder error 2 235 07 e lt PRIME Alarm history screen PQ S S Q Point P If the alarm display screen data has not been downloaded to the GOT the message Z Monitor data not found is displayed and the subsequent screens are not displayed 9 4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens 9 19 9 4 4 Alarm function Alarm display screen The following describes the display data of the alarm display screen and the key functions displayed on the screen 1 Displayed contents 1 Alarm Number AL20 2 Alarm Name Encoder error 2 3 Time of Alarm 13 26 13 Cause of Alarm 1 Encoder connector disconnected 2 Encoder cable faulty Screen Print No Description 1 Alarm Number Displays the number of the alarm that occurred 2 Alarm Name Displays the name of the alarm that occurred Displays the date and time when the alarm occurred The alarm occurrence time is displayed on the basis of the clock data of the GOT e If there is an error in the servo amplifier before it is connected to the GOT an alarm is displayed when the 3 Time of Alarm a servo amplifier is connected to the GOT In this case the time when the servo amplifier is connected to the GOT is displayed as the alarm occurrence time 2 Key functions The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for operations of the alarm display screen Key Function Reset R
264. G DATA 3 Option function board a For GI16 No option function board is required b For GT15 Mount one of the option function boards in the above table on the GOT For the GOTs with a built in option function board refer to the following gt 1 1 2 Hardware and OS required for each function For how to mount an option function board on the GOT refer to the following manual K gt GT15 User s Manual 8 10 Option Function Board 10 2 Specifications 10 3 10 2 1 System configuration a SERVO AMPLIFIER O MONITOR am O gt Z GQ 6 Oz Z o O L BACKUP RESTORE SFC MONITOR CNC DATA I O APPENDICES INDEX CNC functions that can be monitored The CNC monitor function allows the following functions to be monitored For details of each function refer to the manual for each CNC ECO CI CS CN a CN Position Display CC er CI nr O E CS E CIN E CN are CN CN E CN Alarm Diagnosis pomes R e CIN CC CN CC EN CI Fred on O E IC EEC CN Tool Offset Param aar e ar R manas R marr R APLC Release APLC Release Screen Screen 10 4 10 2 Specifications 10 2 1 System configuration MELDAS C6 C64 GO pal eee pr 10 1061 10 O TONO 10190 101 90 10 10 10 O 0 9 0 10 OO TOTO O 10 2 2 Access range 1 Bus connection One GOT can monitor up to two CNCs by switching the CNCs Up to five GOTs can simultaneously monitor one CNC 2 Ethernet connection One GOT can monitor up to 64 CNCs by swit
265. GT1150 GT11000 GT11 Abbreviation of GT1150 GT11 Handy GOT GT1055 Q Abbreviation of GT1055 QSBD GT1050 Q Abbreviation of GT1050 QBBD GT1030 Abbreviation of GT1030 LBD GT1030 LBD2 GT1030 LBDW GT1030 LBDW2 Abbreviation of GT1020 LBD GT1020 LBD2 GT1020 LBL GT1020 LBDW Q o gl ewes GT1020 LBDW2 GT1020 LBLW GT1000 GT10 Abbreviation of GT1050 GT1030 GT1020 GOT900 Series Abbreviation of GOT A900 series GOT F900 series GOT800 Series Abbreviation of GOT 800 series E Communication unit Abbreviations and generic terms Bus connection unit Serial communication unit RS 422 conversion unit Ethernet communication unit MELSECNET H communication unit MELSECNET 10 communication unit CC Link IE controller network communication unit CC Link communication unit Interface converter unit GT15 QBUS GT15 75QBUSL GT15 RS2 9P GT15 RS2T4 9P GT15 J71E71 100 GT15 J71LP23 25 GT15 75J71LP23 Z GT15 J71GP23 SX GT15 J61BT13 GT15 751F900 1 A9GT QJ71LP23 GT15 75IF900 set 2 A9GT QJ71BR13 GT15 751F900 set 3 A8GT J61BT13 GT15 751F900 set E Option unit Abbreviations and generic terms Printer unit GT15 PRN RGB input unit GT16M R2 Video RGB unit Video RGB input unit GT16M V4R1 RGB output unit GT16M ROUT Multimedia unit CF card unit CF card extension unit External I O unit Sound output unit GT16M MMR GT15 CFCD GT15 CFEX CO8SET GT15 DIO GT15 SOUT Description GT15 QBU
266. Ht fT S es eS ees A ae Q Q 1 Displays the label set in the PLC name setting for the target PLC CPU z Displays the CH No network No station No and CPU No of the target PLC CPU as 3 2 Target controller shown below e CH No network No station No CPU No 3 Displays the file name without the extension of the displayed program 4 Keys for operations on the block list screen shown in section 13 6 2 Touch input Displays the block numbers and block titles in the displayed program oc O Z le O LL 7 The block numbers are not displayed with no block 5 Block list Active blocks are highlighted Selecting a block title displays the block data on the SFC diagram monitor screen 13 7 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen ep UU Displays block information for each block 2 6 Block information list When devices are set for the block information the set devices are displayed in the S corresponding cells lt 7 Message display area Displays error messages and others x lt ULU Q 13 6 How to Operate Block List Screen 13 23 13 6 1 Displayed contents 13 6 2 Key functions The following shows the functions of the keys used for operating the block list screen Key Function Returns the screen to the last screen that is displayed right before the block list screen appears Back The key is disabled when the last screen is the GOT utility screen or user created monitor screen Sets
267. I Ee Helie SEE GA Counter emirato 1 OS rl Do count Eterna re S tind WIGHT Cont enable UCA Counter Te ir Dy 05 Cr E EHN ouier CO mE sink O EA Counter 70 E O Sta E E CA TETE siena O2 reset STT TO STO aiar He presse HE S COME T ink Ho D WICH Preset command He S SREE Seb ES Woy 1 VACAZ Coincidence signal enable E fey of re st find HHCH Down count command nie es GT METIO Z RS Count enable command H2 Counter col point WO 2 Eten preset detection R Sacie Coliseo 2 pai comite nierien Selection stare Fuse broken detection OHZ Coincidence signal Wo2 reset 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 5 33 QD62D QD62E QD62 module monitoring E 6 5 34 QD75P QD75D module monitoring Buffer memory address Screen example No E E il w 12 to 813 032C to 032D 74107 MAA Ed a GRR S aiy Ce a deere mine inmeh 10P pulse 1 OVERVIEW R 912 to 913 0390 to 0391 TOE 1012 to 1013 03F4 to 03F5 1112 to 1113 0458 to 0459 3 809 909 0329 038D 1009 1109 03F1 0455 4 806 906 0326 038A 1006 1106 O3EE 0452 5 807 907 0327 038B 1007 1107 O3EF 0453 6 808 908 0328 0386 1008 1108 03F0 0454 829 929 033D 03A1 1029 1129 0405 0469 LIST ou llse sec SYSTEM MONITOR LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION 838 938 0346 03AA 1038 1138 040E 0472 SET Data MONIT MELSEC A LIST EDITOR MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR O QD75P QD75D Input Output Monitor RESET C MENU END DAN
268. IAPPENDICES NDEX 9 12 9 3 Display Operation procedure until the start of the servo amplifier monitor This section describes the flow until the servo amplifier monitor operation screen is displayed after the servo amplifier monitor Option OS is installed in the GOT Turn on the power to the GOT Starting from the special function switch Servo Amplifier Monitor set in the project data Starting from the utility Display the utility Touch the special function switch After the utility is displayed touch Debug amp self check Debug Servo amplifier monitor from the Main Menu 77 GT Designer2 Version Screen Design For how to display the utility refer to the user s manual of Manual 6 2 Touch Switch the GOT to be used Refer to the following manual for how to set the special function switch Set the channel number Model MR J2S A The model of the servo amplifier is selected a US oie HE Set the channel number of the servo pric amplifier connected to the GOT S fous ey MELSERVO J3 J2S M _2 AJ710C24 MELDAS C6 3 a Bus Communication setting window Set the setup The model of the servo amplifier is selected The Station No of the servo amplifier communicated when s selected The Station No of communicated IFU is Set the model type etc of the servo selected WR J2H P8A amplifier to be monitored
269. ION MONITOR 6 Precautions for UO allocation setting 1 Even when I O numbers are set at random as shown below in the case the GOT is connected to the QnACPU the start XY numbers are displayed in order on the System Configuration screen When performing intelligent module monitoring always perform the I O allocation in order from slot 0 7 Slot number Head XY number Set randomly GOT System Configuration screen Input Input Input Special Special Input 32 32 32 CPU 0 20 40 60 80 AO Module name not displayed 2 Ifthe slot assigned with outputs in I O assignment is not fitted with a module the GOT displays it as input Common to ACPU and QnACPU Display provided when the QA1S6 O extension base unit is used with the QCPU Q mode This precaution pertains to a situation where the QA1S6 O extension base unit is connected to the QCPU Q mode in a station connected to the GOT In this case the abbreviated format is displayed for the following intelligent function modules on the System Configuration screen You can use the unit detail information to check the full format of the module displayed with the abbreviated format Unsupported intelligent function modules are displayed as SP and the corresponding modules cannot be monitored Installed module Model name displayed A1S63ADA 63ADA A1SJ71PT32 S3 J71PT32 A1SJ711D1 R4 J711D A1SJ711D2 R4 S1 A1S64TCTT BW S1 A1S64TCRT BW S1 64TCTT R 6 10 6
270. Information and key functions displayed on the screen 3 4 2 Hard copy output This section describes how to store a ladder monitor screen to the memory card in BMP JPEG file format or print it with a printer j 1 O FF O Program Memory MAINS K4Y40 K2 D102 E4 TF BMOY D102 61 K4 Local device monitor not executed E 0 25 5 Sea JUMP T f JUMP J Print Print Cancel E Touch Print Screen A BMP JPEG file will be stored on the The ladder monitor screen will be printed standard CF card inserted in the GOT with the printer connected to the GOT Point f e Install the extended function OS Printer to the GOT when printing a ladder oe monitor screen e The output target memory card printer of hard copy can be set in Hard Copy of GT Designer2 For details of hard copy setting refer to the following manuals L gt GT16 User s Manual Chapter 13 DATA CONTROL GT15 User s Manual Chapter 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual Section 13 2 Hard Copy e When outputting a hard copy the display can be inverted between white and black For invert colors setting refer to the following manual K gt GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual Section 13 2 Hard Copy 3 44 3 4 Operation Procedure Common 3 4 2 Hard copy output 3 5 Switching the Display Format You can switch the display format 16 bit one word module 32 bit two word module or decimal number hexadecimal
271. J a ene u i i Link Ver l E CC Link Ver2 ID 03 00 e I Supporting connection to Universal model QCPU Supporting connection to Q17nDCPU Communication driver CC Link z z 2 637 7 x Supporting connection to CNC C70 CC Link Ver2 ID 03 07 connection Intelligent device Supporting the redundant system with the station redundant type extension base unit Supporting connection to CRnQ 700 2 73B S U i i nQ E CC Link Ver2 ID 03 09 a Supporting connection to Q13UDHCPU Communication driver 2 77F x x x and Q26UDHCPU CC Link Ver2 ID 03 12 Supporting connection to QO2PHCPU and QO6PHCPU TEN Communication driver Supporting connection to QO3UDECPU CC Link Ver2 ID 03 13 X Q04UDEHCPU QO6UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU and Q26UDEHCPU Supporting connection to CC Link Via CC Link a G4 Communication driver connection Via 2 09K S O Ga Supporting connection to Q172HCPU CC LINK G4 01 02 Q173HCPU Continued to next page App 8 Version of GT11 e GT GT Soft Item Description GT Version of OS 16 6oricoo oc H ULU Designer2 Bus Serial S Aa Supporting connection to Universal model ec QCPU T w O Supporting connection to Q17nDCPU Communication driver PE 2 63R l A x X O Supporting connection to CNC C70 CC Link G4 03 07 Supporting the redundant system with the redundant type extension base unit a Supporting connection to AJ65BT R2N E gt 60O CC Link Supporting connection to CRnQ 700 C
272. KOYO KOSTAC DL 03 13 l Communication driver Supporting connection to SHARP PLC 2 09K x O SHARP PLC SHARP JW 01 02 connection Supporting settings for the number of 2 ap Communication driver retries and the timeout time l SHARP JW 03 09 eN O Communication driver Supporting connection to TOSHIBA PLC 2 09K TOSHIBA PROSEC T V 01 02 l l Communication driver TOSHIBA PLC Supporting settings for the number of l l l l l 2 73B TOSHIBA PROSEC T V connection retries the timeout time and delay time O 03 09 Communication driver Supporting connection to 2 77F TOSHIBA PROSEC T V O model2000 S2T 03 12 TOSHIBA Communication driver Supporting connection to TOSHIBA o MACHINE PLC 2 77F TOSHIBA MACHINE TCmini X O MACHINE PLC connection 03 12 JTEKT PLC Communication driver Supporting connection to JTEKT PLC 2 32J x x O connection JTEKT TOYOPUC PC 03 00 Continued to next page App 10 Version of Item Description GT Designer2 Supporting connection to HITACHI IES 2 09K PLC HITACHIIES PLC connection Supporting settings for the number of Sap retries the timeout time and delay time l HITACHI PLC l l Supporting connection to HITACHI PLC 2 43V connection FUJI FA PLC l l Supporting connection to FUJI FA PLC 2 43V connection Supporting connection to MATSUSHITA PLC 2 09K Supporting connection to FP amp 2 18U MATSUSHITA Supporting connection to FP X ES
273. Line MAIN PROG Processing Line COMMENT COMM Production Line When the ladder monitor is activated from the utility The screen switches to the main menu Point B To delete the read ladder data touch the List key The program files and comment files stored in the built in flash memory of the GOT or in the memory card are displayed Files can be selected by touching a key or directly touching the display part key key key key key key key key by the special function switch The screen switches to the user created screen Select cancel is switched by moving the cursor and touching this key Selects all files Cancels all selections Deletes the file selected Moves the cursor upward Moves the cursor downward Displays the preceding page Displays the following page When the ladder monitor is activated i Sea ls Cancel JUMP T f JUMP J Screen Print Print Reading the PLC in the following operations Once the PLC is read with the power to the GOT turned on you do not have to read it in the following operations 3 30 3 3 Display 3 3 3 Display 3 3 4 Searching from the monitor screen When starting a ladder monitor with object coil search defect search can be automatically performed to the read sequence program and the result can be displayed on the monitor Usable objects and functions list The following table shows the types of objects can be searched f
274. Loopback execution status O lo Link scan time display O lt 2 Data link system loop status O oc Host communication status x O O UU lt Host a 7 x x Ns SRaaten Network number O m o Specified control station O Current control station O 0 x lt Control station Communication information O S information 7 O Sub control station link O 2 gt UU 5 Remote O master station 2 O S station number E g Total of linked stations O E S A Largest connected stations O ULU l a Largest data linked station O 58 Data link m Z information Communication status O 22 Causes of interrupted O 7 communication oc Causes of data link stoppage O E S Constant link Constant link scan O L scan O BWY from the master station x W BW from the master station BW receive l x in the higher loop Continued to next page am O E LE O gt Zz O kE O gt O 7 2 Specifications 7 5 7 2 2 Network information that can be monitored Function Loopback Detailed monitor Host status Other station monitor MELSECNE MELSECNE MELSECNE T 10 T 10 T 10 E l i CC Link IE CC Link IE MELSECNE MELSECNE MELSECNE MELSECNE MELSECNE Network Information TUD master T II local T H T H T H control normal station station remote station 7 station 7 control normal master station Station station Forward loop status Reverse loop status Loopback station forward loop O O Loopback station
275. M series is connected 2 This is displayed only when the MR J3 series is connected 9 40 9 4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens 9 4 7 Test operations de Motor less operation screen The following describes the display data of the motor less operation screen and the key functions displayed on the screen oc uu a lt O gt oc Lu 0 oc O Z le 1 Displayed contents Select Start to enter Operation without Motor Mode oc Cycle amplifier power to restore Normal Mode O z zZ OO 26 stare T z5 O lL UU LC O kE op UU E Aa Z PAE Cancel Q 2 2 Operation e Start operation r Touch the oa t key a e Stop operation E To cancel the motor less operation turn the power of the servo amplifier off gt zZ O 3 Key functions The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations of the motor less operation screen LC Key Function e Z O Starts motor less operation gt Changes to the JOG operation screen lt _ gt This section EJ Changes to the positioning operation screen U 3 This section EJ Changes to the DO forced output screen This section EJ t Returns to the function selection menu screen Al lt Exits the servo amplifier monitor Stores the displayed screen to the memory card in BMP JPEG file format or prints it with a printer For further information about hard copies refer to the following lt 9 4
276. MAIN QCD Device initial value Setting the device initial value MAIN QDI 1 The GOT restores file register data in the Flash card installed in the CPU module without checking if the data are overwritten 11 4 11 2 Specifications 11 2 1 System configuration 2 Item Parameter Intelligent function module parameter Program Device comment Boot operation specification file Device initial value File register Sampling trace file Failure history data Programmable controller user data High Performance model QCPU Parameter for operating a programmable controller PARAM QPA Parameter for intelligent function modules IPARAM QPA Program that the CPU operates Including SFC program OPG Device comment to be stored in a programmable controller QCD Batch file for starting programs stored in ROM and others AUTOEXEC QBT Setting the device initial value QDI Data stored in file registers QDR Sampling trace data that the specified device data is OTD continuously collected with the specified timing l Failure history data that are recorded self diagnostic results QFD Any user created data stored in a memory card we Optional 1 The GOT restores file register data in the Flash card installed in the CPU module without checking if the data are overwritten 2 The item can be backed up only 3 Item Parameter Intelligent function module parameter Program Device comment Boot operation
277. MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 6 3 Display 6 11 Continued from previous page Display the System Configuration screen When starting the module format and related data are System Configuration NETWK No 0 PLC STATION FF not displayed m When reading of module data from the PLC CPU is OPU aaa aad ee B complete the module format and related data is displayed AA When using the QCPU Q mode or QSCPU the PLC CPU le gag sa a a status PC information monitor screen and module error Y E information and others Unit Detail Info Screen can be Ex2 i n HP s i checked See Sec 6 4 1 H ae When is selected the intelligent module monitoring ends and the display moves to the original screen where the intelligent module monitor function was begun Specify the module to be monitored See Secs 6 4 1 6 4 6 Display the intelligent module monitor menu See Sec 6 4 6 Select from the menu The Intelligent Module Monitor Screen is displayed by selecting it from the menu See Sec 6 4 6 AE the monitor screen for the intelligent f See Sec 6 4 5 module Check the data for the module with the See Sec 6 5 displayed contents Change the data Change the current value of the specified area Carry out the following operation when changing the current values of the buffer memory that is displayed on the monitor screen See Se
278. Methods 4 4 1 1 described below Key arrangement and a list of key functions The arrangement and functions of the keys displayed on the MELSEC A List Editor window are a Key arrangement and functions for GT16 and GI15 Display area 1 NOW REA DING PLC PLEASE WAIT A MOMENT MOTION CONTROLLER NOT SUPPORTED 2 OME S E lee EE gt aH M HD I HZ l Fa RET DEC F MRD H v K L EA a HANNAM pe Jos ese G AE Ao EE AE BT 4 10 4 4 Operation Methods 4 4 1 Key arrangement and a list of key functions Key name 1 Mode key 2 Ch no 3 Help key 4 Command Device key 5 Control key READ WRITE INSERT DELETE E Reference Summary of function section The key that specifies read or write mode dl s Switch the valid key with SHIFT Section 4 6 3 The key that specifies insert or delete mode Baz ee Switch the valid key with SHIFT Section 4 6 5 The key that specifies parameter or other mode Gaa bara CR i h Section 4 6 6 Switch the upper and lower lines with SHIFT Section 4 6 7 Ch Displays a Communication Ch No S SS Mm U L FROM A U END Z CLEAR The key that can operate the help function Section 4 5 5 Key that inputs K H at the input of command device name and constant input Only when the valid key of upper lower character needs to l be switched switching is allowed with input of the SHIFT and SET k
279. Monitor option OS and GOT Function Expansion Library option OS on the GOT Turn on the power to the GOT Starting from a special Starting from the utility function switch SFC monitor set in the project data Display the utility Touch the special function switch Jl gt s Refer to the following manual for how to set the special After the utility is displayed touch Debug amp self check Debug function switch SFC monitor from the Main Menu gt GT Designer2 Version Screen Design For how to display the utility refer to the user s manual Manual 6 2 Touch Switch of the GOT to be used Set the channel No network No station No and others L 13 5 2 1 Communication setting window Communication setting window Operate the GOT for reading data from the PLC and for displaying the program list window 13 5 How to Operate PLC Read Screen Continued to next page Continued to next page 13 3 Display Operation 13 9 13 3 1 Outline before starting SERVO AMPLIFIER CNC MONITOR MONITOR FUNCTION BACKUP RESTORE oO CNC DATA I O oc O E Z le O LL 7 APPENDICES INDEX Specifying Block List for Display Screen From previous page in the SFC monitor detail settings of the From previous page special function switch Select a program from the program list to displa
280. Monitor screen with a single touch and can edit PLC program while checking the ladder You can also display a list from the step line displayed by the ladder monitor y X0001 X0002 D 4 M120 M130 M131 Pad BEEBE 1 G jas RE RE AAA 4 1 Features 4 1 LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR oc O E m Li E 9 mr q 6 Ll 104 I H OVERVIEW SYSTEM MONITOR NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR Other stations are accessible You can edit the sequence program for other stations in the data link system containing the GOT or GOT connected station network system or CC Link system Help function A convenient help function is supported which enables you to read write insert and delete data as you select menus Comment for each device can be displayed Comment of the device at the cursor position can be displayed W 9 OUT M50 2 10 MOV 10 gt Di Current value Comment of D1 is displayed 4 1 Features 4 2 Specifications 4 2 1 System configuration This subsection describes the PLC CPU series names and the connection forms between the GOT and the PLC for which the MELSEC A list editor is available For further information about communication units and cables for each connection form see the following gt GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Targeted PLC PLC ACPU QCPU A mode T 2 1 Motion controller CPUs cannot be con
281. NG 1D7M33 SH 080654ENG 1D7M63 ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS Abbreviations and generic terms used in this manual are as follows E GOT Abbreviations and generic terms Description GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviation of GT SoftGOT1000 GT1695 GT1695M X Abbreviation of GT1695M XTBA GT1695M XTBD GT1685M S Abbreviation of GT1685M STBA GT1685M STBD GT1685 GT1600 GT16 Abbreviation of GT1695 GT1685 GT1595 GT1595 X Abbreviation of GT1595 XTBA GT1595 XTBD GT1585V S Abbreviation of GT1585V STBA GT1585V STBD GT1585 S Abbreviation of GT1585 STBA GT1585 STBD GT1575V S Abbreviation of GT1575V STBA GT1575V STBD GT1575 S Abbreviation of GT1575 STBA GT1575 STBD GT1575 V Abbreviation of GT1575 VTBA GT1575 VTBD GT1575 VN Abbreviation of GT1575 VNBA GT1575 VNBD GT1572 VN Abbreviation of GT1572 VNBA GT1572 VNBD GT1565 V Abbreviation of GT1565 VTBA GT1565 VTBD GT1562 VN Abbreviation of GT1562 VNBA GT1562 VNBD GT1555 V Abbreviation of GT1555 VTBD GT1555 Q Abbreviation of GT1555 QTBD GT1555 QSBD GT1550 Q Abbreviation of GT1550 QLBD GT1570 GT1560 GOT1000 Series GT1550 S al 00 al GT1500 GT15 Abbreviation of GT1595 GT1585 GT1570 GT1560 GT 1550 Abbreviation of GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDA GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD GT1150 Q Abbreviation of GT1150 QLBDQ GT1150 QLBDA GT1150 QLBD Handy GT1155HS Q Abbreviation of GT1155HS QSBD GOT GT1150HS Q Abbreviation of GT1150HS QLBD GT1155 Q
282. O E m Li E 9 mr q 6 Ll 104 I H If the project data has not been downloaded The A list editor can be started from the utility even if the project data has not been downloaded to the GOT MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 4 3 Display 4 7 4 3 1 Outline until the start 4 3 2 Operation of keyword input If a keyword is registered in the ACPU when the connected ACPU or the ACPU PLC No No corresponding to the operation is changed the GOT requests for input of the registered keyword Input the keyword registered in the ACPU and press the key If a keyword is not registered in the ACPU this operation is not required Procedure for inputting the keyword for the MELSEC A list editor lt Display gt lt Key operation gt lt Description of operation gt NOW READING PLC PLESE WAIT A MOMENT MOTION CONTOROLLER NOT SUPPORTED Start the list editor function shows communication status with the PLC CPU Input of the keyword is requested KEYWORD When the keyword 040411 is input Input the keyword registered in Input the keyword to 6 letters KEYWORD O y the connected maximum with the device ACPU and press the key No constant setting key 0 to 9 A to F When the input keyword is correct The GOT checks the input keyword and displays the result KEYWORD OK The check result display time
283. OR Ni oc O Z G x GC GO LI zZ Q MOTION MONITOR 7 22 No ltem Display contents 4 Constant LS Displays the set contact link scan time x OUT Loop Displays the OUT side loop line status of the host station Normal LoopBK Trans All Sta NG x IN Loop Displays the IN side loop line status of the host station Normal LoopBK Trans All Sta NG OUT Loop Back Sta Displays the station number of the OUT side loopback 5 LoopBK Info P v j E station is displayed with normal loopbacks IN Loop Back Sta Displays the station number of the IN side loopback station is displayed with normal loopbacks of Loop Switching Displays the accumulated number of switching loops x Parameter Setting Displays No parameters Common Param Unique param or Common unique Reserved Sta Displays whether a reserved station exists or not 6 TsSt Sta a x Communication Mode Displays Normal Mode or Constant LS Transmission Mode Not displayed is displayed x Transmission Stat Not displayed is displayed 1 When the station is in the hardware test mode self loopback test mode circuit test mode or station to station test mode Offline test is displayed 2 Eor duplication of the control station or station number Dup CtrlSta No is displayed 2 Key functions The table below shows the function of keys that are used on the detailed monitor Key Fun
284. ORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR b Key functions The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operation on the System Configuration screen Key Function EN Closes the monitoring and returns the screen to the one for starting the intelligent module monitor peg Switches the screen to the System Configuration screen Refer to Section 6 4 1 Switches the log types to be displayed in the log list All log Displays all the logs error logs operation logs Error log Displays the error logs only Operation log Displays the operation logs only Sorts the log list in ascending or descending order Switches the numbers of logs displayed in the log list 32 items Displays the latest 32 logs 100 items Displays the latest 100 logs When the number of displayed logs is switched from 100 to 32 100 logs are displayed before touching the Update key Obtains the latest log information from the PLC CPU and updates the log list The displayed log data before touching the Update key is deleted Scrolls the display one page up or down A Scrolls one page up W Scrolls one page down 2 Operation details screen a Displayed contents 1 Item Description 1 Displays the channel number network number and station number of the monitored station 2 Displays the keys that are used for the operation on the System Configuration screen shown in b 3 Displays the detailed operating
285. OTs that use the client function Abbreviation of TrueType font and OpenType font available for Windows Differs from the True Type fonts settable with GT Designer2 Indicates the modules other than the PLC CPU power supply module and I O module that are mounted to the base unit Generic term for the protocol designed to use MODBUS protocol messages on a TCP IP network How to read this manual Functions This manual describes functions available for GT Designer2 Version2 90U For the added functions by the product version upgrade refer to the list of functions added by GT Designer2 version upgrade in Appendices Symbols Following symbols are used in this manual 3 5 Switching the Display Format You can switch the display format 16 bal one ward module 32 bal two word module or decimal number hex adecanal number of word device and limer c untes values displayed on the Kdor monitor sorcen and whelher to display the comments to the target devices 3 5 1 Display s tching of 16 bit one word 32 bit two word modules During montonno he present values of ward devices except timars and counters are displayed in the 16 bil or 32 bal mate These modules switch allemalety each ang you press the 16 3284 key Point P Display timers and counters You cannot switch the 16 bit one word of 32 bit two word module with regard to the presen and sel values of trners end counters The GOT aulomalbcdlly selects to display the
286. Option OS MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 etc 0 Network monitor 02 02 Network monitor Supporting display of Chinese Simplified Option OS function Traditional German Korean Network monitor 02 04 w Enables monitoring the status of the CC Option OS 2 77F x x Link IE controller network Network monitor 03 12 Option OS Ladder monitor for MELSEC A 01 02 Ladder monitor for MELSEC Q QnA 01 02 Ladder monitor for MELSEC FX 01 02 Option OS Ladder monitor for MELSEC Q QnA 02 04 Ladder monitor for MELSEC FX 02 04 Option OS Ladder monitor for MELSEC Q QnA 02 04 Option OS Ladder monitor for MELSEC Q QnA 03 01 Function for displaying sequence program loaded to CPU on GOT 2 09K Supporting display of Chinese Simplified 2 27D Traditional German Korean Supporting language switching Japanese Korean for displaying file 2 27D name and title of the sequence program Supporting the read of programs PP 9 prog 2 43V comments Supporting reading comments from CF DEEL Ladder monitoring cards function Supporting monitoring local devices 2 58L Option OS Ladder monitor for MELSEC Q QnA 03 03 Option OS Ladder monitor for MELSEC Q QnA 03 07 Supporting connection to Universal model QCPU 2 63R In searching multiple file programs the backward search display is possible With MELSEC QnA ladder monitor the currently displayed program
287. P G M o T TT C 0 1 GO O 6 34 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 5 6 A616AD module monitoring 6 5 7 A616TD module monitoring Buffer memory address gt Screen example No G T ff e 000F 5 ASI6TD Operation Monitor Sc INPUT 0 6 C END D 6 0000 aoe a z E nab le J Disablec rror E R Y 0002 z Channel No 0 Data Format 0000000000 000 Sampling Time 10 ms 0004 Input Status For Data Format 0 Refer to left hand side values 112 to 127 0070 to 007F Format 1 Refer to right hand side values 5 8 Digital Value Error Temp Values Error Discontinuity Error a kE Z Qs o O BO az ir LC A E 1 i SET Data MONIT Enp a O RESET Che MENU 16 to 23 0010 to 0017 a op 2 S 10000 0 Fetal nae Err 000 nab le sled value Err Hels a L 384 to 511 0180 to 01FF Error Enable 0000 0000 a Sne 80 to 87 0050 to 0057 E Input Status 1 Input Status 96 to 103 0060 to 0067 Format O Format 1 C Format O Format 1 ae ae 64 to 71 0040 to 0047 CH 1 CH 9 E ae 32 to 39 0020 to 0027 CH 3 CH B CH 4 00 H C 00 512 to 639 0200 to 027F E CH 5 0 0 0 0 LH D 0 0 3 Gs ooj of op cH E 50 0 0 0 48 to 63 0030 to 003F x i welt SH e Ls lt V L J el we O z Sf O UU gt Q G E uu 9 y JJ ul Z oc SET Data MONIT O AGIGTD Input Output Monitor Sc Che END E O Inputs x z 1 eT 10 JO 10 LED Display READY 11 i 11 oe 12 J2 12 3 Disc 13 03 3 4 Digital Error 14 J i 05 Te
288. QTBDA Function version D or later GT1155 QSBDQ GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDQ GT1150 QLBDA GT11 GT1155 QTBD Hardware Version A or later GT1155HS QSBD GT1150HS QLBD Hardware Version B or later GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD Hardware Version C or later 1 For using an option function board built in the GOT the latest standard monitor OS must be installed on the GOT For OS versions refer to the following Appendix List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series Option functions operated with the GT15 FNB or GT11 50FNB can be used without installing an additional option function board For using functions operated with the GT16 MESB GT15 QFNB o M or GT15 MESB48M and for adding more memory to the GT15 install an applicable option function board An additional option function board can be installed on the GOT with a built in option function board An option function board inapplicable to the GOT cannot be used An option function board for the GT11 cannot be installed on the GT15 For how to check function versions and hardware versions refer to the following manuals L gt GT15 User s Manual GT11 User s Manual Handy GOT User s Manual 1 4 1 1 Before Using Each Function 1 1 2 Hardware and OS required for each function For GI16 O Required Either one x Unusable OS memory space user area Option function board Extended function OS Function name Built in flash memor
289. RAINE Kazpromautomatics Ltd KAZAKHSTAN Mustafina Str 7 2 KAZ 470046 Karaganda Phone 7 7212 50 1150 Fax 7 7212 50 1150 CONSYS Promyshlennaya st 42 RU 198099 St Petersburg Phone 7 812 325 36 53 Fax 7 812 325 3653 ELECTROTECHNICAL SYSTEMS Derbenevskaya st 11A Office 69 RU 115114 Moscow Phone 7 495 744 55 54 Fax 7 495 744 55 54 ELEKTROSTILY Rubzowskaja nab 4 3 No 8 RU 105082 Moscow Phone 7 495 545 3419 Fax 7 495 545 3419 NPP URALELEKTRA Sverdlova 11A RU 620027 Ekaterinburg Phone 7 343 353 2745 Fax 7 343 353 2461 RUSSIA RUSSIA RUSSIA RUSSIA MIDDLE EAST REPRESENTATIVES ILAN amp GAVISH Ltd ISRAEL 24 Shenkar St Kiryat Arie IL 49001 Petah Tiqva Phone 972 0 3 922 18 24 Fax 972 0 3 924 0761 AFRICAN REPRESENTATIVE CBI Ltd SOUTH AFRICA Private Bag 2016 ZA 1600 Isando Phone 27 0 11 928 2000 Fax 27 0 11 392 2354 Mitsubishi Electric Europe B V FA European Business Group Gothaer Stra e 8 D 40880 Ratingen Germany FACTORY AUTOMATION Tel 49 0 2102 4860 Fax 49 0 2102 4861120 info mitsubishi automation com www mitsubishi automation com
290. Reference section 2 4 5 2 4 4 Required Extended function OS 1 The Extended function OS shown in the table below is required OS memory space user area Option function board Extended Oooo o ae function OS e in flash User memory GT15 GT11 GT16 GT15 GT11 memory ROM RAM System monitor 746KB 746KB 746KB KB Not required Not required Not required 2 Install the Extended function OS Install System monitor Extended function OS in the GOT For a detailed installation procedure see the following gt Section 1 1 3 Outline of procedure to the operation of each function Before transferring data from GT Designer 2 to the GOT installing OS downloading project data it is necessary to confirm the free capacity of the user area in the specified drive and the size of the data to be transferred For further information see the following GT Designer 2 Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual Subsection 8 1 2 Drive capacity required for data transfer 2 2 Specifications 2 13 2 2 1 System configuration OVERVIEW N LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR oc O E Z O Lu E L gt nw MELSEC A LIST EDITOR NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 2 2 2 Devices that can be monitored For further information about the monitor device names that can be monitored and the scope see the following lt 3 GT Designer2 Version o Screen Design Ma
291. S MELSERVO J3 J2S M O 4 OMRON SYSMAC 7 T S Communication setting window u S The network monitor startup too 5 E 8 m Z The network monitor starts after a zS channel number is selected l ode Orlin oop gt lt RLoop gt OK Loop Back gt md lo per lt COM STA gt P MTR WAIT ec O Z G x GC GO LI zZ Q MOTION MONITOR 7 3 Display 7 9 7 10 Point 7 3 Display How to display the utility For how to display the utility refer to the following K gt GT16 User s manual 8 3 Utility Display GT15 User s manual 9 3 Utility Display Displaying communication setting window After turning on the GOT the communication setting window is displayed at the first startup of the network monitor only For displaying the communication setting window at the second or later startup touch the button on the network monitor screen C gt 7 4 Operation Procedures If the project data has not been downloaded The network monitor can be started from the utility even if the project data has not been downloaded to the GOT Changing screens Utility Main Menu or user created monitor screen Communication setting window Ch Ha H H Cho oap Drives l a f b 1 EET E N D 7 MUA GUT ed gt E C L E 7 La os Las he Touch Other station monitor menu screen Another Sta Menu Touch a fal ea module T Curr 30ms Mode
292. S TCP 03 09 Supporting connection to SIEMENS S7 a48 Communication driver 200 series l SIEMENS S7 200 02 02 Supporting XON XOFF control Es Communication driver 2 32J Supporting interrupt extension Computer 03 00 2 73B X O O O Communication driver 2 18U OMRON THERMAC INPANEL NEO 02 02 Supporting connection to OMRON temperature controller The functions to automatically stop c eard ommunication driver 2 58L OMRON THERMAC INPANEL NEO 03 03 monitoring faulty stations and to O disconnect communications with controllers are added Supporting connection to SHINKO SN Communication driver indicating controller l Shinko Technos Controller 03 01 The functions to automatically stop O Communication driver Shinko Technos Controller 03 03 monitoring faulty stations and to 2 58L O disconnect communications with controllers are added Supporting connection to CHINO controller Communication driver 2 58L The functions to automatically stop CHINO Controllers MODBUS 03 03 O monitoring faulty stations and to disconnect communications with controllers are added Supporting connection to FUJI SYS gns Communication driver temperature controller l FUJI PXR PXG PXH 03 00 The functions to automatically stop monitoring faulty stations and to Sent Communication driver disconnect communications with FUJI PXR PXG PXH 03 03
293. S2 GT15 ABUS GT15 75QBUS2L GT15 75ABUSL GT15 RS4 9S GT15 RS4 TE GT15 RS2T4 25P GT15 J71BR13 GT15 75J71BR13 Z 2 GT15 75J61BT13 Z Description GT15V 75V4 GT15V 75R1 GT15V 75V4R1 GT15V 75ROUT GT15 DIOR 1 GT15 CFEX GT15 CFEXIF GT15 CO8CF set GT15 ABUS2 GT15 75ABUS2L R Option Abbreviations and generic terms GTO5 MEM 16MC Memory card CF card GT05 MEM 256MC Memory card adaptor GT05 MEM ADPC Description GT05 MEM 32MC GT05 MEM 64MC GT05 MEM 128MC Option function board Battery Protective Sheet Protective cover for oil USB environmental protection cover Stand Attachment Backlight Multi color display board Connector conversion box Emergency stop sw guard cover Memory loader Memory board GT16 MESB GT15 QFNB32M GT15 BAT GT16 90PSCB GT16 80PSCB GT15 90PSCB GT15 80PSCB GT15 70PSCB GT15 60PSCB GT15 50PSCB GT11 50PSCB GT11H 50PSC GT10 50PSCB GT10 30PSCB GT10 20PSCB GT05 90PCO GT05 50PCO GT16 UCOV GT15 90STAND GT05 50STAND GT15 70ATT 98 GT15 60ATT 87 GT16 90XLTT GT15 70SLTT GT15 60VLTN GT15 XHNB GT11H CNB 37S GT11H 50ESCOV GT10 LDR GT10 50FMB GT15 FNB GT15 QFNB48M GT11 50BAT GT16 90PSGB GT16 80PSGB GT15 90PSGB GT15 80PSGB GT15 70PSGB GT15 60PSGB GT15 50PSGB GT11 50PSGB GT10 50PSGB GT10 30PSGB GT10 20PSGB GT05 80PCO GT15 UCOV GT15 80STAND GT15 70ATT 87 GT15 60ATT 77 GT
294. SECNET p 2 G4 3 Description H section GT16 GT16 GT16 GT16 GT16 GT16 GT16 GT11 GT11 GT11 GT11 GT11 GT11 GT11 Monitoring present values by entering devices to be 2 5 monitored in advance Monitoring the present value of n oT devices froma specified device Monitoring the present value set value contact point ao and coil of m devices froma specified device Monitoring the present value of x devices in specified 208 buffer memory of a specified intelligent function module Setting Resetting bit devices Changing the S present value of At word devices and buffer memory Changing the 29 present value of TC possible during TC monitoring Changing the set value of TC possible during TC monitoring Changing device values by T performing a quick test Displaying device comments Displaying word device and buffer 2 4 4 memory values in decimal or hexadecimal 1 The present value of V and Z cannot be changed 2 Indicates CC Link connection Intelligent device station 3 Indicates CC Link connection via G4 4 When a QCPU redundant system is used data of the set value cannot be changed 2 2 Specifications 2 11 2 2 1 System configuration OVERVIEW N LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR oc O Z le LL E LS gt dp MELSEC A LIST EDITOR NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR
295. SL Output 0 O 100 Channe Channe U E hanne E H P 1 a EIS amp 4 5 6 F j 8 L nn Channe Channe L hanne C mel Channe Channe Sn nn Le lae 0 gt WDT Error D A Conversion 0 O Disabled Output Enable 00 OU 1 Enabled Error 6 38 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 5 8 A616DAV module monitoring 6 5 9 A616DAI module monitoring Refer to the following for further information about the screen for A616DAI and the buffer memory address L gt 6 5 8 A616DAV module monitoring OVERVIEW SYSTEM MONITOR LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC A LIST EDITOR MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR O UU gt Q G E uu 9 y JJ ul Z oc O E Z le NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 39 6 5 9 A616DAI module monitoring 6 5 10 A61LS module monitoring Screen example No Limit Switch r a ae Sate a H E AA a E oI OD O1F 0 PO 0 Qu Channe Channe Cnanne O Channe Channe Channe IA B C D E F Inputs x DO WOT Error 01 i nline 6 40 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 5 10 A61LS module monitoring 6 5 11 A62LS module monitoring Buffer memory address Screen example No OVERVIEW x10 WOT Error 2 gt Start 25 LS 0 P IR 11 Online Y22 Posit Stop ll dd gt Up Lim Err Y23 Fue artr2 P1 Disable o Lim Err Y24 Rev Jog StartW28 P2 Disable Sensor Err
296. Set the OS boot drive to A Standard CF Card gt GT Designer 2 Version _ Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual GT11 User s Manual GT15 User s Manual GT16 User s Manual 2 Write the standard monitor OS communication driver option OS extended function OS project data and special data into the CF card Check that the CF card access switch is off and insert the CF card into the GOT Turn on the CF card access switch Mount units to GOT 137 GT15 User s Manual GT16 User s Manual Check the Communication settings e ae a GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Connect the GOT and controller with a cable Turn on the power supply of GOT and the system of the connection destination Start the monitor 1 10 Before Using Each Function 1 1 1 1 3 Outline of procedure to the operation of each function 1 Project data can be also downloaded uploaded via Ethernet For download upload of project data via Ethernet BootOS and standard monitor OS should be installed in the GOT in advance so that the GOT and PC can communicate with each other via Ethernet by setting Communication Settings Refer to the following manual for details GT Designer2 Version L Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual Chapter 8 TRANSFERRING DATA 2 The B drive cannot be set as the OS boot drive Point Precautions for setting OS boot drive to A Standard CF Card 1 GOT startup time When the OS boot drive is
297. Standard monitor OS 03 03 X Standard monitor OS 03 07 DOES i Standard monitor OS 03 12 Jof x O Continued to next page App 21 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR BACKUP RESTORE CNC DATA I O SFC MONITOR 7 ui 9 O Z m o o lt 0 me Version of GT GT GT Soft T Item Description l Version of OS Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 Setting to display input value when entering the value at input target object 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 x x position is possible Numerical Display Format String setting is possible 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 lol o Numerical input When Bit Trigger is not met whether to l l 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 O enable Hold Display can be selected Enables setting the TrueType Numerical 2 90U Standard monitor OS 04 02 O for the font Function to store NULL 0x00 at the end l 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 of input characters Standard monitor OS 02 02 Function to convert characters input in 2 18U Option OS Kana into Kanji KANA KANJI JPN 02 02 Alignment setting is added 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 Setting for displaying an input value at the l l E 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 ASCII Display input target object position is possible ASCII Input When Bit Trigger is not met whether to l 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 enable Hold Display can be selected The character
298. Stop A D Link Stop H B Pass excut Disconnection Loop test Set Conf test Sta Odr Conf Com test Offline test Reset in prgr Indicates the causes why the communications were interrupted This indicates Normal if communications are normal Normal Offline Offline Test Line error Disconnection Initialize Others error codes Indicates the causes why the data link was stopped This indicates Normal if communications are normal Stop disignat No common para Host Para error Host CPU error Com suspension Others error codes Indicates the predetermined time of constant link scans Continued to next page 7 4 Operation Procedures 7 4 2 Detailed monitor 7 17 OVERVIEW SYSTEM MONITOR LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC A LIST EDITOR MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR Ni oc O Z G x GC GO LI zZ Q MOTION MONITOR 7 18 No ltem Display contents FLoop Shows the status of the forward loop lines of the host Normal LoopBK Trans D Link Impo RLoop Shows the status of the reverse loop lines of the host Normal LoopBK Trans D Link Impo x FLoop Back Station Indicates the station number of a station that executes the loopback 5 LoopBK inion along the forward loop Displays when the loopback is operating normally RLoop Back Station Indicates the station number of a station that executes the loopback along the reverse loop Displa
299. Sub in GOT operations in each mode Forcibly changes the ACPU running status between RUN and STOP Performs a read or write operation to the ACPU memory in the machine language 4 20 4 4 Operation Methods 4 4 8 List of functions 4 5 Basic Operation This section takes an easy operation example to describe the basic operation of the MELSEC A list editor Lu gt al LC 4 5 1 Reading sequence programs Z Operation exaple LC E Z O lt Key operation gt lt Display gt C Select the Read mode S READ EE Read the Oth step E Z o Sz Se 33 32 Scroll the screen with the oc O E m Li E 9 mr q 6 Ll 104 H MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 4 5 Basic Operation 4 21 4 5 1 Reading sequence programs 4 5 2 Changing Overwriting commands The example shown below is used to describe how to change sequence program commands Before change 3 OUT Y010 4 OUT TO Ki0 X000 X091 Y Change the timer setting y E Cro value from K10 to K100 After change f 3 OUT Y010 4 OUT TO K100 Change the timer setting value from K10 to K100 Operation example lt Key operation gt lt Display gt 1 Select the Write mode Read the 4th step that changes SD the setting value A Move the cursor to setting value K10 of TO ka 0 fp 0 U The setting value of
300. T OVERVIEW C3 SYSTEM MONITOR Direct Access INPUT CH 4 MX CH 4 J D O E 0 PO C LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION AG16AD Operation Monitor Screen CONNECT No 0 Chg p ER Sampling time 0 ms EN 0008 Input Status For Data Format 0 Refer to left hand side values Format 1 Refer to right hand side values a o oo o o gt aaa ES L END MELSEC A LIST EDITOR E IMO 00 PO C MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR O ABIBAD Input Output Monitor Screen UU gt Q G E uu 9 y JJ ul Z oc O E Z le Inputs 00 WOT Error READY Error OT E o PO C3 Direct Access NETWORK MONITOR 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 TI MO O 0 I GO 00 y O Q MOTION MONITOR 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 33 6 5 6 A616AD module monitoring Buffer memory address Screen example eee EX EN 48 to 63 0030 to 003F Input Channel Channe Channel 2 Channel 3 Sce Channel Data ever Channel E Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 Channel Channel A Channe Channel C WOT Error Channel D Channe Error Channe Data Format 0000 0 Enable U 000000 O Disabled 1 Enabled 100 50 Scale A 0 Data Format 0 Channe l l Chane ster Seat E 16 to 23 0010 to 0017 Cha 3 Channel E WDT Error Channel D Channel Or Channe Connect No Channel No FED oa Enable 000 OU 00100 al JD LT
301. T CNC monitor 02 02 2 function Option OS G Supporting connection to CNC C70 2 63R x x a CNC monitor 03 07 lt Function to back up setting data for pie P me Extended function OS controllers and to restore the data to the 2 58L x x Backup Restore 03 07 Backup restore controllers function Supporting Backup Data Conversion Tool 2 63R oO lo x x S HG EE gt 735 Extended function OS upporting the trigger backu PE ae E Backup Restore 03 09 Continued to next page App 29 Item CNC data I O function SFC monitor function Multi channel function Gateway function Document display function MES interface function App 30 on Version of GT Description Version of OS Designer2 Function to copy or delete data of the gt 63R CNC that is connected to the GOT l Function to display sequence programs written in the PLC CPU in the SFC 2 77F diagram format on the GOT Function to monitor multiple controllers aati with a single unit of GOT l Function for monitoring each controller from one GOT PC or sending a mail from 2 09K GOT Supporting the FTP server function 2 18U Enables transfer of binary data by the FTP S server function l Function to display document on the GOT 2 32J Image quality adjustment for documents is l l 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 possible Function to execute data linkage between T the control and information systems l Oracle 8i ACCESS2000 ACC
302. UN CS rta iia 5 23 DATO Param eter SOTA T 5 25 E E r rS 5 28 AZ MISMO O aid 5 30 DO Tera CODY QUID a ll ei des 532 5 4 14 Action for an incorrect key Input eee eee e eee eee 9 32 5 5 Error Messages and Corrective Actions 5 33 6 INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR 6 1to6 116 6 1 Features 6 1 6 2 Specifications 6 3 6 21 SOY SUC TMS OMIM ATION TTT 6 3 622 ACCESS TANG iia dra data idd 6 6 029 A S FOCAUTIONS A POE E A A 6 8 6 3 Display 6 11 6 4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen 6 15 6 4 1 Composition of the system configuration screen and key fUnctiONS occccccocccccnnoccccnnnncos 6 15 6 4 2 Setting method for other station monitoring sss sees eee eee ee ee 6 17 6 4 3 Composition of PC Information monitor screen and key functions sss eee 6 18 6 4 4 Composition of the unit detail info screen and key functions sees eee eee eee 6 22 6 4 5 Composition of the intelligent module monitor screen and key functi0nS c occccco 6 23 6 4 6 Specifying a module to monitor and selecting monitor menu eee ee eee ee ee e 6 24 6 4 7 Testing of the intelligent function module sss sese eee eee eee 6 25 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 27 6 5 1 A62DA S1 module Monitoring ccccconoononoccnnnnecccnnnconnnnnncnoncnnnnonnnnnnarnnnonnnrnononnnnnnnncnnnnnnss 6 27 652 AGCAD module Monto id 6 28 6 5 3 A68ADN module MONItOFINQ crensian a a aE 6 29 6 54 AGERD modules MONTONG smc 6 30 6
303. USE a Ha ls i om al Setup Section 9 4 2 End l Touch any of the functions Monitor L23 Section 9 4 3 A sss Menu Te Alarm 37 Section 9 4 4 Diagnostics 77 Section 9 4 5 Parameters lt 7 Section 9 4 6 Test Section 9 4 7 Q X AQ Hint To exit by touching At next startup of the servo amplifier monitor the last exited screen is displayed If using the same screen frequently exiting with the button is convenient However the last exited screen is not displayed if the servo amplifier monitor screen data was deleted due to an installation of the OS turning the GOT power from off to on or a reset 9 14 9 3 Display de 9 4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens This section describes the operations of the screens when using the servo amplifier monitor The display screen of the servo amplifier monitor varies slightly with the GOT used This section mainly uses the screen of the GT1575 V for explanation oc uu a lt O gt oc Lu 0 oc O Z le 9 4 1 Servo amplifier monitor With the servo amplifier monitor various monitor functions parameter setting changes and test operations oc can be performed on the servo amplifier connected to the GOT E To display a function make a selection on the function selection menu screen oF 25 l
304. UU G O gt r LR LS K kE M lvl SS 5g ey lS Ww Z 5 O T 377 3 3 3 Display Sie oc S Touch Z O gt SE or O kE LULU Zz When the ladder monitor has When the ladder monitor has been started been started from the utility by the special function switch O Switches to the Main Switches to the 3 gt Menu screen user created screen gt O O gt O 3 3 Display 3 19 3 3 1 Outline until the start 3 3 2 Setting and deleting media for saving ladder data Setting the ladder data storage destination 1 Setting for the Q QnA ladder monitor Up to 512 files of data used for the ladder monitor function sequence programs device comments can be stored in a selected drive Storing ladder data eliminates the need to read ladder data from the PLC CPU every time powering on the GOT reducing the time before executing the ladder monitor For the ladder data storage destination setting refer to the following manual When setting with the utility lt 3 GT15 User s Manual Section 11 7 Q QnA Ladder Monitor When setting with GT Designer2 GT Designer2 VersionO Screen Design Manual Section 3 8 Setting of GOT Display and Operations GOT Setup Point Precautions when the ladder data storage destination is set to None e Only one sequence file and comment file of ladder data can be read in the GOT e When searching program files using the one touch ladder jump function specify a file to be s
305. Up to 8192 devices Recipe 02 04 Standard monitor OS 02 04 Function to save recipe data of GT11 in 2 27D Option OS CSV file format Recipe 02 04 Standard monitor OS 02 04 Function to save recipe data to the A drive 2 27D Option OS standard CF card for GT11 l Recipe 02 04 Up to 101 points can be set for scale l 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 O value number Function to collect data only when display l l l 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 O trigger is met is added Function to display the data collected by l o 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 01 the logging function in trend graph format Second specification and external control l l 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 are possible X 0 X X Continued to next page ae Version of GT GT GT Soft GT Item Description Version of OS Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 o o Standard monitor OS 01 02 it The extended function of the existing 2 09K Option OS x recipe function al Advanced recipe 01 02 OF a rciotorconeg maps aw oo fr BS Advanced Recipe The binary format file output can be converted to CSV Unicode format file by 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 X external control Standard monitor OS 03 03 T The number of records that can be set is l ES 2 58L Option OS x 60 changed to 2000 l a SE Advanced Recipe 03 03 92 Standard monitor OS 02 04 S Report function Function to print the collet
306. Vall s Barcelona Phone 902 131121 34 935653131 Fax 34 935891579 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V UK UK Branch Travellers Lane UK Hatfield Herts AL10 8XB Phone 44 0 1707 27 6100 Fax 44 0 1707 27 86 95 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION Office Tower Z 14 F 8 12 1 chome Harumi Chuo Ku Tokyo 104 6212 Phone 81 3 622 160 60 Fax 81 3 622 160 75 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION Inc 500 Corporate Woods Parkway Vernon Hills IL 60061 Phone 1 847 478 21 00 Fax 1 847 478 22 53 EUROPE FRANCE IRELAND ITALY SPAIN JAPAN USA 4 MITSUBISHI A ELECTRIC GEVA Wiener Stra e 89 AT 2500 Baden Phone 43 0 2252 85 55 20 Fax 43 0 2252 488 60 TEHNIKON Oktyabrskaya 16 5 Off 703 711 BY 220030 Minsk Phone 375 0 17 210 46 26 Fax 375 0 17 210 46 26 Koning Hartman b v Woluwelaan 31 BE 1800 Vilvoorde Phone 32 0 2 257 02 40 Fax 32 0 2 257 02 49 INEA BH d o o BOSNIA AND HERZEGOVINA Aleja Lipa 56 BA 71000 Sarajevo Phone 387 0 33 921 164 Fax 387 0 33 524 539 AKHNATON 4 Andrej Ljapchev Blvd Pb 21 BG 1756 Sofia Phone 359 0 2 817 6004 Fax 359 0 2 97 4406 1 INEA CR d 0 0 Losinjska 4 a HR 10000 Zagreb Phone 385 0 1 36 940 01 02 03 Fax 385 0 1 36 940 03 AutoCont C S s r o Technologick 374 6 CZ 708 00 Ostrava Pustkovec Phone 420 595 691 150 Fax 420 595 691 199 B TECH A S U
307. Z O Displays the communication setting window e For bus connection Switches CNCs to be monitored when multiple CNCs are connected e For Ethernet connection Switches CNCs to be monitored when multiple CNCs are connected The monitoring target is switched in order of the setting for the Ethernet on GT Designer2 SFC MONITOR Ends the CNC data I O and then the screen is returned to the monitor screen or the screen for the utility of the GOT qe The monitoring target is switched in order of the module number Displays the function selection window Select a function to be executed Copy Delete USB Drive Stop 1 e For Copy or Delete _ Function After selecting a function the selected function is displayed e For USB Drive Stop 1 The window for confirming to stop the USB drive is displayed Displays the device selection window Device Select the target of Function CNC E USB Drive 1 B Extend Memory card A Built in CF card After selecting the target the selected target is displayed The settings and display details differ depending on the setting for Device e For CNC Displays the CNC data selection window APPENDICES Select a CNC data that Function is executed Directory After selecting a CNC data the selected CNC data is displayed e For E USB Drive 1 B Extend Memory card or A Bulit in CF card Displays the directory selected in the list The Directory button cannot be touched
308. Ze MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC GOT1000 Graphic Operation Terminal Extended Option Functions Manual Art no 169248 SH NA 080544ENG 2 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION 01102008 Version K SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Always read these precautions before using this equipment Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product In this manual the safety precautions are ranked as DANGER and CAUTION DANG ER Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in death or severe injury Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous N CAUTION conditions resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage E E eee ee ee O T N em ma m SS ES AA Note that the ZN caution level may lead to a serious accident according to the circumstances Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user DESIGN PRECAUTIONS O Some failures of the GOT communication unit or cable may keep the outputs on or off An external monitoring circuit should be provided to check for output signals which may lead to a serious accident Not doing so can cause an accide
309. a Dec Hex Note Step Sea Test Statement End Sea Local Dev Print Screen 1 0 FF O Program Memory TO evice monitor not executed 0 25 Local d R Sea vo Pm Print JUMP T f JUMP J Screen Touch Menu e Touch Cmnit amp Comments are displayed Each comment is displayed in five characters on three lines Point f Priority of comment display 1 For the MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor Either of Common Comment or Comment by program can be selected For the setting of comment display priority refer to the following manual C GT16 User s Manual 11 2 1 Q QnA Ladder Monitor GT15 User s Manual 11 7 Q QnA Ladder Monitor 2 For the MELSEC A ladder monitor The comment display priority is as follows Extension comment gt Comment in Kanji or kana 3 5 Switching the Display Format 3 47 3 5 3 Switching comment no comment display OVERVIEW SYSTEM MONITOR GO oc O E Z le oc T Q G lt l Z O H O Z LL MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR MELSEC A LIST EDITOR NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 3 5 4 Displaying 32 characters of comments Comments can be displayed in 32 characters when the MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor is executed They are not displayed when the MELSEC A FX ladder monitor is executed 1 Procedure for displaying 32 characters of comments evice monitor not executed Sea mi JUMP T f JUMP List Touch Men
310. a ii 3459 A st euent cca tuet ned vataqdusuantonamncedSedeunse sastentcenduabadadectocsaiadetuie 3 61 30 0 Ladder ena scan ee eee ee oe a ee ae 3 62 366 RIL e Tee a a a a Na 3 63 3 0 OUEN SAN a a day 3 67 3 7 Test Operation 3 69 3 7 1 Displaying the test menu screen ini A tia aeade 3 69 3 8 Local Device Monitor 3 70 3 8 1 Operation procedure for local device monitor sss see eee 3 70 3 9 Error Messages and Corrective Action 3 73 4 MELSEC A LIST EDITOR 4 1to 4 38 4 1 Features 4 1 4 2 Specifications 4 3 Mel OVSTSMIMCOMMGUPAN OM TTT 4 3 Bere E E 4 4 AA OA A A A OA 4 5 4 3 Display 4 6 ASA Oulie unukthe 25 Tn I sere NcoapeRa 4 6 432 Operator Ol KEV WON Input deta siar actus a a a tuts 4 8 4 4 Operation Methods 4 10 4 4 1 Key arrangement and a list Of key TUunciiOnS sse eee eee eee 4 10 4 4 2 Display format of the display area cesses 4 12 4 4 3 Switching valid keys upper lower FUNCTIONS sse exe ee eee ee 4 15 4 4 4 Selection and operation Of modes sss sees 4 15 4 4 5 Command input procedures nana iaa 4 16 ARO Hard copy OPUS digan 4 19 4 4 7 Action if an incorrect key is Input eee eee eee 4 19 AAG EIST OMUMCUOMS IA IS 4 20 4 5 Basic Operation 4 21 4 5 1 Reading sequence PrograMS nitrilo 4 21 4 5 2 Changing Overwriting COMMANAS cccccconnnccccnccnncononcnccnnnnnnncnnancnnnnnnrnnnonnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnns 4 22 4 3 3 Adding INSEMING commands ict ison toe a ni detail 4 23 4 5 4 Deleting commanda sss sees
311. a list restoration 237 11 4 Operation Procedures Input the password for the backup restore No Is the password correct Yes Is a password set for the file to be restored No The passwords for the controller contained in the backup data are automatically verified Is the password correct No Input the correct password for the controller Y The file is restored Yes Yes es Is there another file Is there another controller In the multiple CPU system No Restoration completed Point f When passwords for controllers are changed When the password input is cancelled and the restoration is stopped the restored files until the restoration is stopped remain in the controller When only any of the files are restored the data can be inconsistent in the entire system When the password input is cancelled The restoration is stopped and the restored file remains in the controller CF card USB memory Controller When a password for the controller is changed the password verification is required CF card CF card USB memory Controller USB memory Controller When the correct password is input Start the restoration Not matched The restoration is completed CF card USB memory Controller 11 18 11 3 Display Operation 11 3 3 Security and password 11 3 4 Trigger backup The GOT can automatically back up setting data for controllers with the trigger device or th
312. a list of instructions that start with the specified character and allows the user to choose from them Reads a program after allowing the user to specify a step number Moves the selected part of the program to a specified part of the program Copies the selected part of the program to a specified part of the program Displays a comment for the specified device Deletes a program at the specified step Deletes the specified block in the program Deletes all NOP instructions found in program codes described before the END instruction NOPLF instructions will not be deleted Displays a comment for the specified device Clears all parameters in the ACPU only Sets or changes various parameters like those for the memory capacity timer counter and latching range Sets or changes a keyword Changes values set to timer counter devices Displays details of an error in the ACPU and the associated step number Checks duplex coils instruction codes and other elements in the program With regard to a special function unit of the specified I O number monitors the contents of the buffer memory at the specified address Monitors the ACPU clock D9025 through D9027 Clears all contents of the ACPU memory and resets it to the initial state Clears the program Main Sub currently selected Clears all device memories except for special D special M and R Switches the target ACPU in GOT operations in each mode Switches the target program Main
313. adecimal numbers O When the CC Link Safety system master module cannot receive the error information from the 2 gt safety remote I O station is displayed for unreceived items b Key functions Key Function 0 Closes the monitoring and returns the screen to the one for starting the intelligent module x monitor O rr 2 Returns the screen to the PC Information monitor screen D Switches the numerical notation of the displayed data between decimal and hexadecimal O numbers Only when the individual error information for the safety remote l O station is displayed UU gt Q G E uu 9 y JJ ul Z oc O E Z le NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 6 4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen 6 21 6 4 3 Composition of PC Information monitor screen and key functions 6 4 4 Composition of the unit detail info screen and key functions This section describes the structure of the Unit Detail Info screen that is displayed by specifying a module on the System Configuration screen at Info mode and the key functions displayed on the screen The GOT displays the Unit Detail Info screen only when using the following controllers e QCPU Q mode e QSCPU Displayed contents Item Description 1 Displays the network number and station number of the monitored station Displays the operating status error information and other information of the targeted PLC CPU Up
314. age destination eliminates the need of PLC reading when the GOT is powered on again For settings of automatic PLC read and data storage destination refer to the following manual lt GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual 3 3 1 Outline until the start Changing screens The following describes screen changes of 1 Normal operation using an example of the Q QnA ladder monitor S Screen changes of the A FX ladder monitor is the same T S S lt MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor gt Start the ladder monitor e When ladder data is stored on a memory For further information refer to the following card or in the built in flash memory after gt EN Operation for display of this subsection the power to the GOT is turned on x Z O gt gt Lu ee E 09 gt 09 3 lt MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor gt When no ladder data is stored L3 3 3 3 Display S after the GOT is started S lt lt MELSEC A FX ladder monitor gt lt MELSEC Q QnA A FX ladder monitor gt be When performing the ladder monitor When ladder data has already been Display format change ag first after starting the GOT read after the GOT was started search Menu window 1r screen display oc O O UU kE 0 E M JP LE de 7 00 L zE lt 37 3 3 3 Display gt 3 5 Switching the Display Format 3 6 Search Operation kE U x lt L Touch u g PLC reading setting E 7 O window display Oz
315. agram Monitor Screen 13 7 3 Menus Display menu MELSAP L Program Display SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR Comment Display in Zoom Window Comment Change Automatic scro Active Step List Active Block List Program List PLE Read Ladder Monitor Sets the MELSAP L program display mode CNC MONITOR FUNCTION MELSAP L Program Display Touching the key in the MELSAP L program display mode cancels 13 4 2 the MELSAP L program display mode BACKUP RESTORE Sets the zoom comment display mode Touching the key in the zoom comment display mode cancels the 13 4 3 Comment Display in Zoom Window zoom comment display mode Comment Change Displays the comment file list window This section BA Sets the automatic scroll mode Automatic Sero Touching the key in the automatic scroll mode cancels the 13 4 5 automatic scroll mode oO CNC DATA I O Active Block List Displays the active block list window This section EN 3 Program List Displays the program list window 13 5 2 2 PLC Read Displays the PLC read screen 13 5 Starts the ladder monitor O E le O LL Gr Ladder Monitor Touching the key with a device selected can automatically search Chapter 3 for the device with the ladder monitor op 1 Eor the automatic search with the ladder monitor settings for automatically reading sequence programs are O Q required zZ For settings for automatically reading sequence pro
316. ails on setting the password 2 Operations a Inputting the password Touch the key window and enter a password After entering the password touch to set the password To edit the input characters touch to delete the characters and then input the new characters b Canceling password input Touch x to return to the monitor screen 8 4 Operation Procedures 8 4 10 Parameter setting screen OVERVIEW SYSTEM MONITOR LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC A LIST EDITOR MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR NETWORK MONITOR 00 oc O E Z O Z O E O O Parameter setting operation The following describes the procedure of changing the setting of the Auto Tuning item as an example 8 24 of the parameter setting operation Auto Tuning Auto Tuning 8 4 Operation Procedures 8 4 10 Parameter setting screen Select the item whose parameter is to be set with the a Y keys and touch the key As the parameter setting window appears enter the parameter setting with Alphanumeric and touch to confirm the setting To cancel the parameter setting operation touch x at the top right of the screen to close the parameter setting window E As the confirmation window appears touch to write the parameter setting to the motion controller CPU To cancel writing of the parameter setting touch Cancel After writing is completed the parameter setting
317. al documents are subject to change without prior notice 6 Product application 1 In using the Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the graphic operation terminal device and that backup and fail safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault 2 The Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries etc Thus applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by respective power companies and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required such as for Railway companies or Public service purposes shall be excluded from the graphic operation terminal applications In addition applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected such as in aircraft medical applications incineration and fuel devices manned transportation equipment for recreation and amusement and safety devices shall also be excluded from the graphic operation terminal range of applications However in certain cases some applications may be possible providing the user consults the local Mitsubishi representative outlining the special requirements of the project and providing that all parties concerned agree to the special circumstances
318. ame PRG E 2 characters 1 wh Extension 4 characters INDEX Drive name 1 character Max 78 characters 12 2 Specifications 12 3 12 2 2 Access range 12 4 a Remark When setting hierarchy to folder For setting Folder Name enter between folder names is counted as one character The maximum number of hierarchy levels for creating folders is 20 Setting example Folder Name Project 1 abc Project b Character strings that cannot be set The following character strings cannot be used in a folder name and a file name The character strings cannot be used irrespective of capital or small letters COM1 to COM9 LPT1 to LPT9 AUX CON NUL PRN CLOCK The following folder names and file names also cannot be used Folder names starting with G1 Folder and file names starting with a period or Folder and file names ending with a period or Folder and file names with a period or two periods only 4 Protect for data I O When the data protection key 1 2 or 3 and edit lock B or C is set the data I O is restricted For the data protection key 1 2 3 and edit lock B C refer to the following manual Manual for CNC to be used 12 2 Specifications 12 2 3 Precautions 12 3 Display Display operations The following describes the outline for displaying the operation screen for the CNC data I O after installing CNC Data I O and GOT Platform Library ext
319. ame setting for the target PLC CPU 2 Target controller Displays CH No network No station No and CPU No of the target PLC CPU 3 Keys for operations on the PLC read screen shown in section 13 5 2 Touch input Displays the target PLC CPU model and the drives in a list oc O Z le O LL 7 on Selecting a drive displays files within the drive in the file list target controller 4 Target drive list target controller S S For the drive that stores files selected in the file list target controller is displayed to the left of the drive name Displays the program types file names titles sizes dates and times of all the files within the drive selected in the target drive list target controller The date and time show those of updated files APPENDICES A file to be read can be selected from the file list The selected file is highlighted 5 File list target controller For program files only SFC program files in the program memory can be selected For selecting the file name selected in the file list GOT the file selection in the file list GOT is canceled When a password is set for the selected file the password input window appears L This section 1 Password input window Continued to next page INDEX 13 5 How to Operate PLC Read Screen 13 17 13 5 1 Displayed contents No 13 18 Target drive list GOT File list GOT Total file size Number of selected fil
320. annot be set has been Select an item that can be set selected A value that is outside the setting a Set the value within the setting range range has been set The password that was input as the motion parameter changing Input the correct password password is incorrect A communication driver that is compatible with the Q motion Install a compatible communication driver monitor is not installed Point f How to clear a displayed error message For errors that occur with the connection to a controller communication error etc the error message does not disappear even after the cause of the error has been removed To delete the error message restart the GOT 8 5 Error Messages and Corrective Action 9 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR GT16 ElEl AEN Gao eTl 1 Various monitor functions changes to the parameter settings and test operations can be performed on the servo amplifier connected to the GOT The features of the servo amplifier monitor are described below 9 1 Features Real time display of the servo amplifier status L gt 9 4 3 9 4 4 A list of the status of the servo amplifier connected to the GOT and the alarm details can be displayed in real time Display examples Monitor Alarm display Alarm Number AL20 Cunulat ive Hadas 4489753 pulse Peak load ratio 8 E S ears Servo motor speed 400 r min nstantaneous 0 Teena eer 10 03 46 ES 3273 pulse eenma TES 120877 pulse Cause o
321. ar from the screen b When searching program is deleted For returning to the search results of the previously searched program by Sea touching the key during searching in multiple sequence programs the touch operation is canceled when the previously searched program is deleted 3 4 Operation Procedure Common 3 41 3 4 1 Information and key functions displayed on the screen OVERVIEW SYSTEM MONITOR Q3 oc O E Z le oc T Q G lt l Z O H O Z LL MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR MELSEC A LIST EDITOR NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 3 Menu window for the ladder monitor a Display screen A X Dev Sea Aref Cunt Cont Sea 16 32Bit Cunt 32 Coil Sea Dec Hex Note Step Sea Test Statement End Sea Local Dev b Key functions Function lt Displays the ladder block containing the specified device L Subsection 3 6 1 Device search Displays the ladder block containing the specified device Subsection 3 6 2 Contact point search Displays the ladder block containing the specified coil Coil Sea Coil Sea Subsection 3 6 3 Coil search Bany Displays the ladder block containing th ified st b isplays the ladder block containing the specified step number operation Step Sea pay 9 E E Subsection 3 6 4 Step search Displays the last ladder block of the sequence program
322. ard disk and others on the personal computer Get the above file from one of the followings e BkupRstrDataConv folder in the Disc CD ROM of GT Works2 or GT Designer2 e GID2 folder on the personal computer e MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FA NETWORK SERVICE website MELFANSweb website http wwwf2 mitsubishielectric co jp english index html Double click the copied BkupRstrDataConv exe and then the tool starts Refer to the following and set the tool 11 5 Backup Data Conversion Tool 11 31 11 5 2 How to install and start Backup Data Conversion Tool SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR J CNC MONITOR 2 Y FUNCTION LLI GC O E 7 LLI 2 oa Y O lt m SFC MONITOR CNC DATA I O APPENDICES INDEX 11 5 3 How to use Backup Data Conversion Tool Setting items The following shows the setting items of Backup Data Conversion Tool HN Backup Data Conversion Tool Conversion Target GOT gt GX Developer 7 Conversion Destination GX Developer gt GOT Browse Backup Data Folder Target Drive Program Memory Programmable Controllers Workspace Drive Setting Drive Name Z ka Drive Asslenment Drive Release Folder to be assigned to a workspace drive LS Import GOT gt Gx Developer Export GX Developer gt GOT End Item Description Conversion Target Specify data to be converted Specify the storage location of the backup data setting data UNITINFO G1B created with the backup restore functio
323. arget drive list target controller Touching the key selects all the SFC program files common comment files and comment files for the selected SFC program files in the file list target controller When files with the same name are displayed in the file list target controller and file list GOT touching the key selects a file as shown below e For SFC program files When the updated dates and times differ between the files touching the key selects the file in the file list target controller When the updated dates and times are the same between the files touching the key selects the file in the file list GOT e For comment files When the updated dates and times differ between the files touching the key selects the latest file When the updated dates and times are the same between the files touching the key selects the file in the file list GOT Writes the file selected in the file list target controller into the CF card displayed in the target drive list GOT The file written into the CF card on the PLC read screen is stored in the SEQDAT folder After writing among files other than comment files in the CF card files that are not selected in the file list GOT are deleted Then the program list window appears This section 2 Program list window 13 20 13 5 How to Operate PLC Read Screen 13 5 2 Key functions 1 Communication setting window a Displayed screen Ch No STATION Ch NG STATION Wh
324. ata from CF card to built in flash memory and starting GOT with built in flash memory Insert the CF card in the PC Write the OS and project data to be installed on the GOT from the PC to the CF card 1 Write the standard monitor OS communication driver extended function OS option OS project data in the CF card 1 Install standard monitor OS communication driver extended function OS option OS to the GOT After installation is completed the GOT automatically restarts Check that the CF card access switch is off and insert the CF 2 Download the project data i card into the GOT created by the PC Turn on the CF card access switch and then install or download the standard monitor OS communication driver option OS extended function OS and project data Install GT Designer2 in the PC Create project data Wire for the GOT power supply GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual GT Designer2 Version _ Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual GT Designer2 Version _ Screen Design Manual GT10 User s Manual GT11 User s Manual GT15 User s Manual GT16 User s Manual GT10 User s Manual GT11 User s Manual GT15 User s Manual GT16 User s Manual When transferring data to CF card and starting GOT with CF card Insert the CF card in the PC Write the OS and project data to be installed on the GOT from the PC to the CF card 1
325. ate ch EUA 5 0 4 Enter Del A Q O S Password input key window sun This Enter the parameter changing password ME R section UN LW L a Z Ll A A Menu Era lt Pr Name Value Uni 0 0001 _ Change 1 Function selection 2 Auto ne i ai _Write 3 Com pulse multiply numer 16384 4 Com pulse multiply denom 375 Verify 5 In position range 10 pulse 6 Position control gain 1 268 rad s 7 Ea oe time cons 0 ms Write An 8 Internal speed command 1 100 r min 9 aia Kes command 2 500 r min Read All 10 Internal speed command 3 1000 r min 11 Acceleration time constant 0 ms default 12 Deceleration time constan 0 ms IS ore Nas ars 0 ms Cycle amplifier power to initiate changes fe a Z Parameter setting screen 9 4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens 9 29 9 4 6 Parameter setting Password input operation procedure The following describes the procedure for inputting the password for changing the servo parameters A A Please input the passsword MEE 1 8 9 A BJajw 1 4 5 6 LH al K Cycle amplifier power to initiate ch MAA AE EIS 2 O J 4 Enter Del A Print ST Sereen He 1 Functions e If the input password matches the parameter setting screen is displayed e If the input password does not match an error message is displayed Touching returns to the function selection menu screen e Numerical numbers and letters A to F can be
326. ation number uz 1 to 64 Control station normal station For Ethernet connection For CC Link system O Z O NETWK No 1 to 239 NETWK No 0 Station No 1 to 64 Station No O Master station 2 l 1 YOU need to set a monitor target using GT Designer2 in advance m For ACPU monitoring specify the network number station number set using GT Designer2 Refer to the following for details of the monitor target setting for Ethernet connection 37 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual 10 ETHERNET CONNECTION 5 2 When the station No is set to the host station FF set the network No to 0 Z gt When the setting is finished the system configuration of the specified station is displayed 6 l E Refer to Section 6 4 6 for further operations O 6 4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen 6 17 6 4 2 Setting method for other station monitoring 6 4 3 Composition of PC Information monitor screen and key functions This section describes the structure of the PC Information monitor screen that is displayed by specifying the QCPU Q mode or QSCPU on the System Configuration screen and the key functions displayed on the screen The GOT displays the PC Information monitor screen only when using the following controllers e QCPU Q mode e QSCPU When using the QCPU Q mode 1 Displayed contents 1 2 Item Description 1 Displays the network number and station number of the monitored station 2 Displays the
327. automatically and programs to be read can be specified When a Japanese or English file name is specified the corresponding program can be read Accordingly the specified program can be read to be searched and the search result is displayed on the monitor screen by a simple operation as selecting a displayed alarm and then touch the key code switch Multiple files can be read By reading multiple PLC CPU files in advance reading of another program from the PLC CPU is not needed every time the program display is switched and comment display can be switched automatically This enables more efficient ladder monitoring reducing the operation time 3 1 Features 3 3 OVERVIEW SYSTEM MONITOR Q oc O E Z le oc T Q G lt l Z O H O Z LL MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR MELSEC A LIST EDITOR NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 3 2 Specifications 3 2 1 System configuration This section describes the system configuration of the ladder monitor For connection type settings and precautions regarding the communication unit cable and connection type see the following manual gt GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Target controller Controller QCPU Q mode QSCPU QnACPU ACPU QCPU A mode Motion controller A Series FXCPU CNC C70 C6 C64 4 1 The GOT cannot write data to devices in the QSCPU 2 Monitoring is not possible when the target CPU is a motion cont
328. ays keys used for the operations on the monitor screen shown in 4 Key functions The table below shows the functions of keys that are used for the operations on the monitor screen Key Function Closes the monitoring and returns the screen to the one for starting the intelligent module monitor Closes the current monitor and returns to the screen displaying monitor menu This operation can only be used when the intelligent function module has a monitor menu Starts changing writing the current values of the buffer memory of the intelligent function module displayed on the screen Starts testing SET RST of the I O signal between the PLC CPU and the intelligent function module 6 4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen 6 23 6 4 5 Composition of the intelligent module monitor screen and key functions LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR OVERVIEW SYSTEM MONITOR MELSEC A LIST EDITOR O UU gt Q G E uu 9 y JJ ul Z oc O E Z le NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 6 4 6 Specifying a module to monitor and selecting monitor menu This section uses the positioning module AD71 as an example to describe the operations when starting the intelligent module monitor to monitor a desired module Operation procedure Display System Configuration screen See Sec 6 4 1 Specify module to be monitored Touch display position of module 1 From among the modu
329. bes the GT10 functions including the utility Sold separately GT SoftGOT1000 Version2 Operating Manual Describes the screen configuration functions and using method of GT SoftGOT1000 Sold separately GT Designer2 Version2 Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual For GOT1000 Series Describes methods of the GT Designer2 installation operation basic operation for drawing and transmitting data to GOT1000 series Sold separately GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual For GOT1000 Series 1 3 2 3 3 3 Describes specifications and settings of each object function applicable to GOT1000 series Sold separately GOT1000 Series Connection Manual 1 3 2 3 3 3 Describes system configurations of the connection method applicable to GOT1000 series and cable creation Sold separately Manual Number Model Code SH 080778ENG 1D7M88 SH 080528ENG 1D7M23 JY997D17501A 09R815 JY997D20101B 09R817 JY997D24701 09R819 SH 080602ENG 1D7M48 SH 080529ENG 1D7M24 SH 080530ENG 1D7M25 SH 080532ENG 1D7M26 Continued to next page Manual Name GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual Describes specifications system comfigurations and setting method of the gateway function Sold separately GOT1000 Series MES Interface Function Manual Describes the specifications system configurations and setting method of GT MES interface function Sold separately Manual Number Model Code SH 080545E
330. c 6 4 7 6 12 6 3 Display Point f 1 How to display the utility For how to display the utility refer to the following C gt GT16 User s manual 8 3 Utility Display gt GT15 User s manual 9 3 Utility Display gt 2 Displaying communication setting window After turning on the GOT the communication setting window is displayed at the first startup of the intelligent module monitor only O For displaying the communication setting window at the second or later startup S touch the button on the intelligent module monitor screen z gt 6 4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen 3 Ifthe project data has not been downloaded The intelligent module monitor can be started from the utility even if the project c data has not been downloaded to the GOT 2 ao 2 oc E T D lt O S gt MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR O UU gt Q G E uu 9 y JJ ul Z oc O E Z le NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 6 3 Display 6 13 Changing screens The following describes how to change the screen At the second or Utility Main Menu later startup or user created monitor screen At the first startup Communication setting window Touch System Configuration System Configuration screen See Sec 6 4 1 Touch the display module in info mode Touch System Configuration Touch the displayed module in
331. c Automation SNP X 04 02 GE FANUC PLC Supporting connection to GE FANUC PLC connection Communication driver 2 90U LS Industrial Systems MASTER K 04 02 LS IS PLC connection Supporting connection to LS IS PLC SCHNEIDER PLC Communication driver i i 2 90U amedio Supporting connection to the MODBUS TCP MODBUS TCP 04 02 Communication driver SIEMENS PLC Sipai ap Supporting connection to SIEMENS PLC 2 90U SIEMENS S7 300 400 04 02 i SIEMENS S7 200 04 02 Communication driver Computer 04 02 Microcomputer Supporting connection to a microcomputer 2 90U connection Communication driver 2 90U OMRON THERMAC INPANEL NEO 04 02 OMRON temperature Supporting connection to OMRON temperature controller controller connection Communication driver 2 90U SHINKO TECHNOS CONTROLLER 04 02 SHINKO indicating Supporting connection to SHINKO indicating controller controller connection Communication driver 2 90U CHINO Controllers MODBUS 04 02 FUJI SYS temperature Communication driver Supporting connection to FUJI SYS temperature controller 2 90U controller connection FUJI PXR PXG PXH 04 02 YAMATAKE temperature Communication driver Supporting connection to YAMATAKE temperature controller 2 90U controller connection YAMATAKE SDC DMC 04 02 YOKOGAWA Communication driver temperature controller 2 90U YOKOGAWA GREEN UT100 connection UT2000 04 02 RKC tem
332. cable to GT1030 a GT Designer2 Version 2 90U or later is applicable to GT1050 OF iW nS Added GOT main unit Version of GT Target Models Version of OS Designer2 a O GT1020 LBD GT1020 LBD2 GT1020 LBL 2 43V z E GT1020 LBDW GT1020 LBDW2 GT1020 LBLW 2 58L E S z5 GT1030 LBD GT1030 LBD2 GT1030 LBDW GT1030 LBDW2 2 58L E GT1055 QSBD GT1050 QBBD 2 90U rr Added connection types z x UU t t l l O Applicable x N A Applicable from the first version z 7 Version of GT a er ar z Item Description l Version of OS Designer2 1050 1030 1020 Direct Standard monitor OS 01 10 connection to Supporting connection to FX3G series 2 90U Communication driver CPU MELSEC FX 01 06 O Standard monitor OS 01 09 lt Computer link l l l o E Supporting connection to A series PLC 2 82L Communication driver a connection o AJ71C24 UC24 01 04 E CC Link Standard monitor OS 01 07 connection Via Supporting connection to CC Link Via G4 2 73B Communication driver O G4 CC Link G4 01 00 l l Standard monitor OS 01 02 oc Microcomputer Supporting the data formats of Format 1 and a l O 2 472 Communication driver O gt connection Format 2 Computer 01 02 Standard monitor OS 01 02 7 OMRON PLC l G i Supporting connection to OMRON PLC 2 47Z Communication driver O connection OMRON SYSMAC 01 02 Standard monitor OS 01 07 Supporting connection to KEYENCE PLC 2 73B Communication driv
333. ce name l l 25 Version O Screen Design Manual ES Z gt l l When no comments are displayed Up to eight devices can be displayed 11 Monitor display area l When comments are displayed Up to four devices can be displayed 1 Indicates CC Link connection Intelligent device station O 2 Indicates CC Link connection via G4 Z gt SE LC O m Z L O E Z O gt zZ O kE O gt O 2 5 Entry Monitor 2 33 2 5 1 Information displayed on the Entry Monitor screen and key functions 2 5 2 Procedure for entry monitor basic operation i DEV MON When no devices are entered Display example when devices are already entered 01ST AS FFICPUNO 0 PRESS SET KEY SELEC s TEM THEN ENTER DEVICE TYPE amp No If necessary perform Quick test If necessary switch the screen display Operation gt Subsection 2 4 4 Switching the gt Subsection 2 4 5 Quick test display format DEC HEX and operation of monitor devices comment no comment display If necessary perform the following Entering monitor devices Enter the name and number of the devices you want to monitor one by one lt gt Subsection 2 4 2 Entering monitor devices specifying monitor stations and devices Deleting entry devices lt _ gt Subsection 2 5 3 Deleting entry devices Test operation lt 7 Section 2 9 Test operation Point f If more than eight devices are registered You can register up to eig
334. cedure sese 2 53 Index 1 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR CNC MONITOR FUNCTION BACKUP RESTORE CNC DATA I O SFC MONITOR 0 U O G Z T o o lt LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION A Access TANG 6 radona a a 3 11 C GO SEARCH ai a 3 59 Contact point search esse eee 3 57 D Delect sea Clica 3 63 Devices and range that can be monitored 3 9 Device SCAN ete 3 55 Kel UT 3 15 Displaying 32 characters of comments 3 48 Displaying NOES civic 3 50 Displaying statements sse e eee eee eee e 3 51 Displaying the test menu screen ee ee e 3 69 Display switching of 16 bit one word 32 bit two word modules sss sse eee eee 3 45 Display switching of decimal numbers hexadecimal numbers sse eee eee 3 46 E Error Messages and Corrective Action 3 73 H Hard COD W OU a nE es 3 44 1 Information and key functions displayed ON the screen eee eee 3 37 L Ladder end Search eee 3 62 0 Operation Procedure COMMON sss esse eee eee e 3 37 Outline until the Start eee eee 3 15 P SNE aT 3 11 S Searching from the monitor Screen ee e 3 31 Search Operation Res 3 54 Setting and deleting media for saving adder dala A 3 20 SOC CIICATOMS oe 1c te a dE 3 4 Starts reading a comment file from a CF card 3 28 Step SA e 3 61 Switching comment no comment display 3 47 Switching the Display ForMalt ccccooccnnccccnnnncnno 3 45 System COn
335. cess range when the GOT is connected to a controller Refer to the following manual for details of the access range X gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 2 7 Controller that can be Monitored and the Accessible Range 9 2 3 Precautions 1 Before using the servo amplifier monitor Read the manual of the connected servo amplifier carefully and make sure you understand the contents before performing servo amplifier monitoring Test operation Be sure to read the precautions listed below before performing a test operation 9 4 7 Test operations Time displayed on the servo amplifier monitor lf the time data of the GOT is incorrect the time on the servo amplifier monitor will not be displayed correctly Refer to the following manual for the GOT clock data K gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 2 5 Clock Function Setting details Use the same settings for the servo amplifier monitor on the GOT Setup screen L gt 9 4 2 and the servo amplifier If the settings are different proper communications may not be performed Servo amplifier monitored One servo amplifier can be selected to be monitored among 32 servo amplifiers If multiple servo amplifiers are connected select one servo amplifier to monitor 9 2 Specifications 9 11 9 2 2 Access range Co oc uu a lt O gt oc Lu 0 oc O Z le CNC MONITOR FUNCTION BACKUP RESTORE SFC MONITOR CNC DATA I O
336. ch is X1 M310 M340 M41 Print Screen M310 M340 The ladder is displayed on the following line Print Screen When searching multiple files with the MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor displaying the ladder block of the subsequent sequence file clears the previous display Only the ladder block s found in the subsequent sequence file is displayed r Sea Print JUMP T JUMP Screen 3 58 3 6 Search Operation 3 6 2 Contact point search 3 6 3 Coil search Coil search displays the ladder block that contains a specified coil l m lt Operation procedure gt E 3 D Touch Menu oc O E Z O Lu kE 09 gt Menu window de E Touch Coil Sea 3 zoe CA PI x Dev Sea Xref Cmnt Cont Sea 16 32Bit Cmnt 32 Coi ba Dec Hex Note Statement Print Screen oc O E Z le oc T Q G lt l Z O H O Z LL Touch Coil Sea LUC O Using the lt and gt keys switch the input S L area and Enter a device name and its 7 lt gt DEVICE HI 4 U URL S aj y BEE 2 BI LIU U U aK giua aaia z MA E 6 a Enter del A QO After the device name and its number are entered touch the key Input is 5 completed and the keyboard closes x M The data entered can be corrected with the x O following keys wo Del key Used to delete a character of the entered information L key Used to delete all characters O
337. ch setting data information files svis bin Mechanical system File after conversion of mechanical system program edit ae oe eect ate svmchprm bin gt program conversion file information file into internal codes Cam data files of cam No 1 to 64 svcamprm bin Cam data files of cam No 101 to 164 svcampr2 bin 7 Cam data conversion file Cam data files of cam No 201 to 264 svcampr3 bin 7 Cam data files of cam No 301 to 364 svcampr4 bin Q series PLC common Data files of Multiple CPU setting I O assignment and l param wpa parameter file others Multiple CPU high speed E Multiple CPU high speed refresh setting information files svrefresh bin refresh setting 11 2 Specifications 11 2 1 System configuration 1 The data can be backed up or restored only with the Q172DCPU or Q173DCPU 2 The data can be backed up or restored only with the Q172HCPU Q173HCPU Q172CPU Q173CPU Q172CPUN or Q173CPUN 3 The data can be backed up or restored only with the Q172HCPU or Q173HCPU 4 The data can be backed up or restored only with the Q172CPU Q173CPU Q172CPUN or Q173CPUN 5 The data can be backed up or restored with the SV22 operating system software only 6 Data for software Label program Data for GX Developer PROJINFO CAB Symbolic data Symbolic data for PX Developer FFBDQINF BIN Point f 1 Data that cannot be backed up N The GOT cannot back up device current values and data stored in device memories For collecting
338. ching the CNCs Up to eight GOTs can simultaneously monitor one CNC a SERVO AMPLIFIER O MONITOR 3 MELSECNET 10 connection GOT monitors the control station only cc O gt Z GQ 6 Oz Z o O L 10 2 3 Precautions 1 Before using the CNC monitor Read the manual of the connected CNC carefully and make sure you understand the contents before using the CNC monitor function BACKUP RESTORE 2 GOT to be used The CNC monitor cannot be used with the GT1575 V GT1575 VN GT1572 VN GT1560 and GT1550 3 Usable CNC The CNC monitor is applicable to the CNC C70 and MELDAS C6 C64 a CNC C70 Use the CNC C70 with the system software version of BND 1006W000 A0 or later o MELDAS C6 64 Use the MELDAS C6 C64 with the system software version of BND 377W010 DO or later SFC MONITOR CNC DATA I O APPENDICES INDEX 10 2 Specifications 10 5 10 2 2 Access range 10 3 Display Display operations This section describes the flow until the operation screen of the CNC monitor is displayed after the CNC monitor Option OS is installed in the GOT Starting from the special Turn on the power to the GOT function switch CNC monitor set in the project data Starting from the utility Display the utility Touch the special function switch After the utility is displayed touch Debug amp self check Refer to the following manual for how to set the special Debug
339. code reader connection Printer connection FA transparent Multiple GT 11 connection External I O device connection RFID connection App 14 Version of Description GT Version of OS Designer2 Communication driver Supporting connection to CNC MELDAS 2 18U A QnAQJ71E71 AJ71 Q E71 02 02 MELSECNET 10 02 02 CC Link ID 02 02 C6 C64 series Communication driver name has been gen Communication driver changed l AJ71QC24 MELDAS CG 03 01 Supporting settings for the number of Communication driver retries the timeout time and delay time 2 73B Communication driver Communication driver name has been changed CRnD 700 03 09 l l Extended function OS Supporting connection to barcode reader 2 09K Barcode 01 02 Extended function OS Supporting connection to 2D code reader 2 27D Barcode 02 04 Extended function OS Supporting connection to printer Printer 02 04 Supporting the FA transparent function via USB M M J U GT15 2 09K GT11 Boot OS 01 02 C MT Developer via USB MR Configurator and FR Configurator are added as 2 27D compatible software GX Configuration and PX Developer are added as compatible software Supporting the computer link connection between the GOT and PLC on GX Developer 2 77F Supporting the computer link connection between the GOT and PLC on PX Developer FX Configurator FP is added as compatible soft
340. configuration S Required extended function OS option OS and option function board LC The following extended function OS option OS and option function board are required S Aa OS memory space user area OS memory space user area space user area Option function board ec E D 6 amp 8 Category Option OS Wes Sn in flash User memory GT15 GT16 GT15 memory ROM RAM Extended function OS GOT Platform Library 200KB 100KB GT15 QFNB16M SFC Monitor Monitor 608KB 1940KB 1373KB GT15 QFNB32M oc nee GT15 QFNB48M E Option OS 7 Function l 30 4728KB 19381KB 4728KB GT15 MESB48M sE Expansion Library oS Si 1 Eor using the SFC monitor function a capacity of 6201KB or more is required in the user area of the specified drive for installing the extended function OS and option OS For using the GOT with the built in flash memory of 5MB set the OS boot drive to A Standard CF Card For operating GOT Function Expansion Library option OS a capacity of 8192KB is required in the user area of S the GOT memory A total memory capacity of 14393KB is required for using the SFC monitor function 7 Therefore the following settings are required depending on the GOT to be used 2 SE GOT Required setting a a e Setting the OS boot drive to A Standard CF Card GT1575 VN GT1572 VN l l l l e Memory expansion Installing an option function board with add on GT1562 VN memory e Memory expansion Installing an option functi
341. connection The device range applicable to monitoring is extended 2 58L Up to 991F for R and up to 911 for WR can be set Supporting settings for the timeout time 273B and the delay time l Supporting connection to MP2000 and MP3000 Supporting the Ethernet connection 2 47Z YASKAWA PLC connection 2 47Z Supporting settings for the number of 5738 retries and the timeout time l Supporting connection to CP 312 2 77F 2 32J Supporting connection to STARDOM YOKOGAWA PLC connection Supporting the Ethernet connection 2 472 Supporting connection to the 2 73B MODBUS TCP Version of OS Communication driver HITACHI HIDIC H 01 02 HITACHI HIDIC H Protocol 2 01 02 Communication driver HITACHI HIDIC H 03 09 HITACHI HIDIC H Protocol 2 03 09 Communication driver HITACHI S10mini S10V 03 01 Communication driver FUJI MICREX F 03 01 Communication driver MATSUSHITA MEWNET FP 01 02 Communication driver MATSUSHITA MEWNET FP 02 02 Communication driver MATSUSHITA MEWNET FP 03 03 Communication driver MATSUSHITA MEWNET FP 03 09 Communication driver YASKAWA GL CP9200 SH H CP9300MS 03 02 Communication driver Ethernet YASKAWA 03 02 Communication driver YASKAWA GL CP9200 SH H CP9300MS 03 09 Communication driver Ethernet YASKAWA 03 12 Communication driver YOKOGAWA FA500 FA M3 STARDOM 03 00
342. creen capture l l 2 43V O and loading to GT Designer2 e Interval of magnification specification has been changed e buttons have been added Zoom l l l 2 43V O e Zoom in zoom out operations using the Ctrl key and Mouse wheel have been added Lines to align figures and objects are dis Guidelines played when arranging a placed figure or 2 90U object Continued to next page X X X App 16 Version of GT GT GT Soft GT Item Description Version of OS Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 o ULU Ser e fol x fo Aa e Enables updating BootOS without the Z standard monitor OS updated when gt lt only BootOS is already installed on the Os GOT 2 58L BootOS 03 03 P x O Communication e Enables installing the standard monitor OS with the communication driver at once when only BootOS is already E installed on the GOT Z ZO Enables installing OSs on the A drive with SE l l 2 73B x x OZ the OS boot drive set to the A drive Sr Enables setting the maximum number of Preferences 2 63R O screens to be displayed on GT Designer2 Functions of the collection target L Device list selection jump file output and others are 2 73B O S added cr 5 Enables displaying the direct input texts in E a list m l Enables displaying BMP or JPEG image di data reduced t luti f 2000 2 77F JPEG image data ata reduced to a ESSE ion O x O 1600 or less on GT Designer2 Q 4 E Added common setti
343. ct S sequence program had not been read PLC CPU E pe ONO 2 When the file is selected and the Ex A sub sequence program can only be specified as gt L oc O Z G oc m Q G lt q l Z O E O Z 5 LL GPPQ read the file again x E NOT EXISTING DRIVE 1 The specified drive does not exist 1 Check whether the specified drive exists or not Q DRIVE ERROR 2 The specified drive is faulty 2 Check whether the specified drive is faulty or not L ENTRY CODE The specified file password differs from Confirm the file password registered to S MISMATCH the one registered as the file password of the drive of the corresponding PLC m the corresponding PLC CPU CPU and specify it again T 1 When reading file from PLC CPU e After selecting a file and pressing the Read key the selected file does not 1 When reading file from PLC CPU exist in the PLC CPU drive e Perform Read from PLC on the network No station e When starting ladder monitor from the number input screen to update the file list monitor screen the selected file does Change the specified drive Target memory a FILE NOT FOUND e D not exist in the PLC CPU drive e Check the sequence program in the PLC CPU 2 E Q 2 When reading file from CF card 2 When reading file from CF card u e No CF cards are inserted in the e Check if a CF card is inserted in the specified drive specified drive e Check if comment files are stored in the CF card a
344. ction RET Returns to the line monitor Exits the detailed monitor and returns to the screen where the network monitor function was started 7 4 Operation Procedures 7 4 2 Detailed monitor 7 4 3 Other station monitor This section describes the structure of the monitor screen and the common operations used when executing the other station monitor z o 2 Display contents and keys functions other station monitor menu 5 This section describes the other station monitor menu screen and the function of on screen keys The menu screen for the other station monitor is displayed by touching a module number displayed on the host monitor screen a By this other station monitor menu each of the other station monitor can be specified Z 1 Displayed contents S 2 Another Sta Menu 09 2 LC 1 g 6 5 O LU e O 6 23 Ww oc O E a UU No Display contents 7 me ns 1 lt Switches to the communication status monitor for other stations y 1 COM STA Mm 3 7 4 4 Other station communication status monitor T gt Switches to the data link status monitor for other stations 7 2 D Link L gt 7 4 5 Other station data link status monitor Switches to the parameter status monitor for other stations 3 P MTR 7 U gt 7 4 6 Other station parameter status monitor 2 LL Switches to the CPU operation status monitor for other stations 7 mee 4 CPU OP O L gt 7 4 7 Other station CPU operation status monitor Ta
345. ction screen is displayed after System moni tor Extended function OS is installed in the GOT Turn on the power to the GOT Starting from the utility Display the utility i a After the utility is displayed touch Debug amp self check gt Debug gt System monitor from the Main Menu For how to display the utility refer to the user s manual of the GOT to be used Starting from the special function switch System Monitor set in the project data Touch the special function switch Refer to the following manual for how to set the special function switch GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 6 2 Touch Switch Display the functional change menu screen of the system monitor function Depending on the model used the GT15 displays the functional change menu screen in four different screen displays Set the channel No T as network No station No etc ChNo M NetNo 1ST_ CPUNo E Co Conn Driver _ lt gt R E Reads the PLC and displays the sequence program Continued to next page 2 16 2 3 Display 2 3 1 Outline until starting the system monitor From previous page Changing monitor screen from full mode to quad mode For GT1555 VTBD For the GT1555 VTBD the monitor screen can be switched between the full and quad modes with the button for switching the number of monitor screens When the monitor
346. cts as the remote master station on the MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 1 Displayed contents No Item k 2 TsSti Info 2 Ctrl St Info D Link Info 4 Constant LS This Station sk NetWork Group Spc Ctrl Sta Curr Ctrl Sta Com Info SubCtrl Sta Com Total of L Sta Largest Nrm Sta argest DL Sta S Disconnect ion Initialize Com suspension 9sp Cause of Stop This Sations Network Group Spc Ctrl Sta x Curr Ctrl Sta Com Info SubCtrl Sta Com e Total of L Sta Largest Nrm Sta Largest DL Sta Com Status x Causes of Ssp x Causes of Stop Constant l S Constant LS 4 Normal 5 Normal FLoop Back Station RLoop Back Station of Loop Switching 0 6 None Normal Mode Normal Trans Normal Trans Display contents Indicates the station number of the host Indicates the network number Not displayed is displayed Not displayed is displayed Not displayed is displayed Not displayed is displayed Not displayed is displayed Indicates the maximum number of the stations to be linked which is set by common parameters Indicates the maximum station number of the station that is connected in a normal condition Indicates the maximum station number of the station that is performing data link Shows the current communications status of the host D Link in prog D Link
347. d OS memory space user area Option function board eae Option OS E in flash User memory GT15 GT11 GT16 GT15 GT11 memory ROM RAM GT15 FNB GT15 QFNB MELSEC A l GT15 QFNB16M l l 542KB 1024KB 1058KB OKB Not required GT11 50FNB list editor GT15 QFNB32M GT15 QFNB48M GT15 MESB48M 1 Option OS Install the option OS in the above table to the GOT Refer to the following manual for the procedure for installing the option OS L gt GT Designer2 Version O Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual 8 TRANSFERRING DATA 2 OS memory space The available memory space shown in the table above is required in the user area to install the option OS to the GOT Refer to the following manual for the procedure for checking the available memory space of the user area and information about the data using other user areas GT Designer2 Version O Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual 8 TRANSFERRING DATA 3 Option function board a For GT16 No option function board is required b For GT15 and GT11 Mount one of the option function boards in the above table on the GOT For the GOTs with a built in option function board refer to the following 37 1 1 2 Hardware and OS required for each function For how to mount an option function board on the GOT refer to the following manual L gt GT15 User s Manual 8 10 Option Function Board GT11 User s Manual 8 3 Option Function Board 4 2 2 Access range The access range is the
348. d x Response Setting 1 OR ti ti t oad Inertia Ratio oe Speed Ctrl Gainl Position Ctrl Gain2 Auto Tuning PV 1 a P fa 71 8 9 AJ BI al A T H O E O Enter Del A Change auto tuning from 1 Gain Adjustment Auto Tuning Model Position Ctrl Gainl Speed Ctr1 Gain2 D Speed Position 1 Speed Zp Auto Manara a a to 2 No Auto x gt Parameter setting screen M Auto Gain Adjustment Manual Mode2 1 SY Response Setting 7 0 To Motor 70 rad sec Load Inertia Ratio Position Ctr1 Gainl Speed Ctr1 Gainl 1200 rad sec 25 rad sec 600 rad sec Position Ctrl Gain2 Speed Ctrl Gain2 Speed Integral Comp 20 rad sec Notch Filter Not Used Feed Forward Gain 0 Parameter setting is changed LT By performing writing from the parameter setting screen write the servo parameter setting basic parameters adjustment parameters to the motion controller CPU e To change a servo parameter setting enter the necessary numerical value or option number from the automatically displayed key window and write it to the motion controller CPU 8 1 Features 8 2 Specifications 8 2 1 System configuration i gt im This chapter describes the system configuration of the Q motion monitor S For connection type settings and precautions regarding the communication unit cable and connection type see the following manual GOT1000 Series Connection Manual 5 Z O i gt l i i Targ
349. d buffer memory VONo Set the initial device number of the buffer memory in decimal Set the first two digits of the three digit initial I O signal of the module Test operation 3 Section 2 9 Test operation 2 48 2 8 BM Monitor Monitoring Buffer Memory 2 8 2 Procedure for BM monitor basic operation 2 9 Test Operation e Before performing the quick test operations of the system monitor functin such as turning ON or OFF bit device changing the word device current value changing the settings or current values of the timer or counter and changing the buffer memory current value read through the manual carefully and make yourself familiar with the operation method During test operation never change the data of the devices which are used to perform significant operation for the system False output or malfunction can cause an accident You can specify and test any station and device that can be monitored during monitoring by the system mon itor function This section describes how to test the bit or word devices of the controller or the buffer memory of the intelligent function unit 2 9 1 Procedure for displaying the test menu screen and the setting key window screen This subsection describes how to display the test menu screen and the setting key window screen Iae 711 78 TES ENORM Chio 1 NetNo 0JST FFICPUNO O Touch When performing test operation from the Entry Monitor 2141483645 3
350. d monitor OS 04 02 earlier are available Enables setting the E drive for the storage location for the Extended function OS Backup restore function 2 90U backup data or backup setting Backup Restore 04 02 z O l Enables specifying the E drive for the target to input or Extended function OS E gt CNC data I O function 2 90U 60 output the CNC data CNC Data I O 04 02 S o Standard monitor OS 04 02 SP Communication driver Supporting connection to multiple controllers on the o Multi channel function 2 90U Use the communication driver Ethernet network 04 02 or later for each connection T D UU 2 For GT15 GT SoftGOT1000 and GT11 7 va Version of GT GT GT Soft GT a ltem Description Version of OS Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 Displays details in OS information project information alarm information hard copy Utility 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 O information and advance recipe information properties kE Function to display the status of S Network unit o O MELSECNET H communication unit and 2 323 Standard monitor OS 03 00 x status display o CC Link communication unit Function for copying the installed OS or l GOT data package Standard monitor OS 03 01 E data in the GOT main unit to the memory 2 43V O acquisition BootOS 03 01 M card oc O E Z O gt O LL 69 Extended function OS and option OS can be installed unlimitedly Extended function OS and option OS can be ope
351. data may be deleted or the ladder monitor may not operate normally e Turning the CF card access switch ON OFF e Installing removing the CF card Ladder display Up to 24 lines can be displayed per ladder block If a sequence program is written in which 24 or more lines are used in a ladder block the ladder cannot be correctly displayed It is advisable to divide such programs When the system is connected to an FXCPU a During PLC reading only the host station is read b An STL step ladder command a dedicated command for the FXCPU is displayed as shown below Ladder monitoring by GOT Display example of STL command X0000 P_ J ET 20 X0000 Y TF SET 821 c How an INV command is displayed Ladder monitoring by GOT X000 IY yoo d When searching an STL command use S state in a device search e The 32 bit counters are displayed in 32 bit fixed display in the device monitor f When using FX3U C if the memory capacity is set to 32 000 or higher with the GX Developer PLC parameters sequence programs cannot be displayed When displaying a sequence program with the GOT set the memory capacity to 16 000 or less 3 2 Specifications 3 11 3 2 3 Access range OVERVIEW SYSTEM MONITOR Q oc O E Z le oc T Q G lt l Z O H O Z LL MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR MELSEC A LIST EDITOR NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 3 12 5 g
352. ddress GO Machine hexadecimal language code y LT 4 32 4 6 List of Operation Procedures 4 6 7 Operation in other mode O 4 7 Error Messages and Corrective Actions 4 7 1 Error messages and corrective actions in direct CPU connection If an error is detected with the MELSEC A list editor during operation of each mode an error message appears at the 4th line of the display Error messages display conditions and corrective actions are displayed below If an error message appears take the following actions to resume operation En Check the error message e Remove the cause of the error E Input the corresponding key The error message disappears The screen returns to the status before error Example Reading the step with the RST command Display the error message Delete the error message The error message disappears The next operation is resumed 4 7 Error Messages and Corrective Actions 4 33 4 7 1 Error messages and corrective actions in direct CPU connection LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR oc O E m Li E 9 mr q 6 Ll 104 I H OVERVIEW SYSTEM MONITOR NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR Error message Description Corrective action In machine language writing the address which was Address error Set the correct address tried to be written was at the write protect area No corresponding pro
353. de I 4 6 6 Operation in parameter mode P Procedures key input sequence Ret th t to th Clearing all parameters PARAM gt 1 gt gt K gt K Parameter setting Set the parameters for the PARAM PARAM_ gt 2 gt 1 for AOJ2HCPU AOJ2HCPU 2 Select the latch range from Setting of latch range No latch 1 2 latch and All latch Set the availability S1536 to Setting of step relay 2047 of the step relay When the parameter setting Completion of setting is complete write the PLC CPU Parameter setting Set the parameters other other than AOJ2HCPU than AOJ2HCPU Set the main sequence program capacity and the file register capacity Setting of memory capacity Set the top device number used in the latch relay step relay M L S setting other than AnA AnUCPU Set the top device number used in the latch relay step relay internal relay M L S setting AnA AnUCPU only Set the top device used in the low speed high speed retentive timers Timer setting other than AnACPU Set the number of timers used the top device number Timer setting that stores the setting value AnACPU after T256 and the top device used in the low speed highspeed retentive timers Set the number of counters Counter setting used and the top device AnACPU only number that stores the setting value after C255 Setting of latch range Set the range of the device WDT set
354. de entered L M340 Ww oc u qe a a l ES 5 The ladder block containing the specified coil ZS is displayed The coil name is highlighted as shown in the o display example below 2 a Sea pei Te PLL rear dec E ae To Z o O Z S Z O kE S O 3 6 Search Operation 3 59 3 6 3 Coil search Point P 1 Continuous read based on the same coil After a search a continuous search can be performed based on the same coil by touching on the screen If you touch another key the continuous read function will be canceled 2 Ladder monitor display after a search The ladder block containing the searched coil is displayed Example 1 When the entered coil you want to search is M120 aT ee O FF 0 Program Memory MAINI 1 Sea Print Cancel JUMP T T JUMP 1 Screen Print The ladder is displayed on the following line Print Screen When searching multiple files with the MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor displaying the ladder block of the subsequent sequence file clears the previous display O FF 0 Program Memory MAINI Only the ladder block s found in the subsequent sequence file is displayed i ra i Sea Print Cancel JUMP T f JUMP 1 Screen Print 3 6 Search Operation 3 6 3 Coil search 3 6 4 Step search Step search displays the ladder block that contains a specified step number lt Operation procedure gt X70 E 0 i n E Dev Sea Xref Cant Cont Sea 16 32Bit Cunt 32 IT e
355. ded E O Displays the droop pulses of the deviation counter 5 3 Droop pulses E O e During reverse rotation the sign is added O LL Counts the position command input pulses and displays the result 2 4 Cumulative command e Since the value before multiplication of the electrical gear CMX CDV is displayed it may not match the pulses cumulative feedback pulse display e During reverse rotation command the sign is added Displays the frequency of the position command input pulse o 5 Command pulse frequency The value before multiplication of the electrical gear CMX CDV is displayed 2 e During reverse rotation command the sign is added f A Analog speed command voltage during speed Displays the input voltage of the analog speed command VC play p g g Sp control mode 6 Analog speed limit voltage during torque control Displays the input voltage of the analog speed limit VLA play p g g Sp mode Analog torque command ii voltage during position Displays the voltage of the analog torque limit TLA Z speed control mode 7 Analog torque limit voltage during torque control Displays the voltage of the analog torque limit TC mode Continued to next page 1 This is displayed only when the MR J2S U A is connected 9 4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens 9 17 9 4 3 Monitor functions No Description Displays the ratio of the regenerative power to the permissible regenera
356. delay GS521 For the devices and how to set the devices refer to the following S K gt GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual 25 Section 2 9 1 GOT internal devices Sn Section 3 8 Setting of GOT Display and Operations GOT Setup 11 1 When normal backup is executed a When trigger type is set to Rise Turn on the trigger device and then the GOT starts the backup When the backup is started the process notification device turns on Turn off the trigger device right after the process notification device turns on The trigger device does not automatically turn off When the backup is completed the process notification device turns off LLI oc O E 7 LLI G o Y O lt a Trigger device E a Backup processing l Process notification device am E b When trigger type is set to Time 6 The GOT starts the backup at the time specified for the trigger backup O 09 When the backup is started the process notification device turns on and the time trigger automatically turns off When the backup is completed the process notification device turns off Y Specified time SE Time time trigger automatically turns off when the backup is started 2 Z Process notification device INDEX 11 3 Display Operation 11 21 11 3 4 Trigger backup 11 22 2 Error handling When an error occurs during the trigger backup the backup error notification device stores the trigger ID correspondin
357. detail settings 2 GT11 User s Manual 10 2 3 Display contents of communication detail settings GT10 User s Manual 11 4 Keyword O a Remark Keywords l Refer to the following manual for details of keyword 7 lt gt Programming manual for the FX PLC used O 6 2E ao 2 S z im z al E V m gt a Oo LU 9p KE m INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 5 4 Operation Procedures 5 29 5 4 11 Keywords 5 4 12 List monitor The status of contacts and coils in a sequence program is displayed Operation List Monitor gt Select List Monitor with x Parameter setting Keyword setup List Monitor When the list monitor is started on the FX list editor screen the step numbers displayed on the FX list editor screen is Cho 1 O 00 3 M AA Coho O Point Starting list monitor with special function switches FX list monitor With setting special function switches FX list monitor the list monitor can be started on the monitor screen When the list monitor is started on the monitor screen the list editor cannot be used For how to set special function switches refer to the following manual 5 30 5 4 Operation Procedures 5 4 12 List monitor Displays and key functions The following describes the displays for the list monitor bu gt pr Lu gt O Cho 1 OLD M St 1 7 LD HW 100 E 3 SET MM 500 2 4 LD H 500 5 OUT AY 010
358. devices can be entered When the CPU is an FXCPU devices cannot be entered For further information about device numbers and names that can be entered gt GT Designer 2 Version O Device name Screen Design Manual Monitor display area Up to 16 devices can be displayed at a time 1 Indicates CC Link connection Intelligent device station 2 Indicates CC Link connection via G4 Word device value 2 8 BM Monitor Monitoring Buffer Memory 2 47 2 8 1 Information displayed on the BM Monitor screen and key functions OVERVIEW N LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR oc O Z le LL E LS gt dp MELSEC A LIST EDITOR NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 2 8 2 Procedure for BM monitor basic operation Display example when devices are already entered EM MON TOR ChNo 1 Net Ne 170 NOL M OST FFICPUNO 0 PRESS SET KEY SELECT ITEM THEN ENTER DEVICE TYPE amp Ho If necessary perform Quick test operation If necessary switch the screen display 237 Subsection 2 4 5 Quick test lt gt Subsection 2 4 4 Switching the operation of monitor devices display format DEC HEX and comment no comment display If necessary perform the following s Entering monitor devices gt Subsection 2 4 2 Entering monitor devices specifying monitor stations and devices As shown below set a unit an
359. display is specified a comment is also displayed expanded comments are given priority For the method of displaying comments see the following Subsection 3 5 3 Switching comment no comment display 2 A maximum of eight devices is displayed for the word device current value timer and counter current value upper row and set value lower row When the set value is an indirect specification the value of the indirectly specified device is displayed To switch between decimal and hexadecimal for the displayed value see the following MEN Subsection 3 5 2 Display switching of decimal numbers hexadecimal numbers 3 Display the keys used with the operation on the ladder monitor screen shown in b Touch input 4 The display step number left and the remaining step number right are displayed 3 4 Operation Procedure Common 3 37 3 4 1 Information and key functions displayed on the screen OVERVIEW SYSTEM MONITOR O oc O E Z le oc T Q G lt l Z O H O Z LL MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR MELSEC A LIST EDITOR NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 3 38 o PLCRD S a 2 x S A D lt k Ut p Print Screen Cancel Print Key functions when the MELSEC A FX ladder monitor is executed Function Returns the screen to the one displayed when the ladder monitor was activated Switches the screen to the PLC reading screen to
360. down When Function is selected for Delete the setting targets cannot be switched Updates the list Executes the settings The USB drive is applicable to GT16 only Display details in list The following shows file names to be displayed in the list on the CNC data I O screen Target data File name to be displayed in list Machining program ALL PRG O_PRG Parameter ALL PRM Tool offset data TOOL OFS Workpiece offset data WORK OFS Common variable COMMON VAR Maintenance data TREGREG 1 12 8 12 4 When the base specifications parameter of 1166 fixpro is set to 1 the fixed cycle program is the target data When the CNC has machining programs ALL PRG is displayed at the top of the list Operation Procedures 12 5 Error Messages and Corrective Actions The following shows the error messages for the CNC data lO and the corrective actions Error message Error SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR The GOT fails to communicate with the CNC Communication error No USB memory extended memory card or CF card is inserted into the GOT Memory Card not exist Failed to stop USB drive The GOT fails to stop the USB drive The PLC CPU built in the CNC is in Unable to exec PLC built in CNC running operation The GOT cannot execute the CNC data lO because the CNC is in operation Unable to exec Program running Out of memor le capacity of tl 1e data to be WI itten emo exceeds tl 1e CNC memory capacity
361. downloaded m The Q motion monitor can be started from the utility even if the project data has not been downloaded to the GOT 00 oc O E Z O Z O E O O 8 3 Display 8 7 Changing screens Utility Main Menu or user created monitor screen TR Communication setting window END m T OR 17311 1 QU61 dun QJ71 J71 BTI 1 LP21 LEZ LP21 2540 a 1 32P 32P 32P 32P 0 20 40 60 Motion Monitor Parameter Set System Configuration screen 27 8 4 1 Select the motion controller Sys Conf CPU to be monitored Sys Conf Motion Monitor Parameter Set Monitor menu screen 2 gt 8 4 2 Menu selection T Amme i tt Sooo oe Se Sees SS Sse Monitor screen of selected function Parameter setting screen LF Refer to 8 4 3 and thereafter 2378 4 10 END END S Remark Screen displayed at next startup At next startup the last exited screen is displayed However the last exited screen will not be displayed when the GOT is restarted due to an installation of the OS turning the GOT power from off to on or a reset 8 8 8 3 Display 8 4 Operation Procedures This section explains screen operations to be performed when using the Q motion monitor The display screen of the Q motion monitor varies slightly with the GOT used This section mainly uses the screen of the G11575 V for explanation
362. ds in the above table on the GOT For the GOTs with a built in option function board refer to the following 2 3 1 1 2 Hardware and OS required for each function For how to mount an option function board on the GOT refer to the following manual C gt GT15 User s Manual 8 10 Option Function Board 9 2 Specifications 9 2 1 System configuration LO List of servo amplifier types that can be monitored and functions The list of servo amplifier types that can be monitored and their functions is shown below O Monitoring is possible with the servo amplifier monitor X Monitoring is not possible with the servo amplifier monitor Function unavailable a MAI sores moderselei n o o o o o waww Oo o o o sansen o 0 o o o espar Ya oa To o aras ROTA pat O o o o st E Trend graph Trend graph pox x AAA display CT E E E IE VO display VO display Function device l display Software number Coa Amplifier information a Absolute encoder data Automatic voltage l control Axis name setting ao x Unit composition l C Can DO EE O E AG TR x Fuparameter o o o o o DRUparameter o o Parameters Parametercopy Bess sera KK fBasicseting Sper Extension setting voses f o po 8 S o o o Positioning o poo o Tost Operationwfo meter o o o Forcedoupt o J o o Programtest x gt po a Singestepteed lx lo ll
363. dules on the bases of the master station and local stations 6 2 Specifications 6 2 2 Access range When using Ethernet connection e The intelligent module monitor can monitor the intelligent function module on the base of the PLC CPU assigned the IP address The station assigned in the Ethernet setting of GT Designer2 can be monitored e To monitor another network routing parameters have to be set to the GOT side and PLC side For routing parameter setting refer to the following manuals Routing parameter setting for the GOT L gt GOT1000 Series Connection Manual 6 2 Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring Routing parameter setting for PLC CPU Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual PLC to PLC network When the intelligent module monitor monitors the master station of the MELSECNET Il network on which any remote I O station exists e Be sure to assign I O when the master station is AnN or ANACPU If I O is not assigned the system configuration of the intelligent module monitor will not be displayed correctly e Intelligent function modules on the base of remote I O stations are not monitored F With Universal model QCPU With Universal model QCPU the GOT can monitor up to 64 stations 6 2 Specifications 6 7 6 2 2 Access range LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR OVERVIEW SYSTEM MONITOR MELSEC A LIST EDITOR O UU gt Q G E uu 9 y JJ ul Z oc O
364. e 8 4 Operation Procedures 8 9 8 4 1 System configuration screen layout OVERVIEW SYSTEM MONITOR LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC A LIST EDITOR MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR NETWORK MONITOR 00 oc O E Z O Z O E O O 8 4 2 Monitor Menu screen The Q motion monitor allows you to monitor various servo monitor data on multiple monitor screens To display any of the monitor screens make a selection on the monitor menu screen 8 10 Monitor menu screen Item Present Value Mon SFC Error History Error List Error List Axis Positioning Monitor Servo Monitor Present Value Hist ES ER EPR E EA AE m Description Monitors and displays the feed current values and actual current values of all running axes L gt 8 4 3 Present Value Monitor screen Displays the history of errors that occurred in SFC programs from when the motion CPU was powered on or reset 8 4 4 SFC Error History screen Displays the history of errors that occurred on and after the leading edge of PLC ready M2000 lt gt 8 4 5 Error List screen Displays the latest errors that occurred on the specified axis lt 7 8 4 6 Error List Designated Axis screen Monitors the details of the positioning data set to any axis C 7 8 4 7 Positioning Monitor screen Monitors the servo monitor servo amplifier lt 7 8 4 8 Servo Monitor screen Di
365. e W in the specified direction right or left with the or key Display of an error message An error message will appear on the 4th line of the display area An error message on the display is cleared when you press any key Then the display resumes the state before the appearance of the error message When an error message is displayed take action according to the procedure described in the following section 77 Section 4 7 Error Messages and Corrective Actions 4 4 Operation Methods 4 4 2 Display format of the display area 4 4 3 Switching valid keys upper lower functions Make valid the upper or lower function of keys available for two different purposes to operate the MELSEC A list editor 1 Switching the upper and lower functions of mode keys In general the upper functions of mode keys are valid To make the lower function of a mode key valid touch the key and then the mode key During switching of the upper and lower functions of mode keys the mark on the valid keys remains 2 Switching the upper and lower functions of command device keys Switch the upper and lower functions of command device keys using the keys shown below if necessary Makes the upper function valid Makes the lower function valid The keys shown below can be operated even if the lower function of a key is valid You do not need to operate the SHIFT key e Comparison symbol keys at the input of comparison operation commands
366. e SFC Error History screen and the key functions displayed on the screen Displayed contents M D Program No Err a H 4 SFC F G K BKNo Code Error Definition 17 1 SFC F G K Block C DOW Detection The momentary power interruption S 1500 Mas generated The poner supply was turned off IS 8 14 1 SFC F G K Block Motion SFC Paraneter unregistered error 1 23 K 5 17003 Kin paraneter is mt witten or paraneter is corrupted 1 1 SFC F G K Block AC DC DOW Detection Te mery power interruption SA 1500 ms generated The poer supply ms turned off 17 1 SFC F G K Block Motion SFE Paraneter unregistered error 1 57 K 17003 Kin FE paraneter is mot witten or paraneter is corrupted 17 1 SFC F G K Block AGDE DOM Detection Te nonertary poner interruption 1 58 E 1500 ms generated The poner supply was turned off 1 4 SFC F G K Block Motion SFL Paraneter unregistered error 0 57 K 17003 tion FE paraneter is mt witten or paraneter is corrupted 17 4 SFC F G K Block ADC DOM Detection Te nonertary power interruption 0 57 1500 ms generated The poner supply was turned off 17 4 SFC F G K Block Motion SFC Paraneter unregistered error 4 11 K i 17003 tion FE paraneter is mt witten or paraneter is corrupted 1 Displays the dates and time when SFC errors occurred The eight latest errors are displayed for the history of errors 2 Displays the SFC program numbers where SFC errors occurred 3 Displays the error codes of t
367. e communication setting window is displayed e The name of the Communication driver installed in the GOT is displayed e Touch ChNo on the communication setting window and set the channel number of the controller targeted to the ladder monitor Touch the gt key and move the cursor to NETWK No Set the network number of the target controller and the CPU station number according to the table shown below Connection form CC Link Setting Direct Computer oe ae MELSEC Bus CPU ink Ethernet intelligent NET 10 connection E E connection device connection connection connection station 0 Host loop NETWK No 1 to 239 sie rane Specified loop 0 When the 0 When master the station is selected control 1 to 64 ion i When a station Is local selected STATION station is 1 to 64 selected FF When When a the host normal station is selected station is selected 1 When the station No is set to the host station FF set the network No to 0 For the operation of the key window see the following 37 Subsection 2 4 3 Key window setting columns and operation procedure OQ Entry is completed by touching the key and the key window closes 3 3 Display 3 3 3 Display 3 21 OVERVIEW SYSTEM MONITOR GO oc O E Z le oc T Q G lt l Z O H O Z LL MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR MELSEC A LIST EDITOR NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR
368. e days and time set Setting the trigger type selects whether to execute the backup with the trigger device or with the days and time 1 2 3 When trigger type is set to Rise The GOT executes the backup when the set trigger device turns on Use the backup with the trigger device for automatically backing up setting data for controllers after the setting data are changed Trigger device X100 X100 OFF ON 7N Backing up setting data to a CF card USB memory S L X100 ON Detected When trigger type is set to Time The GOT executes the backup at the specified time on the specified days Use the backup with the time for backing up setting data periodically Setting GOT to back up data at 17 30 on Tuesdays Backing up setting data to a CF card USB memory Maximum number of backup data With the trigger backup the maximum number of backup data to be stored can be specified When the number of backup data exceeds the maximum number of backup data the GOT automatically deletes the oldest backup data Therefore the GOT does not fail to store the latest backup data Comparing and updating backup data For the backup the GOT compares the previous backup data with current setting data for each controller on the same base unit When the current setting data for any of the controllers differ from
369. e executed In that case execute the backup again by using a formatted or new CF card or USB memory For how to set the password for the backup restore refer to the following lt gt This section EA Setting password for backup restore How to use the password for the backup restore refer to the following 3 This section Z How to use password for backup restore 11 14 11 3 Display Operation 11 3 3 Security and password Setting password for backup restore L The password for the backup restore can be set only when the following condition is satisfied at the first S backup 7 When passwords are set for the files for the backup target controller Zz nS At the first backup the password authentication for the controller is required The following shows the operating procedure at the first backup S Touch Backup function in the main menu on 30 the GOT The first backup 2 gt 11 4 Operation Procedures Sp 11 Is a password set for the file to be backed up LLI oc O E 7 LLI G o Y O lt a Input the password for the controller When the password for the first file is verified the other files are automatically verified using the password for the first file When the automatic verification fails input the corresponding password O lt Is the password correct a S O The file is backed up Is there another file or E 6 No T Is there another contro
370. e following lt gt Section 2 4 4 Switching the display format DEC HEX and comment no comment display Test example When the entry monitor is displayed When the entry monitor is displayed comment display hexadecimal display On the GT15 A DEVICE MONI TOR RV TLE MONITOR Chio 1 NetNo 0 1ST Chio 1 NetNo OlT FFICPUNG 0 FF CPUNO 0 L 16 3256 Bo OHOCBS 0003 KI Te om C 7 BO Link status Gea SO line E 1 Switching the display format Word device values are displayed in decimal or hexadecimal numbers on the entry batch TC and BM monitors 2 Device comment display Comments written in the controller are displayed when a controller device is monitored 2 4 2 1 Features Other stations can be monitored You can monitor other stations in the data link system containing the GOT or GOT connected station network system or CC Link system For further information about the connection forms that can be monitored see the following OVERVIEW 37 Section 2 2 1 System configuration NO oc O Z le m E 0 gt 0 LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC A LIST EDITOR MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 2 1 Features 2 5 2 2 Specifications 2 2 1 System configuration This subsection describes the controller names and the connection forms between the GOT and the control ler that can be cove
371. e kana comment space Is reduced Settings that reduce kana comment space and the kana comment space after setting change Settings resulting in Nm lt Nf x 500 Nk x 500 500 Nm Nf x 500 500 Kana comment space steps after setting change 500 Nm Memory space after change steps Nf File register space after change blocks Nk Comment space before change blocks 2 Remark Settable range and default value N The settable range and the default value depend on the FX PLC type Refer to the following manual for details of the settable range and the default value L Programming manual for the FX PLC used 5 4 Operation Procedures 5 4 10 Parameter setting 2 Key functions The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operation on the parameter setting screen OVERVIEW Key Function Default Initializes the parameters x Completes the changed setting contents Ends parameter setting SYSTEM MONITOR LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC A LIST EDITOR al E V m gt a Oo LU 9p KE m INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 5 4 Operation Procedures 5 27 5 4 10 Parameter setting 5 4 11 Keywords Registers deletes releases protection for and sets protection for the FX PLC keywords Function usability of the MELSEC FX list editor for keyword protection levels The functions that can be used with the MELSE
372. e local device monitor is switched between execution and non execution states Starting local device monitor The following shows how to start the local device monitor Touch A m JUMP T A JUMP 1 List Touch Mon E Touch Menu XO X1D WE Touch MENU MiS L D102 61 TO co D102 0 0 0 25 5 Local device monitor not executed Sea Print JUMP t f JUMP Screen Menu window Touch Loca Dev Uif iC 02 Gl K4 AS aay X Cunnt or TO wo DUS 0 _Dev Sea ire psi 0 0 25 5 S S Cont Sea 16 30Bit Cmnt 32 Coil Sea Dec Hex Note Step Sea Test Statement End Sea Local Dev C Touch Local Dev Print J Screen Continued to next page 3 70 3 8 Local Device Monitor 3 8 1 Operation procedure for local device monitor From previous page QO The local device monitor is started gt LU gt o LU gt P O BMOY D102 sU K4 TO CO D102 Auta setting MAINS T E Sea 7 L ese Prom l e 5 For changing a sequence program to be O Z A monitored touch List and then change S 5 sequence programs on the program list z window 7 O TO 0 NENE Type Title or MAIN PROG Processing Line MAINI PROG Execution Line Exit PLCRD Print S Switch t 1 PAGET PAGEL oc O E Z le oc T Q G lt l Z O H O Z LL The local device monitor is started with the O Q changed sequence program E lt O 2
373. e of description 25 Ww Z The example of description shown below indicates that must be touched first z2 second 0 third and finally O 0 PLR 5 O lt 2 o 6 6 O O 4 4 Operation Methods 4 11 4 4 1 Key arrangement and a list of key functions 4 4 2 Display format of the display area The following describes the position and content of each data field in the MELSEC A list editor display area Current mode display Valid key display Step number device name and number Program list etc The 4th line displays data program name device name etc entered by the user 1 Mode and valid key display The following describes the mode and valid key display The mode display shows the MELSEC A list editor mode selected by the user The valid key display shows which of the two functions assigned to each key is currently available the function indicated at the upper part of the key or the function indicated at the lower part of the key Current mode display Display Mode AE Read mode W orcos Write mode Aa Insert mode T Oa Delete mode E Parameter mode Ol ost Other mode Valid key display This display is not always available With regard to keys framed in dotted lines in the figure shown at the left the valid key display indicates which BEAD INGER of the two functions assigned to each key is valid WRITE DELETE EJ I T 2 F
374. e user area to install the option OS to the GOT Refer to the following manual for the procedure for checking the available memory space of the user area and information about the data using other user areas gt GT Designer2 Version O Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual 8 TRANSFERRING DATA Option function board a For GI16 No option function board is required b For GT15 Mount one of the option function boards in the above table on the GOT For the GOTs with a built in option function board refer to the following gt 1 1 2 Hardware and OS required for each function For how to mount an option function board on the GOT refer to the following manual K gt GT15 User s Manual 8 10 Option Function Board 7 2 Specifications 7 2 1 System configuration 7 2 2 Network information that can be monitored The network information that can be monitored with the network monitor and the link types are as follows O Can be monitored x Cannot be monitored S MELSEC g MELSEC MELSEC NET 10 5 MELSEC MELSEC NET 10 NET 10 MELSEC CC Link IE CC Link IE Function Network Information yale NET II E Uac NET H control normal master NET H NET H lt lt local station remote station 7 station 7 station control normal master E station station E station S Network category display O Lu kE Network number display O gt Station number display O Host operation mode O O Line monitor Host loop line status O S lt
375. e utility Touch the special function switch Refer to the following manual for how to set the special function switch LLI oc O E 7 LLI G o Y O lt a After the utility is displayed touch Debug amp self check gt Debug gt Backup restoration from the Main Menu For how to display the utility refer to the user s manual of GT Designer2 Version D Screen Design the GOT to be used Manual 6 2 Touch Switch O lt x Q O zZ O Backup restoration sackup restoration function Main menu S L T LC Ria C SLR ETIE date 2 ofall Delete backup data T op UU O Q Z UU A AAA gt Point f 1 How to display the utility _ _ For how to display the utility refer to the following K gt GT16 User s manual 8 3 Utility Display GT15 User s manual 9 3 Utility Display 2 When GOT has no project data fi The backup restoration can be started with the utility even though the GOT has no project data 11 3 Display Operation 11 11 11 3 1 Outline before starting Changing screens Utility Main Menu or user created monitor screen m GOT data E package Close Main menu Backup restoration function Main menu Sett ing SYSTBKUP Ez gt Restration A function l Backup function a Dev ice gt GOT ES Restoration function E GOT gt Device LES GOT data package acquisition GOT data Delete backup data
376. earched 2 Setting for the A FX ladder monitor Ladder data cannot be stored For the A FX ladder monitor data for ladder monitoring are deleted every time the GOT is powered on again Deleting ladder data Ladder data can be deleted with the ladder monitor screen or the utility For deletion of ladder data refer to the following When deleting with the ladder monitor screen lt Section 3 3 3 Display When deleting with the utility C gt GT16 User s Manual Section 11 2 1 Q QnA Ladder Monitor GT15 User s Manual Section 11 7 Q QnA Ladder Monitor 3 20 3 3 Display 3 3 2 Setting and deleting media for saving ladder data 3 3 3 Display This subsection describes the procedure for reading the PLC to read the sequence program from the target controller when the ladder monitor is executed and until the ladder monitor screen is displayed The operation of reading the PLC depends on the controller type When the MELSEC A FX ladder monitor is executed The MELSEC A ladder monitor is taken as an example to describe the operation procedure Utility display procedure Subsection 3 3 1 X Ch No IU STATION Chio Comm Driver 4 gt SS A QnA QCPU QU7 1024 NETWK No Screen X Ch No 1 NETWK No O STATION 1 8 9 A Bla v 4 5 6 C Dd lp BIS S 550 05 1 E 0 0 Enter Del AC Cancel Print Screen Continued to next page O Th
377. ection Set the correct directory settings and then execute the CNC data I O again Check if data protection keys edit locks and others turn on Check if the data is a read only data Then execute the CNC data I O again Delete unnecessary machining programs and then execute the CNC data I O again Specify a file and then execute the CNC data I O again File system errors Format the NC memory e Check if the copy destination device is ready for data writing e TRACE TRC and NCSAMP CSV cannot be cop ied to the CNC Check if the copy source device is ready for data reading Check the file name and then execute the CNC data I O again Delete the machining program in the CNC and then execute the CNC data I O again Turn off the GOT and CNC Check data in the CF card and the connection status Then execute the CNC data I O again 12 9 CNC MONITOR FUNCTION N BACKUP RESTORE Q lt x a O Z O APPENDICES INDEX MEMO 12 10 13 SFC MONITOR im E a n SOFT a 6116 6115 Goro0g eril 1 leri 0 13 1 Features 26 E 92 With the SFC monitor function the GOT can monitor SFC programs of controllers and changing device S values of the programs is available The function improves the efficiency in troubleshooting and maintenance of PLC systems with SFC programs Lu The following shows features of the SFC monitor function O E Displaying SFC p
378. ective action Error definition Communication cannot be established with the PLC CPU of the monitor target Check the status of the connection between the controller and the GOT disconnected or cut cables Check if an error has occurred in the controller Select a motion controller CPU that can be monitored on the System Configuration screen L 7 8 2 1 A motion controller CPU that cannot be monitored was selected on the System Configuration screen A Target motion controller CPU of the Q motion monitor The motion controller OS installed Install SV13 or SV22 in the motion controller CPU Q172CPU Q173CPU of the monitor target as the motion controller OS in the motion controller CPU Q172CPU Q173CPU of the monitor target is other than SV13 or SV22 MARVA AO AN a Install a motion controller OS that is compatible with the Q OS installed in the motion controller i Forint S ni N motion monitor in the motion controller CPU of the monitor target is not i a tn l l l i i i 2 7 compatible with the Q motion Designer2 Version D Screen Design Manual l Controllers that can be Monitored and the Access Range monitor The monitor data was not installed l l l Download the monitor data of the motion monitor or was deleted The axis number selected has not Select the axis number that has been set been set Set the axis using the peripheral software During servo parameter setting an item that c
379. ed below E X Y100 Z T Bus connection and direct CPU The base of the connected station is 2 Ch No il NETWK No 0 s f gt STATION FF D71 connection displayed ii ChNo Comm Driver lt gt LD A OnA QCPU QJ71C24 se Y1 l The base of the station set as the host is Ethernet connection _ 2 MELSECNET 10 displayed E MELSERVO J3 J2S M S l The base of the master station is E CC Link connection via G4 SER displayed o MELSECNET H connection 5 MELSECNET 10 connection z CC Link IE controller network if S No system configuration display az connection lt lt CC Link connection Intelligent device station E e The following operations are always required for MELSECNET H a MELSECNET 10 and CC Link connections D lt 1 Touch to display the window shown in 2 O 2 2 Touch to switch to the window for network setup To monitor another channel number or other station touch the channel number you want to monitor and switch to the network setup window Touch an alphanumeric key to specify the network number and PLC station number U Alphanumeric key Enters the network number and PLC station number x KIGE Selects the input area i S E e Sets the area value S For data link system For network system 6 NETWK No 0 NETWK No 0 Host loop Q Station No FF Host 1 to 255 Specified loop z 0 Master station Station No FF Host SS x 1 to 64 Local station 0 Control st
380. ed data 2 27D Extended function OS x Report 02 04 Standard monitor OS 02 04 S Compatible with the printer output 2 27D Extended function OS x T Hard copy function Printer 02 04 S Na Thumbnail Output can be set 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 lol o x lt l Extended function OS Operation panel l l l Cia Enables setting the operation panel 2 58L External I O Operation Panel x unction 03 03 Sound output Extended function OS Enables setting the sound output 2 58L x O function Sound Output 03 03 lt lt Function for loading the data read with bar a 2 09K Standard monitor OS 01 00 x O Z cord reader to PLC CPU O Number of settable devices is extended Barcode l 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 x O from 32 to 1024 points Space 0x20 or NULL 0x00 can be E 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 x O a selected for blank device O E Function to write in the devices which data Extended function OS 5 RFID function 2 73B are read by the RFID reader writer RFID 03 09 O 69 l l l Standard monitor OS 03 00 l l Function to display an image taken by a Video display 2 323 Extended function OS video camera on the GOT Video RGB 03 00 Standard monitor OS 03 00 Function to display the personal computer B RGB display 2 32J Extended function OS 3 screen on the GOT G Video RGB 03 00 z a Function to operate the mouse pointer on l a Remote personal Standard monitor OS 03 13 the per
381. ed when the 2 90U Standard monitor OS 04 02 O device value is out of range Password can be set for the connection of 2 Password Setting l 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 O lt motion controller and servo amplifier lt System information of report function and S l 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 x O o print are added System D drive automatic recovery status l oo l 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 x O information notification signal is added System information regarding B drive has E 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 x O been added E The name Password is changed to S o l 2 58L Standard monitor OS 03 03 X O Security in the system environment E Security Enables setting the operator angi Extended function OS authentication Operator authentication 03 03 a In clock management both adjust and 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 O broadcast can be set PA LL Data save device of MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor data can be set at GT 2 18U x x E Designer2 lt Automatic program read at the start of ladder monitor for MELSEC Q QnA 2 43V x x GOT Setup o Priority Level Comment can be set drops Continued to next page App 19 0 RST Version of GT GT GT Soft T Item Description Version of OS Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 Enables the backup restore setting the Enables the backup restore setting setting olx x Enables the setting for monitoring local devices 2 58L x GOT Setup Enables se
382. een example 1600 0640 QD75P QD75D Axis control data 2 _ Ss 1700 1800 06A4 0708 I PREP PES OTE AS faa 2 1501 1601 05DD 0641 aeie mi peec 1701 1801 06A5 0709 O T H My o vendes S 3 1502 1602 05DE 0642 RA in W n 1702 1802 06A6 070A lege 0 JA Lompleted Il HREquest S 1503 1603 O5DF 0643 id eom eted REIES PEJO tolera 1703 1803 06A7 070B DST SD ST 14 50 el Hid sl DTS I 5 1504 1604 05E0 0644 G RE LE mag Lto 0 1704 1804 06A8 070C Den HS an Disable TiEmable 6 1512 1612 05E8 064C sii OO MATE Ene error EZ EE 1712 1812 06B0 0714 pun completed REGNES S l l y 7 1516 1616 O5EC 0650 1716 1816 06B4 0718 eo 1610 to 1611 064A to 064B 1710 to 1711 O6AE to O6AF 1810 to 1811 0712 to 0713 10 1520 1620 O5F0 0654 1720 1820 06B8 071C 11 1521 1621 05F1 0655 1721 1821 06B9 071D 1522 to 1523 05F2 to 05F3 1622 to 1623 0656 to 0657 1722 to 1723 O6BA to 06BB 1822 to 1823 071E to 071F 13 1524 1624 05F4 0658 1724 1824 O6BC 0720 14 1525 1625 05F5 0659 1725 1825 O6BD 0721 1 1538 1638 0602 0666 QD75P QD75D Axis control data 3 ce ew ar 1738 1838 O6CA 072E be Alo bets hse ASA A ETT 2 panes OPO all Sey Giichipe Pair legion T T Bab pais by bare bei e 1748 1848 06D4 0738 a TE Rm m S 1549 1649 060D 0671 Saltos O Address 1 Arc data xis3 1749 1849 06D5 0739 4 1550 1650 060E 0672 1750 1850 06D6 073A 1540 16
383. een o Inverter Communication driver changed 2 43V O connection FREQROL 500 700 03 01 3 to 30 seconds gt 1 to 30 seconds Supporting connection to E700 series and Communication driver 2 63R x x O S V500 V500L series FREQROL 500 700 03 07 Z A i fone n S Communication driver 2 upporting connection to servo amplifier i jai E MELSERVO J2S M 01 02 a x Q 2 Supporting connection to MELSERVO J3 Communication driver 2 18U x xX O series MELSERVO J3 J2S M 02 02 l l Communication driver Supporting connection to MR J3 T series 2 63R x x O MELSERVO J3 J2S M 03 07 LL Supporting writing to the E PROM area in 030 Communication driver S g Servo amplifier parameter writing MELSERVO J3 J2S M 03 00 O a lt connection Supporting the point table setting for MR 2 32J J2S CP MELSERVO J3 J2S M 03 00 Communication driver Supporting the test run mode MELSERVO J3 J2S M 03 00 Supporting settings for the number of 9738 Communication driver retries the timeout time and delay time l MELSERVO J3 J2S M 03 09 Communication driver Communication driver Enables setting the host station address 2 90U MELSERVO J3 J2S M 04 02 Communication driver QJ71E71 AJ71 Q E71 Q17nNC Robot controller 2 7F Supporting connection to robot controller connection CRnD 700 03 12 NO oo N C Continued to next page App 13 Item CNC connection MELDAS C6 C64 Bar
384. eens 6 8 6 5 34 QD75P QD75D module monitoring O1 Screen example 0D75P 0D75D Positioning data is ess re T gr 6 86 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 5 34 QD75P QD75D module monitoring Buffer eT address to 2002 2004 to 2012 2014 to 2022 2024 to 2029 8000 to 8002 8004 to 8012 8014 to 8022 8024 to 8029 14000 to 14002 14004 to 14012 14014 to 14022 14024 to 14029 20000 to 20002 20004 to 20012 20014 to 20022 20024 to 20029 07D0 to 07D2 07D4 to 07DC 07DE to 07E6 07E8 to 07ED 1F40 to 1F42 1F44 to 1F4C 1F4E to 1F56 1F58 to 1F5D 36B0 to 36B2 36B4 to 36BC 36BE to 36C6 3608 to 36CD 4E20 to 4E22 4E24 to 4E2C 4E2E to 4E36 4E38 to 4E3D 6 5 35 QD75M module monitoring Screen example SET Data MONIT enn RESEM r PG MENU Buffer memory address DEC HEX 809 909 0329 038D 1009 1109 03F1 0455 806 906 0326 038A 1006 1106 O3EE 0452 807 907 0327 038B 1007 1107 O3EF 0453 808 908 0328 038C 1008 1108 O3F0 0454 829 929 033D 03A1 1029 1129 0405 0469 Z O OVERVIEW 1 EA Saas aa st Oa SO AAA it SYSTEM MONITOR LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION 838 938 0346 03AA O 1038 1138 040E 0472 0000 0096 1 0 150 300 450 012C 0102 0002 to 0003 2 to 3 152 to 153 0098 to 0099 302 to 303 452 to 453 012E to 012F 01C4 to 01C7 i u A Beia Eo DR
385. elect Cancel CFCmnt List ail All Read Continued to next page ZZ The PLC reading screen is displayed Touch the key The setting window appears Point f Displaying the ladder monitor OO screen When the drive for storing ladder data is set to C Flash Memory the ladder monitor screen displays the sequence program at the time of reading data from the PLC If any of the set values of the sequence program is changed re read the PLC When the drive for storing ladder data is set to A Built in CF card or B Memory card changes of the set values are reflected in the screen display Rereading data from the PLC is not required The setting window appears Make settings for the initial activation of the ladder monitor The settings shown below switch each time you touch the E ee key DISPLAY USE OF EXISTING DATA SELECT USE OF CLEAR CLEAR EXISTING DATA USE OF EXISTING DATA This setting is invalid when the automatic PLC read setting is made or a searched file is specified when performing coil search or defect search from the key code switch or the special function switch set for the advanced alarm display E The After the setting is completed touch the x button to close the Setting window 70 Using the key select the target drive applicable memory in which the ladder data to be monitored is saved 3 3 Display 3 3 3 Display 3 27 oc O E Z le
386. elected e Check the connection state between the servo amplifier and the GOT connector disconnection cable wire break Communication can not be o os e Check if an error has occurred in the servo No AMP Communications established with the servo amplifier Kf amplifier set as the monitor destination P e Set the same values to the setup screen on the servo amplifier monitor and the parameter setting on the servo amplifier This test mode cannot be selected Another test operation function has l l Exit the other test operation function Operation without Motor rotation started SON The servo amplifier SON signal is a e Turn off the servo amplifier SON signal Make sure that operation is at a stop ON A value outside the setting range i Set the servo parameter of the servo amplifier Incorrect setting range was set when setting the servo E within the setting range parameter of the servo amplifier An alarm occurred on the connected oe Servo alarm has occurred Alarm ad Reset the alarm on the servo amplifier servo amplifier l The drive unit is not installed in the l L Unit not found Select the slot where the drive unit is installed selected slot The password that was input as the Unmatched password password for changing the servo Input the correct password amplifier parameter is incorrect Check the write data Can t write to servo amp Normally Failed to write the parameter l l Check the setup info
387. emove the GOT from the control panel before replacing the backlight when using the GOT with the backlight replaceable by the user Not doing so can cause an electric shock Replacing a backlight without removing the GOT from the control panel can cause the backlight or control panel to drop resulting in an injury BACKLIGHT REPLACEMENT PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Wear gloves for the backlight replacement when using the GOT with the backlight replaceable by the user Not doing so can cause an injury Before replacing a backlight allow 5 minutes or more after turning off the GOT when using the GOT with the backlight replaceable by the user Not doing so can cause a burn from heat of the backlight DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS CAUTION When disposing of the product handle it as industrial waste TRANSPORTATION PRECAUTIONS CAUTION When transporting lithium batteries make sure to treat them based on the transport regulations Refer to Appendix 3 for details of the regurated units Make sure to transport the GOT main unit and or relevant unit s in the manner they will not be exposed to the impact exceeding the impact resistance described in the general specifications of this manual as they are precision devices Failure to do so may cause the unit to fail Check if the unit operates correctly after transportation REVISIONS The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print
388. en Exits the parameter setting and returns to the screen where the Q motion monitor was started Stores the displayed screen to the memory card in BMP JPEG file format or prints it with a printer For further information about hard copies refer to the following 8 4 11 Hard copy output The touch operation of this key is invalid 8 22 8 4 Operation Procedures 8 4 10 Parameter setting screen Inputting the password The password input key window appears for accessing the parameter setting screen when the password setting data for changing motion parameters is written to the GOT with GT Designer2 Param Setting AxNo 1 Auto Tuning peed Gain Adjustment Auto Tuning Model SY Response Setting 1 Load Inertia Ratio 7 0 To Motor Position Ctrl Gainl 70 rad sec Speed Ctrl Gainl Position Ctrl Gain2 Please input the passsword Speed Ctrl Gain2 Notch Fitter T 8J 9 A BI al vl Feed Forward Gain 4 5 6 C0 D p es Ee ee O Enter Del AC 1 Function e If the password matches the parameter setting screen is displayed e If the password does not match an error message is displayed Touching returns to the System Configuration screen e Only numbers and letters A to F can be used for the password setting Up to 8 characters e The password for changing the motion parameters is set with GT Designer2 Refer to GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 3 5 Password Setting for det
389. en the CH No is input When the network No station No and CPU No are input The following table shows the displayed contents 1 CH No input area Set the CH No for the target controller 2 Network No input area Set the network No for the target controller Set the station No of the target controller 3 Station No input area l l l When the station No is set to the host station FF set the network No to 0 4 CPU No input area Set the CPU No 5 CH No selection key Select a CH No 6 Keys for operations in the communication setting window shown in b Touch eys input b Key functions Key Function Closes the communication setting window x When any of the CH No network No station No and CPU No is not input and the monitor target is not set the communication setting window does not close gt Moves the cursor among the input areas AL Deletes all the input values and characters lel Deletes an input value or character Moves the cursor when the cursor is in the CH No input area network No input area or station No input area Enter When the cursor is in the CPU No input area and settings for the CH No network No and station No are completed the communication setting window closes and the PLC read screen appears 13 5 How to Operate PLC Read Screen 13 21 13 5 2 Key functions SERVO AMPLIFIER CNC MONITOR MONITOR FUNCTION BACKUP RESTORE oO CNC DATA
390. ended function OS on the GOT Turn on the power to the GOT Starting from the utility Display the utility E After the utility is displayed touch Debug amp self check gt Debug gt CNC data I O from the Main Menu For how to display the utility refer to the user s manual of the GOT to be used Set the channel Set the channel No of the CNC connected to the GOT Start the CNC data l O Select the channel No and then the CNC data I O starts Starting from the special function switch CNC data I O set in the project data Touch the special function switch Refer to the following manual for how to set the special function switch lt gt GT Designer2 Version LJ Screen Design Manual 6 2 Touch Switch Communication setting window 12 3 Display 12 5 SERVO AMPLIFIER CNC MONITOR MONITOR FUNCTION N BACKUP RESTORE Q lt x a O Z O SFC MONITOR APPENDICES INDEX Point P 1 How to display the utility AAA For how to display the utility refer to the following C gt GT16 User s manual 8 3 Utility Display GT15 User s manual 9 3 Utility Display 2 Displaying communication setting window After turning on the GOT the communication setting window is displayed at the first startup of the CNC data I O only For displaying the communication setting window at the second or later startup touch the button on
391. er e wn LL a tere KEYENCE KV 700 1000 01 00 O connection Communication driver a Supporting connection to KV 3000 and KV 5000 2 77F O a KEYENCE KV700 1000 01 03 A TOSHIBA Communication driver Supporting connection to TOSHIBA MACHINE o MACHINE PLC PLC 2 77F TOSHIBA MACHINE TCmini O connection 01 03 O Standard monitor OS 01 07 MATSUSHITA Communication driver Supporting connection to MATSUSHITA PLC 2 73B PLC connection MATSUSHITA MEWNET FP 01 00 AEAN Supporting connection to CP9200SH MP900 ee Standard monitor OS 01 07 gas Communication driver connection ml Supporting connection to MP2000 MP900 series 2 73B YASKAWA MP 01 00 Continued to next page App 31 T Version of GT GT GT Item Description Version of OS Designer2 1057 1030 1020 Standard monitor OS 01 07 LS IS PLC Communication driver Supporting connection to LS IS PLC 2 90U O connection LS Industrial Systems MASTER K 01 05 Standard monitor OS 01 04 Supporting connection to MicroLogix 1000 1200 l KG 2 58L Communication driver series ACCENN AB MicroLogix 01 00 BRADLEY PLC O l Standard monitor OS 01 04 connection Supporting connection to SLC500 series 2 58L Communication driver O AB SLC 500 01 00 Standard monitor OS 01 04 Supporting connection to SIEMENS S7 200 di l l 2 58L Communication driver O series SIEMENS PLC SIEMENS S7 200 01 00 connection Standard monit
392. er information about hard copies refer to the following lt gt 9 4 8 Hard copy output The touch operation of this key is invalid 9 4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens 9 4 7 Test operations de Positioning operation screen The following describes the display data of the positioning operation screen and the key functions displayed on the screen 1 Displayed contents oc uu a lt O gt oc Lu 0 oc O Z le 1 200 r min 0 5175 am 2 2 1000 ms 0 20000 58 3 131072 pulse 0 9999999 92 OL UU am O kE i ec Aa Z Pri Cancel 2 2 1 Displays the set speed of the servo motor 2 Displays the set acceleration deceleration time constant O 3 Displays the set distance Q O 2 Operation 6 a For MR J2 Super series and MR J2M series e Start operation Touch the Forward or Reverse key am i O To resume operation that has been paused touch the Forward key to resume forward z rotation or the Reverse key to resume reverse rotation o e Stop operation D When the set distance has been reached operation stops Touching the Pause key pauses the operation If touch the Pause key again after the operation is paused the remaining distance is o erased O Z a UU b For MR J3 series a e Start operation Touch the or key To resume the operation that has been paused touch the key to resume the rotation e Stop operation When the set distance has
393. eration Check the details of key operations on the display before pressing this key Section 4 4 5 b Key arrangement and functions for the GT11 5 Control keys 1 Mode keys it S NOW READING PLC if PLEASE WAIT A MOMENT O MOTION CONTROLLER NOT SUPPORTED SS elp key HHS z mpp jecofaein 5 Control key 4 Command Device keys Q R 5 T U Y x Y z m O The functions of these keys are the same as those of the keys for the GT 15 For a summary of the functions see the preceding page 3 Ir 2 How to express keys and key operation descriptions The keys for the MELSEC A list editor and operation procedures are described in text in a simplified manner as shown below a Some keys such as and al are available for two different purposes Operate such keys with either the upper or lower function indicated on them valid according to the operation In descriptions only the necessary functions are indicated on keys Example of description When entering the character M the key is indicated as in the description oc O E m Li E 9 mr q 6 Ll 104 I H 7 Z Make upper or lower functions valid by using the SHIFT key or the key For further a information about the procedure for making upper or lower functions valid see the following fe zg Section 4 4 3 Switching valid keys upper lower functions b The expression mm means touching keys from to in O order Exampl
394. eration Read mode 1 For decimal numbers input K then the number For hexadecimal numbers input H then the number Point P Moving the cursor to the line on which the operand or set value is to be changed When starting to change an operand or a set value place the cursor on the line of the operand or set value to be changed the line on which the step number is not displayed If you place the cursor on the command line the input operation is not possible Command line Cannot operate on this line Operand set value line Place the cursor on this line Example Changing MOV DO D10 to MOV DO D123 ChNo 1 lt WRITE gt none Set the l FOES ChNo 1 AS EAS Vaor INSERT mode Move the cursor to the changed location with 4 Jor 5 20 5 4 Operation Procedures 5 4 6 Changing operands set values 5 4 7 Deleting commands Deletes one command at a time from a Sequence program LU Operation E S l Siop the FX PLS MODE gt Move he cursor othe command to be deleted DELETE mode oc E Z PE Point f When moving the cursor to the position where the command is to be deleted kE n i s a nm Place the cursor on the command line the line on which the step number is displayed You cannot delete the command if the cursor is placed on the line of an operand or set value 5 6 Command line Place the cursor on this line 7 WS Operand set value line Cannot
395. erial communication station number of the IFU interface unit Sets the setup details and returns to the function selection menu screen Exits the servo amplifier monitor Displays the communication setting window 1 This is valid only when the MR J2M A series is connected 9 16 9 4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens 9 4 2 Setup de 9 4 3 Monitor functions Displays all monitor data of the servo amplifier in real time Monitor screen The following describes the display data of the monitor screen and the key functions displayed on the screen oc uu a lt O gt oc Lu 0 oc O Z le 1 Displayed contents oc 1 Cumulative feedback 173 pulse Peak load ratio 1 E 2 Servo motor speed Oremin nstantaneous 0 O T 3 S Ooulse BIS position TR pulse 4 Cunulat ive command 0 pulse ABS counter TRIST raz 5 command pulse 0 kpps Load inertia moment times k LC 6 commend voltage 0 00 v ee 279 V 2 7 K G L 0 04 V 2 8 a load 0 9 Effective load 0 2 Lis Print Cancel O Description x Counts the feedback pulses from the servo motor encoder and displays the result S Cumulative feedback pulses When the set value exceeds 9999999 counting begins from 0 E e During reverse rotation the sign is added Displays the speed of the servo motor Servo motor speed e The value is displayed with the 0 1r min unit rounded off e During reverse rotation the sign is ad
396. ering monitor devices specifying monitor stations and devices Y From previous page Device entry screen when the entry monitor Device entry screen when the batch monitor or TC monitor is selected BM monitor is selected 1 2 3 4 x x Chio Hetheo TET FFICPUNO Ta FF CPUNO 0 HZY DEVICE 16570 32b 1 107 16b 0 32b 1 0 y LT AIS oJ A Bl aly BUFO WI RI Jo 6 C D AJE T TIC 4 gt 3 JE Fl AT K ED 4 Enter RIE 6 8 9 Set 1 to 9 as shown in the table below and then touch the key For the operation of key windows see the following L gt Section 2 4 3 Key window setting columns and operation procedure Description of setting MELSECNET H CC Link No Item Bue Direct cpu Computer Ethernet connection connection link i connection connection E connection MELSECNET 1 0 connection ID G4 pq Channel No Sets the channel number of the controller targeted to the system monitor 0 Host loop 2 Network No 1 to 239 1 to 255 0 Specified loop FF When the host FF When the station is host station selected is selected 0 When the control 0 When the station is master ag Station No FF 1 to 64 SR eaae 1 to 64 When a selected normal station 1 to 64 When a is selected local station is selected 4 CPU No 0 to 4 This item must be set only when the system is connected to multiple QCPUSs It is not necessary when the system is connected to another CPU
397. eripheral equipment may not be the same resulting in an unintended operation of the PLC CPU LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION 5 Writing sequence programs Sequence programs cannot be written when the target CPU Is operating EEPROM oc O E m Li H 2 q L T 104 H MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 4 2 Specifications 4 5 4 2 3 Precautions 4 3 Display 4 3 1 Outline until the start This subsection describes an outline until the system monitor screen is displayed after List editor for MELSEC A Option OS is installed in the GOT Starting from the utility Display the utility After the utility is displayed touch Debug amp self check gt Debug gt MELSEC A List editor from the Main Menu For how to display the utility refer to the user s manual of the GOT to be used Set the Channel No Read the PLC and display the sequence program 4 3 Display Turn on the power to the GOT set in the project data Touch the special function switch a S7 Refer to the following manual for how to set the special function switch lt gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 6 2 Touch Switch Ch No IM NETWK No STATION CPU No 0 4 ChNo Comm Driver 4 gt ZS A QnA QCPU QJ 71024 Ea AJ7IOC24 MELDAS C6 3 a Bus EPA A os se A
398. ers FLoop Shows the status of the forward loop lines of the host Normal NG RLoop Shows the status of the reverse loop lines of the host Normal NG FLoop Back Station Indicates the station number of a station that executes the loopback along the forward loop When loopback is normal is displayed When there is no loopback station F is displayed 3 LoopBK Info RLoop Back Station Indicates the station number of a station that executes the loopback along the reverse loop When loopback is normal is displayed When there is no loopback station R is displayed of Loop Switching Indicates the cumulative number of times for which loops have been switched 2 Key functions The table below shows the function of keys that are used on the detailed monitor Key Function RET Returns to the line monitor Exits the detailed monitor and returns to the screen where the network monitor function was w started 7 4 Operation Procedures 7 19 7 4 2 Detailed monitor OVERVIEW SYSTEM MONITOR LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC A LIST EDITOR MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR md ec O Z G x GC GO LI zZ Q MOTION MONITOR Display contents and keys functions acting as a MELSECNET II local station This section describes the screen configuration of the detailed monitor and the function of on screen keys when the host acts as the local station on t
399. es Message display area 13 5 How to Operate PLC 13 5 1 Displayed contents Description Displays the drive set for Data save location in the MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor settings For the SFC monitor function only the A drive standard CF card or B drive extended memory card is available For the drive that stores files displayed in the file list GOT is displayed to the left of the drive name Displays the program types file names titles sizes dates and times of all the files within the drive selected in the target drive list GOT The date and time show those of updated files A file to be read can be selected from the file list The selected file is highlighted For selecting the file name selected in the file list target controller the file selection in the file list target controller is canceled Displays the total data size of files selected in the file list target controller and file list GOT Displays the total number of files selected in the file list target controller and file list GOT Displays error messages and others Read Screen 1 Password input window a Displayed screen cc gt aa of zZ mS O Z LC ae 26 OZ z5 O lL The following table shows the displayed contents LC Displays the type of the password to be input Program password Comment e 1 Password type 0 password 2 a 3 Displays the file name 4 Keys for operations in the password inpu
400. es in specified buffer memory of a specified intelligent function module Data Setting Resetting change bit devices by test Changing the operation present value of word devices and buffer memory Changing the present value of TC possible during TC monitoring Changing the set value of TC possible during TC An A A A monitoring Quick Changing device test values by performing a quick test Display Displaying device switching comments Displaying word device and buffer memory values in decimal or hexadecimal OVERVIEW NO oc O Z le LL E LS gt dp N N 00 N LADDER MONITOR MELSEC A LIST EDITOR FUNCTION x MO Te Eh gt Eh NO NO N N ds IN al INTELLIGENT MODULE MELSEC FX LIST MONITOR EDITOR 3 4 mel An x A Ke De oc O E ZZ S 1 These items cannot be monitored when a motion controller Q series is monitored x 2 When the GOT is connected to the MELSECNET 10 use a QCPU and a network module QJ71LP21 O QJ71LP21 25 QJU71LP21S 25 QJ71LP21G QJ71BR11 of function version B or a later version E Zz 3 The present value of Z cannot be changed None of the connection types supports V 4 When a motion controller Q series is connected device comments cannot be displayed 5 Indicates the CC Link IE controller network connection 6 Indicates CC Link connection Intelligent device station O 7 Indicates CC Link connection via G4
401. esets the alarm The reset alarm is stored as the latest alarm AlarmHist Changes to the alarm history screen 7 This section 4 Returns to the function selection menu screen End Exits the servo amplifier monitor Stores the displayed screen to the memory card in BMP JPEG file format or prints it with a printer For further information about hard copies refer to the following Screen 9 4 8 Hard copy output era The touch operation of this key is invalid 9 20 9 4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens 9 4 4 Alarm function de Alarm history screen The following describes the display data of the alarm history screen and the key functions displayed on the screen 1 Displayed contents oc uu a lt O gt oc Lu 0 oc O Z le Seq No Alarm No Alarm Name Time hour Detai I hex O AL20 Encoder error 2 238 T AL8E Serial com error 236 5 3 Ov ALSE Serial com error 236 5 OZ AL20 Encoder error 2 236 E E AL20 Encoder error 2 236 AL20 Encoder error 2 y _y 1 2 3 L O kE op UU E Aa Z Print Cancel 2 2 Displays the alarm history starting from the latest alarm in order 1 Seq No e Later alarms have smaller Seq Nos 0 indicates the latest alarm 7 Up to six alarms can be displayed in the alarm history kE lt 2 Displays the number of the alarm that occurred F zZ 3 Displays the name of the alarm that occurred 2
402. essages and Corrective Actions 12 9 P PICCAUNOMNS sto ori 12 3 S eT lea usd cla 12 2 System CONfIguUratiON ooooncnccconconnonoconnconanencnononoss 12 2 Index 7 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR CNC MONITOR FUNCTION BACKUP RESTORE CNC DATA I O SFC MONITOR 0 U O G Z T o o lt SFC MONITOR A ACCESS Tale ua Active block list window eee Active step list window see eee eee eee C CHANGING Screens eee ee eee Comment file list window sss ee eee eee Communication setting WiNdOW ccooncccco D Device contact coil search window xx e Devices and range that can be monitored Display Operation ee eee E Error Messages and Corrective Action H How to Operate Block List Screen Display menu ee eee eee eee eee How to Operate device test window How to Operate PLC Read Screen e eee How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen Display Meda iia SA A E M Monitoring Mode mMenu sese sese ee eee 0 Outline before staring see eee eee e P Password input WINdOW occccocccccccccoccnconcncnnnnnos Precaution Sr e o E Program list window sss esse eee eee eee R Reading comment files from CF card S Setting automatic scroll mode sse eee Setting Display Format ccccccscceeeeeeeeeeeeeees S
403. essary perform the following s Entering monitor devices Enter the initial device name and a device number you want to monitor K gt Subsection 2 4 2 Entering monitor devices specifying monitor stations and devices Test operation gt Section 2 9 Test operation 2 40 2 6 Batch Monitor 2 6 2 Procedure for batch monitor basic operation 2 7 TC Monitor Monitoring Timers and Counters The TC monitor is a function to monitor only timers T and counters C This section describes how to operate the TC monitor when the system monitor function is executed OVERVIEW 2 7 1 Information displayed on the TC Monitor screen and key functions N 1 The information displayed on the TC Monitor screen is described below 4 2 3 4 Displays a channel No Displays a network No oc O E Z O Lu E L gt nw Displays a station No Displays a CPU No gt o o 10 Displays a file name TE MON TOR DA TC MONITOR Nd LNG Ul FILE NAME TMA 1 N PG T L l a a U FF CPUNO 0 LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION Operation start Wo 30 Sy Products Line A Products Line E No comments displayed 6 Displays a set value Comments displayed MELSEC A LIST EDITOR 5 Displays a comment 7 Displays a present value 8 Displays a device number 11 Displays contact point and coil on off 9 Displays a device name 12 Monitor display area For fur
404. et motion controller CPU of the Q motion monitor E 2 Motion controller CPU 2 Q172CPU Q173CPU Q172CPUN Q173CPUN Q172HCPU Q173HCPU Q172DCPU Q173DCPU 5 1 Use the following production number motion controller CPU when using the Q172CPU or Q173CPU a e For bus connection and direct CPU connection AS Q172CPU Production number K or later 22 Q173CPU Production number J or later Ir For a connection other than bus connection and direct CPU connection Q172CPU Production number N or later E Q173CPU Production number M or later 2 Q 2 Use a motion controller CPU with the following version of the OS installed when using SV13 or SV22 with the a Q172CPU Q173CPU Q172CPUN or Q173CPUN s lt SW6RN SV13Q LI OOH or later 00E or later when using the Q172CPU or Q173CPU with a bus connection or O direct CPU connection 2 SW6RN SV220 L 00H or later 00E or later when using the Q172CPU or Q173CPU with a bus connection or a direct CPU connection Connection type 1 When the GOT is connected to a QCPU Q mode QnACPU or motion controller CPU L y amp O Available A Partly restricted X Unavailable ae 2 gt LU Function Connection type between GOT and controller a MELSECNET H CC Link Mar e Bus Direct CPU hi Ethernet connection CC Link connection S GG connection connection bi connection MELSECNET iE J S 3 ee 10 connection G4 Z Monitors the present value D a Servo positioning error and othe
405. etting display mode of SFC programs Setting SFC data storage location Setting zoom comment display mode Tee lele Sie SLEPiliSl WINGOW nt Step No transition condition No search WINKOW cceecceeeceseeeneeteeeeeeeeaeenes Index 8 13 11 13 34 13 21 13 41 Switching display formats between decimal and hexadecimal nuMberS 13 15 Switching languages of SFC programs 13 15 System configuration see e e eee eee 13 4 T Test eee aT 13 38 Z ZOOM WING e siii id 13 27 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and s
406. etween GOT and CNC Computer MELSEC EN Link connection l Bus Direct Ethernet Name Details link NET 10 connection connection connection connection connection Monitors the CNC CNC C70 C6 C64 monitor and changes the parameters 1 Indicates CC Link connection Intelligent device station 2 Indicates CC Link connection via G4 3 Applicable to the CNC C70 only 4 Applicable to the CNC C6 C64 only 10 2 10 2 Specifications 10 2 1 System configuration Required option OS and option function board The option function OS and option function board shown below are required OS memory space user area Option function board l eR Option OS in flash User memory GT15 GT16 GT15 memory ROM RAM GT15 FNB GT15 QFNB CNC monitor 390KB 770KB 588KB Not required GT15 QFNB16M GT15 QFNB32M GT15 QFNB48M GT15 MESB48M 1 Option OS Install the option OS in the above table to the GOT Refer to the following manual for the procedure for installing the option OS K gt GT Designer2 Version O Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual 8 TRANSFERRING DATA 2 OS memory space The available memory space shown in the table above is required in the user area to install the option OS to the GOT Refer to the following manual for the procedure for checking the available memory space of the user area and information about the data using other user areas gt GT Designer2 Version O Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual 8 TRANSFERRIN
407. evice monitor not executed Z Z a z Z O O gt O 3 5 Switching the Display Format 3 51 3 5 6 Displaying statements 3 5 7 Language switching of the sequence program MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor In the MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor language switching Japanese Korean is available for displaying the following items of a Sequence program To switch the language register the following items with the language Japanese Korean used for the PLC READING DATA DISPLAY To display Korean for example register the following items with Korean on GX Developer e File name e Title e Comment e Note e Statement Items other than the above such as menu are displayed with the language set on GOT setup Statement CHNo 1 NETWK No O ST FF CPUNo 0 Filename Pagel Exit Ladder Break PLCRD SetUp Drive SEL READ Pa gel Select Cancel CFCmnt List 411 All Read Example PLC reading screen Display procedure for the PLC reading screen 3 Subsection 3 3 3 PLC reading screen CHNo 1 NETWK No O ST FF CPUNo 0 Time Title MAINS MAING Paget Exit Ladder Break PLCRD SetUp Drive SELI READ Pa gel Select Cancel CFCmnt List air All Read Continued to next page 3 52 3 5 Switching the Display Format File name Sea Print Cancel JUMP T T JUMP J Screen Print Example Ladder monitor screen Touch the key The setting window appears 3
408. external I O devices 2 90U External I O Operation Panel 04 02 l Extended function OS Supporting connection to the RFID controller 2 90U RFID 04 02 2 For GT15 GT SoftGOT1000 and GT11 Item Bus connection GT11 GT Soft GOT1000 Bus Serial Version of Description GT Version of OS S Designer2 Communication driver 2 04E Bus Q 01 00 Bus A QnA 01 00 GT15 Communication driver Bus Q 03 03 Supporting connection to BUS Bus A QnA 03 03 gt BBL GT11 BootOS 03 03 P Standard monitor OS 03 03 Communication driver Bus Q 03 03 Bus A QnA 03 03 Supporting connection to Q172HCPU snag Communication driver Q173HCPU l Bus Q 01 02 e Communication driver Priority order of data load can be set 2 43V i Bus connection Q 03 01 X X X Bus connection Q 03 07 Supporting connection to Q17nDCPU Supporting connection to CNC C70 l Communication driver Supporting connection to CRnQ 700 2 73B l Bus connection Q 03 09 Supporting connection to Q13UDHCPU gt 77F Communication driver and Q26UDHCPU l Bus connection Q 03 12 Supporting connection to Q02PHCPU and QO6PHCPU Communication driver 2 82L Supporting connection to Universal model QCPU Communication driver 2 63R Supporting connection to QOGIUDECPU Q04UDEHCPU QO6UDEHCPU Bus connection Q 03 13 X Q13UDEHCPU and Q26UDEHCPU A L Continued to next page
409. eys Key that inputs the command device number and constant Only when the valid key of upper lower character needs to be switched switching is allowed with input of the SHIFT and keys Key that declares start of step number input or automatic scroll Switch key that makes the lower character valid on each key with dual functions Whether upper or lower character is valid can be checked on the display Section 4 4 4 Switch key that makes the upper character valid on each key with dual functions Whether upper or lower character is valid can be checked on the display Section 4 4 4 When the Help function is used the screen returns to the display at the input of the HELP key In the Parameter mode the process is cancelled After restarting continue the operation If the Clear key is pressed when the system is not in the Parameter mode Other mode or Help function the screen returns to the initial status of the mode selection The input commands or device numbers except for the mode are cleared This is used for repeating the procedure if incorrect keys are pressed Section 4 4 7 In eee Other mode the screen returns to the previous eee Key that provides blank space at the command and at between device names Key that moves the cursor on the display gt gg or Section 4 4 3 determines scroll directions Press this key at the last of a series of key operations to execute the op
410. f Alarm camane Gale 2165791 pulse ABS counter 19979 rev 1 Encoder connector disconnected Command pulse 20 kpps Load inertia Eu 16 0 times 2 Encoder cable faulty KSA on ls 277V S voltage 0 06 Y Regenerative load 0 Effective load 2 Lier Sancel aine Screen E Paani a Displays monitor data of the servo amplifier in a list Displays the details number name occurrence time and cause of alarm of the alarm currently occurring in the servo amplifier The alarm can also be reset 9 1 Features 9 1 to oc uu a lt O gt oc Lu 0 oc O Z le CNC MONITOR FUNCTION BACKUP RESTORE SFC MONITOR CNC DATA I O IAPPENDICES NDEX Various diagnostics of the servo amplifier can be performed lt gt 9 4 5 There are multiple diagnostics functions to enable various diagnostics of the servo amplifier to be performed Display examples DI DO display Amplifier information display Servo amp Moni tor Servo amp Moni tor Peas Cancel Pr lift Cancel Sereen He Sereen Print Displays a list of the ON OFF status of the external I O signals of Displays the servo amplifier software number and servo motor the servo amplifier information model name ID and encoder resolution Writing of the servo parameters is enabled 3 9 4 6 The servo amplifier parameters can be read changed and written to the servo amplifier Cntl mode reg brake select Function
411. f Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens 9 15 P Parameter Setting eee e eee 9 29 Se TRI a T 9 11 S Servo amplifier monitor eee ee e ee 9 15 SCUD doo 9 16 SDECMNCAUON Sii NA 9 3 System COnNfiguratiON coooncncccconnccccnoncnnoncanenenonanons 9 3 T Test op rations sist a 9 35 Index 6 CNC MONITOR FUNCTIONS A ACCESS TAN 10 5 D IDISDIGY visitada 10 6 E Error Messages and Corrective Action 10 10 0 Operation Procedures sese eee 10 8 P PECAUMIDAS ecserin a io sn 10 5 S SDECINCALIONS T 10 2 System configuration sss eee eee 10 2 BACKUP RESTORE A ACCESS Maui dd dida ido 11 9 C Changing SCV eCnS iii iba 11 12 D Data list restoration eee ee eee eee 11 28 Data to be backed up and restored 11 4 Display operation s eee eee eee 11 11 M Main menu sese eee eee ee ee eee 11 26 0 Operation procedures sse eee 11 26 Outline before staring eee ee eee 11 11 P Precautions eee eee e 11 9 Progress screen Dackup oooccccionnccccccnccnnconnnos 11 27 Progress screen restoration cccseseeesseeeeees 11 29 S Security and password eee 11 14 Setting storage location for backup data 11 13 SDEGCINICATIONS sitas daros 11 3 System CONfIgUratiQN ooccccccccncccnnncononcnonanononononos 11 3 T Trigger backup esse eee ee 11 19 CNC DATA I O A ACCESS Te LT 12 3 C CHANGING Stereos 12 6 D ISPs 12 5 E Error M
412. fer memory address Screen example No 1 827 927 033B 039F QD75P QD75D Axis monitor data 2 OOOO te 1027 1127 0403 0467 2 828 928 033C 03A0 1028 1128 0404 0468 3 829 929 033D 03A1 1029 1129 0405 0469 4 834 934 0342 03A6 1034 1134 040A 046E 5 835 936 0343 03A8 1036 1135 040C 046F 6 836 936 0344 03A8 1036 1136 040C 0470 837 937 0345 03A9 1037 1137 040D 0471 832 932 0340 03A4 1032 1132 0408 046C 833 933 0341 03A5 1033 1133 0409 046D 824 to 825 0338 to 0339 924 to 925 039C to 039D 1024 to 1025 0400 to 0401 1124 to 1125 0464 to 0465 826 926 033A 039E 1026 1126 0402 0466 7 8 EE 1 2 aD 108 L Zasu 816 916 0330 0394 1016 1116 03F8 045C O 814 to 815 032E to 032F 0392 to 0393 03F6 to 03F7 045A to 045B 05F6 to 05F7 065A to 065B O6BE to 06BF 0722 to 0723 817 917 0331 0395 1017 1117 03F9 045D 817 917 0331 0395 1017 1117 03F9 045D 1528 1628 05F8 065C 1728 1828 06C0 0724 CMs IO degree Cinch 0e BEI 1 1 2 pea 19 3 Setting a TEE Cineme ig are O o ZUERA re oe Coup E 6 82 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 5 34 QD75P QD75D module monitoring Screen example QD75P QD75D Position speed control gt tau ar Dacit i Char EEE Oh speed SW Ert EES Naver 0D75P 0D75D Axis control data 1 gt tau ar 1 ATASS AE Getting T
413. figuratiON ccoooncncccconcccccnoncnnnncanencnononons 3 4 Index 2 T TSTST RE A Touch search Switching valid keys upper lower functions 4 15 MELSEC A LIST EDITOR System CONfiguUratiON occccconncccnocnconncnnnoncnnonannconanenos 4 3 A U Access range E E TH 4 4 Using the help function A a A 4 25 a Action if an incorrect key IS Input ee eee ee 4 19 of Adding Inserting commande 4 23 mi O B Sea elle 4 21 O C ae Changing Overwriting comMmMAanaS 4 22 Command input procedures sss sese eee 4 16 Sd COMMON OPEratiON occccccoccncccccccnnccnoncncnnnnnonnnnnns 4 28 D te Deleting commande sese eee eee eee eee 4 24 E A O eeras ths 4 6 E Display format of the display area 4 12 g lt E Error Messages and Corrective Actions 4 33 Error messages and corrective actions in direct CPU eels ele 4 33 z Error using list editor function on the lt MS St Mirra 4 37 A O S H Hard CODY OM io la 4 19 K S Key arrangement and a list of key functions 4 10 2 L 7 List Of FUNCTIONS ss eee eee e 4 20 List of Operation Procedures sss eee eee 4 28 0 e Operation Methods sss 4 10 a Operation of keyword Inour 4 8 a Outline Until the Start cccccscececescscvssecesceeresescseveeseees 4 6 P PLC CPU error messages and troubleshooting 4 36 PLC memory alce ainia dde 4 27 A 2a aaaeleerceeoces aceasta 4 5 R
414. for the backup restore when setting the trigger backup with the GOT utility unauthorized users cannot execute the backup Without inputting the password for the backup restore when setting the trigger backup an error occurs and the GOT does not execute the backup even if the trigger condition is met Input the password for the backup restore in the trigger backup setting of the GOT utility For setting the trigger backup with the GOT utility refer to the following lt gt GT16 User s Manual Section 11 2 2 Trigger Backup Settings GT15 User s Manual Section 11 13 Trigger Backup Settings 2 Setting items for trigger backup Set the trigger backup with GT Designer2 and the GOT utility For the setting items for GT Designer2 refer to the following GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual Section 3 8 Setting of GOT Display and Operations GOT Setup For the setting items for the GOT utility refer to the following K gt GT16 User s Manual Section 11 2 2 Trigger Backup Settings GT15 User s Manual Section 11 13 Trigger Backup Settings 11 20 11 3 Display Operation 11 3 4 Trigger backup Controlling backup with devices The GOT controls the trigger backup with devices The following shows the devices to be used for the trigger backup T e Trigger device z e Process notification device DS e Backup error notification device e Trigger backup processing setting No notification GS657 e Trigger backup data send
415. for the language switching in the GOT utility with comment files created with the SJIS code KS code and or ASCII code With a CF card storing comment files created with the SJIS code KS code and or ASCII code comments can be displayed in the language corresponding to any character code in the CF card regardless of the language set in the GOT utility 13 1 Features Interaction with ladder monitor function By only selecting a device on the SFC diagram monitor screen and starting the ladder monitor the GOT can search and display the device in a ladder program gt 13 7 3 Display menu The function is useful for searching for a device used within both a SFC program and a ladder program in the ladder program Example When turning on Y22 device with ladder program including interlock circuit O E lt PLC CPU gt A lt Sensor gt lt GOT gt E X1 OFF Monitor screen GOT SFC monitor Ladder monitor Searching in ladder program 1 JL JL JL TEJE PJ ET Finding that the machine stops 8 Checking an active step with the SFC monitor E Checking that the machine operation command M10 is on Touching M10 and starting the ladder monitor Finding out that Y22 machine operation is off because X1 is off O Finding out that the machine stops because the door is open X1 is off 13 1 Features 13 3 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR CNC MONITOR FUNCTION BACKUP RESTORE de CNC DATA I O oc O E Z Oo
416. fore performing a test operation Check parameters of the servo amplifier before starting operation Unexpected operations may occur depending on the machine The heat sink regenerative brake resistor servo motor and other parts of the servo amplifier may be hot while the power is on or for a period after the power is turned off therefore do not touch or bring parts cables etc close to them Doing so can cause fire or damage to the parts 1 Servo on For test operation of JOG operation positioning operation the SON digital input signal of the servo amplifier is turned on automatically in the servo amplifier to start operation regardless of the ON OFF status of the SON signal of the digital I O signal of the servo amplifier In addition the servo amplifier does not accept any external command pulses and input signals excluding emergency stop until the test operation screen is exited The SON automatically turns on when touching the or key on the JOG operation screen or positioning operation screen of the servo amplifier monitor 2 Stop Point 7 To perform an emergency stop turn off the emergency stop signal of the servo _ _ amplifier or turn off the input power a Use the following procedure to stop test operation from the servo amplifier monitor e JOG operation Release the or key e Positioning operation Touch the key b The servo motor stops if any of the following states occurs during test operation e T
417. g data for controllers By controlling the backup with the set trigger device the GOT can automatically back up setting data for controllers after the data are changed By setting the days and time the GOT can back up setting data for controllers periodically Trigger device X100 X100 OFF gt ON 1T Setting GOT to back up data at 17 30 on Tuesdays Backing up setting data to a CF card or USB memory Backing up setting data to a CF card or X100 ON Detected 11 2 11 1 Features 11 2 Specifications o 11 2 1 System configuration y of a This section describes the system configuration for the backup restore function BS For connection type settings and precautions on the communication unit cable and connection type refer to the following manual C gt GOT1000 Series Connection Manual 4 a E Target controller 62 22 Controller 2 Q series 2 QCPU Q mode 1 1 CNC C70 CNC C70 Q172CPU Q173CPU Q172CPUN Q173CPUN Q172HCPU Q173HCPU 3 4 Motion controller CPU Q172DCPU Q173DCPU 1 Use a PLC CPU with the function version of B or later 2 The backup restore function cannot be used with the redundant CPU 3 Use the following production number motion controller CPU when using the Q172CPU or Q173CPU e For bus connection and direct CPU connection Q172CPU Production number K or later Q173CPU Production
418. g the ladder block of the subsequent sequence file clears the previous display 2 SS Print JUMP T f JUMP L Screen Only the ladder block s found in the subsequent sequence file is displayed next contact point is displayed 3 68 3 6 Search Operation 3 6 7 Touch search E Touch a coil on the screen The contact point of the same device in which the coil exists is searched and the ladder block containing the searched contact point is added to the ladder blocks displayed The searched device is highlighted E You can continuously search the ladder in the downward direction by touching When there is no more contact point of the same device in which the touched coil exists the message DEVICE NOT FOUND will be displayed 3 7 Test Operation You can change device values and turn on and off bit devices on the screen when the ladder monitor is executed This section describes how to display the test menu screen z For the procedure for changing device values and turning on and off bit devices see the following gt 237 Section 2 9 Test Operation S Point Before test operation 5 Timer and counter values cannot be changed during MELSEC FX ladder Z monitoring With the MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor function the GOT cannot write data to the 2 devices in the QSCPU O 3 7 1 Displaying the test menu screen 1 Displaying the test menu screen The procedure for displaying the test menu screen d
419. g to the trigger setting set for the backup with the error and a system alarm occurs Check the system alarm and then remove error causes For system alarms and corrective actions refer to the following manual gt GT15 User s Manual The backup error notification device stores O when the next trigger backup is executed Trigger device 1 Backup processing 1 Process notification device 1 Backup error he 0 0 notification device Storing trigger ID Storing 0 when the next corresponding to l iar with pl trigger backup is executed Trigger backup processing setting No notification lt 1 xX gt 1 GS657 3 Setting send delay time The backup restore function can set the delay time for backup communication intervals Setting of the delay time can reduce the load of other processes such as monitoring objects with the backup process The actually time set by the set value is listed as follows Set value Delay time 0 None 1 to100 Set value x 5 ms 101 or more 500 ms Point Setting of trigger backup data send delay Backup communication times are longer than a default when the trigger backup data send delay is set Set the suitable delay time to match the processing condition of backup function and others such as monitoring objects 11 3 Display Operation 11 3 4 Trigger backup Precautions Tor trigger backup The following shows precautions for the trigger backup 1 GOT operations durin
420. g trigger backup 25 The GOT may take a long time to monitor devices and to operate during the trigger backup EZ Execute the trigger backup when the operator does not operate the GOT R Updating data with the functions that collect device values including the logging function may also take a long time 2 Displaying device name on GOT O When the trigger device is set to Rise the GOT displays the device name of without the 58 extended function OS of the device name converter installed 92 For displaying the device name correctly install the extended function OS of the device name ES converter on the GOT 11 3 First backup The trigger backup is unavailable for the first backup Manually execute the first backup and then set the password for the backup restore and passwords for controllers After the settings set the trigger backup LLI oc O E 7 LLI G o Y O lt a 4 Passwords for controllers When passwords for controllers stored in the backup setting differ from current passwords for the controllers the backup operation is canceled For executing the trigger backup check that passwords for controllers have no changes Q When the backup operation is canceled manually execute the backup again and then input E correct passwords 2 O 5 Checking file register changes When the trigger backup is frequently executed set Check the file register changes to Not execute with the GOT utility because data stored
421. get PLC Release the keyword for the target PLC 1 When reading file from PLC CPU e Read only one program file or one comment file 2 When reading file from CF card e No CF cards are inserted in the specified drive e No comment files are stored in the CF card Delete superfluous files and perform reading again Read the program again Check the sequence program in the PLC CPU and then read the program again Check the settings in the PLC CPU and read the program again Check manuals for the PLC CPU 4 MELSEC A LIST EDITOR stl0 The MELSEC A list editor enables you to change the sequence program in the ACPU QCPU A mode This function is intended to troubleshoot the PLC system and to streamline maintenance operations By installing list editor for MELSEC A an Option OS from GT Designer2 into the GOT you can edit the ACPU QCPU A mode PLC program The features of the MELSEC A list editor are described below 4 1 Features Parameters and sequence programs are easy to maintain You can check or partly correct change or add PLC CPU parameters and sequence programs simply by operating keys You can easily edit sequence programs without preparing any peripheral unit other than the GOT Example of changing sequence program commands LD xo Changed i xo OUT Y20 p MOV DO DI LD Xt LD Xi S Combination with the ladder monitor You can open the MELSEC A List Editor window from the Ladder
422. gistered in the MAHON target contone key Used to delete all characters entered UC O READ STATE 5 CSEE Lu kE op gt op Q oc O E Z le oc T Q G lt l Z O H L LL o In the case of the MELSEC FX ladder monitor Touch the key to enter the keyword registered in the L target PLC CPU z Refer to the following manual for the FX CPU keywords 7 37 GT16 User s Manual 10 2 3 Display contents of E communication detail settings GT15 User s Manual 10 2 3 Display contents of communication detail settings D x lt da READ SELECTION a EAD SELECTION O READ PROGRAM e NE a NON SETTING ES SWITCH TIL ISEL _1 SET im Exit Ladder Break PLCRD ot fale a ES Keyword am 6 Z O E Z o E 6 6 Continued to next page O 3 3 Display 3 23 3 3 3 Display From previous page The sequence program is read READ SELECTION e The message EXECUTING is displayed COMMENT e The entire size of the program and the portion already read are displayed NON SETTING Portion already read entire program size SWITCH TI SEL E a Ai e The reading of the PLC stops by touching the key The reading of the sequence program is completed READ SELECTION The message OPERATION COMPLETE is displayed COMMENT NON SETTING SWITCH T4 SEL ES A l tse wes noo J a When the ladder mo
423. gram The specified command was not found Check the program In communication with the CPU for clearing the keyword 1 Mount the memory cassette properly Memory cassette check or writing the parameter the memory cassette is 2 Replace the memory cassette with a new insufficient or not mounted one The set step number is larger than the maximum step Step over error b Set the correct step number number Setting error Setting value is not correct Set the correct value Not selectable The function which cannot be executed was selected Select other function Operation error The set device symbol is incorrect Perform the correct key operation 1 Set the correct device symbol 2 Set the number within the range of CPU device The specified command was not found Device error The device number exceeds the range o Proceed to the next operation if it does not The identical coil is found in the sequence Identical coil affect the control program Correct the program if it affects the control When the CPU has detected the error stop running of the operation After resetting the When the program is read it cannot be converted to the Command error CPU check the command around the error proper command Write the correct command For check of the error step refer to 4 6 7 The command set at the time of read write or insert is Command setting error Set the correct command not correct M sa When writ
424. grams refer to the following a When setting with GOT utility C gt GT15 User s Manual Section 11 7 Q QnA Ladder Monitor When setting with GT Designer2 gt GT Designer2 Version L Screen Design Manual Section 3 8 Setting of GOT Display and Operations GOT Setup in a z 13 7 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen 13 33 13 7 3 Menus 13 34 1 Comment file list window The GOT displays the comment file list a Displayed screen Comment File List nd Name lo rot display coments common comment The following table shows the displayed contents Among comment files stored in the CF card the file names and titles of the comment files and common comment files used for the displayed SFC program are a displayed 1 Comment file list OS For switching comments select a comment file to be used For hiding comments select Do not display comments A selected comment file is highlighted 2 Keys for operations in the comment file list window shown in b Touch input b Key functions Key Function A k 4 Scrolls the display area up and down by one line Closes the comment file list window and displays the SFC diagram monitor screen with the Apply Changes dh comments of the file selected from the comment file list 13 7 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen 13 7 3 Menus 2 Active step list window The GOT displays active steps in the displayed block a Displayed screen 2 S
425. gt TO c 2 Auto setting MAIN a P Point 7 How to monitor local devices when ladder monitor starts With setting the GOT setup the GOT can start monitoring local devices when the z ladder monitor starts For settings for monitoring local devices when the ladder monitor starts refer to the Bc following manual 02 zZ 237 GT16 User s Manual Section 11 2 1 Q QnA Ladder Monitor GT15 User s Manual Section 11 7 Q QnA Ladder Monitor O Z S Z O o E Z S Z O O 3 8 Local Device Monitor 3 71 3 8 1 Operation procedure for local device monitor Ending local device monitor The following shows how to end the local device monitor GD Touch Menu Touch MENU TO Auto setting MAIN 0 25 k l Sea Print JUMP Y JUMP J Screen Mentes Touch x G Dev Sea Xref Cnnt S Cont Sea 16 32Bit Cunt 32 ES Coil Sea Dec Hex Note J Step Sea Test Statement End Sea Ru Print Screen End the local device monitor The local device monitor is ended with the following operations e When touching key tae e When touching PLCRD key Touch Local Dev 0 25 Print Cancel JUMP T JUMP 1 Screen Print Point f When ladder monitor screen is switched to other screens during executing local device monitor When the ladder monitor screen is switched to other screens because of communication errors and others during monitoring local devices the GOT keep
426. gt OfLin FLoop gt OK No per RET COM STA gt P MTR WAIT Touch a box Select a box RET Select a menu item Detailed monitor Other station monitor screen 7 3 Display 7 11 OVERVIEW SYSTEM MONITOR LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC A LIST EDITOR MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR Ni oc O Z G x GC GO LI zZ Q MOTION MONITOR 7 4 Operation Procedures This section describes the information and key functions displayed on the network monitor screen The display on the network monitor screen varies slightly depending on the GOT used and a screen for the GT1575 V is used for the descriptions in this section 7 4 1 Line monitor This section describes the structure of the monitor screen and the common operations used when executing the line monitor Display contents and keys functions This section describes the line monitor screen configuration and the function of keys displayed on the screen after starting the network monitor 1 Displayed contents DN Mode gt OnLin 7 3 4 8 5 6 No Display contents 1 This shows the operation mode of the host On line Off line Test 2 This shows the status of the F loop Forward loop OK NG 2 3 This shows the status of the R loop Reverse loop OK NG 2 4 This shows whether the loopback was executed or not Executed Not executed This shows the link scan time required for
427. he MELSECNET I 1 Displayed contents This Station s Indicates the station number of the host TsSti Info l l l This Station s Indicates the category of the host Total of L Sta Indicates the maximum number of the stations to be linked which is 2 D Link Info defined by common parameters This shows the communication status of the host 3 Com status E E Parameter wait Cyclic comm Com suspension This shows the status of receiving Device BWY from the master station 4 BWY From Master OK Data is being received by cyclic communication NG Unable to receive because the host is disconnected etc This shows the status of receiving Device BW from the master station of a dual layer system 5 BW From Hostmaster OK Data is being received by cyclic communication NG Unable to receive because the host is disconnected etc FLoop Shows the status of the forward loop lines of the host Normal NG RLoop Shows the status of the reverse loop lines of the host Normal NG 6 LoopBK Info FLoop Back Station Not displayed is displayed RLoop Back Station Not displayed is displayed of Loop Switching Not displayed is displayed 2 Key functions The table below shows the function of keys that are used on the detailed monitor Key Function RET Returns to the line monitor Exits the detailed monitor and returns to the screen where the network monit
428. he backup Create a sequence program so that the trigger device turns off after the GOT checks that the process notification device turns on GOT power z lt Backup trigger device Backup processing gt INDEX 11 3 Display Operation 11 25 11 3 4 Trigger backup 11 4 Operation Procedures This section describes the backup restore display details and the functions of the keys displayed on the screen The display screen for the backup restore differs depending on the GOT to be used This section explains the display screen with the GI1575 V screen 11 4 1 Main menu The following describes the display and the key functions on the Bakcup restoration function Main menu screen Display details Backup restoration function Main menu 1 Setting SYSIBKUP Channe 1 01 Next chnnl Backup function Dev ice gt GOT Restoration function GOT gt Dev ice GOT data package acquisition GOT data del Delete backup data No Display details 1 Displays the target channel No of the backup and the setting name for the backup restore Fixed Key functions Key Function Next chnnl Switches the target channels of the backup restore Backup function Starts the backup Restoration function Switches the screen to the Restoration function Data list screen Switches the screen to the setting screen of the GOT data package acquisition C gt GT16 User s Manual Section 11 3 3 GOT Data Package Acquisi
429. he communication cable is disconnected e The screen is switched to another servo amplifier monitor screen or the servo amplifier monitor is exited However during motor less operation the test mode is not canceled until the servo amplifier is powered off Preparations for test operations When performing test operations it is necessary to make the test operation settings on the connected servo amplifier Refer to the manual of the connected servo amplifier for details of making settings on the servo amplifier to perform test operations 9 36 9 4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens 9 4 7 Test operations JOG operation screen This section describes the display data of the JOG operation screen and the key functions displayed on the screen 1 Displayed contents No mba gt Motor speed Acc dec time 1 200 r min 0 5175 2 1000 ms 0 20000 Selecting Momentary touch switches while they are being pressed Screen Print Description Displays the set speed of the servo motor Displays the set acceleration deceleration time constant Momentary Switch Operation 2 2 Displays how to operate the JOG operation 2 Operation a When selecting Momentary Switch Operation Selecting Momentary e Start operation Touch the or key e Stop operation Release the or key When selecting Momentary Switch Operation Not Selecting Momentary e Start operation Touch the or key e Stop
430. he currently undisplayed stage immediately before after the currently displayed stage Operations can be performed when the system configuration has three or more extension bases Scrolls one stage up Scrolls one stage down 6 4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen 6 15 6 4 1 Composition of the system configuration screen and key functions LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR OVERVIEW SYSTEM MONITOR MELSEC A LIST EDITOR O UU gt Q G E uu 9 y JJ ul Z oc O E Z le NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR When using the QCPU A mode QnACPU and ACPU 1 Displayed contents 1 Main lA The model name of the module and related data are displayed at the end of the module data readout from the PLC CPU The OS executes it automatically een 2 0 Uf 0 0 0 af a 0 When connected to MELSECNET 10 the A screen shown in Section 6 4 2 is displayed Item Description 1 Displays the network number and station number of the monitored station For modules installed in the monitored station the model name and start No of l O signals are displayed for the intelligent function module IN OUT and the I O points for the I O module For an intelligent function module that cannot be monitored SP and the start No of the I O signal 2 are displayed The display position of the module becomes the key to switch to the screen where the monitoring
431. he errors that occurred 4 Error Definition Displays the definitions of the SFC errors that occurred Key functions The table below shows the functions of the keys used for operation of the SFC Error History screen Key Function Returns to the monitor menu screen Exits the SFC Error History screen and returns to the screen where the Q motion monitor was started Stores the displayed screen to the memory card in BMP JPEG file format or prints it with a printer For further information about hard copies refer to the following U 8 4 11 Hard copy output The operation of this key is invalid Clears the error history Only with Q172DCPU and Q173DCPU 8 12 8 4 Operation Procedures 8 4 4 SFC Error History screen 8 4 5 Error List screen This section describes the display data of the Error List screen and the key functions displayed on the screen gt LC gt Displayed contents O Error List 1 gt axl T Error Definition HA O 4 26 Min L present value change was nade shi le the Z 13 34 1 200 corresponding axis was operating or dying servo IF 2 4 26 Maj Mastart sv anp pe is OF initial processirg the anp is 13 34 1 1004 mt yet installed a sv err ocerred o the cable is faulty m 4 26 Min rest value charge was nade whi le the 0 18 35 1 3010 correspondirg axis ms operating or dying servo FF F 4 26 Min A present value charge ms nade whi le the 13 35 1 300 corresponding axis ms operating or
432. he sequence program has an abnormal command code No END instruction Instruction code abnormal The sequence program has an abnormal Ladder creation bad Np circuit Communication is not possible because a keyword is registered in the target PLC For FX3U C only Please release the keyword A keyword is set to the PLC that is targeted to the PLC reading on the PLC reading screen THE KEYWORD IS REGISTERED Cannot read multiple files Data Save Location is set to None The number of read file exceeds the Number of files exceeds 512 maximum number of files can be treated Aborting in ladder monitor 512 When starting ladder monitor from a o D monitor the monitor target of the specified This is not a specified program l device and that of the program already read to the GOT do not match An invalid program is specified during The specified file does not exist o monitoring local devices An error occurs during monitoring local Local device monitor error l devices The PLC CPU does not support the local Local device monitor is not supported l l device monitor function 3 74 3 9 Error Messages and Corrective Action Corrective action Check the sequence program with the peripheral device GX Developer Check the sequence program with the peripheral device GX Developer Check the sequence program with the peripheral device GX Developer Release the keyword for the tar
433. he start Operation for display a O 1 Normal operation lt This subsection describes the flow until the ladder monitor operation screen is displayed after a ladder monitor Option OS is installed in the GOT 2 Turn on the power to the GOT Starting from the special function switch Starting from the utility ladder monitor set in the project data O Display the utility Touch the special function switch P EE oc O E Z le oc T Q G lt l Z O H O Z LL LC O T After the utility is displayed touch Debug amp self check gt Refer to the following manual for how to set the special 7 Debug gt Ladder monitor from the Main Menu function switch lt O Lu For how to display the utility refer to the user s manual 237 GT Designer2 Version U Screen Design 9 of the GOT to be used Manual 6 2 Touch Switch y kE Y Set the channel No network No EES x lt MELSEC Q QnA LADDERMON TOR i station No etc O ec nO 2 gt 3 3 3 Display m a e ia gt Exit I A QnA 0CPU QJ71024 ci ge Communication setting window ors le m Z ZS Read the PLC and display the sequence program I 33 3 3 Display cc Z O SE LC O kE LULU Z L O Z O gt zZ O kE O gt O 3 3 Display 3 15 3 3 1 Outline until the start 3 16 Point 3 3 Display How to display the utili
434. he status of I O signals to and from an external module is monitored Monitor screen NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 6 1 Features 6 1 Enabled data change by write operations The values are written into the buffer memory of the intelligent function module by writing values from the monitor screen Writing example Monitor screen When changing a change permitted channel Select writing gt Enabled project data reusing for the intelligent module monitor Intelligent module monitor data is saved in the following directory in a personal computer with GT Designer2 installed Saved as a G1 file Because the following data can be edited with GT Designer2 you can use part of the data for project data It is recommended that you copy the data to prevent accidental deletion of the data GT15SVGA File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Oo Back gt j C3 CAMELSECIGTD21Gmdp10001GT155YGA x Name Size Folders B Sw Local Disk C 3 Documents and Settings K PS Search R Folders Ei KEk e A Ed G15PMONT G1D 6 KB E GISPMONT G1 4 515 KB E G MELSEC El 5 EZSocket 3 6TD2 6 1 Features E 5 Example900 E 5 Example1000 5 Fonts C Gmdp 5 Gmdp1000 B GTISIVGA D GTISVGA 3 GTISXGA E 5 os E 5 Os1000 E G SysLib1000 5 SysLiba900 E 5 SysLibF900 gt UserLib My Documents Type G1D File Gi File 6 2 Specifications 6 2 1 S
435. hen the cursor is placed on the device number MELSEC A LIST EDITOR E If necessary enter numbers or characters from the keyboard MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR key Used to delete a character of the entered information key Used to delete all characters under the cursor e The a w keys without a description do not function Entry is completed by touching the key INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR 4 The keyboard closes by touching the key NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 2 4 Operation Procedure Common to the System Monitor Screens 2 23 2 4 3 Key window setting columns and operation procedure 2 4 4 Switching the display format DEC HEX and comment no comment display This subsection describes how to switch the display format and comment no comment display The Entry Monitor window is taken here as an example to describe the specification of a monitor station and a monitor device when the system monitor function is executed The procedure for switching the display format DEC HEX and comment display when another item is selected Example of switching when the entry monitor is selected Switching the display format from DEC to HEX Switching no comment display to comment display DEVICE MONITOR ChNo 1 NetNo ST Switching the display format from DEC to HEX Switching no comment display to comment display DEVICE MONITOR Chio 1 Neto DEVICE MONITOR Chio 1 Neth SETE DET Bm O1ST FF
436. her station communication status monitor and the function of keys displayed on it This screen cannot be displayed for a MELSECNET II local station 1 Displayed contents No Display contents Displays the communication status by station number OK ERR 1 The station numbers displayed do not indicate the number of station numbers in the network rather the maximum number of communication stations 2 Any station in an abnormal condition is highlighted 3 Reserved stations are displayed as normal stations 2 Key functions The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the other station communications status monitor operations Key Function RET Returns to the other station monitor Exits the other station communication statuses monitor screen and returns to the screen where the network monitor was started VO Switches the screen display of stations 1 to 80 stations 81 to 120 stations 7 24 7 4 Operation Procedures 7 4 4 Other station communication status monitor 7 4 5 Other station data link status monitor This section describes the screen configuration of the other station data link status monitor and the function of on screen keys This screen cannot be displayed for a MELSECNET II master station or local station gt Lu gt 1 Displayed contents S LC O Z O Lu kE 09 gt ep oc O E A No Display contents S Zz Ze Displays the data link status by station
437. hipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind a
438. his key is used when setting timers and counters writing applied commands etc Displays the list from a specified step No when the step No is input Moves the list display area bar up and down and switches the line being edited Determines the key operation Inputs commands device names etc The key contents depend on the input contents The commands that can be used differ depending on the target FX PLC Refer to the manual for the FX PLC to be used Exits the MELSEC FX list editor 5 4 Operation Procedures 5 4 1 Key arrangement and a list of key functions Keyboard switching Touching the button switches the command keyboard 1 and command keyboard 2 When you touch the button for a keyboard function the optimum keyboard for input for that function is displayed automatically OVERVIEW Command keyboard 1 Command keyboard 2 DC 2 ALA III n ooe om R DICE ea oer f w fA EGO Ce A SYSTEM MONITOR LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC A LIST EDITOR al E V m gt a Oo LU 9p KE m INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 5 4 Operation Procedures 5 11 5 4 1 Key arrangement and a list of key functions 5 4 2 Selection and operation of modes The MELSEC FX list editor has four modes READ WRITE INSERT and DELETE Select an appropriate mode for the intended operation For more information on the mode to select refer to the function operations from subsec
439. ht entry devices If more than eight devices are registered the oldest ones will be deleted one by one and the eight latest entry devices will be monitored If necessary delete unnecessary entry devices and re enter ones you want to monitor 2 34 2 5 Entry Monitor 2 5 2 Procedure for entry monitor basic operation 2 5 3 Deleting entry devices This subsection describes how to delete entry devices Deleting entry devices with the system monitor function executed is described below OVERVIEW NO oc O E Z O Lu E L gt nw When specifying the device name you want to delete When deleting devices at a time O DEVICE MONITOR SETE DEVICE MONITOR 3 Chio 1 NetNo GIST FFICPUNe 0 ChNo 1 NetNe 01ST FF CPUNe 9 TE az ie O a 2 S z DEVICE 1 K LU T NI LJ S atv F PRESS SET KEY SELECT ITEM B F R lt gt THEN ENTER DEVICE TYPE amp No AJZ V TICA JA S EIG Enter Dell At 58 Enter the device name you ES want to delete in 1 ala Enter the device number you want to delete in 2 cc Touch the key Z EN Touch the x key The window closes 2 For further information about key window 2 operation see lt Subsection 2 4 3 Key window setting columns and E operation procedure E S 6 O O 2 5 Entry Monitor 2 35 2 5 3 Deleting entry devices 2 6 Batch Monitor The batch monitor is a function to specify the head device of any device range to pe
440. ics he Get esa EEE LEE E A UE ESTEE 2 93 203 0035 00CB T el els aise l Adis Adi 353 503 0161 01F7 ALGA PE 3 56 206 0038 00CE s I e is i 356 506 0164 01FA eres a 57 207 0039 OOCF 357 507 0165 01FB SS ZE HEH TEO SE Eee Ei 5 58 208 003A 00DO dL a La IL 358 508 0166 01FC 6 54 204 0036 00CC 354 504 0162 01F8 Shion EE eho ILI Externa e arg guest A tA BEROR ma IE 7 59 209 003B 00D1 E 359 509 0167 01FD 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 5 34 QD75P QD75D module monitoring 9 62 212 003E 00D4 362 512 016A 0200 6 79 LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR OVERVIEW SYSTEM MONITOR MELSEC A LIST EDITOR O UU gt Q G E uu 9 y JJ ul Z oc O E Z le NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR Buffer s address Screen example E 229 _ _ 00E5 0D75P 0D75D GPR detailed parameters O gt a e 379 529 0178 0211 an Dal DIE o a de 2 82 232 0052 00E8 el 5 m Z 382 532 017E 0214 ap E 7 A im 10 3 83 233 0053 00E9 eT a Sl 383 533 017F 0215 E ae 4 86 236 0056 O0EC Nnn I EEIT EE 386 536 0182 0218 a qa a TEREE a d T TT aa 80 to 81 0050 to 0051 i SS TA le Mendo Le DEBES a iC A to 214748308 DEIA me Tour ORR retry a SJR PUSE 234 to 235 OOEA to 00EB 384 to 385 0180 to 0181 934 to 535 0216 to 0217 7 87 237 0057 00ED 387 537 0183
441. ile the FX PLC is running as rO The memory to write to is EPROM E i Set other than EPROM for the memory to write to 32 Can not write The protect switch of the EEPROM is S Switch off the protect switch of the EEPROM on The specified step number exceeded the T Step number is out of a range l Specify a step number below the maximum value E maximum number 3 kE The specified command cannot be 2 Not found Proceed to the next operation lt found O UU 09 Not found The specified device cannot be found Proceed to the next operation a gt Check the program memory space and delete commands al porto The program may exceed the available to keep it within the space space Writing is not executed 37 Section 5 4 7 Deleting commands An invalid command non existent Command error Input the correct command command was specified E V m gt a Oo LU 9p KE m Point f How to erase an error message An error message is not erased even if the cause of the error is eliminated To erase an error message touch a key on the MELSEC FX list editor screen INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 5 5 Error Messages and Corrective Actions 5 33 MEMO 6 INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR S GT SOFT a e cGT16 c6T15 corioo0o GTI 1 erl U 9 oc O E 6 1 Features 3 7 With the intelligent module monitor you can use dedicated screens to monitor the buffe
442. information displayed on the BM Monitor screen is described below 4 2 3 4 Displays a channel No Displays a network No Displays a station No Displays a CPU No gt o o EM MONITOR Chio 1 NetNo IO MAL Ol BM U Sy z U Sy 3 U BM U EM z U EM D U BM U EM 3 U 5 6 7 8 Displays a word device value Displays a device No Displays a device name gt o o Displays the initial I O signal of the module For further information about items 1 to 8 shown above see the page that follows 2 46 2 8 BM Monitor Monitoring Buffer Memory 2 8 1 Information displayed on the BM Monitor screen and key functions 2 3 No The following table describes the key functions displayed on the BM Monitor screen Key switch Function Activates the Quick test operation L gt Section 2 4 5 Quick test operation of monitor devices Switches the screen to the functional change menu screen to activate another monitor function or terminate the system monitor function L 3 Section 2 4 6 Changing screens Switches the screen to the display format switching screen to change the value display format DEC HEX on the BM Monitor screen or comment no comment display Section 2 4 4 Switching the display format DEC HEX and comment no comment display Switches the screen to the Device entry screen to enter or test monitor devices Entering monitor devices lt Section 2
443. ing in the Write or the Insert Delete mode the Turn OFF the memory protect switch in the emory protec dd memory protect switch in the memory cassette is ON memory cassette C v Memory assignment set in the parameter exceeded the Set the parameter within the capacity of the apacity over id capacity of the memory cassette memory cassette Write the END command at the last step of the No END command There is no END command program Restart the list editor function If communication is not made properly check the E When the list editor function is started proper following PLC communication error A communication with the PLC is not made 1 GOT main unit 2 Connection of the cable 3 CPU main unit if any error has occurred Close and restart the editor for MELSEC A If communication is not made properly check PLC COMM ERROR When the editor for MELSEC A is started proper the following PLEASE CLOSE communication with the CPU is not made 1 GOT main unit 2 Connection of the cable 3 CPU main unit 1 Check the setting of RAM ROM Correct writing was not made in the Write or Insert 2 Check the RAM mounting PC write error mode 3 Check the setting of the memory protect switch in the CPU Writing insertion or deletion was attempted PLC is running Stop the CPU during running of the CPU Change the PLC number and set the station for PC No error The PLC number is set to other station access
444. ing window is displayed at the S first startup of the MELSEC FX list editor only A For displaying the communication setting window at the second or later startup 0 touch ChNo on the MELSEC FX list editor screen 579 4 Operation Method O 3 Ifthe project data has not been downloaded z The MELSEC FX list editor can be started from the utility even if the project data a has not been downloaded to the GOT 32 2 z im z al E V m gt a Oo LU 9p KE m INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 5 3 Display 5 7 Change screens This section describes how to change the screen Utility Main Menu or user created monitor screen l Communication setting window 1 ChNo CG Comm Driver 4 gt 1 MELSEC FX A QNA OCPU QJ7IC2A E N rm Error message Detail Step 1 0 configuration error 1010 PC HPP communication error 6201 Memory capacity Parameter File reg capacity _0 block setting Ra Latch range M 500 M1023 C 100 C 199 16bit S 500 S 999 C 220 C 255 32bit D 200 D 511 RUN terminal input Default Keyword The keyword of MELSEC FX is operated setup Regist Delete Clear Protect e E o G AN a 5 gt Q e v om ER Re D 50 List Monitor 7 Qon EA CA m OOOO 030 010 oo r e wn vo E 1 With setting special function
445. input sequence INSERT Y gt SET gt Step number GO gt Com gt GoW mand Insert a command in the Insert a command in the program program A KL Display the program gt HELP gt 1 gt 121 gt Specify the movement in the Insert mode start step Move the program Move the whole program GO gt Specify the movement gt GO gt Specify the movement gt end step destination step Display the program gt HELP gt 1 gt 3 gt Specify the in the Insert mode copy start step Copy the program Copy the program Specify the gt Specify the copy gt copy end step destination step 4 6 5 Operation in delete mode D Details Procedures key input sequence SHIFT gt DELETE gt gt Step number gt Delete a command from the Delete a command from the program program Display the program gt HELP gt 1 gt gt Specify the Delete the specified range of Specify the range of the in the Delete mode deletion start step the program program for deletion Specify the deletion gt end step Delete the whole NOP inthe Display the program gt HELP gt 1 l2 program in the Delete mode Delete the whole NOP 4 30 4 6 List of Operation Procedures 4 6 4 Operation in insert mo
446. int Date Manual Number Revision Jun 2008 SH NA 080544ENG J Compatible with GT Designer2 Version 2 82L Partial corrections Section 3 2 2 3 7 6 4 4 7 2 1 11 2 1 11 3 3 Partial additions Section 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 3 2 4 6 2 1 6 3 6 4 1 6 4 2 6 4 3 11 2 3 11 6 13 2 1 App1 Oct 2008 SH NA 080544ENG K Compatible with GT Designer2 Version 2 90U Section 1 1 3 2 1 2 3 1 3 3 1 4 4 1 5 5 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 3 10 3 11 1 11 3 1 11 3 4 11 4 1 11 4 3 11 6 12 3 13 1 13 3 1 13 5 1 13 5 2 13 6 1 13 6 3 13 7 1 13 7 3 Section 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 3 2 1 3 5 4 4 1 4 2 1 4 3 1 4 4 6 5 1 5 2 3 5 3 5 4 1 5 4 10 5 4 13 6 2 1 7 2 1 8 2 1 9 2 1 10 2 1 10 2 3 11 2 1 11 3 2 12 2 3 13 2 1 13 2 2 13 8 13 9 Appt Japanese Manual Version SH 080541 N This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION INTRODUCTION Thank you for choosing Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal Mitsubishi GOT Read this manual and make sure you understand the functions and performance of the GOT thoroughly in advance to ensure correct use CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ti odio de lisis A 1 A o E ances A 7 INTRO
447. ion Required hardware o The following hardware is required GOT Hardware lt T E GT16 CF card USB memory ES GT15 CF card ha CNC data that can be input and output The following data can be input and output with the CNC data l O function S Z For details of the data refer to the manual for the CNC to be used 25 AA Z Description Sr Machining program Parameter Tool offset data Common variable Workpiece offset data Maintenance data 12 2 2 Access range i 1 Bus connection One GOT can execute the CNC data I O on up to two CNCs by switching the CNCs 2 2 Ethernet connection One GOT can execute the CNC data I O on up to 64 CNCs by switching the CNCs Q lt x a O Z O 12 2 3 Precautions 1 Before using CNC data I O Read the manual of the connected CNC carefully and make sure you understand the contents before using the CNC data I O 2 GOT to be used The CNC data I O cannot be used with the GT1575 V GT1575 VN GT1572 VN GT1560 and GT1550 SFC MONITOR 3 Folder name and file name a Number of characters set for folder and file names The GOT recognizes the file location with a path as shown below Set the folder and file names so that the total number of characters in the path is within 78 characters The user can set the folder name and file name only Other than the folder and file names are automatically set APPENDICES Example Path of file to be stored in CF card A T ESPE File n
448. ion which may cause a touch switch to operate Note that the following occurs on the GOT when the backlight goes out The POWER LED flickers green orange and the monitor screen appears blank CAUTION Do not bundle the control and communication cables with main circuit power or other wiring Run the above cables separately from such wiring and keep them a minimum of 100mm 3 94in apart Not doing so noise can cause a malfunction MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the GOT main unit to from the panel Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the communication unit option function board or multi color display board onto from the GOT Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction When installing the multi color display board wear an earth band etc to avoid the static electricity Not doing so can cause a unit corruption CAUTION Use the GOT in the environment that satisfies the general specifications described in this manual Not doing so can cause an electric shock fire malfunction or product damage or deterioration When mounting the GOT to the control panel tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop short circuit or malfunc
449. ion Connection type between GOT and servo amplifier Name Direct connection O Servo amplifier lt Servo monitor changing S amplifier the servo parameter O z monitor settings and test operations LC O E Z O gt T ep op UU O Q Z UU A A lt ULU Q Z 9 2 Specifications 9 3 9 2 1 System configuration Required option OS and option function board The option OS and option function board shown below are required Option OS monitor 1 OS memory space user area Option function board ang D ez in flash User memory GT15 GT16 GT15 memory ROM RAM GT15 FNB GT15 QFNB Servo amplifier 390KB 770KB 524KB Not required GT15 QFNB16M GT15 QFNB32M GT15 QFNB48M GT15 MESB48M Option OS Install the option OS in the above table to the GOT Refer to the following manual for the procedure for installing the option OS gt GT Designer2 Version O Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual 8 TRANSFERRING DATA OS memory space The available memory space shown in the table above is required in the user area to install the option OS to the GOT Refer to the following manual for the procedure for checking the available memory space of the user area and information about the data using other user areas K gt GT Designer2 Version O Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual 8 TRANSFERRING DATA Option function board a For GT16 No option function board is required b For GT15 Mount one of the option function boar
450. ion about hard copies refer to the following 37 9 4 8 Hard copy output S lt ULU Q Z The touch operation of this key is invalid 9 4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens 9 25 9 4 5 Diagnostics function Amplifier information display screen The following describes the display data of the amplifier information display screen and the key functions displayed on the screen 1 Displayed contents Amplifier Firmware Version BCD B26W000 B4 Motor mode HC PQ13 MF 13 Motor ID O2FF 1300 k A Encoder resolution 131072 pulse rev Print Caneel No Description Servo amplifier model Displays the model name of the servo amplifier Amplifier Firmware Version Displays the software number of the servo amplifier connected to the GOT Accumulated power on time Displays the cumulative time of the control power on after the product was shipped from the factory Displays the number of times the rush relay has been turned on off after the product was shipped from the ima l Num of inrush cur sw time factory 1 Displays the model name of the option card installed in the servo amplifier 1 Optional card model If no option card is installed then No connection is displayed Motor model 2 Displays the model name of the servo motor connected to the servo amplifier Motor ID 2 Displays the ID of the servo motor connected to the servo amplifier Encoder resolution 2 Displays the encoder resolution of
451. ion information 5 e 400 to 402 Q6BADV Q68ADI eo 3 Q64AD 55 11 0 403 to 405 Q62DA Q64DA 14 1 25 un 406 to 407 QD62D QD62E E QD62 19 0 408 to 430 QD75P QD75D 572 8 O 21 8 431 to 467 QD75M 454 S 136 6 1001 to 1031 QD75MH 427 3 2 2 IE i 6 58 IONES i 133 AI dz 00 CSCS 5 1 Use the screen for AD75P to monitor A1SD75P z 2 Use the screen for AJ711D to monitor A1SJ711D 3 Downloading any of these enables monitoring both intelligent function modules O 6 2 Specifications 6 5 6 2 1 System configuration 6 2 2 Access range When using bus connection direct CPU connection computer link connection e The intelligent module monitor can monitor intelligent function modules on the bases of the connected station and other stations e The intelligent module monitor can only monitor systems of the following combinations when computer link connection is applied PLC CPU used Computer link serial communication module used QCPU Q mode QJ71C24 QCPU A mode A1SJ71UC24 QnACPU AJ71QC24 A1SJ71QC24 AJ71UC24 A1SJ71UC24 AJ71C24 S8 A1SJ71024 A1SCPUC24 R2 A2CCPUC24 1 For details of module names refer to the GOT1000 Series Connection Manual ACPU The following restrictions apply when monitoring other stations of MELSECNET II data link systems Only the host and master stations can be monitored when the connected station is a local station Regardless of the type of connected station no stations other than ACPU
452. ion position of encoder present value Present servo command value Present monitor present value Displays the four past present values of the ABS axis at servo amplifier power on off At power on Power on time Encoder present value Multi revolution data of initial encoder Single revolution data of initial encoder Servo command value after recovery Monitor present value after recovery PWR ON PWR OFF Alarm occurrence information at present value recovery error code of minor major error At power off Servo amplifier power off time Encoder present value Multi revolution data of encoder present value before servo amplifier power off Single revolution data of encoder present value before servo amplifier power off Servo command at servo amplifier power off Monitor present value at servo amplifier power off 8 20 8 4 Operation Procedures 8 4 9 Present Value History Monitor screen Key functions The table below shows the functions of the keys used for operation of the Present Value History Monitor screen o gt Key Function O Display example When axis Changes the axes to be monitored 1 is monitored O Z Returns to the monitor menu screen Lu Exits the Present Value History Monitor screen and returns to the screen where the Q motion monitor T gt END was started Stores the displayed screen to the memory card in BMP JPEG file format or prints it with a printer For further information
453. it with a printer For further information about hard copies refer to the following 8 4 11 Hard copy output The operation of this key is invalid 8 18 8 4 Operation Procedures 8 4 7 Positioning Monitor screen 8 4 8 Servo Monitor screen This section describes the display data of the Servo Monitor screen and the key functions displayed on the screen gt bu gt im z gt Displayed contents O Servo Monitor 1 tax Servo Monitor Data a 2 Motor Speed 0 r min 5 3 Motor Current 0 4 Servo Alarm kE 09 gt ep oc O E Z Sz rO AO as iT LC O UU 1 Displays the axis number currently being monitored a 2 Motor Speed Displays the actual speed of the servo motor x O 3 Motor Current Displays the motor current value at the rated current of 100 7 4 Displays the alarm detected by the servo amplifier gt Key functions The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for operation of the servo monitor screen z Key Function 2 S tax of Display example When axis Changes the axes to be monitored 1 is monitored w 5 Q Returns to the monitor menu screen 2 z END Exits the servo monitoring and returns to the screen where the Q motion monitor was started O 5 JE Stores the displayed screen to the memory card in BMP JPEG file format or prints it with a printer E 2 For further information about hard copies refer to the following Screen lt gt 8 4 11 Hard copy
454. ith the GOT the GOT may not correctly monitor local devices if O b For monitoring local devices do not monitor the same local device in the same PLC CPU simultaneously with multiple GOTs and GX Developer c When the same local device in the same PLC CPU is simultaneously monitored with multiple x GOTs and GX Developer the GOT cannot correctly monitor the devices lt 8 Changing set values of timer and counter when monitoring multiple programs z For monitoring multiple programs set values of all the target programs can be changed by switching displayed programs when the test menu screen is opened from the ladder monitor screen O Point f Reflecting value changes in display of ladder monitor screen For opening the test menu screen from the system monitor screen or user created screen even if the set values of the timer and counter are changed the changed values are not reflected in the display of the ladder monitor screen oc O E Z le oc T Q G lt l Z O H O Z LL For reflecting the changed values in the display of the ladder monitor screen read O the program again a 0 9 Precautions for Universal model QCPU z Even though Universal model QCPU processes 64 bit data the GOT cannot monitor the 64 bit 7 data gt 10 Precautions for QASCPU a The GOT cannot write data to the devices in the QSCPU b For a safety function block only the FB definition name is displayed in the applica
455. itor i y wem f o oo meae II ICI mes dT OO we f o x Link direct device ERIGE E S U D DYD O Intelligent function module usenoovoo O usenoovoo O o o D k _ N XxX IX X x olo olo o0o 0 P2lolololo PC lxloljojolololo o o olololololo X X Interrupt pointer w O a a Network No device J0t0255 to 255 x H I O No device X 3E0 to 3E3 Macro registration device VDO to PO x x 1 Eor searching devices with the menu for the ladder monitor the device number cannot be specified 2 Search ZZ by specifying Z For searching ZZ0 specify ZO For searching ZZ1 specify Z1 ZZO is not searched by specifying Z1 When a sequence program has Z and ZZ specifying Z searches both Z and ZZ 3 2 Specifications 3 2 2 Devices and range that can be monitored 3 2 3 Access range With Universal model QCPU the GOT can monitor up to 64 stations The access range other than the above is the same as the access range when the GOT is connected to a controller Refer to the following manual for details of the access range K gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 2 7 Controllers that can be monitored and the Access Range 3 2 4 Precautions 1 2 4 GOT to be used The ladder monitor cannot be used with the GT1555 Q and GT1550 Q Precautions to be taken while the ladder monitor is activated While the ladder monitor is activated do not perform the following for the GOT Otherwise the stored
456. k connection via G4 6 The QSCPU does not support the connection type kE U 2 When the GOT is connected to a QnACPU gt LL O Available A Partly restricted x Unavailable mes 09 Function Connection form between GOT and controller m S Bus Direct Computer Ethernet MELSEC CC Link connection SIS Name Description CPU link NET 10 secuon connection connection x0 connection connection connection Ww 3 6 O operation search etc gt kE Displaying word S oc Display devices in DEC or HEX 26 S E switching Displaying device 52 comments etc Test Changing device 4 4 3 7 2 Local Z nae Monitoring local E devices x x x monitor fag O Storing ladder monitor E in BMP JPE Z Hard copy Bad k A 3 4 2 format or printing it with a printer L 1 The present value of Z cannot be changed V cannot be turned on or off O 2 Indicates CC Link connection Intelligent device station 5 l 3 Indicates CC Link connection via G4 z O O 3 2 Specifications 3 5 3 2 1 System configuration 3 When the GOT is connected to an ACPU QCPU A mode and an A series motion controller CPU Name Search operation Display switching Test operation Hard copy search etc devices in DEC or HEX comments etc Changing device values etc Storing ladder monitor screen in BMP JPEG format or printing it with a printer 1 2 8 4 5 O Available A Partly restricted x Unavailable F
457. keys on the GOT ct Continued to next page 10 8 10 4 Operation Procedures ltem Display data Switches to the previous page when there are multiple pages displayed on the screen Switches to the next page when there are multiple pages displayed on the screen Sets data to the monitor area Enters alphabets upper case only numerals spaces or symbols The grayed symbol can be entered after the key is touched a SERVO AMPLIFIER O MONITOR Moves the cursor up down left or right Repeat function is available am O gt Z GQ 6 Oz Z o O L Moves the cursor to the previous or subsequent block Repeat function is available Deletes one character at the cursor position S Y LL Ee A Switches the Insert mode E E an Deletes one block while editing machining program After touching the Shift key touch the CAN C B key to delete all blocks being displayed on the screen Enters EOB into the machining program O lt lt Q 2 Determines the entry O Switches the key function me O Z O gt O LL ep ep Lu O Q Zz UU A A lt X lt W Q 10 4 Operation Procedures 10 9 10 5 Error Messages and Corrective Action This section describes the error messages that may be displayed during CNC monitor operation and their corrective action If two or more of the following errors have occurred the error with the higher priority is displayed z S oeeo Install the com
458. l of L Sta Largest Nrm Sta Largest DL Sta Com Status Cause of Ssp Cause of Stop 1 Group 2 3 1 TsSt Info 2 Ctrl St Info 3 D Link Info For details of 1 refer to the following page This Station s Network Group Spc Cirlr Sta Curr Ctrl Sta Com Info SubCtrl Sta Com Rmt I OMstSt Total of L Sta Largest Nrm Sta Largest DL Sta Com Status x Causes of Ssp Causes of Stop Ctr lSta Com bCtrl Sta Com Have OMstSta Blck1 None Parameter Setting Common Param Reserved Sta Ha ST a Constant LS 100 ms 4 Normal SS 5 ore 6 Ye a Mode Constant LS Normal Trans Normal Trans Display contents Indicates the station number of the host Indicates the network number Indicates the group number Indicates the station number of the station that is specified as a control station Indicates the station number of a station that is currently acting as the control station Indicates whether the host is communicating with the control station or the sub control station Indicates whether there is a sub control station link Displays the station number of the remote I O master station for X Y communication block1 and block 2 Displays None when there is no setting Indicates the maximum number of the stations to be linked The maximum number is defined by common parameters Indicates the maximum station number of the station perf
459. ladder blocks E lt U lt q E Lis Displays the program list window 7_ gt This section 3 3 40 3 4 Operation Procedure Common 3 4 1 Information and key functions displayed on the screen Point Sea About the key Only when the MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor is executed 1 Continuous device search by key Sea Immediately after the key has been pressed to go back in the history a continuous device search using the key cannot be executed 2 Number of histories that can be gone back Using the Back key you can go back into the history up to 100 ladders 3 Clearing search history When any of the following operations is performed the search history is cleared to return to the normal ladder display e When thel f key is touched When a single ladder block takes up more than one screen scrolling can be made within the block e When the key is touched e When a step search END search or defect search is executed e When a comment display is changed e When a new file is read by touching l 4 Returning search results during searching in multiple sequence programs a Displaying search results For searching in multiple sequence programs the GOT can display search results of the previously searched program by touching the Back key The GOT cannot display search results of multiple programs on one screen When programs are switched the currently displayed search results of the program disappe
460. later version 52 md ec O Z G x GC GO LI zZ Q MOTION MONITOR 7 2 Specifications 7 3 7 2 1 System configuration 2 When the GOT is connected to an ACPU QCPU A mode O Available A Partly restricted x Unavailable Function Connection type between GOT and controller pj uter CC Link connection Direct CPU Ethernet MELSECNET 10 Name Description connection connection connection connection connection Network monitor Monitoring the network status of MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 and MELSECNET II 1 Indicates CC Link connection Intelligent device station 2 Indicates CC Link connection via G4 3 Monitoring is not possible when the target CPU is ANUCPU and a MELSECNET 10 network module is used sA Required option OS and option function board The option OS and option function board shown below are required Option OS OS memory space user area Option function board Se 6 A in flash User memory GT15 GT16 GT15 memory ROM RAM GT15 FNB GT15 QFNB Network monitor 210KB 370KB 324KB Not required GT15 QFNB16M GT15 QFNB32M GT15 QFNB48M GT15 MESB48M 1 Option OS Install the option OS in the above table to the GOT Refer to the following manual for the procedure for installing the option OS gt GT Designer2 Version O Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual 8 TRANSFERRING DATA OS memory space The available memory space shown in the table above is required in th
461. lation is in processing Completed The backup is completed 6 Displays the file name in processing 7 Key functions 5 im A A Key Function Switches the screen to the Backup restoration function Main menu screen Cancels the backup Ends the backup restore and then the screen is switched to the backup restore startup screen x a 11 4 Operation Procedures 11 27 11 4 2 Progress screen backup 11 4 3 Data list restoration The following describes the display details and the key functions on the Restoration function Data list screen Display detail Restoration function Data list setting SYol BRUP Data list Ch Nw PC Unit name 01 000 FF 1 Q25HCPU 4 O1 000 FF 2 O1 000 FF 3 2 01 000 FR4 End of Listy Touch data name Multiple Touch unit name to select to select No Display details 1 Displays the setting name for the backup restore Fixed 2 Displays backup data stored in a CF card or USB memory Select a backup data to be restored with touching the data 3 Displays the channel No network No station No module No and unit name for the target controller of the restoration Displays the target controller status of the restoration Select a target controller of the restoration with touching the controller 4 O Restoration target O Not restoration target x Access disabled Key functions Ke Function Y i y Scrolls the data list up and down by one line Z Scroll
462. lay mode state at the first display of the SFC diagram monitor screen differs depending on the SFC program format SFC program format State at the first display MELSAP3 format Without MELSAP L program display mode MELSAP L format With MELSAP L program display mode For the display mode of SFC programs refer to the following 13 4 2 Setting display mode of SFC programs 13 26 13 7 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen 13 7 1 Displayed contents 2 Comment display at first display of SFC diagram monitor screen The following shows the order of comment files to be used at the first display of the SFC diagram monitor screen after reading data from the PLC When the CF card has no comment file no comment is displayed Priority order Comment files used for SFC diagram monitor screen 1 Comment files by program within the SEQCMNT folder in the CF card 2 Common comment files within the SEQCMNT folder in the CF card 3 Comment files by program within the SEQDAT folder in the CF card 4 Common comment files within the SEQDAT folder in the CF card 1 Zoom window The GOT can display operation output transition condition sequence programs in the ladder format a Displayed screen ON OFF status display of contacts and coils ON FA 44H OFF bff lt gt th The following table shows the displayed contents 1 e For displaying operation output sequence program T The step number and step comment are displayed e dj e For
463. layed coil search is performed to the sequence program that has been read first Therefore the file to be searched has to be read from the PLC reading screen beforehand For setting from the PLC reading screen refer to the following section 1237 3 3 3 Display 3 34 3 3 Display 3 3 4 Searching from the monitor screen The following explains the operation taking MELSEC Q ladder monitor as an example Equipment The monitor target to be searched is Not match checked Matches CHNo 1 NETWE No O ST FF CPUNo 0 READ SELECTION ENT MAIN COMM MAINI PROG MAIN PROG Pagef Exit Ladder Break PLCRD SetUp Drive SEIS READ p agel Select Cancel CFCmnt List 411 All Read 1 0 FF O Program Memory MAIN1 153STEP 92 HH RST Y2 e 440 SET 2 Sea Print Cancel JUMP 1 f JUMP J Screen Print When the searched device is found lt When the searched device is not found The ladder monitor screen The user created screen is is displayed displayed After coil search monitoring of the ladder displayed is started automatically For the A FX ladder monitor touching the Mon key provides the same operation Touch a key in monitor screen E Searching stats only when the monitor target of the sequence program that has been read and the monitor target that is set on the object match When they are mismatch an error message appears Read again to
464. le Module 2 Local station Local station 2 Key functions This section describes the function of keys to be used for the line monitor operations Key Function Exits the line monitor and returns to the screen where the network monitor function was started Mode nL in FLoop gt OK Switches to the detailed monitor screen that corresponds to the module displayed on the current monitor screen This key is effective for each screen Switches to the other station monitor menu that corresponds to the network displayed on the current monitor screen This key is effective for each screen Displays the communication setting window Changes the monitoring destination CPU using the controller number For multi CPU system connection only The controller number is displayed according to the number of CPUs loaded 7 14 7 4 Operation Procedures 7 4 1 Line monitor 7 4 2 Detailed monitor This section describes the detailed monitor and the common operations used when executing the line monitor Display contents and keys functions acting as a MELSECNET H or MELSECNET 10 Control station normal station This section describes the contents of the detailed monitor and the function of on screen keys All these are displayed and used when the host acts as the control station normal station on the MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 1 Displayed contents This Stat ron si NetWor k Spe Ctr Sta Curr Ctrl Sta z S 3Ick2 None Tota
465. lected 1 to 64 Whena 1 to 64 When a normal station is local station is selected selected OVERVIEW N oc O E Z O Lu E L gt nw oc O E Z S lt rO AO as iT 4 CPUN O to 4 This item must be set only when the system is connected to multiple QCPUs It is not necessary O when the system is connected to another CPU is kE Displays a comment maximum number of characters 16 one byte characters O 5 Comment A comment is displayed when DISPLAY is selected for comment display on the display format 7 switching screen UU DW Indicates that the device value is a 32 bit two word module g 6 Data range l l l m Nothing displayed Indicates that the device value is a 16 bit one word module Decimal number 16 bit one word module Six digits including a digit for a sign are displayed Display example 12345 32 bit two word module Ten digits including a digit for a sign are displayed Display example s 7 Word device value x lt 123456789 T Hexadecimal number 7 O 16 bit one word module Four digits are displayed Display example H AB12 wo 32 bit two word module Eight digits are displayed Display example H ABCDE123 ON 8 Bit device ON OFF O O OFF a gt 9 Up to eight devices can be monitored with regard to each CPU station number ULU For further information about device numbers and names that can be entered lt _ gt GT Designer 2 O 10 Devi
466. les installed in the corresponding base unit specify the intelligent function module whose format is displayed For modules where the format is not displayed monitor with the system monitor function See Sec 2 2 Specify the menu corresponding to the type of data to be monitored 3 With modules for which the monitor menu cannot all a be displayed in one screen touch the A Y keys M Code Coment Monitor Sereen T Position at the right of the screen to scroll the display menu Input Output Monitor Screen i Positioning Data Monitor Scr 01 4 Check the contents of the display Carry out the subsequent operation according to Sec 6 5 5 Carry out tests for the displayed data according to Sec 6 4 7 Change current value of buffer memory Turn output signal from PLC CPU on and off Proceed to Sec 6 4 7 and Sec 6 5 6 24 6 4 Operation of Each Intelligent Module Monitor Screen 6 4 6 Specifying a module to monitor and selecting monitor menu 6 4 7 Testing of the intelligent function module e When testing the operation changing a current buffer memory value of the DDANGER intelligent module monitor read this manual carefully to fully understand the z operation gt For devices that perform significant operations for the system never perform test operation to change data Doing so can cause accidents due to false outputs or malfunctions 2 Testing can be performed for all buffer memory data
467. lit are displayed Touching the error indication 7 3 SV RDY ERR DT SV ERR PA l l l l part switches to the Error List Designated Axis screen of the touched axis gt lt l l O number U gt 8 4 6 Error List Designated Axis screen HO The common bit devices are always monitored and displayed Te 4 Bit device screen Error detection type bit devices eee eee Displayed in red General status type bit devices sse Displayed in green UU 5 Q O Key functions 7 s A Z The table below shows the functions of the keys used for operation of the Present Value Monitor screen ST dz EO Key Function 2 Touching the key alternates the monitor item between the feed present value and actual present value Only in the real mode x E 6 Returns to the monitor menu screen gt ie O Exits the present value monitor and returns to the screen where the Q motion monitor was started E Z Switches the displayed axis number Displayed only for Q173CPU Q173HCPU and Q173CPUN monitoring Stores the displayed screen to the memory card in BMP JPEG file format or prints it with a printer For further information about hard copies refer to the following lt 8 4 11 Hard copy output 00 Screen The operation of this key is invalid oc O E Z O Z O E O O 8 4 Operation Procedures 8 4 3 Present Value Monitor screen 8 11 8 4 4 SFC Error History screen This section describes the display data of th
468. ller In the multiple CPU system Set the password for the backup restore E Set 32 or less alphanumeric characters 1 for the password O x i Sett ing SYS IBKUP S Password rro lt AV BIC DI EI FI 6 A AST KEY WY WY Of P AY RI S TI UY VIH az A 4 Y 2 A Del Enter Backup completed in Q Z 11 3 Display Operation 11 15 11 3 3 Security and password 11 16 Point 1 Setting password For ensuring the security setting a password of 8 or more characters that cannot be easily guessed is recommended When the password is leaked the same system can be created Pay enough attention to managing the password Passwords for motion controller CPU a File name When a password for a motion controller CPU data is input the GOT does not display the file name The GOT displays the data type only Setting passwords for data without any contents When contents of the following motion controller CPU data do not exist do not set any passwords for the data SFC program Mechanical system program Cam data When passwords are set for the data without any contents the automatic password authentication is unavailable when the GOT executes the backup As a result the user must input the passwords each time 11 3 Display Operation 11 3 3 Security and password How to use password Tor backup restore LC m 1 Backup The following shows the operating procedure for the backup after setting the passwo
469. ls ER Edit View Favorites s Example Storing comment files with ASCII code in the ASCII folder 13 3 Display Operation 13 3 3 Reading comment files from CF card In the CPU No folder create folders for storing comment files by character code Item Folder name Folder for SUIS code SJIS Folder for KS code KS Folder for ASCII code ASCII 2 Copy a comment file wcd from the project data of GX Developer Store the copied comment files in the folders for each character code in the CF card Comment character Storage folder name code SJIS code SJIS KS code KS ASCII code ASCII Install the CF card with the comment file on the GOT D Switch comment files on the SFC diagram monitor screen for displaying the comments in an appropriate language 13 4 Setting Display Format o The display format of word device values displayed on the SFC diagram monitor screen language the c display mode of SFC programs and others can be set a6 OE TZ 13 4 1 Switching languages of SFC programs R Languages of comments to be displayed on the SFC monitor screens can be switched during monitoring For switching languages comment files in the language to be displayed must be created in advance E gt 13 3 3 Reading comment files from CF card 53 The following shows the relations between the language selected in the GOT utility and comment files with 35 each character code 42 Language Comment file Japanese Comment
470. lses to 0 Returns to the function selection menu screen End Exits the servo amplifier monitor Stores the displayed screen to the memory card in BMP JPEG file format or prints it with a printer For further information about hard copies refer to the following Screen Hee 8 4 11 Hard copy output Ca l E The touch operation of this key is invalid 9 18 9 4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens 9 4 3 Monitor functions de 9 4 4 Alarm function The following alarms are displayed e Alarm display Displays the alarm that is currently occurring L gt This section EZ oc uu a lt O gt oc Lu 0 oc O Z le e Alarm history Displays the history of alarms that occurred gt This section a The screen changes as follows after Alarm is selected on the function selection menu screen o O a oni tor es Os 25 Alarm O LL Diagnostics LU LUC O kE op Lu oC a g Function selection menu screen Q a Alarm Number AL20 Alarm Name Encoder error 2 Time of Alarm 13 26 13 Q Cause of Alarm E 1 Encoder connector disconnected a 2 Encoder cable faulty O Z O O Screen O f Alarm display screen Z T O LL a Seq No Alarm No Alarm Name Time hour Deta 1 Chex O AL20 Encoder error 2 238 07 1 ALSE Serial com error 236 10 N 2 AL8E Serial com error 236 10 E 3 AL20
471. m in the 16 bit one word or 32 bit two word mochis Operation example Switch TE Pd one word module display to 32 54 two word module display fi Touch Mon 12 Touch Menu 3 6 Search Operation This section desenbes device search contact point search ool search step search ladder end search defect search and touch search Point 1 Searching a iong multiple programs Search 7 1 be performed lo multiple sequence programs read fram PLC CPL For ser chabte tens among multiple programa refer 16 the folowing section 135 3 2 Performance Specifications 2 Searching in the specified program only for the MELSEC Q On4 ladder monitor Search can be automatically performed lo a program by specifying the file to be Searched wilh a object such as the Special Function Switch Fe 3 34 Searching from the monror screen Point P Refers to the information required Refers to the supplementary E Remark explanations for reference co AS LADDER To LA TON 1 0 0O re Indicates the operation steps Menu and items are differentiated with parentheses Refers to an item displayed on the computer screen or the GOT screen Refers to a button displayed on the computer screen or the GOT screen or a key of the computer keyboard Show the items including detailed explanation manual and the chapter section item 1 OVERVIEW This manual describes the following functi
472. mand line the line on which the step number is displayed You cannot write a command with the cursor on an operand or set value line Command line Place the cursor on this line E V m gt a Oo LU 9p KE m Operand set value line Cannot operate on this line Lu 2 Example a Writing ORB command E OS a Z zS LC O Z O gt lt oc S e E Set the ChNo 1 lt READ gt WRITE or Y INSERT mode O With 4 or move the z cursor to the position to gt overwrite insert the command 6 O gt O 5 4 Operation Procedures 5 17 5 4 5 Writing commands 5 18 b Inputting LD X000 Set the WRITE or INSERT mode ChNo 1 With 4 or w move the cursor to the position to overwrite insert the command c Inputting OUT T100 K19 ChNo 1 gt gt gt with a or move the cursor to the position to overwrite insert the command 5 4 Operation Procedures 5 4 5 Writing commands Writing applied instructions 1 Operations S oh O jo D id x U O O m TI Z B gt xe o a E al 2 CC 3 o 2 OVERVIEW For overwriting WRITE mode For insertion INSERT mode I Input the device name and ud e gt L _ device number oc O E Z O gt 1 D double word command and P pulse execution format command can also be input after the applied instruction number is
473. match the monitor target for searching on the PLC reading screen In MELSEC A FX ladder monitor an error message does not appear even they are mismatch and searching continues 3 Searching result is displayed 4 Touching the button searches consecutively Touching the Exit button completes searching halfway If the searched device is not found the message DEVICE NOT FOUND appears and searching is completed After searching the normal ladder monitor screen is displayed 3 3 Display 3 35 3 3 4 Searching from the monitor screen OVERVIEW SYSTEM MONITOR O oc O E Z le oc T Q G lt l Z O H O Z LL MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR MELSEC A LIST EDITOR NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 3 3 5 Reading comment files from CF cards A comment file to be used for the ladder monitor can be read from a CF card installed on the GOT Using a comment file stored in a CF card has the following advantages e The processing time is shorter than the one for reading a comment file from a PLC CPU e Writing comment file data into a PLC CPU is not required so less memory of the PLC CPU is used Procedure for using comment files stored in CF cards The following shows the procedure for using a comment file stored in a CF card Removable Disk E File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Back gt FS Search K Folders ROL Address leg EL File and Folde
474. mber Four digits are displayed Display example H AB12 6 Set value Decimal number Four digits are displayed Display example 1234 7 Present value Hexadecimal number Four digits are displayed Display example H AB12 Present values cannot be monitored when the CPU is an FXCPU 8 Device No Up to eight devices can be entered 9 Dev For further information about device numbers and names that can be entered gt GT Designer 2 Version O evice name Screen Design Manual When the CPU is a QnACPU or QCPU A program name will be displayed When there are plural program 10 File name names the initial file name to be executed will be displayed When the CPU is an ACPU or FXCPU MAIN PROGRAM will always be displayed 5 0n Y on off 1 O Off When the CPU is an FXCPU contact points and coils cannot be monitored oS Contact point and coil When no comments are displayed Up to eight devices can be displayed at a time 12 Monitor display area a When comments are displayed Up to four devices can be displayed at a time 1 Indicates CC Link connection Intelligent device station 2 Indicates CC Link connection via G4 2 7 TC Monitor Monitoring Timers and Counters 2 43 2 7 1 Information displayed on the TC Monitor screen and key functions OVERVIEW N LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR oc O Z le LL E LS
475. ment Peripheral statements are represented by 7 Subsection 3 5 6 Displaying statements This key is not displayed when the MELSEC A and MELSEC FX ladder monitor Changes device values on the screen when the ladder monitor is executed For further TE TEST information see the following operation Section 3 7 Test Operation Switches the local device monitor between execution and non execution states Local device eS L Section 3 8 Local Device Monitor The key is not displayed with the MELSEC QnA ladder monitor 3 42 3 4 Operation Procedure Common 3 4 1 Information and key functions displayed on the screen 4 Program list window a Display screen OVERVIEW switch 1 PALET PAGE 2 SYSTEM MONITOR The following table shows the display details GO No Function 1 Displays saved sequence program name Displays the keys used in the program list window s operation Touch input oc O E Z le oc T Q G lt l Z O H O Z LL Besides key touch a program name can be selected by touching the program name directly b Key functions Key Function Switch Switches to the selected ladder monitor screen Scrolls the display upward or downward by a file MELSEC A LIST EDITOR JUMP T Scrolls the display upward or downward by a page JUMP MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 3 4 Operation Procedure Common 3 43 3 4 1
476. mera connected to the multimedia unit and to play video 2 90U Extended function OS files stored in a CF card Multimedia 04 02 All GT15 functions added by GT Designer2 Version2 90U or Object function 2 90U Standard monitor OS 04 02 earlier are available Continued to next page App 17 ae Version of GT Item Description Version of OS Designer2 Batch Self Check USB Device Display and Multimedia are added to Switch Action of the special function switch Touch switch 2 90U Standard monitor OS 04 02 The go to screen switch is applicable to the overlap windows 3 4 and 5 Screen Script Supporting the overlap windows 3 4 and 5 2 90U Standard monitor OS 04 02 1 Eor the ASCII display or ASCII input the Kana kanji conversion is not available Only the Kana kanji conversion enhanced version is available 2 For GT15 GT SoftGOT1000 and GI11 Version of GT GT GT Soft T Item Description Version of OS Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 JPEG file reading enabled 2 09K Standard monitor OS 01 02 A po x Q Function to import IGES format data to Function to import IGES format data IGES format data 2 MES O Enables adjusting image qualities for l 2 47Z x Figure reading JPEG files Supporting piping Supporting piping 2 2798 Standard monitor OS Standard monitor OS 03 00 00 O Enables setting the coordinates and the l l 2 90U O size using values Enables setting
477. mit Value 0 PLS In Position Error Reset Actual PV o PLS F POS Completion cs ee ee en pes Aad SW ds In Position orwar ar o Dan rn e 2 UST S Command In Position Reverse JOG Start Drt Counter 7 ERR l 0 PLS Servo Error Detect B Cam Reference POS E Speed Controlling Sa SU TD Au rnp ZERO Request Servo OFF Command 2 Min Ma jor SV ERR SA ee S CHG Latch Enable Spee i ZERO Comp let i M Code T Limit i E G Error Reset xE Cam No Eternal Signal FLS 2 Error Detection Servo Error Reset XE Stroke External Signal RLS Servo Error Detect EA an Tai am Ax 1 Rev External Signal STOP an a a a i gral OE omplet ion Gain CHG Command alh Ka ore External Signal FLS IAF IN Signal orque Limiting Signa External Signal RLS Y Mode Cont Op Warning dE External Signal STOP External Signal DOG CHANGE O Servo ON OFF Status 2 Torque Limiting Signal O M code Outputting Z rO kE 32 XI ID screen Print Screen Print 1 7 A O E T kE No Item Description 0 Displays the axis numbers of the running axes being monitored a P S UU For the virtual axis the axis type is displayed 7 Roller gt 1 Data Item Ballscrew Rotary table Cam L E Displays the data during positioning control of the PCPU 0 Feed PV Target address output to the servo amplifier gt lt value of the roller surface speed for the roller 7 S E axis m S Actual PV Actually traveled present value no value is displayed for the roller axis 2 Feed PV
478. module monitoring LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR OVERVIEW SYSTEM MONITOR MELSEC A LIST EDITOR O UU gt Q G E uu 9 y JJ ul Z oc O E Z le NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR Buffer memory address Screen example No ak F gt a Y l Posit Star E Upper Limit 2 In position Range 0002 0003 ev 2 d Electronic Gear 4 Rotation Direction 000A System Setting 5 Torque Limit egen Resi Velocity Limit LS s a Accel Time ns n positio rpm Positioning Mode 000E P Switchover Test Mode X08 Error Detection f 2 S Switch 0011 40 41 0028 0029 114 to 117 0072 to 0075 23 orb 2 ore 2 7 Inputs X Outputs CY Rtn Comple 13 Complete Upp Lower Limit LS 6 46 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 5 14 AD7OD module monitoring 6 5 15 AD71 module monitoring Screen example p Kava O p Kava O Y axis gt AAA va VIS e sre 8 ao a SESE S Ue AUS Posit Lomp L Vall i J ae CIA 0000 EM lt M AAA 5 e OX Axis WY Axis X Axis Zero Data 348 2 AUS Posit Lompl Present value S Y Axis Zero Data 3 x 0 zro start y ero Address 0 PG Zero Point S S HO Y19 Fwd Jog Start Outp v st ee 6 341 O Tep Hina gaem EE O UU gt Q G E uu 9 y JJ ul Z oc O E Z le Z o S Z S S O 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 47 6 5 15 AD71 module monitoring Screen example
479. mong multiple programs refer to the following section 3 2 Specifications 2 Searching in the specified program only for the MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor Search can be automatically performed to a program by specifying the file to be searched with a object such as the Special Function Switch 37 3 3 4 Searching from the monitor screen 3 54 3 6 Search Operation 3 6 1 Device search Device search displays the ladder block that contains a specified device i bu lt Operation procedure gt E 3 Touch Menu oc O Z O Lu kE 09 gt ep Touch Dev Sea 3 16 32Bit Cunt 32 a Test Statement ds Local Dev A T 0 nS CR Touch Dev Sea Print Screen oc O E Z le oc T Q G lt l Z O H O Z LL Using the lt and gt keys switch the input LUC O area and enter a device name and its S x E DEVICE TEL number NI R LIS aly Example Specify DO DH WI RI K Z 4 K l l EA E After the device name and its number are E 6 J Enter Del AC entered touch the key Input is completed and the keyboard closes 7 1 The data entered can be corrected with the is following keys fe E Del key Used to delete a character of the Su entered information O FF 0 Program Memory 3 PLS M400 key Used to delete all characters entered 3 kE The ladder block containing the specified ig device is displayed 02
480. monitoring monitoring Function details Stored screen data Servo amplifier monitor data common information 21 0 de noose s o pa o DI DO display 612 I O Display M A IFU B E l 614 I O Display J3 A NON 28 7 pre laeren manr TT 5 622 Function Dev M A DRU BA f COCA H T ermm o H H AAC A arsana CI Unit composition 647 Unit Comp M A IFU BB amnes t a CS 652 Parameters M A DRU Se EN a T 656 Parameters l O setting J3 A 5 2 Sip 664 Positioning M A DRU o 36 aoe 666 Motor less op S J3 A i A ee 2 7 jem Doraesonsa fan HH H 9 2 Specifications 9 7 9 2 1 System configuration b When using GT15 0 O V Memory space KB For MR For MR For MR For MR Function details Stored screen data J2S DA J2S LJCP J2M P8A J2M JDU monitoring monitoring Monitoring monitoring Servo amplifier monitor data common information 21 0 Alarm display 602 Alarms ALL 2 6 Alarm Alarm history 604 Alarms Hist ALL 620 Function Dev S CP Function device l 621 Function Dev M A IFU display 622 Function Dev M A DRU 630 Amp inf S A 631 Amp inf S CP Amplifier l 632 Amp inf M A IFU information display 633 Amp inf M A DRU 634 I O Display J3 A Diagnostics function 652 Parameters M A DRU Parameter setting 653 Parameters Basic setting J3 A 654 Paros Sorner K OO naar easa o naar 10 set 99 a A A A aR A A CI
481. more monitor devices are entered these switches are available when their comments are displayed Al Scrolls information upward by a line Y Scrolls information downward by a line 2 7 TC Monitor Monitoring Timers and Counters 2 7 1 Information displayed on the TC Monitor screen and key functions 3 The following table below describes the range of display of items 1 to 12 displayed Description of setting MELSECNET H CC Link No Item Bus Direct CPU D Ethernet connection connection j T MELSECNET 10 connection connection Sion connection T connection 1 Channel No Sets the channel number of the controller targeted to the TC monitor 0 Host loop 1 to 239 0 fea 1 to 255 Specified loop FF When the host station is FF When the host station is is selected eee 0 When the master 0 When the control station o 3 Station No FF 1to 64 station is is selected 2elsaie 1 to 64 When a normal 1 to 64 When a station is selected i local station is selected CPU No 0 to 4 This item must be set only when the system is connected to multiple QCPUs It is not necessary when the system is connected to another CPU 2 Network No Displays a comment maximum number of characters 16 one byte characters 5 Comment A comment is displayed when DISPLAY is selected for comment display on the display format switching screen Decimal number Four digits are displayed Display example 1234 Hexadecimal nu
482. mp Error 15 5 cc 16 16 06 G O 17 i z 3 18 8 09 19 09 DA 1A DA i Jb 1B 1 S DC IC nC C i z x D i IE i Z J 1F 1 LC O Z O Z O kE O O 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 3 6 5 7 A616TD module monitoring O1 Screen example EN EM nG E G PA eHe Hehe baen Hea Nen e N es E 10 v r L N Aaa alla da Tm le l ales e O O i LH es G E E Eo KGI 9 10 11 12 18 13 14 15 16 616TD Temperature Monitor CONNECT No 0 Screen ho e F Channel No WDT Error Error CH No Enable O Disabled 1 _ FEDCBA9S 76543210 Enabled Temp Value Err or Screen INPUT F Input lt Status 0 0 100 50 Channel 0 1 3 B 4 Data E 1 el 5 1 6 el 7 B WDT Error Error Digital Yal Err 2 Temp Wal Err elle No FEDCBA9S 76543210 Data Format 000 AAA O Disabled 1 Enabled 3 4 6 36 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 5 7 A616TD module monitoring Buffer memory address 129 to 143 0081 to 008F 257 to 271 0101 to 010F EN 177 to 191 00B1 to 00BF 305 to 319 0131 to 013F 193 to 207 00C1 to OOCF E 321 to 335 0141 to 014F 241 to 255 00F1 to OOFF 369 to 383 0171 to 017F UR AO to 639 0200 to 0200t0027F ME SS 23 A 0017 112 to 127 0070 to 007F Buffer memory address Screen example ees EK EIN 384 to 511 0180 to 01FF 512 to 639 0200 to 027F gt UU RE G Value IC Lu Channel 1 U 8 gt T EE y A 0000 6 Channel
483. n Displays whether the GOT communicates with the control station or sub control station Not displayed is displayed Displays the station numbers of the I O master stations for block 1 and block 2 None is displayed with no setting Displays the total number of stations on the monitored network set for common parameters Displays the maximum station number of the station communicating normally Displays the maximum station number of the station performing a data link Displays the current communication status of the host station D Link in prog D Link stopped B Pass excut B Pass stopped Offline test Offline Displays the reason for the interrupted communication Normal Comm is displayed with normal communications Cable disconnct Wrong cable Checking cables Disconnct retrn Offline mode Offline test Self check mode Displays the reason for the interrupted data link Normal is displayed with normal data links Stop disignat D Link time up Testing line Param not rcvd Invlid Host No Set Rsvd Sta Dup Host No Dup CtrlSta No Sta No not set Invlid NTWK No Host Para error Params in comm CPU stop error CPU pwr stp err 7 4 Operation Procedures Continued to next page 7 21 7 4 2 Detailed monitor OVERVIEW SYSTEM MONITOR LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC A LIST EDITOR MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONIT
484. n about the data using other user areas K gt GT Designer2 Version O Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual 8 TRANSFERRING DATA Option function board a For GI16 No option function board is required b For GT15 Mount one of the option function boards in the above table on the GOT For the GOTs with a built in option function board refer to the following K gt 1 1 2 Hardware and OS required for each function For how to mount an option function board on the GOT refer to the following manual GT15 User s Manual 8 10 Option Function Board 8 2 Specifications 8 2 1 System configuration Required special data The following special data is required Special data GOT Memory space KB OVERVIEW GT1695M X GT1685M S GT1595 X GT1585V S GT1585 S 347 GT1575V S GT1575 S Motion monitor data GT1575 V GT1575 VN GT1572 VN GT1565 V GT1562 VN 346 GT1555 V 1 Special data Download the special data indicated in the table above to the GOT Refer to the following manual for the procedure for downloading the data SYSTEM MONITOR gt GT Designer2 Version O Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual 8 TRANSFERRING DATA 2 Memory space for special data The available memory space shown in the table above is required in the user area to download the special data to the GOT Refer to the following manual for the procedure for checking the available memory space of the user area and information about
485. n by clicking the button Target Drive Select the PLC drive that has setting data to be converted Workspace Drive Setting Set the settings for editing backup data with GX Developer Folder to be assigned to a Backup Data Folder workspace drive Specify the target folder of Drive Name by clicking the button Click the item and then Folder to be assigned to a workspace drive is assigned to Drive Name Folder to be assigned to a workspace drive is automatically assigned to Drive Name normally l Use the button when the drive assignment setting is canceled by clicking the button and a drive is assigned again Click the item and then the drive assignment setting is canceled Import GOT GX Developer Converts the backup data to data editable with GX Developer Export GX Developer gt GOT Converts data edited by GX Developer to data applicable to the backup restore End Ends Backup Data Conversion Tool For details of 1 refer to the following 11 32 11 5 Backup Data Conversion Tool 11 5 3 How to use Backup Data Conversion Tool 1 Folder name and file name a Number of characters set for folder and file names L The GOT recognizes the file location with a path as shown below E Set the folder and file names so that the total number of characters in the path is within 78 T characters The user can set the folder name and file name only S Other than the folder and file names are automatically set
486. n example Touch a key in monitor screen The operation differs depending on object setting 1 When the Automatic PLC read setting is made a When Specify Search File is selected Reads the specified sequence program b When Specify Search File is not selected Mens anne When the Reads all sequence programs in the PLC read setting is automatic program memory of the target controller not made PLC read setting is For setting method of Automatic PLC read The monitor target made to be searched is refer to the following manual checked 237 GT Designer2 VersionO Screen Design Manual 2 When the Automatic PLC read setting is not Not match made Searching starts only when the monitor target of the sequence program that has been read and h A is the monitor target that is set for searching on the isplayed object match When they are mismatch an error message appears Read again to match the monitor target for searching on the PLC reading screen E When a keyword is registered to the read target drive enter the keyword To read a file to which a password is registered enter the password If canceling the entry reading of the drive or file is canceled Local device monitor not exec uted Sea Print Cancel JUMP t P JUMP J Screen Print After the read program is searched the result is displayed When the searched dd Sai l E Touching the button searches consec
487. n is valid Quick test of bit devices Quick test of word devices 1 To quick test of bit devices 2 To quick test of word devices 2 26 2 4 Operation Procedure Common to the System Monitor Screens 2 4 5 Quick test operation of monitor devices 1 Quick test of bit devices Operation example Change the status of bit device X001 from off O to on 0 DEVICE MONITOR Chio 1 NetNo OVERVIEW G 1ST N Touch the bit device you want a to switch its status to on or off oc O E Z O Lu E L gt nw ChNo 1 NetNo 0 ST LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION The device name and number of the selected bit device are highlighted EA 0 10 MELSEC A LIST EDITOR Chio 1 NetNo DIST FF CPUNO 213385219 DW od lA y r 1 Touch J e MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR TESTIEIMENUIESF ORME ChNo 1 NetNo 0 1ST FF CPUNo 0 S64 INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR The status of the selected bit device is switched from C off to on NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 2 4 Operation Procedure Common to the System Monitor Screens 2 27 2 4 5 Quick test operation of monitor devices 2 Quick test of word devices Operation example Change the device value of word device W200 from 43 to 100 Conditions Data range 16 bits device value display format decimal number DEVICE MONITOR Touch the device you want to change the device value Chio iS ae He
488. n monitor screen will be printed memory card inserted in the GOT with the printer connected to the GOT 2 GOT with QVGA resolution Hard copy output operations are performed by turning ON OFF the start or abort trigger device that has been set in the GT Designer Point f e Install the extended function OS Printer to the GOT when printing a Q motion monitor screen e The output target CF card printer of hard copy can be set in Hard Copy of GT Designer2 For details of the hard copy setting refer to the following gt GT16 User s Manual Chapter 13 DATA CONTROL GT15 User s Manual Chapter 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY GT Designer2 VersionO Screen Design Manual Section 13 2 Hard Copy 8 4 Operation Procedures 8 4 11 Hard copy output OVERVIEW SYSTEM MONITOR LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC A LIST EDITOR MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR NETWORK MONITOR 00 oc O E Z O Z O E O O 8 5 Error Messages and Corrective Action This section describes the error messages that may be displayed during Q motion monitor operation and their corrective action 8 26 Error message No PLC Communications This PLC type is not supported Controller s OS type is different It is not a version for GOT Monitor data not found Unused axis selected It is not possible to select Incorrect setting range Unmatched password Communication channel setup error Corr
489. n the following operating environment Item Description Personal computer PC AT compatible personal computer that Windows runs on Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Operating System English version Operating system Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System English version Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Operating System English version Computer CPU Refer to the following Applicable operating system and performance required for personal computer Hard disk space 500KB or more Disk drive CF card drive Display color High Color 16 bits or more Display Resolution 640 x 480 dots or more Hardware CF card Others The mouse and keyboard must be compatible with the above OS Applicable operating system and performance required for personal computer Performance required for personal computer CPU Memory Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Operating System English version Pentium 200MHz or more 64MB or more Microsoft Windows XP Professional Operating System English version Operating system Pentium I 300MHz or more 128MB or more Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Operating System English version 11 30 11 5 Backup Data Conversion Tool 11 5 1 Operating environment 11 5 2 How to install and start Backup Data Conversion Too Installing Backup Data Conversion Tool is not required Start Backup Data Conversion Tool with the following procedures Copy BkupRstrDataConv exe to the h
490. n to the memory card in BMP JPEG file format or prints it with a printer For further information about hard copies refer to the following lt gt 9 4 8 Hard copy output The touch operation of this key is invalid 9 28 9 4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens 9 4 5 Diagnostics function de 9 4 6 Parameter setting You can use the parameter setting function to set the servo parameters basic parameters expansion parameter 1 2 of the connected servo amplifier The password input key window appears for accessing the parameter setting screen of the servo amplifier monitor when the password is set with GT Designer2 The screen changes as follows after Parameters is selected on the function selection menu screen oc uu a lt O gt oc Lu 0 oc O Z le o 5 E zZ Z Alarm O 25 Diagnostics OL LU LUC O Y Function selection menu screen 2 Section 9 4 2 1 Set the servo parameter changing cr password on GT Designere o For details of the parameter setting gt refer to the GT Designer2 Version O S Have you registered Screen Design Manual the servo amplifier parameter No changing password Q lt E a EN Z r ame alue ni O Pr N Val Unit Change Z 1 3 4 verify 5 6 np 8 Please input the passsword IRI 9 1o 7 8 9 A Bla v 415 6 0 Dd al K z Cycle amplifier power to initi
491. navailable LU Function Connection form between GOT and controller gt LU gt Direct CC Link Reference O T Bus CPU SI Huin METE CC Link connection section Name Description link connection NET 10 5 connection connection connection 4 connection IE Search Device search defect P oc A 3 6 O operation search etc O Displaying word p p y 9 A Display devices in DEC or HEX z 3 5 Y op switching Displaying device S l comments etc x A Test Changing device 3 20 9 3 3 7 Storing ladder monitor Hard in BMP JPEG A ar screen in VERES A BAD copy format or printing it with a printer Available with the multiple CPU system including a QCPU Q mode For the MELSECNET 10 connection use a QCPU and network module QJ71LP21 QU71LP21 25 QU71LP21S Q oc O E Z le oc T Q G lt l Z O H L LL h NO oc 25 and QJ71BR11 with the function version B or later O 3 The present value of Z cannot be changed V cannot be turned ON or OFF T kE 4 Available with the Display I F connection only a 5 Indicates the CC Link IE controller network connection a 6 Indicates CC Link connection Intelligent device station 7 ULU 7 Indicates CC Link connection via G4 gt b When the GOT is connected to a MELDAS C6 C64 O Available A Partly restricted x Unavailable Function Connection form between GOT and controller D ae aa Computer a MELSEC Refe
492. nd water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation to damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technic
493. ndard monitor OS 02 02 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 02 Communication driver 2 18U For communication drivers used in each connection use 02 02 or above 2 77F Standard monitor OS 03 12 Extended function OS Video RGB 04 02 Extended function OS Multimedia 04 02 Standard monitor OS 03 01 BootOS 03 01 M 2 90U 2 90U 2 43V 2 45X Standard monitor OS 03 02 Extended function OS Sound Output 03 03 Extended function OS 2 58L 2 58L External I O Operation Panel 03 03 Extended function OS 2 90U External I O Operation Panel 04 02 Version of GT l Version of OS Communication driver 2 90U Bus Q 04 02 Bus A QnA 04 02 Communication driver 2 90U A QnA Q CPU QJ71C24 04 02 MELSEC FX 04 02 Communication driver A QnA Q CPU QJ71C24 04 02 AJ71QC24 MELDAS CG 04 02 AJ71C24 UC24 04 02 2 90U J D E D at N Continued to next page EN Version of GT E Item Description Version of OS Designer2 MELSECNET H connection PLC to PLC network MELSECNET 10 connection PLC to PLC network Communication driver MELSECNET H 04 02 Supporting connection to MELSECNET H PLC to PLC network 2 90U Supporting connection to MELSECNET 10 PLC to PLC connection Communication driver MELSECNET H 04 02 2 90U Communication driver 2 90U CC Link IE Controller Network 04 02 CC Link
494. nductive is displayed The entire field of the device name and number is highlighted on screen Example Ma After searching for Coil M669 that is in the OFF state M111 is displayed as a device that is not conductive Example MME When there is no more defect the FACTOR SEARCH The next defect is automatically STOP will be displayed and the defect search will searched end 3 64 3 6 Search Operation 3 6 6 Defect search b When two occurrences of the search device are found If there are two or more devices that caused a failure the the defect search Is interrupted message appears and the defect search is terminated Example After searching for Device M120 that is in the OFF state M669 and M23 will be 7 gt displayed as devices that caused a failure if After searching for coil M120 that is in the OFF state M669 and M23 are displayed as devices that are not conductive Example foom 128 M LL After searching for a device that is in the ON state devices that are E conductive are displayed The entire field of the device name and number is S highlighted on screen B D gt ep 8 TC f em When resuming the defect search specify either of the found contacts M669 and X0025 After touching to change it into Menu execute the defect search Q3 oc O E Z le oc T Q G lt l Z O H O Z LL Point Precautions for making defect search 1 When the contact p
495. nected The message MOTION CONTROLLER NOT SUPPORTED will be displayed when the MELSEC A list editor function is activated 2 When the PLC is A2USH S1 it operates within the range of A3U when the PLC is the A25H S1 A2SH A1SH or A1SJH it operates within the range of A3N Z Connection forms When the GOT is connected to an ACPU QCPU A mode O Available x Unavailable Connection form between GOT and PLC MELSEC CC Link connection l Bus Direct CPU Computer link Ethernet AMEE Function NET 10 connection 19 connection connection connection name connection GT16 GT16 GT16 GT16 GT16 GT16 GT16 Crt GT15 GT15 GT15 GT15 GT15 GT15 MELSEC A x x x x x x list editor 1 When the PLC is the A2SH S1 A2SH A1SH A1SJH use a CPU of version E or a later version Programs cannot be written to CPUs of version D or an earlier version 2 When the PLC is A3N A2N S1 A2N or A1N it can not be used 3 When the PLC is QCPU A mode it cannot be used 4 Indicates CC Link connection Intelligent device station 5 Indicates CC Link connection via G4 4 2 Specifications 4 3 4 2 1 System configuration LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR oc O E m LU E K O T 104 H OVERVIEW SYSTEM MONITOR NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR Required option OS and option function board The option OS and option function board shown below are require
496. ngs object functions 3 o zZ 1 For GT16 S E Version of GT l Item Description Version of OS Designer2 All GT15 functions added by GT Designer2 Version2 90U or l oc Common setting 2 90U Standard monitor OS 04 02 O earlier are available 5 O Window screen Supporting the overlap windows 3 4 and 5 2 90U Standard monitor OS 04 02 S LL 69 l The settable range of GS is extended to the range from GSO l GOT internal device 2 90U Standard monitor OS 04 02 to GS2047 Screen switching Enables setting the screen switching devices for the overlap l l 2 90U Standard monitor OS 04 02 function windows 3 4 and 5 Station No Switching Enables setting the station No switching devices for the 2 90U Standard monitor OS 04 02 Function overlap windows 3 4 and 5 System information regarding the overlap windows 3 4 and System information 5 is added 2 90U Standard monitor OS 04 02 7 ui 9 O Z m o o lt System information regarding the E drive is added information regarding the E drive is added Communication settings EA setting the multi channel Ethernet connection 2 90U Standard monitor OS 04 02 Standard monitor OS 04 02 Enables using up to two channels when the GT16M R2 is RGB display 2 90U Extended function OS used for the RGB input unit l Video RGB 04 02 Function to display or record video images taken by a video Standard monitor OS 04 02 Multimedia function ca
497. nitor is activated When the ladder monitor is activated from the utility by the special function switch Ladder monitor screen The screen switches to the The screen switches to main menu the user created screen Print Cancel Screen Print Point 7 Reading the PLC in the following operations Once the PLC is read you do not have to read it in the following operations However it must be re read after you read it and then downloaded project data and when the power to the GOT is turned on again 3 24 3 3 Display 3 3 3 Display When the MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor is executed The MELSEC Q ladder monitor is taken as an example to describe the operation procedure With regard to the MELSEC QnA ladder monitor if any keyword is entered in the target controller it gt pr must be entered after Z Utility display procedure K gt Subsection 3 3 1 O S When no ladder data i is stored gt When ladder data is already stored DRES O Select and touch or as described below 3 oc Q Circuit Monitor Le e To use stored ladder data touch YES z e To delete stored ladder data and read new ladder data z Lu touch INO QQ 1 NETWK No G ST FF CPUNoO q TA LC O Q LU kE EL aan lt O LU A LU gt DRES e Select and touch or as described below Q Circuit Monitor e To delete stored ladder data touch D To keep stored ladder data touch NO L LC BO 1 NETWK No O ST FF CPUN
498. nt due to false output or malfunction O l a communication fault including cable disconnection occurs during monitoring on the GOT communication between the GOT and controller is suspended and the GOT becomes inoperative For bus connection The CPU becomes faulty and the GOT becomes inoperative For other than bus connection The GOT becomes inoperative A system where the GOT is used should be configured to perform any significant operation to the system by using the switches of a device other than the GOT on the assumption that a GOT communication fault will occur Not doing so can cause an accident due to false output or malfunction Do not use the GOT as the warning device that may cause a serious accident An independent and redundant hardware or mechanical interlock is required to configure the device that displays and outputs serious warning Failure to observe this instruction may result in an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction DESIGN PRECAUTIONS O Incorrect operation of the touch switch s may lead to a serious accident if the GOT backlight is gone out When the GOT backlight goes out the POWER LED flickers green orange and the display section turns black and causes the monitor screen to appear blank while the input of the touch switch s remains active This may confuse an operator in thinking that the GOT is in screensaver mode who then tries to release the GOT from this mode by touching the display sect
499. nt file stored in a CF card do not write comment file data into a PLC 3 36 3 3 Display 3 3 5 Reading comment files from CF cards 3 4 Operation Procedure Common This section describes the information and key functions displayed on the ladder monitor screen The display screen of the ladder monitor varies slightly with the GOT used This chapter mainly uses the screen of the GT1575 V for explanation 3 4 1 Information and key functions displayed on the screen The ladder monitor screen depends on the controller type Point f After executing PLC reading if the controller comment or comment capacity is changed the comment may not be correctly displayed on the ladder monitor screen When changing the comment or comment capacity re start the GOT 1 When the MELSEC A FX ladder monitor is executed a Display monitor When comment is not displayed maximum 8 lines Norma STRAT When comment is displayed maximum 3 lines ON A 0001 X0002 ON OFF status display for ladder monitor Hem Y0023 gt Auto Produ rod ON status F 44H opera ct A tion selec anp OFF status I 4 lt gt J Stand The MCR command is normally displayed as H Print Cancel Screen Print The information shown in the table below is displayed No Description 1 Sequence program is displayed A maximum of 11 contact points is displayed in one line of a ladder for 12 contact points or more move to the next line When a comment
500. ntact S Z value 2 7 oc 2 point and coil of m E devices from a 2 specified device i l l s i l l l A NT A A A Ne A Nx BM monitor Monitoring the present value of x O PT sgt evices in specified 28 O buffer memory of a ES specified intelligent function module O 09 Data Setting Resetting m change by bit devices test Changing the x operation present value of A A word devices and buffer memory 7 Changing the 29 is present value of TC 7 5 possible during TC m monitoring Changing the set value of TC w possible during TC a monitoring kE Quick test Changing device S EE 0 values oy A A 245 3 E performing a quick E test Display Displaying device switching comments oc Displaying word E device and buffer 2 4 4 6 memory values in z decimal or S hexadecimal E Z 1 These items cannot be monitored when an A motion controller CPU is monitored 2 V Z and A cannot be monitored or their present values cannot be changed 3 Indicates CC Link connection Intelligent device station g 4 Indicates CC Link connection via G4 5 O gt Z O kE O gt O 2 2 Specifications 2 9 2 2 1 System configuration 4 When the GOT is connected to an FXCPU O Available A Partly restricted x Unavailable Connection form between GOT Function and controller Reference Direct CPU connection section Name Description GT16 GT15 GT11 Monitoring present values by Entry monitor entering
501. ntelligent function modules can be monitored properly if they are installed in a base unit connected to a large building block type PLC CPU e g AnNUCPU 3 When monitoring the A1SD75M AD75M Displayed as A1SD75P or AD75P when the A1SD75M or AD75M is installed The A1SD75M or AD75M can be monitored within the monitoring range of the A1SD75P or AD75P 4 When monitoring the A81CPU The A81CPU is monitored in the following way Item 64 points in first half 64 points in last half Treatment of Treated as a module that cannot be l l Treated as an input module A81CPU monitored System oe e Displays Special X Y Displays Input 64 X Configuration screen Monitoring Disabled Enabled as inputs 5 When monitoring an I O module r Tn a Only the output signal can be monitored for an I O module for which Output is displayed on the System Configuration screen For input signals monitor X of the PLC CPU device with the system monitor function Editing and reusing intelligent module monitor data The project data for the intelligent module monitor cannot be edited by modifying or adding an object However the data can be used on a user created monitor screen 6 2 Specifications 6 9 6 2 3 Precautions LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR OVERVIEW SYSTEM MONITOR MELSEC A LIST EDITOR O UU a 2 m G E uu 9 y mr m E Z oc O E Z G NETWORK MONITOR Q MOT
502. nter o Not required Stroke Font Support Data 400 KB Not required Stroke Standard Font JPN 2160KB Not required Stroke Standard 3175KB Not required S Font JPN supporting Hangul Stroke font Stroke Standard Font China 1474KB Not required GB Stroke Standard Font China 2016KB Not required GB supporting Hangul Video display Video RGB 512KB Not required RGB display Remote personal computer Video RGB 512KB Not required operation PC Remote Operation 84KB Not required Backup restore Backup Restore 820KB Not required L gt Ec m gt O SYSTEM MONITOR LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC A LIST EDITOR Operator Authentication Operator authentication 784KB Not required Sound Output Sound Output 200KB Not required External I O Operation Panel External I O Operation Panel 100KB Not required CNC Data I O 437KB Not required CNC data I O es GOT Platform Library 100KB Not required Device data transfer Device Data Transfer 100KB Not required MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR Standard Font China GB 1280KB e Standard Font China Big5 1920KB i Standard Font Japanese 1280KB 0 KANJI regions Stroke Font JPN 1037KB is Stroke Font China GB5 1248KB Le ina Big6 i ss INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR Stroke Font China Big5 1680KB Operation Log 1218KB Operation log Document display Document Display 2048KB x Kana kanji conversion KANA KANJI JPN 4 1223KB Kana kanji conversion KANA KANJI JPN
503. nual 2 2 3 Access range With Universal model QCPU the GOT can monitor up to 64 stations When the GOT is connected to the remote I O station in MELSECNET H network system only the master station can be monitored The access range other than above is the same as the access range when the GOT is connected to a controller Refer to the following manual for details of the access range 3 GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 2 7 Controller that can be monitored and the Access Range 2 2 4 Precautions 1 Monitoring and testing real number data Real number data cannot be monitored and tested All word devices containing real number data are monitored in integer data binary data 2 Monitoring devices in 32 bit two word module When monitoring word devices T C D W etc in 32 bit two word module those with 32 bits of data remaining are monitored Devices with 16 bits one word of data remaining are not monitored If an odd number is specified for the first monitor device number the last device number of the specified controller will not be displayed Example When the data entry of the A2NCPU is monitored in units of 32 bits from odd numbers D1 D3 D1017 D1018 D1019 D1020 D1021 D1022 D1023 Device name re r M A A A Unit of monitor display Nothing displayed 2 14 2 2 Specifications 2 2 2 Devices that can be monitored 3 Changing the T C set values of large size and small size Qn
504. number J or later LLI oc O E 7 LLI G o Y O lt a O e For connections other than bus connection and direct CPU connection l Q172CPU Production number N or later S Q173CPU Production number M or later z 4 The operation system software of SV13 and SV22 are available only Use a motion controller CPU with the following OS installed when using the Q172CPU Q173CPU Q172CPUN or Q173CPUN e SW6RN SV13QQ 00H or later OOE or later for using the Q172CPU or Q173CPU with the bus connection or direct CPU connection O e SW6RN SV22QQ 00H or later 00E or later for using the Q172CPU or Q173CPU with the bus connection or Z direct CPU connection 5 DB A Connection type O Applicable A Partly restricted X Inapplicable Function Connection type between GOT and controller 09 MELSECNET H CC Link H l Computer G PEN Bus Direct CPU Ethernet connection connection Z Name Description i l link K connection connection connection MELSECNET E o connection l ID G42 lt 10 connection Backs up setting data for a controller Backup connected to the restore GOT and restores A the data to the controller S Z 1 Indicates CC Link connection Intelligent device station 2 Indicates CC Link connection via G4 11 2 Specifications 11 3 11 2 1 System configuration Required extended function OS The following extended function OS is required OS memory space user area GT16 os y A
505. o 6 74 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 5 31 Q68ADV Q68ADI Q64AD module monitoring A E He ies 30 32 34 36 38 40 001E 0020 0022 0024 0026 0028 002A 002C 001F 0021 0023 0025 0027 0029 002B 002D 6 5 32 Q62DA Q64DA module monitoring Buffer memory address gt Screen example No C E 062DA 064DA Operation Monitor E S VZH END 0014 rat e ry 11 to 14 000B to 000E a O REET E fe 0013 A fo SW SOO BO 6 z Grr GC ES Pilar range setting D 2 gt O a a O Z Sz xO aS AZ ST oc A YA RESET Chg J MENU m G z i O LU 0B Er change done a 2 LE vale kE H gt lt ES PE LU T gt Q62DA Q64DA Graph Monitor oat 11 to 14 000B to 000E ata RESET menu END EN 11 to 14 000B to 000E D ae EN ELA 0001 to 0004 UU gt Q G E uu 9 y JJ ul Z oc O E Z le DOOR ee ee l 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 75 6 5 32 Q62DA Q64DA module monitoring Q MOTION MONITOR NETWORK MONITOR 6 5 33 QD62D QD62E QD62 module monitoring Buffer memory address BST R T T 6 76 QD62D GD62E OD62 Operation Monitor ae EESIN Sri oa E E C ae OW Seip la Tie STT etd Ole AO 10ms El e A SLE A me count max 0D62D 0D62E 0D62 Input Output Monitor AE HOAME Edy G EES ert piz Eel CHi Cointe Tareelpoint Wo 1 MICA Preset command GH Counter comerdencelpomt Novi IIS CER
506. o 2 09K 2 43V 2 43V 2 32J 2 43V 2 43V 2 43V 2 43V Switch Action of the special function 2 47Z switch Enables specifying the transparent color of a figure when using an image file as a 2 472 figure FX List Monitor Operator Information Management Log in Log out Operator Authentication Password Change Operator Authentication and Backup Restore are added to Switch Action of 2 58L the special function switch The name Password is changed to Password Security Level in Switch Action of the special function switch CNC Data Input Output is added to 2 63R Switch Action of the special function switch SFC Monitor is added to Switch Action of the special function switch 2 77F Q l GT GT Soft T Version of OS 15 GOT1000 11 Standard monitor OS 03 00 lol o O Standard monitor OS 01 02 lol o O Standard monitor OS 03 01 lol o x Standard monitor OS 03 01 lolo O Ea Standard monitor OS 03 01 iol e O Standard monitor OS 03 02 X CNC MONITOR FUNCTION Standard monitor OS 01 02 Standard monitor OS 03 01 O X Standard monitor OS 03 01 es dl y Standard monitor OS 03 00 Standard monitor OS 03 01 Standard monitor OS 03 01 Standard monitor OS 03 01 01 Standard monitor OS 03 01 Standard monitor OS 03 02 OJOJOJO O Standard monitor OS 03 02 X
507. o 55 EA to EB T 7 88 238 388 538 58 EE 184 21A acc CCC Dt SEE SET pare penny TEO TES GE pont doz Meco RI IE comta DEE EZET Ji EA Setting ED RIE a PEZET Es GG not a ELIAS En int tay EZ STET Mimi OA desres minis Coins MOOOC dadaa minio PACAGE Ciam Minchin EZ LET to 2147483647 pulse degree ininie ig LU to ERER EZE RIRE EEIZ S SE Bett Ine range degrees QD75MH 1 0 signal amp Status SET Data MONIT E IH END Rese efi Kea Iae e Tens NL NE NE it Speed Cont Tae Maira R TIE e PAE EE IE 10 100 E Ec IE 00 00 E Earl OPR complete Tiag 0 SEESI Kos velk atem A speed change W mag um 107 degree 10 inch 10F pulse 1 jeje cep AS Reed rate K KH o 0 T JE MEA m 0 ESTI TD Menan aal Upiilise secy a 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens Buffer memory address Screen example No 70 220 370 520 46 DC 172 208 71 221 371 521 47 DD 173 209 78 228 378 528 4E E4 17A 210 4 72 to 73 222 to 223 48 to 49 DE to DF 372 to 373 522 to 523 174 to 175 20A to 20B 5 74 to 75 224 to 225 4A to 4B E0 to El 374 to 375 524 to 525 176 to 177 20C to 20D 6 76 to 77 226 to 227 4C to 4D E2 to E3 376 to 377 526 to 527 178 to 179 20E to 20F 818 to 819 802 to 803 332 to 333 322 to 323 918 to 919 902 to 903 396 to 397 386 to 387 1018 to 1019 3FA to 3FB 1002 to 1003 3EA to 3EB 1118 to 1
508. o install the option OS to the GOT Refer to the following manual for the procedure for checking the available memory space of the user area and information about the data using other user areas 1 GT Designer2 Version QO Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual 8 TRANSFERRING DATA 3 Option function board a For GT16 and GT10 No option function board is required b For GT15 and GT11 Mount one of the option function boards in the above table on the GOT For the GOTs with a built in option function board refer to the following lt 3 1 1 2 Hardware and OS required for each function For how to mount an option function board on the GOT refer to the following manual GT15 User s Manual 8 10 Option Function Board GT11 User s Manual 8 3 Option Function Board Functions list and monitor conditions The following shows the memory that can be monitored by the MELSEC FX list editor and the FX PLC status conditions O Can be monitored A Can be monitored under certain conditions x Cannot be monitored Memory that can be monitored 7 EEPROM P memory EPROM FX PLC Function Built in RAM memory cassette flash memory status memory cassette memory cassette cassette Displaying sequence Reading E programs RUN sequence E Searching commands STOP programs devices sequence l Changing operands set programs values For Stop 1 Inserting commands A x only Deleting commands Sequence program all
509. o not execute the backup restore on the GOT while the target controller of the backup restore is accessed by GX Developer Doing so causes a communication error on GX Developer The backup restore is executed 4 Motion controller CPU a Backup For backing up data for controllers including the motion controller CPU do not set the motion controller CPU to the installation mode When the motion controller CPU is set to the installation mode the GOT does not back up data for the motion controller CPU The GOT backs up data for the other controllers on the same base unit Restoration For restoring data to controllers including the motion controller CPU do not set the motion controller CPU to the installation mode or test mode Doing so stops the restoration operation of the GOT When the restoration is stopped be sure to execute the restoration again Failure to do so causes the GOT not to write all the data into the controllers resulting in incorrect operations of the controllers 11 2 Specifications 11 2 3 Precautions 11 3 Display Operation o 11 3 1 Outline before starting y of We n Operations before displaying The following describes the outline for displaying the operation screen for the backup restore after installing Backup Restore extended function OS on the GOT a O 38 26 OZ on Starting from a special function switch Starting from the utility Backup Restore set in the project data 1 1 Display th
510. o the connector of the connected unit until it clicks After plugging check that it has been inserted snugly Not doing so can cause a malfunction due to a contact fault Plug the communication cable into the connector of the connected unit and tighten the mounting and terminal screws in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit TEST OPERATION PRECAUTIONS When testing the operation e g turning bit devices ON OFF or changing a current word device value a current or set timer counter value or a current buffer memory value thoroughly read the relevant manual to fully understand the operating procedures When testing never change the data of the devices that control the operation essential for the system False output or malfunction can cause an accident STARTUP MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS When power is on do not touch the terminals Doing so can cause an electric shock or malfunction Connect the battery correctly Do not discharge disassemble heat short solder or throw the battery into the fire Incorrect handling may cause the battery to generate heat burst or take fire resulting in injuries or fires Before starting cleaning or terminal screw retightening always switch off the power externally in all phases Not switching the power off in all phases can cause a unit failure
511. oO m a f you press YES all data will be deleted Q gQ kE Z Po aa Ladder monitor screen O m z zg LC O Z O XxX O Z 2 Ga LC O E Zz O gt PTA Continued to next page S S O 3 3 Display 3 25 3 3 3 Display From previous page MELSEC Q QnA LADDERMON TOR X IU NETWK No Ch No STATION CPU No 0 4 ChNo Comm Driver lt gt GH Pm Poms p Print Cancel AS Screen Print MELSEC Q QnA LADDERMON TOR x Ch No Hl NETWK No MO STATION CPU No 0 4 1 8 9 Al Bl aly anna Print Cancel GE 2 859180 155 Screen Print 0 Enter DA Continued to next page 3 26 3 3 Display 3 3 3 Display The communication setting window is displayed e The name of the Communication driver installed in the GOT is displayed e Set the channel number of the controller targeted to the ladder monitor Touch the gt key and move the cursor to NETWK No Set the network number of the target controller the CPU station number and the CPU number according to the table shown below Setting range Connection form Setting Bus connection MELSEC Direct CPU NET H ri CC Link S Ethernet controller E 7 connection GOnnectian MELSEC GE intelligent Computer link NET 10 device station a connection connection connection 0 Host loop NETWK No 1 to 239 1 to 255 1 to 239 0 Specified loop
512. oc T Q G lt l Z O H O Z LL MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR Go SYSTEM MONITOR OVERVIEW MELSEC A LIST EDITOR NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR From previous page The drive selection window is displayed Enter the target drive applicable memory Drive number setting range 0 to 4 key Used to delete a character of the entered AAA DRIVE IG O Program Memory information B ee ee key Used to delete all characters under the cursor 71718 9 A Bl aly Enter key Registers the entered information When any keyword is set for the selected drive enter the 4 5 6 0 DI aK vol A LA If canceling the entry reading of the drive is canceled de Enter Del AG 2 A list of the files stored in the selected drive is displayed Using the keys shown below select the file data you want to read key Moves the cursor upward o LNETWK No O ST FF CPUNo 0 key Moves the cursor downward i key Displays the preceding page L oa re m key Displays the following page A KE key Select Cancel is switched by moving the cursor and touching this key Select All key Selects all the files in the drive L Cancel All key Cancels all the file selections Exit Ladder Break PLCRD SetUp Drive SEL READ y E i E E G ES S S 6 0 EA READ key Starts the reading of the file data selected Starts reading a comment file from a CF card Set the drive to
513. oint searched is a b contact point o If a B contact is found defective as a result of the defect search a search for the cause of the ON OFF state will be automatically switched L 2 Screen display after a defect search S After the end of the defect search the GOT stops monitor and displays the search S result Hence the monitor screen of the GOT shows the result retained during the defect search 3 Display of defect search results While the search result is displayed after the end of the defect search the n searched ladder can be displayed backwards by pressing single ladder ua block scroll or 10 ladder block jump available for only the MELSEC Q Qn ladder monitor m Up to 100 ladders can be displayed on screen The following messages will appear at the start or the end of the search results z e When viewing the start of search results This is the start of search results 25 e When viewing the end of the search results This is the end of search ES results 4 Display of contact point and coil ON OFF a 1 During automatic search execution E e MELSEC A FX ladder monitor Displays ON OFF in the entire ladder displayed on the screen e MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor Displays ON OFF in the ladder displayed m last 2 During search result display The ON OFF of the ladder block searched last and the monitor results of O word devices are displayed S O 3 6 Search Operation 32 65 3 6 6 Defect search 3
514. ol length compensation and tool radius Tool offset data TOOL OFS compensation l Offset data between the machine coordinate system and Workpiece offset data WORK OFS workpiece coordinate system Macro variables applicable to different machining Common variable COMMON VAR programs CNC ladder User created PLC program ladder USERPLC LAD 5 Q series motion controller CPU Motion SFC program File where SFC code G code and F FS code files are conversion file control combined and converted into CPU s Motion SFC program sfcprog cod code code memory storage format File where G list and F FS list files are combined and Motion SFC program ee converted into CPU s Motion SFC program text memory sfcprog bin conversion file text storage format Motion SFC parameter sfcprmD bin Motion SFC control parameter setting information files file sfcprm bin svsystemD bin System setting data file System setting data information files svsystemH bin 7 svsystem bin 4 High speed read setting svlatchD bin l High speed read setting information files file svlatch bin Optional data monitor o A svsysmonD bin Optional data monitor information files setting file svsysmon bin 7 svdataD bin Axis data parameter block information files svdataH bin Servo parameter information files svparaH bin 7 Servo data file a svdata bin Servo parameter information files svdata2 bin Limit swit
515. ommunication driver 26 connection Via 2738 Cc Link G4 03 09 S ae ga Supporting settings for the number of b G retries the timeout time and delay time Supporting connection to Q13UDHCPU Communication driver 2 77F l x x O and Q26UDHCPU CC Link G4 03 12 ae O Supporting connection to QO2PHCPU and 7 QO6PHCPU l Communication driver Supporting connection to QO3UDECPU CC Link G4 03 13 X X X lt Q04UDEHCPU QO6UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU and Q26UDEHCPU Supporting connection to the Ethernet Communication driver o Supporting connection to Q172HCPU 2 09K QU71E71 AJ71 Q E71 x x E Q173HCPU 01 02 kE lt Supporting automatic system switching a32 Communication driver F for QCPU redundant system QJ71E71 AJ71 Q E71 03 00 aos Supporting routing parameter setting with Si Communication driver GT Designer2 l QJ71E71 AJ71 Q E71 03 01 Supporting connection to Universal model QCPU 5 E Supporting connection to Q17NDCPU 5 gt Elhemet Supporting connection to CNC C70 Communication driver T connection Supporting the redundant system with the 2 63R QJ71E71 AJ71 Q E71 X redundant type extension base unit Q17nNC 03 07 Supporting the redundant system with the remote I O station of the MELSECNET H LE network system O G The communication driver name is ci changed Communication driver X o 2 73B QJ71E71 AJ71 Q E71 Q17nNC Supporting connection to CRnQ 700 and CRnD 700 03 09 S CRnD 700 l E Communicati
516. on Displays the model name I O points and start I O number for the modules installed in the monitored station For an intelligent function module that cannot be monitored the model name is displayed as SP 2 The display position of the module becomes the key to switch to the screen where the monitoring of that module is performed Touch input Displays the CPU Nos for the CPUs and the control CPU number for the installed modules when there are multiple CPU systems 3 Display keys used for the operations on the System Configuration screen shown in 2 Touch input 2 Key functions The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used with the operation on the DEVICE MONITOR screen Key Function END Closes the monitoring and returns the screen to the one for starting the intelligent module monitor Ae Displays the communication setting window QCPU The screen switches to the PC Information monitor screen Refer to Section 6 4 3 In intelligent module monitor mode Module Switches to the screen where the intelligent module monitoring for that module is performed display position In unit detail info mode Switches to the screen displaying detailed information of the selected module Switches the System Configuration screen to Info mode Refer to Section 6 4 4 Peasic mode Switches the System Configuration screen to Basic mode Scrolls the display one stage up or down to display the system configuration of t
517. on board with add on GT15 other than the above O memory E For setting the OS boot drive refer to the following F Z GT Designer2 Version L Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual Chapter 8 TRANSFERRING DATA 2 1 Extended function OS and option OS Install the above extended OS and option OS on the GOT For how to install the operating systems refer to the following manual K gt GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual Chapter 8 TRANSFERRING DATA oc O E Z Oo O LL 7 2 OS memory space For installing the extended function OS and option OS the available soace shown in the above table is required in the user area For checking the available space in the user area and the data that uses other user areas refer to the following manual gt GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual Chapter 8 TRANSFERRING DATA APPENDICES 3 Option function board a For GI16 No option function board is required b For GI15 Mount one of the option function boards in the above table on the GOT For the GOTs with a built in option function board refer to the following 1 1 2 Hardware and OS required for each function For how to mount an option function board on the GOT refer to the following manual L gt GT15 User s Manual 8 10 Option Function Board INDEX 13 2 Specifications 13 5 13 2 1 System configuration Required hardware The following hardware is required
518. on displayed on the test menu screen and key functions 2 9 3 Information and set items displayed on each setting key window screen The information and set items on the setting key window screen to be used for each test are described below 1 Information displayed on each setting key window screen OVERVIEW 1 Displays a channel No 2 Displays a network No N 3 Displays a station No 4 Displays a CPU No x ChNo JO Ne T E S I Screen for bit device on off operation CEVICHE J RST 1 SET 1 5 Sets on off oc O E Z O Lu E yn gt nw XK EN 2 z 6 Sets a device number BF gt 7 Sets a device name 6 Enter dell A Displays whether decimal or hexadecimal is selected D Decimal H Hexadecimal LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION SET VAL SET VAL Chio 1 NetHo Set value operation screen for timers and counters DEW ICE im FJ js paje joj ft ftp Jj t i gt JJ Enter del A a ar for word devices Kr lar T KR oes 0 S 9 Sets th i bi Ba NN Ten n ets the presen 16 bit one word module 32 bit two word module E EX E s A KA value ofa wora T H U a K A ZIVi TI Cla gt EH Enter Del A BM VAL 16 BM VAL 32 10 Sets the initial I O signal of a module 16 bit one word module 32 bit two word module Ber Ye T 0 8 Sets a T C set value MELSEC A LIST EDITOR MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR
519. on driver Supporting connection to Q13UDHCPU 2 77 QJ71E71 AJ71 Q E71 Q17nNC x and Q26UDHCPU CRnD 700 03 12 Continued to next page App 9 GT11 GT Soft GOT1000 Bus Serial Version of ltem Description GT Version of OS Designer2 The communication driver name is changed Supporting connection to QO2PHCPU and 2 82L X Ethernet QO6PHCPU Communication driver ii S ECON Ethernet MELSEC Q17nNC connection upporting connection to Q03 CRnD 700 03 13 QO4UDEHCPU QO6UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU and Q26UDEHCPU Supporting connection to QS001CPU X Supporting connection to the E Communication driver 2 3 MODBUS TCP MODBUS Tce MODBUS TCP 03 09 Extended device range monitored Communication driver The setting of TIM or CNT up to 4095 2 09K OMRON SYSMAC etc 01 02 O Communication driver OMRON PLC Supporting delay time setting 2 27D OMRON SYSMAC connection 02 04 O Supporting the settings of Retry and SEN Communication driver Timeout Time l OMRON SYSMAC 03 01 l Communication driver Supporting connection to CP1L 2 82L OMRON SYSMAC 03 13 l Communication driver Supporting connection to KEYENCE PLC 2 18U KEYENCE PLC KEYENCE KV700 1000 02 02 connection Supporting connection to KV 3000 and gt 775 Communication driver KV 5000 KEYENCE KV700 1000 03 12 O KOYO El PLC Communication driver Supporting connection to KOYO El PLC 2 82L x O connection
520. onononcos 2 51 Information displayed on the Batch Monitor screen and key functions cesser eee eree ee eee 2 36 Information displayed on the BM Monitor screen and key functions cesser eee eree eee 2 46 Information displayed on the Entry Monitor screen and key functions cesser eee eree ee eee 2 31 Information displayed on the TC Monitor screen and key functions sese ee eee 2 41 Information displayed on the test menu screen and key functions cesser eee eree ee eee 2 50 K Key window setting columns and Operation procedure sss sees eee 2 23 0 Outline until starting the system monitor 2 16 P Presa le 2 14 Procedure for batch monitor basic operation 2 40 Procedure for BM monitor basic operation 2 48 Procedure for canceling TC monitor keywords 2 45 Procedure for displaying the test menu screen and the setting key window screen 2 49 Procedure for entry monitor basic operation 2 34 Procedure for TC monitor basic operation 2 44 Q Quick test operation of monitor devices 2 26 P o r ele ee 2 6 Switching the display format DEC HEX and COMMENTt NO COMMENT seccceeeeeeteeeeeeeeees 2 24 System CONfIgUratiON ccococncccconncconcnnnonnnnccnnnconanenos 2 6 T TC Monitor Monitoring Timers and Counters 2 41 TeEStOpSraAtOM TTT 2 49 Test operation basic procedure oooccccnccnccnncnconocos 2 55 Test Operation pro
521. ons available on a GOT system in which the standard monitor OS an Extended function OS an Option OS and the Communication driver are installed e System monitor e Ladder monitor e A list editor L gt EC m gt O LC FX list editor E Intelligent module monitor S e Network monitor S e Q motion monitor gt e Servo amplifer monitor e CNC monitor e Backup restore s CNC data I O O e SFC monitor Z The monitor functions explained herein are intended to troubleshoot the PLC system and to streamline o maintenance operations 29 le Point f 1 Precautions for using each function pl AAA Some functions are not available depending on the GOT used target CPU or E connection form For option function boards functions available on each GOT and restrictions on z i A O each target CPU and connection form see the appropriate chapter 7 2 Display examples in this manual In this manual with a few special exceptions explanations are given primarily using the G11575 V screens D O SE SY 2 O Z 35 JE LU zZ z oc E 6 ie O Z E Z Q MOTION MONITOR 1 1 Before Using Each Function 1 1 1 Each function and related manuals The difference between the extended and option functions of the GOT is shown below e Extended functions Functions available by installing an Extended function OS e Option functions Functions available by connecting an option function board including a board with add on memor
522. ontrol block start Jump destination block No Touching a step displays the zoom window U gt This section 1 Zoom window Touching a step with a jump destination block No displays a block switching tab and then the jump destination block data is displayed in the SFC diagram display area e Transition condition display 10 SFC diagram display area Transition condition No Transition condition Transition condition sequence program axo Product detection Comment Touching a transition condition displays the zoom window L gt This section 1 Zoom window 11 Device current value display area Displays the current values of word devices displayed in the SFC diagram display area 12 Message display area Displays error messages and others Displays Scrolling automatically with the automatic scroll mode Automatic scroll status display 13 Nothing is displayed without the automatic scroll mode E L gt 13 4 5 Setting automatic scroll mode Displays the number of active steps in the displayed block 14 Number of active steps Touching the item displays the active step list window U 13 7 3 2 Active step list window 1 Operation output transition condition sequence programs are displayed in the MELSAP L program display mode only gt 13 7 3 Display menu Point P Displayed contents of SFC diagram monitor screen 1 Display mode at first display of SFC diagram monitor screen The disp
523. onversion software Document Converter for GOT1000 series PX Developer Abbreviation of SWLJD5C FBDQ E type FBD software package for process control m License key for GT SoftGOT 1000 Abbreviations and generic terms License m License key for GT SoftGOT2 Abbreviations and generic terms License key License key FD E Others Abbreviations and generic terms OMRON PLC KEYENCE PLC KOYO El PLC SHARP PLC JTEKT PLC TOSHIBA PLC TOSHIBA MACHINE PLC HITACHI IES PLC HITACHI PLC FUJI FA PLC MATSUSHITA PLC YASKAWA PLC YOKOGAWA PLC ALLEN BRADLEY PLC GE FANUC PLC LS IS PLC SCHNEIDER PLC SIEMENS PLC OMRON temperature controller SHINKO indicating controller CHINO controller FUJI SYS temperature Temperature controller controller YAMATAKE temperature controller YOKOGAWA temperature controller RKC temperature controller PC CPU module GOT server GOT client Windows font Intelligent function module MODBUS TCP Description GT15 SGTKEY U GT15 SGTKEY P Description A9GTSOFT LKEY P For DOS V PC SW5D5F SGLKEY J For PC CPU module Description Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by OMRON Corporation Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by KEYENCE CORPORATION Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO LTD Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Sharp Corporation Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by JTEKT Corporation Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by TOSHIBA CORPORATION Abbrevia
524. operate on this line q oc E m Example 7 Deleting OUT T10 K100 lt i m 5 E on gt lt LL LLI dp Lu Set the ChNo 1 lt READ gt WRITE or INSERT ul mode O Move the cursor to the command to be deleted with 4 or the sTEp key 1 z LC 29 m Z zg LC O Z O gt XxX LC O Lu Z LC O Z O gt PTA O kE O gt O 5 4 Operation Procedures 5 21 5 4 7 Deleting commands 5 4 8 Sequence program all clear Clears all the sequence programs Operation Stop the PK BLC 1 pe gt a gt WRITE mode Example Clears all the sequence programs Caution ChNo 1 lt WRITE gt The program will be erased Press OK to continue usas Set the ChNo 1 E READ gt arre mode ma Point f Items cleared when All Clear for a sequence program is performed When All Clear is executed the parameters before program execution are initialized and Latch Clear is executed The memory space becomes the default value the comment area a 0 block the file register space a 0 block and keywords unregistered After All Clear set the above parameters etc again 5 22 5 4 Operation Procedures 5 4 8 Sequence program all clear 5 4 9 PLC diagnostics Displays the FX PLC error message error code and step at which the error occurred LU gt Operation E gt O gt PLC diagnostics 3 gt Select PLC diagnostics
525. or OS 01 10 Supporting connection to SIEMENS S7 300 400 ode l l 2 90U Communication driver O series SIEMENS S7 300 400 01 05 Standard monitor OS 01 07 Inverter l bate l l Supporting connection to inverter 2 73B Communication driver O connection FREQROL 500 700 01 00 Bar code reader Supporting connection to barcode reader 2 16 Standard monitor OS 01 08 connection Added GT Designer2 functions Version of GT GT GT Item Description Version of OS Designer2 1050 1030 1020 Library Enables setting the background color of the o 477 workspace figures in the Library Editor screen Auxiliary setting Enables setting Specify the touch area setting Enables setting Specify the touch area the touch area 2 NES Reading BMP or Enables displaying BMP or JPEG image data JPEG image reduced to a resolution of 2000 x 1600 or less 2 77F data on GT Designer2 Directly editing Enables editing the comment group directly in gt 77F comment group settings for the lamps and touch switches l Added common settings object functions GT GT 1050 1030 1020 Version of GT Item Description Version of OS Designer2 Corresponding to the overlap window display Window screen 2 73B Standard monitor OS 01 07 and the o display O Figure Supporting piping piping 2 NES Standard monitor OS 01 00 L Jo O GOT Setup The key reaction speed can be set 2 es Standard monitor OS 01 09 Jo O The clock
526. or a sign are set Entry example 123456789 D displayed in the number entry box indicates that the entry is decimal T C set value Hexadecimal number 16 bit one word module Four digits are set Entry example H AB12 32 bit two word module Eight digits are set Entry example H ABCDE123 H displayed in the number entry box indicates that the entry is hexadecimal Decimal number connection connection connection MELSECNET 10 connection ID x1 G4 2 16 bit one word module Six digits including a digit for a sign are set Entry example 12345 32 bit two word module Ten digits including a digit for a sign are set Entry example 123456789 D displayed in the number entry box indicates that the entry is decimal Hexadecimal number Word device present value 16 bit one word module Four digits are set Entry example H AB12 32 bit two word module Eight digits are set Entry example H ABCDE123 H displayed in the number entry box indicates that the entry is hexadecimal Initial 1 O signal of E L l 10 dul Set the first two digits of the three digit initial lO signal of the module module 11 2 52 Initial device number of Set the number in a decimal number buffer memory 1 Indicates CC Link connection Intelligent device station 2 Indicates CC Link connection via G4 2 9 Test Operation 2 9 3 Information and set items displayed on each setting key window screen 2 9 4
527. or function was started 7 20 7 4 Operation Procedures 7 4 2 Detailed monitor Display contents and keys functions when monitoring CC Link IE controller network This section describes the screen configuration of the detailed monitor and the functions of on screen keys when the GOT monitors a control station or normal station on the CC Link IE controller network set as the host station 1 Displayed contents 1 2 Spc Ctr Curr Ctr Com nfo SubCtr Rmt OMs 3 Total of Largest Largest Com Cause o Cause of Sta 120 l Sta 120 Ctr lSta Com Sta Com _ tSta Bleck None None L Sta Nrm Sta DL Sta 120 Ssp Normal Comm Stop Norma This Station s NetWork Group Spc Ctrl Sta Curr Ctrl Sta Com Info SubCtrl Sta Com Rmtl OMstSta Total of L Sta x Largest Nrm Sta Largest DL Sta Com Status Cause of Ssp Cause of Stop lt D Link in prog Constant LS OUT Loop IN Loop OUT Loop Back Sta IN Loop Back Sta of Loop Switching Parameter Setting Reserved Sta Communication Mode Transmission Mode Transmission Stat Norma Norma Common uni que one Normal Mode Display contents Displays the host station number Displays the network number Displays the group number Displays the station number set as the control station Displays the station number of the station currently operating as the control statio
528. or the controller Backup CF card USB memory Authentication of the password for the backup restore Restore Automatic authentication of passwords for the controller The following shows the passwords used for the backup restore Password Description Password for the backup restore function Password for backup restore Set the password on the GOT at the first backup Before setting the password set passwords for controllers in advance Passwords set for the files for the target controllers of the backup restore Passwords for controllers l a Set the passwords with software for the controllers when writing the files to the controllers After the first backup after setting the password for the backup restore the user has no need to input the passwords for the controllers The passwords for the controllers are automatically verified The following shows the security advantages User Advantage No need to disclose the passwords for the controllers to the operator Administrator a Preventing anyone other than the administrator to browse or edit setting data for the controllers The backup restore is executed by using the password for the backup restore only Operator No need to input passwords for the controllers Point Before setting password for backup restore When the user forgets the password for the backup restore the backup restore cannot b
529. ormation displayed on the test menu screen and key functions 1 Test menu screen DEVICE MONITOR Chio 1 NetNo O ST FFICPUNO 0 BM YAL16 l VALUE 32 l BM UAL 27 l The table shown below describes the key functions Key Function Switches the screen to the functional change menu screen to activate another monitor function or terminate the system monitor function Section 2 4 6 Changing screens Switches the screen to the display format switching screen to change the value display format DEC HEX or comment no comment display 37 Section 2 4 4 Switching the display format DEC HEX and comment no comment display Switches the screen to the Device entry screen Displays the screen for bit device on off operation ET VAL Displays the Set value operation screen for T timers and C counters Displays the Present value operation screen for word devices VALUE 16 Data range 16 bit one word module Displays the Present value operation screen for word devices Data range 32 bit two word module Displays the Present value operation screen for buffer memory BM VAL 16 Data range 16 bit one word module Displays the Present value operation screen for buffer memory BM VAL 32 Data range 32 bit two word module Terminates the test menu screen and displays each monitor screen C CANCE lt 09 CLD Op TI L S 4 D Z D Z LD w 5 2 50 2 9 Test Operation 2 9 2 Informati
530. orming a communication in a normal condition Indicates the maximum station number of the station that is data linked Shows the current communications status of the host D Link in prog D Link Stop A D Link Stop H B Pass excut Disconnection Loop test Set Conf test Sta Odr Conf Com test Offline test Reset in prgr Indicates the causes why the communications were interrupted This indicates Normal if communications are normal Normal Offline Offline Test Line error Disconnection Initialize Others error codes Indicates the causes why the data link was stopped This indicates Normal if communications are normal Stop disignat No common para Host Para error Host CPU error Com suspension Others Continued to next page 7 4 Operation Procedures 7 4 2 Detailed monitor 7 15 OVERVIEW SYSTEM MONITOR LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC A LIST EDITOR MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR md ec O Z G x GC GO LI zZ Q MOTION MONITOR 7 16 No ltem Display contents 4 Constant LS Indicates the predetermined time of constant link scans x FLoop Shows the status of the forward loop lines of the host Normal LoopBK Trans D Link Impo RLoop Shows the status of the reverse loop lines of the host Normal LoopBK Trans D Link Impo tem aa FLoop Back Station Indicates the station number of a station that executes the loopback x along the
531. output oc area i i is invali O E D The operation of this key is invalid E Hr lnt gt O SE LC O m Z 00 oc O E Z O Z O E O O 8 4 Operation Procedures 8 4 8 Servo Monitor screen 8 4 9 Present Value History Monitor screen This section describes the display data of the Present Value History Monitor screen and the key functions displayed on the screen Displayed contents Present value History Monitor iten NR HEM SL los SV dp Val Monitor pv ALM HP Data 12 14 10 38 OH OH 3BFF62H 0 MON val 12 14 10 38 OH OH 3B1454H 4591 0000 Nur PWR ON 12 14 10 38 FEFEH 26950H OH 0 0000 PWR OFF 1 0 0 0 0H OH OH 0 0000 PWR ON2 0 0 0 0H OH OH 0 0000 PWR OFF2 0 0 0 0H OH OH 0 0000 PWR ONS 0 7 0 0 0H OH OH 0 0000 PWR OFFS 0 0 0 OH OH OH 0 0000 Ud PWR ON4 0 0 0 0H OH OH 0 0000 No Item Description mba gt Ax Displays the axis number of the axis currently being monitored Displays the following values monitored at home position return Home position return completion time Encoder present value 2 HP Data Multi revolution data of absolute position reference point data Within one revolution position of absolute position reference point data Servo command value Monitor present value Displays the following present monitor values Present time Encoder present value 3 MON Val Present multi revolution data of encoder present value Present within one revolut
532. p direction F 7 d Loopback is performed in the forward e Loopback is performed in the f Data link is not available loop direction only reverse loop direction only lo Ue sll bK ol TU T AO CE ey l l Dv l E n h rdl Tl For the CC Link IE controller network the loop status is displayed as shown below a Normal status b Loopback in execution c All stations with errors 1 Test is only displayed when using MELSECNET II When using a system other than MELSECNET II Off line is displayed even during testing of the forward or reverse loop 2 The loop names vary depending on the network system to be monitored as shown below MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 MELSECNET II network systems CC Link IE controller network Forward loop OUT side loop Reverse loop IN side loop 7 4 Operation Procedures 7 13 7 4 1 Line monitor OVERVIEW SYSTEM MONITOR LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC A LIST EDITOR MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR md ec O Z G x GC GO LI zZ Q MOTION MONITOR Point P When the GOT target is ANACPU or AnNCPU MELSECNET II is displayed even if a MELSECNET 10 network module is installed In addition if there is a master station and local station module 1 of the line monitor is displayed as Master station Network module Display on the GOT 2nd module Module 1 Master station Master station 1st modu
533. parameter entry set the switch on the CPU to STOP and RUN again or reset the CPU oc O E Z O Z O E O O 8 2 Specifications 8 5 8 2 2 Access range 8 3 Display Operations for display This section describes the flow until the Q motion monitor operation screen is displayed after the Q motion monitor Option OS is installed in the GOT Turn on the power to the GOT Starting from the special function switch Q motion monitor set in Starting from the utility h d the project data Display the utility Touch the special function switch re 3 After the utility is displayed touch Debug amp self check Refer to the following manual for how to set the special Debug gt Motion monitor from the Main Menu function switch GT Designer2 Version LD Screen Design Manual 6 2 Touch Switch For how to display the utility refer to the user s manual of the GOT to be used Set the channel number ETWK No E Set the channel number of the GHM E S A ChNo Comm Driver K controller monitoring the Q motion laz 2 A QnA QCPU QU7 1024 a 3 MELSERVO J3 J2S M 4 OMRON sYsmac Communication setting window Motion Monitor Parameter Set The System Configuration screen is displayed Touch a motion controller CPU to monitor Touching Motion Monitor displays the monitor menu Motion Monitor Parameter
534. patible communication driver in the GOT Bus connection Bus Q Ethernet connection QJ71E71 AJ71 Q E71 Q17nNC MELSECNET 10 connection MELSECNET 10 Higher Support communication driver is not The compatible communication driver installed CNC MONITOR is not installed in the GOT After setting the IP address of the CNC to The IP address of CNC to monitor is The IP address of the CNC has not be monitored in the Ethernet setting of GT not set up CNC MONITOR been set Designer2 download the project data to the GOT a There is no channel for Check that the channel No is correctly set Communication channel setup error a o communication in the communication settings Lower 10 10 10 5 Error Messages and Corrective Action 11 BACKUP RESTORE gt 6 IGT SOFT Puya cT16 GT 5 be 000 GTI 1 GT IO 11 1 Features g 26 Setting data including a sequence program parameters and setting values for a controller connected to E the GOT can be saved backed up in a CF card or USB memory in the GOT The saved data can be restored to the controller if required The following shows features of the backup restore function 2 Remark GOT backup ES The backup restore function is applicable to controllers connected to the GOT For backing up the GOT setting data use the GOT data package acquisition function For the GOT data package acquisition function refer to the following manual L gt GT1
535. pe O Available X Unavailable Function Connection type between GOT and PLC CPU MELSEC CC Link Bus Gue Computer NET H connection oat CPU Ethernet connection CC Link Name Description connection link P E connection connection MELSEC IE ne aie 5 connection NET 10 ID G4 connection rk Monitors buffer Intelligent memory of intelligent module function module and monitor signal statuses of I O modules 1 Eor the MELSECNET 10 connection use a QCPU and network module QU71LP21 QU71LP21 25 QU71LP21S 25 and QJ71BR11 with the function version B or later 2 Indicates the CC Link IE controller network connection 3 Indicates CC Link connection Intelligent device station 4 Indicates CC Link connection via G4 5 The QSCPU does not support the connection type Required option OS and option function board The option OS and option function board shown below are required OS memory space user area OS memory space user area space user area Option function board Ss Option OS ae in flash User memory GT15 GT16 GT15 memory ROM RAM GT15 FNB GT15 QFNB Intelligent module v 390KB 770KB 384KB Not required GT15 QFNB16M GT15 QFNB32M monitor GT15 QFNB48M GT15 MESB48M 1 Option OS Install the option OS in the above table to the GOT Refer to the following manual for the procedure for installing the option OS GT Designer2 Version O Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual 8 TRANSFERRING
536. peed POS CHG paea e M Code T Limit o 0 Zero Point Passage Error Reset Program No l o 0 Error Detection ts e e a A Servo Error Detect Feed py Update aan RZV CHG ERR Infot H 0000_ ZERO Request Servo OFF Command PC Link COM ERR 0 ZERO Completion Sa al CHe Command in a External Signal FLS FIN Signal lotion CPU WDT ERR 0 SS External Signal RLS Motion CPU WDT ERR O External Signal STOP MAN PLS Axis ERRJ Be 1 Pulse p External Signal DOG CHANGE Error So 3 Servo ON OFF Status pu AAA Ax ERR s Torque Limiting Signal Each MAN PLS SM ERR SM ERR Test Mode Rea 17181920212223242526272829303132 Q kE LULU Print a ocreen Monitors the details of the positioning data set to any axis e Displays the latest errors that occurred on the specified 8 gt 8 4 7 Positioning Monitor screen AXIS U 8 4 6 Error List Designated Axis screen oc O E Z O Z O E O O 8 1 Features 8 1 Servo parameters can be changed by writing Write example Disabling the auto tuning function Parameter setting screen Auta Tuning Speed Gain Adjustment SY Response Setting 1 Auto Tuning Model Load Inertia Ratio Position Ctrl Gainl Speed Ctr Gainl Position Ctrl Gain2 Speed Ctr Gain2 Speed Integral Comp 20 rad sec Notch Filter Not Used Feed Forward Gain 0 70 rad sec 1200 rad sec 25 rad sec 600 rad sec 7 0 To Motor a 7 m Parameter setting window appears Auto Tuning Spee
537. perature Communication driver Supporting connection to RKC temperature controller 2 90U a controller connection HKC SR Mini HG MODBUS 04 02 Communication driver Inverter connection Supporting connection to inverter 2 90U FREQROL 500 700 04 02 Servo amplifier Communication driver Supporting connection to servo amplifier 2 90U connection MELSERVO J3 J2S M 04 02 Communication driver 2 90U QJ71E71 AJ71 Q E71 Q17nNC CRnD 700 04 02 CHINO controller Supporting connection to CHINO controller connection Supporting connection to YOKOGAWA temperature controller Robot controller Supporting connection to robot controller connection Continued to next page App 4 Item CNC connection MELDAS C6 C64 Bar code reader connection Printer connection FA transparent External I O device connection RFID connection a Version of GT Description Version of OS Designer2 Communication driver AJ71QC24 MELDAS C 04 02 MELSECNET H 04 02 Supporting connection to CNC MELDAS C6 C64 series 2 90U CC Link Ver2 ID 04 02 Ethernet MELSEC Q17nNC CRnD 700 04 02 l l Extended function OS Supporting connection to barcode reader 2 90U Barcode 04 02 l l Extended function OS Supporting connection to printer 2 27D Printer 04 02 Supporting the FA transparent function via USB 2 90U Standard monitor OS 04 02 Extended function OS Supporting connection to
538. plifier power to initiate changes Pri C 9 o Touch E Print Screen O 2 O BMP JPEG file will be stored in the memory card The servo amplifier monitor screen will be installed in the GOT printed with the printer connected to the GOT 2 GOT with QVGA resolution L Hard copy output operations are performed by turning ON OFF the start or abort trigger device that Z i has been set in the GT Designer O op Point f e Install the extended function OS Printer to the GOT when printing a servo amplifier monitor screen e The output target CF card printer of hard copy can be set in Hard Copy of GT 7 Designer2 O For details of the hard copy setting refer to the following a lt gt GT16 User s Manual Chapter 13 DATA CONTROL GT15 User s Manual Chapter 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY gt GT Designer2 VersionO Screen Design Manual Section 13 2 Hard Copy SK LU a Z 9 4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens 9 43 9 4 8 Hard copy output 9 5 Error Messages and Corrective Action This section describes the error messages that may be displayed during servo amplifier monitor operation and their corrective action Error message Error definition Corrective action l The monitor data have not installed Download the monitor data of the servo amplifier Monitor data not found s or have been deleted monitor l An item that cannot be set was l It is not possible to set or Select an item that can be set s
539. pment may not be the same resulting in an unintended operation of the PLC CPU Sequence program change Stop the FX PLC before changing writing inserting deleting a sequence program or changing parameters Operation is not possible with the FX PLC running If you press the key but the system does not proceed to the next operation for example a search Check the input contents applied instruction number device value etc When used together with the ladder monitor Even if you execute the MELSEC FX list editor with the ladder monitor activated edited information will not be reflected on the Ladder Monitor screen To reflect such edited information perform the PLC reading of the ladder monitor again When using list monitor Only devices to be used for basic instructions can be monitored The status of devices word bit to be used for application instructions cannot be monitored 5 2 Specifications 5 D 5 2 2 Access range LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION OVERVIEW SYSTEM MONITOR MELSEC A LIST EDITOR al E V m gt a Oo LU 9p KE m INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 5 3 Display Outline until the start This subsection describes an outline until the system monitor screen is displayed after List editor for MELSEC FX Option OS is installed in the GOT Starting from the utility Display the utility After the utility is displayed
540. product If necessary order them by quoting the details in the tables below The manual in PDF format is included in the GT Works2 and GT Designer2 products Related Manuals Manual Name GT16 User s Manual Describes the GT16 hardware relevant contents including the specifications part names mounting power supply wiring external dimensions and option devices Describes the GT16 functions including the utility Sold separately GT15 User s Manual Describes the GI15 hardware relevant contents including the specifications part names mounting power supply wiring external dimensions and option devices Describes the GT15 functions including the utility Sold separately GT11 User s Manual Describes the GI11 hardware relevant contents including the specifications part names mounting power supply wiring external dimensions and option devices Describes the GT11 functions including the utility Sold separately Handy GOT User s Manual Describes the Handy GOT hardware relevant contents including the system configurations specifications part names mounting power supply wiring external dimensions and option devices Describes the Handy GOT functions including the utility and how to make cables Sold separately GT10 User s Manual Describes the GT10 hardware relevant contents including the specifications part names mounting power supply wiring external dimensions and option devices Descri
541. ps and touch 2 77F O 7 switches S Improved library structure and added S l l 2 09K O A import function Improved user library structure expanded the user library registration capacity l l s j 2 18U O copying the figure data to the user library etc O lt Aion o tres rame a ma feo lo E O Library workspace Enables setting the background color of S g the figures in the Library Editor screen l O Enables sorting the figure data by subject or function and displaying different 2 58L O shaped figures in the same color in the a image list 6 Real type data are added to the subject in gt l 2 63R O O the library n Matching project data stored in GOT and l l 2 09K Standard monitor OS 01 02 O project data opened on GT Designer2 Project data matching Project data matching is available between the GOT and GT Designer2 even 2 82L x O if the minor versions are not matched 7 ui 9 O Z m o o lt Enables copying of only characters in lamp display touch switch and comment 2 18U O Copy ON gt OFF display Copy OFF gt ON Enables copying of only comment No in bit lamp touch switch and comment 2 73B O display bit Continued to next page App 15 0 RST Version of GT GT GT Soft T Item Description Version of OS Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 Enables editing of the settings for advanced alarm observation advanced user alarm alarm history advanced 2 18U O recipe function and
542. r 9 4 2 Setup This is used to set the communication with the servo amplifier Point P 1 Before making the settings on the setup screen also make the same settings on the servo amplifier side If the settings on this screen and the settings on the servo amplifier do not match proper communications may not be performed 2 The settings on the setup screen return to the initial state when the GOT is turned off or reset After turning on the power to the GOT perform the settings on the setup screen again Setup screen This section describes the display data of the setup screen and the key functions displayed on the screen 1 Displayed contents 1 The model of the servo amplifier is selected 2 The Station No of the servo amplifier communicated when is selected 3 The Station No of communicated IFU is selected MR J2M P8A Axis number and Capacity setting cannot be set No hen y O Description 1 Displays the model of the servo amplifier to be connected 2 Displays the station number 00 to 31 of the servo amplifier to communicate with 3 Displays the serial communication station number of the IFU interface unit 2 Key functions The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations of the setup screen Key Function Sets the model of the servo amplifier to be connected Sets the station number 00 to 31 of the servo amplifier to communicate with 1 Sets the s
543. r 5 monitor servo related items on a l 5 2 variety of monitor screens A x Parameter Changes the setting of the settings servo parameter ns O E 1 Indicates the CC Link IE controller network connection Z 2 Indicates CC Link connection Intelligent device station LU 3 Indicates CC Link connection via G4 O 4 Only the motion controller CPU on the host station can be monitored m Monitoring or setting of parameters of other station cannot be performed 00 oc O E Z O Z O E O O 8 2 Specifications 8 3 8 2 1 System configuration Required option OS and option function board The option function OS and option function board shown below are required Option OS OS memory space user area Option function board ang D ez in flash User memory GT15 GT16 GT15 memory ROM RAM GT15 FNB GT15 QFNB Q motion monitor 390KB 770KB 607KB Not required GT15 QFNB16M GT15 QFNB32M GT15 QFNB48M GT15 MESB48M 1 3 Option OS Install the option OS in the above table to the GOT Refer to the following manual for the procedure for installing the option OS lt gt GT Designer2 Version g Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual 8 TRANSFERRING DATA OS memory space The available memory space shown in the table above is required in the user area to install the option OS to the GOT Refer to the following manual for the procedure for checking the available memory space of the user area and informatio
544. r Tasks ES fad fm Rename this folder 3 Move this Folder A Copy this Folder a Publish this Folder to the Web E mail this Folder s Files NC Delete this Folder File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Back gt K FS Search K Folders ROL File and Folder Tasks Gn Rename this file Open a Mowe this file E A Copy this file S Publish this file to the Web E E mail this File XK Delete this File Scan For Viruses Send To L Cut Create Shortcut Delete Other Places Rename 3 Resource Gj My Documents Properties File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Back K FS Search K Folders ROL s E E CIRCMNT File and Folder Tasks fm Rename this file E Move this file A Copy this file a Publish this file to the Web a E mail this File Delete this file Create a folder with the folder name of CIRCMNT in a CF card When the CIRCMNT folder already exists creating a new CIRCMNT folder is not required Copy a comment file wcd from the project data of GX Developer Save the copied comment file in the CIRCMNT folder created in the CF card Install the CF card with the comment file on the GOT Read the comment file with the ladder monitor Point f When using comment files stored in CF cards When comment files exist both in a CF card and a PLC the comment file to be used may not be read For using a comme
545. r enables you to monitor the statuses of all network lines connected to the host 32 In addition you can also perform detailed monitoring of a desired network and monitoring of other S stations by touch input on the line monitor O z M z O GOT wirh VGA or higher resolution GOT wirh QVGA resolution qe 2 gt LU Monitoring available for the detailed network information with the detailed monitor F Dedicated monitor screens are displayed according to the network type of the connected host 3 Network type MELSECNET II master station MELSECNET II local station 6 x MELSECNET 10 and MELSECNET H control station and normal station 02 Z gt MELSECNET 10 and MELSECNET H remote master station CC Link IE controller network control station and normal station md Display example ec O Z G x GC GO LI zZ Q MOTION MONITOR 7 1 Features 7 1 Monitoring available for other stations statuses with the other station monitor You can monitor the following statuses of other stations connected to the network e Communication status of each station e Data link status of each station e Parameter status of each station e CPU action status of each station e CPU RUN status of each station e Loop status of each station Other station monitor menu Another Sta Menu Other station communication status monitor 7 1 Features 7 2 Specifications 7 2 1 System configuration m gt m Thi
546. r for l 590KB 4170KB 1082KB Not required GT15 QFNB32M GT15 QFNB48M MELSEC Q QnA GT15 MESB48M 1 Option OS Install the option OS in the above table to the GOT Refer to the following manual for the procedure for installing the option OS K gt GT Designer2 Version O Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual 8 TRANSFERRING DATA 2 OS memory space The available memory space shown in the table above is required in the user area to install the option OS to the GOT Refer to the following manual for the procedure for checking the available memory space of the user area and information about the data using other user areas GT Designer2 Version O Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual 8 TRANSFERRING DATA 3 Option function board a For GI16 No option function board is required b For GT15 Mount one of the option function boards in the above table on the GOT For the GOTs with a built in option function board refer to the following 1 1 2 Hardware and OS required for each function For how to mount an option function board on the GOT refer to the following manual GT15 User s Manual 8 10 Option Function Board Display screen for the ladder monitor A sequence program of up to 8 lines one line up to 11 contacts 12 or more contacts will be looped back is displayed on a single screen In addition the current values of up to 8 word devices 9 or more devices are displayed by switching the display with the arrow key e
547. r memory of the G intelligent function module and make changes to the data In addition you can monitor the signal statuses of the I O modules The features of the intelligent module monitor are described below a O E Z Realized monitoring with dedicated screens 3 You can monitor the intelligent function module s and I O module s and make changes to the data 29 XI ID using dedicated screens S There is no need to create screens for monitoring or data changes thereby reducing the drawing workload S a 1 For intelligent function module z As a menu of monitor items is displayed select an item from the menu and the corresponding 7 monitor screen is then displayed gt Details of the buffer memory and the I O signal statuses between the buffer memory and the PLC CPU are displayed in text numerical values and graphs on the monitor screens Select a monitor from the menu Monitor screen D x lt y ne 2 Zero Return Data Monitor Screen Positioning Data Monitor Scr 03 dl Select a menu Parameter Data Monitor Screen Positioning Data Monitor Scr 04 O Positioning Data Monitor Screen Positioning Data Monitor Scr 02 do 0 M Code Comment Monitor Screen _ Positioning Data Monitor Scr 05 E Input Output Monitor Screen Positioning Data Monitor Scr 06 _ Positioning Data Monitor Scr 01 Positioning Data Monitor Scr 07 UU gt Q G E uu 9 y JJ ul Z oc O E Z le 2 For I O module T
548. r the word device current value timer and counter current value upper row and set value lower row When the set value is an indirect specification the value of the indirectly specified i i LC device is displayed O To switch between decimal and hexadecimal for the displayed value see the following 5 gt C gt Subsection 3 5 2 Display switching of decimal numbers hexadecimal numbers S O 3 The current status of monitoring local devices is displayed E blinks just to the right of the local device monitor status display during communicating with a PLC CPU Z Nothing is displayed without monitoring e Auto setting program names A local device is monitored The active program name is displayed e Local device monitor not executed A local device is not monitored O e Local device monitor is not supported The PLC CPU being used is inapplicable to the local device Z For switching the local device monitor between execution and non execution states refer to the following O lt 37 This section 3 2 O 3 4 Operation Procedure Common 3 39 3 4 1 Information and key functions displayed on the screen No Function 4 Display the keys used with the operation on the ladder monitor screen shown in b Touch input 5 The Ch No the network No the station No and CPU No are displayed Only when the MELSEC Q ladder monitor function is executed 6 The drive is displayed 7 The file name of the PLC program i
549. rated up to 21 Conventionally both of above OSs can l 2 18U BootOS 02 02 E uN be installed and operated up to 9 The is extended function OS data size is twice as Manel large as other OS data The logging OS extended function sa l data size is three times as large as other OSs and option OS data OSs Xx YN LL Q m LL Ca Extended function OS and option OS can a be operated up to 32 The extended function OS data size is l 2 73B BootOS 03 09 S x twice as large as other OS data The logging OS data size is three times as large as other OS data Built in option o BootOS 03 03 P GT15 FNB built in the GOT is enabled 2 58L x x function board Standard monitor OS 03 03 O Function for monitoring testing device of Extended function OS PLC CPU or buffer memory of intelligent 2 09K a System monitoring System monitor 01 02 function module function Supporting display of Chinese Simplified gz Extended function OS Traditional German Korean l System monitor 02 04 a O Continued to next page App 27 Q y Version of GT GT GT Soft T Item Description l Version of OS Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 Supporting connection to Universal model Extended function OS 2 63R x O System monitoring QCPU System monitor 03 07 function Supporting connection to CC Link IE E Extended function OS controller network l System monitor 03 12 Xx Function to monitor the network status of SE
550. rd for the 30 G C backup restore Eg Start es Touch Backup function in the main menu on the GOT The second or later backup 11 4 Operation Procedures cc e Input the password for the backup restore O O lL No Is the password correct Yes Is a password set for the file to be backed up LLI oc O E 7 LLI G o Y O lt a The passwords for the controller stored as the backup setting data are automatically verified for each file O lt Is the password correct Input the correct password lt for the controller O 6 The file is backed up Yes Is there another file E E Z No S T ep ves Is there another controller In the multiple CPU system Set the password for the backup restore N Set 32 or less alphanumeric characters for E the password Y Sett i ng SYSIBKUP a H Have the passwords for the e de a E 2 controllers ever been changed AJBICIDJEJF 6 H in Aj KJ UW HOF P E AIR S TI UY 08 a No WUXI Y 2 AG Del Enter Backup completed x lt ULU Q Z Point When passwords for controllers are changed When the password input is cancelled and the backup is stopped the backed up files until the backup is stopped are all deleted 11 3 Display Operation 11 17 11 3 3 Security and password 2 Restoration The following shows the operating procedure for the restoration after setting the password for the backup restore Touch Execute in the dat
551. rd or USB memory Check if the communication settings and communication driver for the GOT are correctly O incorrectly set set lt The backup restore cannot be completed y because a communication error occurs Because parameters for the controller are Check if the parameters for the controller is 2 between the GOT and a controller during the incorrectly set the controller dose not correctly set with tools including GX Developer O backup restore recognize the GOT for the controller The controller is turned off Turn on the controller The cable is not correctly connected Check the cable LLC O Z Z O gt O LL 09 UY LL O QOQ Zz W a A lt gt lt W Q zZ 11 6 Errors and Corrective Actions 11 35 Backup Error Cause No CF card or USB memory is installed to the GOT The CF card or USB memory does not have free space The backup data cannot be written The CF card or USB memory is set to write into a CF card or USB memory protect The drive does not exist Setting data files and data cannot The GOT cannot communicate with the be obtained from the controller controller e The user does not remember the The backup cannot be executed password The password is incorrect The because passwords for files of the first backup controller are set e Passwords for files of the controller are changed Restoration Error Cause The GOT cannot communicate with the controller Set
552. red by the system monitor function For further information about communication units and cables for each connection form see the following GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Target controller Controller QCPU Q mode Q series motion controller CPU QSCPU QnACPU ACPU QCPU A mode A series motion controller CPU FXCPU Remote 1 0 station MELSECNET H system MELDAS C6 C64 1 The GOT cannot write data to devices in the QSCPU The test operation is not available 2 2 Specifications 2 2 1 System configuration 2 Connection type 1 When the GOT is connected to a QCPU Q mode Q series motion controller CPU or ASCPU O Available A Partly restricted x Unavailable Function Connection type between GOT and controller MELSECNET H CC Link connection Link connection Bus Direct GPU eae ti ti link Ethernet connection aT T L connection connection connection connection MELSECNET in p 6 9 re Name Description 9 9 section 10 connection GT16 GT16 GT16 GT16 E GT16 GT16 SKG GT11 GT11 GT11 GT11 GT11 GT11 GT11 GT11 Entry Monitoring present monitor values by entering devices to be 2 5 monitored in advance Ar Batch Monitoring the monitor present value of n j 2 6 devices from a specified device TC Monitoring the monitor present value set value contact point and coil of m devices from a Specie EEE xl 1 xl xl 1 1 e192 x1 BM Monitoring the A A A A A A A A monitor present value of x devic
553. rence E Name Description l CPU link NET 10 S y E connection connection 4 5 nO connection connection connection aT 2 gt UU Search Device search defect operation search etc Displaying word Display devices in DEC or HEX switching Displaying device comments etc Test Changing device operation values etc MONITOR ae INTELLIGENT MODULE Storing ladder monitor screen in BMP JPEG neon format or printing it with 5 a printer 5 S 1 For the MELSECNET 10 connection use a QCPU and network module QJ71LP21 QJ71LP21 25 QU71LP21S x 25 and QJ71BR11 with the function version B or later Q kE 2 The present value of Z cannot be changed V cannot be turned ON or OFF a 3 The set values of T and C cannot be changed 4 Indicates CC Link connection Intelligent device station 5 Indicates CC Link connection via G4 e Z O gt Z O kE O gt O 3 2 Specifications 3 7 3 2 1 System configuration Required option OS and option function boards The option function OS and option function boards shown in the table below are required OS memory space user area Option function board Dae Option OS E in flash User memory GT15 GT16 GT15 memory ROM RAM ad 342KB 674KB 523KB Not ired ot require i MELSEC A q GT15 FNB GT15 QFNB GT15 QFNB16M GT15 QFNB32M Ladder monitor for 342KB 674KB 592KB Not required GT15 QFNB48M GT15 MESB48M MELSEC FX GT15 QFNB GT15 QFNB16M Ladder monito
554. ress Screen example No 1 1506 to 1507 5E2 to 5E3 1606 to 1607 646 to 647 E E E ien Pelee BSAA E E AER 2 1706 to 1707 6AA to 6AB Ente na EEEREN 1806 to 1807 70E to 70F so Joes etA S 1514 to 1515 5EA to 5EB am EE o jp vaT 1614 to 1615 64E to 64F s mead Step sta E P 1714 to 1715 6B2 to 6B3 eLa S S 1814 to 1815 716 to 717 EU ET EH E Lalee n s 5 1513 1613 5E9 64D s 4 command Skip 1713 1813 6B1 715 inl T e S R 1544 1644 608 66C J eg zal 1744 1844 6DO 734 EOI PEE Sec a r 1545 1645 609 66D 1745 1845 6B1 735 8 1546 1646 60A 66E 1746 1846 6B2 736 9 1547 1647 60B 66F 1747 1847 6B3 737 io 1505 1605 5E1 645 1705 1805 6A9 70D 1500 1600 5DC 640 QD75MH Axis control data 2 1 1700 1800 6A4 708 0 QD75MH Axis control data 1501 1601 5DD 641 1 8 1701 1801 6A5 709 2 9 a 1502 1602 5DE 642 3 10 1702 1802 6A6 70A 4 mrar NEO e Do 1503 1603 5DF 643 m EE O II 1703 1803 6A7 70B 5 12 5 1504 1604 5E0 644 IEQUESE 13 1704 1804 6A8 70C 6 Disable 1 raple SN Sa isg Jew Tora E 14 6 1512 1612 5E8 646 7 value HEE 1712 1812 650 714 regue OCompleted iRequest 7 1516 1616 5EC 650 1716 1816 6B4 718 1508 to 1509 5E4 to 5E5 8 1608 to 1609 648 to 649 1708 to 1709 6AC to 6AD 1808 to 1809 710 to 711 1510 to 1511 5E6 to 5E7 9 1610 to 1611 64A to 64B 1710 to 1711 6AE to 6AF 1810 to 1811 712 to 71
555. rform monitoring This section describes how to operate the batch monitor when the system monitor function is executed 2 6 1 Information displayed on the Batch Monitor screen and key functions 1 The information displayed on the Batch Monitor screen is described below 1 Displays a channel No 2 Displays a network No 3 Displays a station No 4 Displays a CPU No Display example of bit devices BATCH MON TOR p AO TES MENU OR MIN Chio 1 NetNo 0157 FFICPUNO 0 Product A O Froduct B O Product C C Resource LC a C C No comments displayed Comments displayed 5 Displays bit device on off 6 Displays a comment Display example of word devices 16 bit ATA TES TMENJFOR MI SETA TES TEMENE OR Chio 1 NetNo DIST FFICPUNO 0 Chio 1 NetNo O ST FFICPUNO 0 BATCH MON TOR ULU U 326 ll nventory units Shipment A shipment E Shipment C 1 1 IE 13 1 J 1 1 3256 i No comments displayed Comments displayed 7 Displays a word device value 8 Displays a device number 9 Displays a device name 2 36 2 6 Batch Monitor 2 6 1 Information displayed on the Batch Monitor screen and key functions Display example of word devices 32 bit BATCH MON TOR BATCH MONITOR TES TEMEN ORME SET E TES JEMENU UHE ChNo 1 NetNo OlST FFICPUNo 0 ChNo 1 NetNo OIST FFICPUNo 0 OVERVIEW N D Shipment B D 16
556. rigger device 0 Trigger ID 1 LL l a Trigger device Z Trigger ID 2 OF a BS Backup processing lt lt gt Trigger ID 1 rh Backup processing 4 Trigger ID 2 z G Ez Process notification device 529 Trigger ID 1 O SP Process notification 1 1 device Trigger ID 2 Trigger backup processing GS657 D The trigger device Trigger ID 1 turns on and then the GOT starts the backup Trigger ID 1 LLI oc O E 7 LLI G o Y O lt a 2D When the backup is started the process notification device Trigger ID 1 turns on and the trigger backup processing setting No notification GS657 stores the trigger ID When the process notification device turns on the trigger device Trigger ID 1 turns off Q When the backup Trigger ID 1 is completed the GOT recognizes that the trigger device Trigger ID 2 is on and the GOT starts the backup Trigger ID 2 O When the backup is started the process notification device Trigger ID 2 turns on and the trigger backup processing setting No notification GS657 stores the trigger ID When the process notification device turns on the trigger device Trigger ID 2 turns off am 9 When multiple trigger conditions are simultaneously met The GOT executes the backup with the smallest trigger ID first 10 When trigger device is on at GOT startup The GOT recognizes that the trigger condition is met and then the GOT executes t
557. rmation Please confirm forward or reversal stroke The servo amplifier LSP LSN signal l Turn on the servo amplifier LSP LSN signal end LSP or LSN is OFF The channel No setting or Communication channel setup error communication driver setting is Check the communication settings incorrect e MR J2M P8A or MR J3 A was selected with the station No l l selection setting set to No e Set the station No selection setting to Yes It is not possible to select l l E e A channel with no station number Select a channel with a station number was selected for the MR J2M P8A 9 44 9 5 Error Messages and Corrective Action 10 CNC MONITOR FUNCTIONS ST GT SOFT GOT1000 a SERVO AMPLIFIER C3 MONITOR eTl I icetlO 10 1 Features cc O gt Z GQ 6 Oz Z o O L Functions such as Position Display Monitor Alarm Diagnosis Monitor Tool Offset Param Program Monitor and APLC Release Screen equivalent to the MELDAS dedicated display are available for the MELDAS connected to the GOT Position Display Monitor Alarm Diagnosis Monitor m O e Z Lt LU LJ L o AE 7 POSITION 5 23 13 48 MONITOR 1 1 lt o ALARM DI AGN 1 cc SU ae CL A K TSA o se x a E S COO COOL CL ta E I COORDI COMMAND SEARCH MMEND SERVO SPINDLE PLC 1 F MENU a Menul Menu2 I Menu3 Menu4 Menub gt 4 Menul Menu2 Menu3 Menu4 Menu5 gt Q La als a sl el z el o ol
558. rne Name Description link NET 10 connection connection connection connection connection connection ie G4 MELSEC Sequence program writing FX list parameter setting PLC editor diagnostics and keyword registration etc 1 Indicates CC Link connection Intelligent device station 2 Indicates CC Link connection via G4 Required option OS and option function board The option OS and option function board shown below are required OS memory space user area Option function board GIB 6 Option OS A in flash User memory GT15 GT11 GT10 GT16 GT15 GT11 GT10 memory ROM RAM GT15 FNB GT15 QFNB MELSEC FX GT15 QFNB16M Not 542KB 1024KB 1058KB GT11 50FNB list editor ad Bail GT15 QFNB32M required GT15 QFNB48M GT15 MESB48M 1 Option OS a For GI16 GT15 and GT11 Install the option OS in the above table to the GOT Refer to the following manual for the procedure for installing the option OS lt gt GT Designer2 Version O Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual 8 TRANSFERRING DATA 5 2 Specifications 5 3 5 2 1 System configuration LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION OVERVIEW SYSTEM MONITOR MELSEC A LIST EDITOR al E V m gt a Oo LU 9p KE m INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR b For GT10 Installing the option OS is not required 2 OS memory space The available memory space shown in the table above is required in the user area t
559. rograms in SFC diagram format z The GOT can monitor SFC programs of the PLC CPU and display the programs in the SFC diagram Z format MELSAP3 or MELSAP L format O E A O 6 3 oc O E Z Oo O LL 7 lun of active steps 1 SFC diagram monitor screen The following screens are displayed with the SFC monitor function e PLC read screen l 13 5 How to Operate PLC Read Screen e Block list screen 13 6 How to Operate Block List Screen e SFC diagram monitor screen 7 13 7 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen APPENDICES INDEX 13 1 Features 13 1 Touching a step or transition condition on the SFC diagram monitor screen displays an enlarged operation output transition condition sequence program Nan of active stegs Switching display formats device comment display and languages 13 2 The following are available e Switching the display formats of device values Switching whether to display or hide device comments e Switching languages for file names of SFC programs comments and others 1 Switching display formats On the SFC diagram monitor screen the display formats for the current values of word devices can be switched between decimal and hexadecimal numbers 2 Switching device comment display Whether to display or hide device comments used in SFC programs can be switched 3 Switching languages Block titles file titles and comments can be displayed in the language set
560. roller Q series 3 The ladder monitor is not applicable to the FX3G 4 Use the function version A2 or later 3 2 Specifications 3 2 1 System configuration J Connection type 1 When the GOT is connected to a QCPU Q mode or a QSCPU O Available A Partly restricted x Unavailable S oc Function Connection type between GOT and controller gt MELSEC CC Link connection Link connection Direct Computer NET H SA A Name Description K CPU link Ethernet connection CC Link section i z a on connection connection connection MELSEC IES p 46 G4 5 6 6 NET 10 T connection E 6 Search Device search defect 3 6 operation search etc l e 7 gt ep OO Displaying word aia in DEC or Display 3 5 switching i Displaying device comments etc Test Changing device 0 4 0 0 3 7 Local device Monitoring local x i vi H ing A 38 monitor devices oc O E Z le oc T Q G lt l Z O H O Z S LL Storing ladder monitor aries screen in BMP JPEG es PY format or printing it with a printer m D 1 Kor the MELSECNET 10 connection use a QCPU and network module QJ71LP21 QU71LP21 25 QJ71LP21S lt 25 and QJ71BR11 with the function version B or later i 2 The present value of Z cannot be changed V cannot be turned ON or OFF m 3 Indicates the CC Link IE controller network connection 4 Indicates CC Link connection Intelligent device station 5 Indicates CC Lin
561. rom a monitor screen and functions usable in each object For object setting to display searching result on ladder monitor refer to the following manual gt GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual 1 MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor O Applicable x Inapplicable Function Object 1 For reading comment files from CF cards refer to the following gt Subsection 3 3 5 Reading comment files from CF cards 2 MELSEC A FX ladder monitor O Applicable x Inapplicable Function Object 2 Searching operation 1 When displaying searching result with the Advanced Alarm Display or Special Function Switch The following explains the procedure from touching the Key Code Switch for advanced alarm display or Special Function Switch and performing coil search or defect search to display of a ladder block The following flowchart explains the operation when the destination to save the ladder block data is specified When performing MELSEC A FX ladder monitor the operation is the same when displaying the searching result with Alarm List or History explained 2 3 3 Display 3 31 3 3 4 Searching from the monitor screen OVERVIEW SYSTEM MONITOR Q oc O E Z le oc T Q G lt l Z O H O Z LL MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR MELSEC A LIST EDITOR NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR The following explains the operation taking MELSEC Q ladder monitor as a
562. rt the network monitor 52 c When there is a network parameter error The network monitor cannot be displayed correctly when there is a network parameter error Review the network parameter md d When the network parameter has not been set to the QCPU The network monitor cannot be displayed correctly when the network parameter is not set to the QCPU Be sure to set the network parameter when monitoring the network with the GOT ec O Z G x GC GO LI zZ Q MOTION MONITOR 7 2 Specifications 7 7 7 2 3 Access range e When changing the head addresses on CPU side to which refresh parameter is set The Network monitor cannot be displayed correctly if the SB and SW head addresses of CPU side are changed while refresh parameter is set in the network parameter for the QCPU To monitor the network with the GOT set the head addresses of SB and SW on CPU side to default f When mounting MELSECNET H network module and MELSECNET G network module on same base unit The GOT cannot monitor the network status For monitoring the network status execute the network diagnostics with GX Developer When monitoring MELSECNET H Even if a network module on the MELSECNET H is being monitored a MELSECNET 10 display is provided in either of the following cases e The normal station has been started due to a communication error cable disconnection etc e The monitor target is the remote master station When monitoring MELSECNET
563. s 11 27 System CONTIQUIALION c9gsxgozs 2 Y yea ss ia R ACCESS ael 11 23 PRECAUTIONS TTT 11 3 Display Operation 11 3 1 Outline before Starting esse eee eee 11 3 2 Setting storage location for backup data 11 33 Security and password occccccconnonccconcncncnnnnononnnnononnnncononnnns 113 4 Tngger backup tias ii id 10 1to10 10 10 1 10 2 EEE TE TE TEE 10 2 r T A 10 5 e arene ETTET 10 5 10 6 10 8 10 10 11 1to 11 36 e 11 3 11 4 Operation Procedures 11 26 Mas Malena dias 11 26 41 42 Progress screen DACKUD iio 11 27 11 4 3 Data list restoration sra 11 28 11 4 4 Progress screen restoration esse ier e eee ee eee eee 11 29 11 5 Backup Data Conversion Tool 11 30 WSA Operating EnvVironmMmen THT 11 30 11 5 2 How to install and start Backup Data Conversion Too eee 11 31 11 5 3 How to use Backup Data Conversion Tog eee eee 11 32 11 6 Errors and Corrective Actions 11 35 12 CNC DATA I O 12 1to 12 10 12 1 Features 12 1 12 2 Specifications 12 2 12 21 TT Ec sinis Te Te ae a TE dc 12 2 12 22 ACCESSTANO O snena a a ro 12 3 l2 29 d rc lc re gee ro ee te 12 3 12 3 Display 12 5 12 4 Operation Procedures 12 7 12 5 Error Messages and Corrective Actions 12 9 13 SFC MONITOR 13 1 to 13 42 13 1 Features 13 1 13 2 Specifications 13 4 1 e E o oashorad E tren atecaanamedcswdeutweacsaatetiatas 13 4 13 2 2 Devices and range that Can be monitored esse eee e eee e 13 7 BAS ACCESS And Sinto dao dd 13
564. s 002 4 5 6 816 0330 916 0394 1016 03F8 7 esz oso 992 osaa 1082 0408 6 ms e osr 027 oos ran eE eas 0930 928 usao 1028 404 ne A e28 Tas 926 Tan 1028 0405 ne cues 1210 oasa 1260 LEs dica os oso 1218 0402 1268 oara aor ee a 087 oar 1207 0401 1287 mes al x 3 O O 3 1 MPG Enabled0 Disable 1 Enable oe e 0 NAS Speed Position Contro Che MENU ol Original o sia osz ora 0092 1054 oare ers asar ore 0998 1075 0007 R n 0480 1214 oase 1268 oao me A E E nes 0600 1215 over 1205 ose i Ta 0551 017 os T care cal ats ar a 165 0658 1219 040 1200 oser CIE 0901 957 0395 1017 osea VZP Switch Latch li Switch O Disable A 7 3 E Enabled 1 Enab le 7 E V V Contro 6 66 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 5 25 AD75P A1SD75P module monitoring Buffer memory address 1 1300 0514 2300 08FC 3300 0CE4 SET Data MONIT ning Information Monitor Screen SET Che MEN ae Address Gi AHE 2299 08FB 3299 OCE3 4299 10CB o Arc a Dwel Address Address ei eo Are A Dye ll Address AT P ai HRE 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 67 6 5 25 AD75P A1SD75P module monitoring 0270 SET He MONIT exp OVERVIEW 02AF 02B1 to 02F0 o x 1 W AE G P A Sn ZT ITS ST CC e A 5 O O IMO wr ow
565. s monitoring local devices For switching the local device monitor to non execution state restart the ladder monitor and then switch the local device monitor to non execution state Continued to next page 3 72 3 8 Local Device Monitor 3 8 1 Operation procedure for local device monitor 3 9 Error Messages and Corrective Action This section describes the error messages displayed when the ladder monitor function is executed and PLC COMMUNICATION ERROR LOCK ON OTHER MACHINE PLEASE CANSEL Read key is pressed the selected file does not exist in the PLC drive 1 Cannot communicate with PLC CPU of the specified network No or station No 2 The specified drive does not exist File is locked with the peripheral equipment GX Developer GPPQ A3 CPU A4UCPU Check and correct the following 1 Does the specified PLC CPU exist 2 Is it online Data communication status 3 Has an error occurred 4 Is CPU No correct 5 Power on the GOT again and so on After reading and writing with the peripheral equipment GX Developer Z corrective action 22 gt O The specified keyword is different from l ENTRY CODE MISMATCH the keyword that is registered in the object EE the keyword that Is registered in PL the object PLC CPU and specify again oc C CPU O 1 An attempt was made to switch to the 2 ladder monitor screen when a Read the sequence program that written in the obje
566. s refer to the following lt gt 9 4 8 Hard copy output The touch operation of this key is invalid 1 This is displayed only when the MR J2M A series is connected 2 This is displayed only when the MR J3 series is connected Point When default is executed for the MR J3 series parameters The operation when default is executed differs depending on the displayed parameter screen as shown in 1 and 2 below 1 When the basic setting gain filter or extension setting parameter screen is displayed The OOOBH processing reference writing is possible only for basic setting gain filter and extension setting parameter is performed When the I O setting parameter screen is displayed The 000Cu processing reference writing is possible for all parameters is performed 9 32 9 4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens 9 4 6 Parameter setting de Parameter setting operation The following describes the procedure of changing the setting of the Auto tuning item as an example of the parameter setting operation oc uu a lt O gt oc Lu 0 oc O Z le Touch the key The parameter values within the servo amplifier are displayed on the screen CNC MONITOR FUNCTION Print SGEE The parameter read confirmation window is displayed Touch the key to read the parameter values within the servo amplifier to the GOT OK to read parameters Execute BACKUP
567. s a monitor screen a When the trigger condition is met while the GOT displays a screen other than monitor screens including the utility screen and ladder monitor screen the GOT does not execute the backup When a screen other than monitor screens is switched to a monitor screen the GOT executes the backup b When a monitor screen is switched to a screen other than monitor screens during the trigger backup the GOT stops the backup and the GOT deletes the data in process When the screen is switched to a monitor screen the GOT executes the backup again c When the following are operated the GOT does not execute the backup even if a screen other than monitor screens is switched to a monitor screen e Restarting the GOT e Changing the trigger backup setting with the GOT utility When another trigger condition is met during backup The GOT cannot detect that another trigger condition is met Trigger device Trigger ID 1 Trigger device Trigger ID 2 not detected Backup processing AU Le Trigger ID 1 Backup processing Trigger ID 2 Process notification i device Trigger ID 1 Process notification device Trigger ID 2 Trigger backup processing setting No notification 0 GS657 For ensuring the trigger backup establish a handshake with the trigger device and the process notification device An example of a handshake is shown on the next page 11 3 Display Operation 11 3 4 Trigger backup T
568. s among GOTs refer to the following ZE 237 GT Designer2 Version O Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual 92 App3 2 List of Differences between the GOT1000 series and GOT 900 series functions For using the following functions use GT Designer2 or OS of the corresponding version or later Applicable OS versions and communication drivers for GI16 G115 GT SoftGOT1000 and GT11 are differ O ent from those for GI10 The added functions for GT10 are listed separately from those for G115 GT i SoftGOT1000 and GT11 E Point f How to use this table ZS provides the versions of GT Designer2 and OS required for each GOT or communication unit A BF and the following provides description for the functions added with the version upgrade and the versions of GT Designer2 and OS with which the function is 2 compatible Regarding ZZZ and the following there may be a case where the function is not supported by a particular type of GOT even when the function is compatible with the version 5 In such a case check the version for the function and the version of the GOT and S use GT Designer2 or OS of the later version o Appendix 1 1 GT16 GT15 GT SoftGOT1000 and GT11 ZS Added GOT main unit Communication unit Version of GT l Target Models Version of OS Designer2 7 ui 9 O Z ui o o lt GT1695M XTBA GIT1695M XTBD 2 90U Standard monitor OS 04 02 GT1685M STBA GT1685M STBD 2 90U Standard monitor OS 04 02 GT1
569. s completed O am 2 z S SE LU O gt Zz am 2 z S Z O O 4 5 Basic Operation 4 25 4 5 5 Using the help function 2 Displaying comment The following example shows the procedure of displaying the comment in the Read mode Operation example lt Key operation gt lt Display gt D Input the HELP key in the Read mode HELP MENU 1 READ HELP 2 COMMENT DISPLAY CLEAR END 2 Select 2 COMMENT DISPLAY COMMENT DISP 12 YES 2 NO CLEAR END_ HELP MENU LT Select 1 YES O gt LD X0000 Display the comment of f 1 OUT Y0020 the device at the cursor position 2 LD X0000 Motor start limit D Move the cursor to the following step O LD X0000 1 gt OUT YO020 2 LD X0000 Motor start Check 4 26 4 5 Basic Operation 4 5 5 Using the help function 4 5 6 PLC memory all clear When input of a keyword is requested all parameters and sequence programs can be cleared together with the keyword registered in the ACPU using the operation below Operation example Display the keyword input request KEYWORD Stop operation of ACPU Set the target ACPU to the stop status Operation of PC memory all clear Inout ALLCLR and press the key A fo L aL a O fo L LR Peo Q Display of PC memory all clear process When the GOT starts clearing the process the display in the left appears column and the total number of bytes change sequentially ALL CLEAR kkkkkkkkkk ma
570. s displayed 8 The total number of steps in the current monitor PLC program is displayed b Key functions when the MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor is executed Function Exit Returns the screen to the one displayed when the ladder monitor was activated Switches the screen to the PLC reading screen to read from the controller the sequence program to be monitored PLCRD For further information about PLC reading see the following Subsection 3 3 3 Display lt lS D Zz O n Starts monitoring the displayed sequence program Displays the Menu window for ladder monitor 7_ gt This section 2 When the number of devices whose present and set values are within the display range shown in 2 on the preceding page is nine or more the devices to be displayed are switched Scroll the information upward and downward by a ladder block Scrolls the information downward by a screen W E it LY In search operation a search is continuously performed under the same conditions Displays back past device contact point coil searches or touch searches by one Stores the displayed screen to the memory card in BMP JPEG file format or prints it with a printer For further information about hard copies see the following Subsection 3 4 2 Hard copy output Cancel The operation of this key is invalid ES op Op y Q p B 5 S Ta E E lt U gt Jump the information upward and downward by ten
571. s section describes the system configuration of the network monitor S For connection type settings and precautions regarding the communication unit cable and connection type see the following manual 2 gt 5 G0T1000 Series Connection Manual 7 E m Z Target controller op gt Controller on QCPU Q mode QnACPU am ACPU QCPU A mode E Z 7 O Motion controller A series 6 nnan uE 1 Monitoring is not possible when the target CPU is a motion controller Q series 32 LL A Connection type 0 5 i S 1 When the GOT is connected to a QCPU Q mode QnACPU or motion controller CPU G O Available A Partly restricted x Unavailable D lt Function Connection type between GOT and controller O UN ere MELSECNET CC Link m E EO Direct CPU P E Ethernet H connection CC Link connection P connection connection connection MELSECNET IE connection 10 connection we a Monitors the statuses of the kE following networks e MELSECNET H network is Network O C e MELSECNET 10 network a monitor OE e MELSECNET II network a e CC Link IE controller network ar 1 Indicates the CC Link IE controller network connection a 2 Indicates CC Link connection Intelligent device station 3 Indicates CC Link connection via G4 i a 4 When the GOT is connected to the MELSECNET H or MELSECNET 10 use a QCPU and a network module QJ71LP21 QU71LP21 25 QU71LP21S 25 QU71LP21G or QU71BR11 of function version B or a
572. s set as follows Example Folder name for the 10th backup data for Ch 1 on November 22nd 2006 Folder name 06112210 Folder name Description YY Backup year the last two digits of the year MM Backup month 01 to 12 YYMMDDXX Backup date 01 to 31 XX Serial number 00 to 99 When names of folders for backup data include XX of 99 the backup data cannot be stored Up to 100 backups can be executed per channel in a day 11 8 11 2 Specifications 11 2 1 System configuration 11 2 2 Access range 1 2 3 Access range with connection types The following shows a target controller of the backup restore execution with each connection type Connection type Target controller Bus connection Direct CPU connection computer link connection Host station Ethernet connection With multi channel function With the multi channel function the backup and restoration is executed per channel Multiple CPU system When the target controller of the backup restore is the multiple CPU the backup is collectively executed for CPU No 1 to 4 The restoration is executed with specifying target controllers of the restoration multiple controllers possible 11 23 Precautions 1 Password for backup restore When a password for a controller is changed after setting the password for the backup restore set a new password for the backup restore For setting the password for the backup restore refer to the following Subsection 11
573. s the data list up and down by one page Switches the number of target controllers of the restoration e Single selection Select Single selection when selecting only one target controller of the Hu tiple single restoration selection selection e Multiple selection Select Multiple selection when selecting multiple target controllers of the restoration Switches the screen to the Backup restoration function Main menu screen Starts the restoration 11 28 11 4 Operation Procedures 11 4 3 Data list restoration 11 4 4 Progress screen restoration L This following describes the display details and the key functions on the Restoration function Progress L screen gt lt oe f O Display details D2 1 Restoration function Progress me HD p O 2 l S Ss Ch Nw PC Unit name status g Z 01 000 FF 1 Q25HCPU Restoring 01 000 FF 1 Q25HCPU O 9 01 000 FF 2 gt PARAM OPA ZD 01 000 gt K gt MAIN QPG Ow 3 11 4 5 LLI oc O E 7 LLI G o Y O lt a Return Cancel No Display details O 1 Displays the setting name for the backup restore Fixed Q 2 Displays the backup data name O O 3 Displays the channel No network No station No module No and unit name for the target controller of the restoration Displays the target controller status of the restoration Restoration target 4 O Not restoration target E kE x Access disabled Z Restoration failed S LL
574. same as the access range when the GOT is connected to a controller Refer to the following manual for details of the access range K gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual 2 7 Controllers that can be monitored and the Access Range 4 4 4 2 Specifications 4 2 2 Access range 4 2 3 Precautions The points of precaution when using MELSEC A list editor are described 1 Reading the MELSEC A list editor by specifying a command The MELSEC A list editor cannot be ready by specifying a dedicated command OVERVIEW 2 Using the MELSEC A list editor together with the ladder monitor Even if you execute the MELSEC A list editor with the ladder monitor activated edited information will not be reflected on the Ladder Monitor screen To reflect such edited information perform the PLC reading of the ladder monitor again 3 Executing the MELSEC A list editor Execute the MELSEC A list editor when the target PLC is not running It cannot be executed when the PLC is running SYSTEM MONITOR 4 Changing sequence programs parameters using another peripheral equipment When using the MELSEC A list editor do not change programs or parameters in the PLC CPU from other peripheral equipment If you change programs or parameters either reset the GOT main unit or set the PLC No again If you carelessly change the program on one PLC from multiple units of peripheral equipment including GOT the contents of the program in the PLC CPU and the p
575. see eee eee 4 24 40 USNE Neb TACI N EHET 4 25 4 5 6 PLC memory all clear sse eee 4 27 4 6 List of Operation Procedures 4 28 e A o ae em ie Teens ene oe Sire TT 4 28 46 2 Operation in writemode WY TT 4 29 4 6 3 Operation in read mode HI 4 29 4 64 Operationininser moder vesical as 4 30 4 6 5 Operation in delete mode D 4 30 4 6 6 Operation in parameter mode P 4 31 AG Operation AM ome mode ia a ad iio luc cial 4 32 4 7 Error Messages and Corrective Actions 4 33 4 7 1 Error messages and corrective actions in direct CPU Connection eee ee eee eee 4 33 4 7 2 PLC CPU error messages and troubleshooting ccoccccconnnnnnccnnnccccononanncccnnnccnnnnnnnnccnnnnnnnnnos 4 36 4 7 3 Error using list editor function on the link system sse eee eee e eee e eee 4 37 5 MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR 9 1t0o5 34 5 1 Features 5 1 5 2 Specifications 9 3 Diels E TTT 5 3 DE ee e Te LT 5 5 52 9 Sr e lt 11 Te dt dodo 5 5 5 3 Display 5 6 5 4 Operation Procedures 5 9 5 4 1 Key arrangement and a list of key TunciiOnS sse eee ee eee 5 9 O42 Selection and Operation Orimodes iria nea ers eee 5 12 5 4 3 Sequence program display eee eee 5 13 54 4 Searching commands and CeVICES sca ethers lis 5 15 DAS A 5 17 5 46 Changing Operands TTT 5 20 547 DEISTING command S TT 5 21 5 4 8 Sequence program all clear ooonccccconnconccconnnccnoononnnonancncnnnnnnnnnonnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnanoss 5 22 SO EPIL CACAO S
576. selection 1 Auto tuning Com pulse multiply numer Com pulse multiply denom In position range Position control gain 1 Pos com acc dec time cons Internal speed command 1 Internal speed command 2 Internal speed command 3 Acceleration time constant Deceleration time constant S pattern acc dec time cons Print Cancel screen Print Various test operations can be performed gt 9 4 6 Various test operations can be performed on the connected servo amplifier Display examples JOG operation Motor less operation MR J2S A Servo amp Monitor Servo amp Moni Lor L OSC Print Print sereen Sereen The servo amplifier rotates while the Forward or Reverse key is Simulates motion of the servo motor within the servo amplifier even touched when the servo motor is not connected 9 2 9 1 Features LO 9 2 Specifications 9 2 1 System configuration oc uu a lt O gt oc Lu 0 oc O Z le This section describes the system configuration of the servo amplifier monitor For connection type settings and precautions regarding the communication unit cable and connection type see the following manual lt gt GOT1000 Series Connection Manual oc 26 Servo amplifiers targeted for the servo amplifier monitor 5 Si Servo amplifier MELSERVO J2 Super series MELSERVO J2M series S kE MELSERVO J3 series 7 o 2 S A Connection type a O Available X Unavailable Funct
577. setting of the GOT utility Split the ladder block Correct the program with GX Developer and operate the GOT for reading the file from the PLC Continued to next page 13 41 SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR CNC MONITOR FUNCTION BACKUP RESTORE oc O E Z G O LL 7 APPENDICES INDEX Error message The file file name is broken Perform PLC Read and read the file again The device range has been changed Please read the file again Cannot read programs other than SFC program 13 42 The GOT cannot display the program file data on the block list screen or SFC diagram monitor screen because the program file is broken The GOT cannot read the target device values of the SFC monitor because the device range is changed in the PLC parameter setting during the SFC monitor The program file specified by a key on the block list screen or the SFC diagram monitor screen is not a SFC program 13 9 Error Messages and Corrective Action Corrective action Operate the GOT for reading the file from the PLC Operate the GOT for reading the file from the PLC Specify a SFC program by a key on the block list screen or the SFC diagram monitor screen APPENDICES m 25 n n 5 Appendix1 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series The following describes the functions added by version upgrade of the GT Designer2 Version2 90U z For function comparison
578. settings are made to E the PLC parameter PLC file setting is set S e When the comment file is not set Not used e When the comment file is set to Use the same file name as the program S e When a keyword is entered for each memory E 6 2 O 2 4 Operation Procedure Common to the System Monitor Screens 2 25 2 4 4 Switching the display format DEC HEX and comment no comment display 2 4 5 Quick test operation of monitor devices e Before performing the quick test operations of the system monitor function such as turning ON or OFF bit device changing the word device current value changing the settings or current values of the timer or counter and changing the buffer memory current value read through the manual carefully and make yourself familiar with the operation method During quick test operation never change the data of the devices which are used to perform significant operation for the system False output or malfunction can cause an accident The quick test operation procedure for monitor devices is described below The Entry Monitor screen is taken as an example to describe quick test operation when the system monitor function is executed The operation procedure is the same even if the batch monitor TC monitor or BM monitor is selected Example of quick test operation when the entry monitor is selected DEW ICE MONITOR PliNo 0 OK TES TEMEN ORE ChNo 1 NetNo 0lST FF CPUNo 0 Snn test operatio
579. sonal computer by touching the computer 2 82L Extended function OS personal computer screen displayed on operation function PC Remote Operation 03 13 the GOT using the RGB display function Continued to next page App 25 Item Set overlay screen Test function Project Script Screen Script Object Script Key Code App 26 _ Version of GT Description Version of OS Designer2 Number of screens that can be called on GT11 is extended to the same as GI15 Up to 2047 screens 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 Screen calling setting with dragging i 9 qu galles 2 43V possible Specifying of placement position Front Back for the basic and called screens is possible Disable background colors of overlay screen when setting an overlay screen can be set Function for changing device value with displaying test window Function to execute scripts in unit of project file Word device values can be converted into data in the specified data type and the GOT can read or write the data Data type conversion function Function to execute scripts in unit of screen Word device values can be converted into data in the specified data type and the GOT can read or write the data Data type conversion function The file operation functions are added Function to execute scripts in unit of object width height and decimal_point are added
580. splay screen and the key functions displayed on the screen 1 Displayed contents oc uu a lt O gt oc Lu 0 oc O Z le _ Slot Number Ss Funet jon Func 12 3 45678 E Func 1 2 37 8 MN OFF m ON z m oe RD Input Function Output Function see BT w e pus 00000000 ooo O DOG DI4 TLC PTO T a S pn TO Pn Ez oooooooo 000 o 1 DI1 WNG PT2 52 1 S 05925225 p12 AM PTS 25 00000000 BING ooo S DI3 Ma PTA 25 T OR or E jop0000000 STP 69009002 TPO D D D D D D D U D D D D D D D H D D D D D D D D UU LC O kE 7 E 2 When MR J2S OCP is monitored S a 1 Input Output Function Displays the ON jf or OFF C status for each I O signal 2 Key functions O The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations of the function lt lt device display screen S 5 Key Function Changes to the DI DO display screen 3 This section EZ LC C Changes to the ABS data screen lt _ gt This section EZ 6 T 09 Changes to the amplifier information screen U gt This section EJ Changes to the unit composition list screen 7 This section 4 7 O Returns to the function selection menu screen gt o A lt Exits the servo amplifier monitor Stores the displayed screen to the memory card in BMP JPEG file format or prints it with a printer For further informat
581. splays the history of encoder present values servo command values and monitor present values of the ABS axis at servo amplifier power on off or at home position return lt gt 8 4 9 Present Value History Monitor screen Not displayed when using the GT155 1 8 4 Operation Procedures 8 4 2 Monitor Menu screen 8 4 3 Present Value Monitor screen This section describes the display data of the Present Value Monitor screen and the key functions displayed on the screen U gt o gt Displayed contents O Present value Monitor PC READY M2000 ir amin RER Ea E Ups All Ax 5V ON Acpt M2049 E q E OMi US E yo ths A LM UE S 2 F inedebus mesetas S L PLS n East iee M2075 f Test REQ PERA SO L PLS MAN PLS 1 Enab le M2081 i MAN PLS 2 Enable M2052 ue PLS MAN PLS Axia ERR CMO pa e E 2545B7 B B101 1215141516 Z S EERS 2 zm Syn Ene 12383456 68 B1D1112 x O AO A zZ iT 4 1 2 3 x Q UU 1 The axis numbers of the running axes being monitored are displayed a UU The feed present values or actual present values of the running axes are 2 displayed Touching the display part of the monitored value switches to the 2 Feed PV Actual PV o positioning monitor screen of the touched axis number 2 7 8 4 7 Positioning Monitor screen Whether the servo ready signals major minor errors and servo error detection signals are ON lit or OFF not
582. ss sse eee eee 6 5 32 Q62DA Q64DA module monitoring sss sse eee eee 6 5 33 QD62D QD62E QD62 module monitoring sss sss sss sese eee 6 5 34 QD75P QD75D module monitoring sss sss sees eee eee 6 5 35 QD75M module MONitOriNgQ cccccccccccccccccccnonccnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonononoss 6 5 36 QD75MH module monitoring ccccccccccccccccconnncnnnnnonnnnnnnonnnnnonnnncnnnns Operating I O Module Monitor Screen 6 6 1 Specifying the module to be monitored sss eee eee 6 6 2 Monitor screen configuration and key functions esse eee ee eee e ees 6 7 Error Messages and Corrective Action 7 NETWORK MONITOR 7 1 Features 7 2 Specifications 7 3 7 4 Tae A System CONMOULATON T 7 2 2 Network information that can be monitored sss sees ee ee eee eee arar ACCESS Te A O O TA Display Operation Procedures FAN A A NN A AAA FAD Detaled MONO nit adi TAS TOMER Stalon MONO lia eect neice aise 7 4 4 Other station communication status monitor esse ee ee ee ee ee ee e 7 4 5 Other station data link status monitor ee ee ee 7 4 6 Other station parameter status monitor esse eee eee 7 4 7 Other station CPU operation status monitor eee ee eee 7 4 8 Other station CPU RUN status monitor sese ee e eee ee ee e eee 7 4 9 Other station loop status monitor eee eee eee eee e 7 5 Error Message and Corrective Action 8 Q MOTION MONITOR 8 1 Features 8 2 Specifications 8 3 8 4 B28 System COMUN sra idad Bue ee PANGS irradia
583. ssages for the SFC monitor and the corrective actions Error message Failed to write the value to the device Failed to communicate with CPU File access error Confirm the CF card Failed to get the information of CPU because of bad connection Failed to save files because of an insufficient capacity of CF card The file file name is broken The file is unselected Failed to write file name to CF card Change the Data save location of Q QnA ladder monitor to A or B The ladder block is too big to display The specified block does not exist Confirm the program In the device test mode the GOT fails to write the value into the device of the PLC CPU The GOT cannot communicate with the target PLC CPU A file access error occurs The GOT fails to collect data from the PLC CPU The CF card has insufficient space for storing files The file read from the CF card is broken The GOT fails to write the file into the CF card The SFC monitor is started with Data save location is set to a drive other than A Built in CF card and B Memory card in the MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor setting The GOT cannot display a sequence program in the zoom window because the program has a ladder block with 25 or more lines The GOT cannot display the specified block data in the SFC diagram because the specified block does not exist 13 9 Error Messages and Corrective Action Fe CNC DATA I O
584. st editor for MELSEC A 01 02 O z S Function to display edit the sequence Option OS program read out from the FXCPU in the 2 18U List editor for MELSEC FX O list mode 02 02 Ww oc Extended function OS ep List editor for Supporting display of Chinese Simplified 2 27D List editor for MELSEC FX O ae MELSEC FX 02 04 2 O Supporting display of Chinese Simplified 5 Raz aa une Extended function OS Traditional German and Korean 2 27D List editor for MELSEC FX O GT11 supports display of Chinese 102 04 Simplified Traditional and Korean o D Function to monitor the servo amplifier Servo amplifier Option OS O and also to change parameters execute 2 18U a x monitor function Servo amplifier monitor 02 02 E test run etc lt o Function to execute servo monitor and E Option OS 2 parameter setting for motion controller 2 18U x x Q motion monitor 02 02 CPU Q series Parameter setting is enabled for 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 x x Q172HCPU Q173HCPU A i ia mene S ti tion to Q17NDCPU 2 63R Sas 5 nction upporting connection to n baia ES Q motion monitor 03 07 eS e 2 O Enables clearing the SFC error history 2 63R Option OS an Universal model QCPU only l Q motion monitor 03 07 es Supporting connection to CC Link IE Option OS 2 77F x x controller network Q motion monitor 03 12 Function to monitor the MELDAS that is Option OS 0 2 18U x X Ll CNC monitor connected to the GO
585. t a Oo LU 9p KE m INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR Parameter setting screen The following describes the contents displayed on the PLC diagnostics screen and the function of on screen keys 1 Displayed contents 1 Memory capacity 2 File reg capacity 0 block 3 Latch range M 50O M1023 C 100 C 199 16bit S 500 5999 C 220 C 255 32bit D200 D 511 4 RUM terminal input No Display contents Sets the memory space number of steps 1 Memory capacity If you touch the section you can change the memory space Sets the memory space number of blocks allocated to the file register 2 File reg capacity 4 RUN terminal input Latch range Touch the D section and input the number of blocks Sets the latch range power failure hold area Touch the number display section and input the value Sets whether or not to use one of the FX PLC input terminals for RUN input Touch the O section and set the device to be set for the RUN terminal 5 Default Initializes the parameters L H Point P Memory space for Kana comments after changing memory space file register space If the memory space is set smaller than the total of the file register space and kana comment space the kana comment space is automatically reduced With the MELSEC FX list editor the kana comment space is not displayed Note that if any setting as described below is made th
586. t Module Monitor Screens PP A f o W e T e 1 2 0001 0002 o o f No 6 57 6 5 20 A1S62DA module monitoring LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR OVERVIEW SYSTEM MONITOR MELSEC A LIST EDITOR O UU gt Q G E uu 9 y JJ ul Z oc O E Z le NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 6 5 21 A1SD7O module monitoring Refer to the following for further information about the screen for A1SD70 and the buffer memory address K gt 6 5 13 AD70 module monitoring 6 58 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 5 21 A1SD70 module monitoring 6 5 22 A1S62RD module monitoring Buffer memory address N eee EN 10 11 000A 000B SET Data MONIT AISG2RD Operation Monitor Screen ES 18 to 21 0012 to 0015 E emp Value C e value C Time Disab led Enab led 21 LS 88 0002 0003 A 16 bits QL LS Count 0000000010011010 1 Enabled 0 Disabled a 0000 000000000000000 1 1 Completed 0 Not Completed OVERVIEW QuE O O SYSTEM MONITOR 7 ea e a s T ion detection CH 2 Disconnection detection fe WOT Error Temp Sensor Type 0 O Error Code 100 TIE E Z Qs GF QO E Sm LC EI O SET Data IV END O A1S62RD Input Output Monitor Screen RESET Che MENU ul A RA A eee E BUL S A Outputs Y 2 WDT Error 00 L lt READY i 1 S 2 Error Reset R 3 CH1 Disc S 03 3 9 4 CH2 Disconnected J J L L J JL J ep 0 3 0 gt x lt T T AE LU So
587. t window shown in b Touch input b Key functions a E Key Function S zZ x Closes the password input window and cancels the password input operation S H Switches the key type to the value A Switches the key type to the alphabet uppercase O 47 Switches the key type to the alphabet lowercase T AC Deletes all the input values and characters De Deletes an input value or character a O Q Verifies the password set in the password input area a A Enter When the password verification for the first file is successful the password verification for the Z other files is automatically executed with the same password x lt ULU a 13 5 How to Operate PLC Read Screen 13 19 13 5 1 Displayed contents 13 5 2 Key functions The following shows the functions of the keys used for operating the PLC read screen Key Back select CPU x y i y Recommend Proceed Function Returns the screen to the last screen that is displayed right before the PLC read screen appears The key is disabled when the last screen is the GOT utility screen or user created monitor screen Displays the communication setting window L 13 5 2 1 Communication setting window Exits the SFC monitor and returns the screen to the SFC monitor startup screen Scrolls the display area up and down by one line Scrolls the display area up and down by one page Available only when 0 Program Memory is selected from the t
588. tc are displayed For the GT1695M X GT1685M S GT1595 X GT1585V S GT1585 S GT1575V S or GT1575 S the MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor displays a sequence program of up to 15 lines one line up to 11 contacts 12 or more contacts will be looped back on a single screen 3 2 Specifications 3 2 1 System configuration 3 2 2 Devices and range that can be monitored 1 MELSEC A ladder monitor O Possible x Impossible D t E Device Ladder display pena or Search operation gt input 000 to XFFF hexadecimal e AC 2 Output YO0O to YFFF hexadecimal to YFFF hexadecimal O Internal relay A to M8191 O Z Latch relay LO to L819 to L8191 O Step relay em o to 88191 S 09 gt ep Q oc O E Z le oc T Q G lt l Z O H O Z S LL x IX OOO OO VO Oy OO OO oc Q z UU gt kE U is 2 MELSEC FX ladder monitor O O O Possible x Impossible ae 2 gt UU Device monitor Device Device range Ladder display Search operation display UU O Output Y000 to Y337 octadecimal JO oo O Z Fe zS i I00 to 130 four points Fx0 SOO IOO to 150 six points Fx1 Fx2 s ptp 16 to 18 three points Fx1 Fx2 x x E 1010 to 1060 six points Fx1 Fx2 2 Extension register RO to R32767 Lok O 6 2 gt O 3 2 Specifications 3 9 3 2 2 Devices and range that can be monitored 3 MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor O Possible x Impossible Device mon
589. tem configuration SERVO AMPLIFIER MONITOR Y CNC MONITOR Y FUNCTION LLI oc O E 7 LLI G o Y O lt a SFC MONITOR CNC DATA I O APPENDICES INDEX 5 Motion controller CPU a OS for motion controller CPU The OS for the motion controller CPU cannot be backed up or restored For backing up or restoring setting data for the motion controller CPU install an appropriate OS on the motion controller CPU in advance b Backup restore for motion controller CPU The GOT backs up or restores data stored in the SRAM built in the motion controller CPU regardless of the operation mode For writing data to the FLASH ROM built in the motion controller CPU restore the data to the SRAM and then write the data in the SRAM to the FLASH ROM with MT Developer 6 Backup data 1 Storing backup data When backups for the same channel are executed several times the backup data are stored in a CF card or USB memory Backup data stored in the CF card or USB memory are not overwritten 2 Storing backup data Backup data are stored in a CF card or USB memory with the following folder structure CF card USB memory s gt sssss s sss ss sss ss sss ss sse s s gt gt lt Memory card that is in the drive set as the storage location for backup data BACKUP SYS51BKUP YYMMDDXX 00 Folder for storing backup data SYS2BKUP 3 Folders for backup data Backup data are stored by the folder and a folder name YYMMDDXX i
590. tep List A AA 2 The following table shows the displayed contents 1 Block No Displays the block No of the displayed block 2 Keys for operations in the active step list window shown in b Touch input Displays the step numbers and step comments of the active steps in the displayed block 3 Active step list Selecting a step searches for the step and the GOT displays the step data on the SFC diagram monitor screen b Key functions Key Function Displays the step list window step List L 3 This section 3 Step list window A Scrolls the display area up and down by one line Point Precautions for active step list window When the statuses of steps change the displayed contents of the active step list in the active step list window change Therefore selecting a step may be difficult depending on the frequency of the step status change When selecting a step is difficult select a step from the step list in the step list window This section MF 3 Step list window 13 7 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen 13 35 13 7 3 Menus SERVO AMPLIFIER CNC MONITOR MONITOR FUNCTION BACKUP RESTORE de CNC DATA I O oc O E Z Oo O LL 7 APPENDICES INDEX 3 Active block list window The GOT displays active blocks in the read SFC program a Displayed screen The following table shows the displayed contents 1 Keys for operations in the active block list
591. ter station of the QnACPU Release the set keyword 7 30 7 5 Error Message and Corrective Action 8 QMOTION MONITOR Lu gt am Lu O SI gt a z lt 6116 er15 BLH eil s10 dE O E 8 1 Features 5 x O gt Lu kE 2 The Q motion monitor enables the servo monitoring and parameter setting of the motion controller CPU 0 The following are the features of the Q motion monitor Various servo monitor data can be displayed on multiple monitor screens cc The Q motion monitor function has multiple monitor screens on which you can monitor servo data in a ra gt zZ variety of patterns ce QO Display examples 25 WwW Present Value Monitor Error List LU Present value Monitor Error List O a Feed 7 H aniani gt REG S SL S PCPU READY M9074 rror Definition Sims STR Sera a pata E a S reso TERNE WE Min A present value clare was ade shi e the E h Ext EMG tap Tenut Era 13 34 1 300 corresponding axis was operating o dire servo OFF Ne iag 4 26 Maj Ata start sans OFF initial processig the ap is lt 3 Jers ero ena petect czas 13 34 1 1004 mt yet installed a sv err ccourred or the cable is faulty cN Eg 0 S se ee ee 4 26 Mir A present value ar ms rade hile te m PLS WDT Error lt MOO7S ay 13 35 1 200 corresponding axis nas operating or daring servo OFF 9 h ibe ae a M2038 gt 4 26 Min A present value carge was rade abi le the EL
592. the control station and the normal station for the remote master station and the remote I O station and for the master station and all the sub stations 5 Maximum the maximum value of link scan time Minimum the minimum value of link scan time Current the current value of link scan time This shows the communication status of the host Only for MELSECNET II local station 6 P MTR WAIT Ready to receive parameters from the master station Cyclic com Normal communication Com suspension Communication is suspended because the host is disconnected 7 This shows the network category network number and station number Continued to next page 7 12 7 4 Operation Procedures 7 4 1 Line monitor No Display contents For the MELSECNET H and MELSECNET 10 network systems the loop status is displayed as shown below Forward loop F Reverse loop R a Forward loop OK b Forward loop OK c Forward loop NG Reverse loop OK Reverse loop NG Reverse loop OK F d Loopback in execution e Forward loop NG f MELSECNET 10 coaxial g MELSECNET 10 coaxial Reverse loop NG bus OK bus NG F ERES A 1 1 1 AR LF E A A oe R ee R A For the MELSECNET Il network system the loop status is displayed as shown below Forward loop F Reverse loop R a Data link in execution in forward loop b Data link in execution in reverse c Loopback is performed in the loop forward reverse loo
593. the coordinates and the Object 2 90U O size using values Windows fonts applicable 2 09K Standard monitor OS 01 02 Text Stroke font applicable 2 43V Standard monitor OS 03 01 HEN x Enables specifyng of background color 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 loo O Standard monitor OS 01 01 DES O Standard monitor OS 02 04 O e Japanese 12dot e Japanese 16dot Gothic 2 04E e Japanese 16dot Mincho Japanese supporting Europe 12dot e Japanese supporting Europe 16dot Gothic Japanese supporting Europe 16dot Mincho e Chinese Standard font Simplified 12dot 2 27D Simplified 16dot Mincho e Chinese Simplified supporting Europe 12dot e Chinese Simplified supporting Boot OS 02 04 G e Chinese Europe 16dot Mincho Supporting the TrueType numerical font Standard monitor OS 04 02 TrueType font 2 90U 7 segment Boot OS 04 02 U Enables setting the KANJI region 2 47Z Standard monitor OS 03 02 Supporting Thai 2 472 Standard monitor OS 03 02 The following font name is changed e Stroke Standard Font JPN Stroke font The following fonts are added e Stroke Standard Font China GB e Stroke Standard Font China 2 58L Stroke Standard Font 03 03 Extended function OS U GB supporting Hangul The following font is added e Stroke Font JPN Option OS Stroke Font JPN 03 03 2 58L x x xX O Continued to next page App 18
594. the servo motor connected to the servo amplifier 1 This is displayed only for the MR J3 series 2 This is not displayed when monitoring the MR J2M P8A 2 Key functions The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations of the amplifier information display screen Function Changes to the DI DO display screen gt gt This section Changes to the function device screen 7 This section Es Changes to the ABS data screen lt _ gt This section Changes to the unit composition list screen lt _ gt This section EJ Returns to the function selection menu screen Exits the servo amplifier monitor Stores the displayed screen to the memory card in BMP JPEG file format or prints it with a printer For further information about hard copies refer to the following lt 9 4 8 Hard copy output The touch operation of this key is invalid 9 26 9 4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens 9 4 5 Diagnostics function 2 ABS data display screen The following describes the display data of the ABS data display screen and the key functions displayed on the screen 1 Displayed contents Encoder data to oc uu a lt O gt oc Lu 0 oc O Z le Absolute position data Value of each motor edge pulse Command pulse value 1696721441 59469128 Encoder data x lt Current position lt Position at power
595. ther information about items 1 to 12 shown above see the page that follows MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 2 7 TC Monitor Monitoring Timers and Counters 2 41 2 7 1 Information displayed on the TC Monitor screen and key functions 2 42 2 The following table describes the key functions displayed on the TC Monitor screen Key switch TEST MENU T O y Function Activates the Quick test operation Section 2 4 5 Quick test operation of monitor devices Switches the screen to the functional change menu screen to activate another monitor function or terminate the system monitor function L 3 Section 2 4 6 Changing screens Switches the screen to the display format switching screen to change the value display format DEC HEX on the TC Monitor screen or comment no comment display Section 2 4 4 Switching the display format DEC HEX and comment no comment display Switches the screen to the Device entry screen to enter or test monitor devices Entering monitor devices gt Section 2 4 2 Entering monitor devices specifying monitor stations and devices Test operation gt Section 2 9 Test Operation Canceling keywords gt Section 2 7 3 Procedure for canceling TC monitor keywords Scroll displayed information upward or downward by a line to display the preceding or next monitor device that is not currently displayed When five or
596. timer TO was changed from K10 to K100 4 22 4 5 Basic Operation 4 5 2 Changing Overwriting commands 4 5 3 Adding Inserting commands The example shown below is used to describe how to add sequence program commands m gt oc LU gt Before addition O 7 P K80 K5 D20 14 END E Pl kau K5 D20 O g hp 2 Amon z command gt After addition Mov p2ok2v01 af S op T A __7 P_K80 K5 D20 14 MOV D20 K2Y018 Add the MOV 19 END command oc O E rg O SS Zz A xO Operation example 77 a lt a a E lt Key operation gt lt Display gt Select the Insert mode 4 OUT TO 4 K100 INSERT NE 6 ANI MO oc O E m Li E 9 mr q 6 Ll 104 I H Read the 14th step to insert the command D Input the MOV D20 K2Y0018 14 D20 me 14 K2Y0018 m S 19 gt END 20 NOP y a The command of MOV D20 K2Y0018 was 2 added to Step 14 5 o oc O ST UU Zz z 2 oc O z O X LUC O Lu Z oc O E FE O gt Z S kE O gt O 4 5 Basic Operation 4 23 4 5 3 Adding Inserting commands 4 5 4 Deleting commands The example shown below is used to describe how to delete sequence program commands Before deletion c Delete the ANI SLD TO __MO command 6 ANI MO 7 P K80 K5 D20 jasal o After deletion 5 LD TO Delete the ANI 7 P K80 K5 D20 MO command f
597. ting data files and data cannot be written into the controller The target controller of the restoration is a different kind of controller from the target controller of the backup The restoration cannot be executed e The passwords for files written in the because passwords for files of the controller are changed controller are set 11 36 11 6 Errors and Corrective Actions Corrective action Install a CF card or USB memory to the drive specified for storing the backup setting or backup data Install a CF card or USB memory with enough free space Delete unnecessary files in the CF card or USB memory Set the CF card or USB memory to writable The attributes of backup data files stored in the CF card or USB memory cannot be changed with the GOT Set the files to writable with a personal computer Check if the drive specified for storing the backup setting or backup data exists Check if the CF card unit is installed on the GOT Check the following GOT e Check if the cable is correctly connected to the GOT e Check if the correct communication driver is installed on the GOT e Check if the communication settings are correctly set Controller e Check if the parameters are set e Check if the cable is correctly connected to the controller e Check if the controller is turned on Check with the administrator of the system regarding the passwords for files of the controller Corrective action Check
598. ting for latch setting WDT setting Set the value of the watchdog other than AnA AnU timer in the unit of 10 ms Setting of I O control system only for Set the I O control system A3HCPU and A3MCPU When parameter setting is complete write the PLC CPU Completion of setting write 1 1 y S GO gt 2 2 gt CLEAR gt gt 4 Setting for multiple items is also available gt GO End of writing is displayed PARAM_ gt 2 gt 1 1 gt Capacity gt GO gt END gt 2 For main 1 gt 2 gt Top number of L gt Top number of S gt GO input unit 1K step y gt Capacity gt GO gt END gt 2 For sub input unit 1K step 1 gt y gt points gt GO END gt 2 For file register input unit 1K point 1 gt 2 gt Top number of L gt Top number of S gt GO gt 2 Top number of timer gt GO gt 2 T ice f 1 gt 3 gt No of timers gt GO gt gt device for storage _ 1 1 2 of setting values Es Top number of M E gt 2 R GO L Top number of timer gt GO gt 2 gt No of counters gt gt Top device for storage gt GO A of setting values
599. tion GT15 User s Manual Section 13 12 GOT Data Package Acquisition The key is not displayed on the GT1555 Q and GT1550 Q GOT data package Deletes the oldest data among backup data already stored in a CF card or USB memory in the ES Ss Delete backup data GOT Ends the backup restore and then the screen is switched to the backup restore startup screen 11 26 11 4 Operation Procedures 11 4 1 Main menu 11 4 2 Progress screen backup E This following describes the display details and the key functions on the Backup function Progress screen L a 25 U U O Display details zz uj O nS 1 Backup function Progress i Setting SYS1BKUP cc 2 Data 01011403 O Ch Nw PC Unit name Status ge Z 3 01 000 FF 1 025HCPU e Backing up 01 000 FF 1 025HCPU OF 01 000 FF 2 PARAM OPA 25 01 000 FF 3 MAINI QPG o 01 000 FF 4 MAIN2 QPG Sp End of List S MAINS QPG 1 1 3 MAIN PG 4 5 Cancel LLI oc O E 7 LLI G o Y O lt a No Display details 1 Displays the setting name for the backup restore Fixed O 2 Displays the backup data name E Q 3 Displays the channel No network No station No module No and unit name for the target controller of the backup z Displays the target controller status of the backup 4 Backup target O Not backup target x Access disabled 5 E Displays the backup progress status 2 5 Backing up The backup is in processing T Aborting The backup cancel
600. tion instruction format T The program in the safety function block is not displayed 2 E safety function block S fe E W Z T2 z S 200 Local device monitor not execu Exit PLCRD Mon Menu T l o ral 58 3 C9 100 0 46 aA z S S Z o E 6 6 2 gt O 3 2 Specifications 3 13 3 2 4 Precautions c The following shows the GOT operation when the program in a safety function block has the target of the search operation Search operation GOT operation The GOT adds and displays the ladder block that shows the FB definition name in the application instruction format in the last row Device search Contact point search l l l l For the continuous search when the program in the safety function block has multiple target devices the ladder block is added to the last row only one time Coil search The GOT displays the ladder block that shows the FB definition name in the application Step search l l instruction format corresponding to the searched step The GOT adds and displays the ladder block that shows the FB definition name in the Defect search application instruction format in the last row and ends the defect search The operaiton is the same as that when all the defective devices are searched 3 14 3 2 Specifications 3 2 4 Precautions 3 3 Display This section describes the operation procedure from turning on the power to the GOT to ladder monitor function display 3 3 1 Outline until t
601. tion Overtightening can cause a drop short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS CAUTION When loading the communication unit to the GOT fit it to the connection interface of the GOT and tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a drop failure or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit When mounting the multi color display board onto the GOT tighten the mounting screws within the specified torque range Loose tightening may cause the unit and or GOT to malfunction due to poor contact Overtightening may damage the screws unit and or GOT they might malfunction Push the option function board onto the corresponding connector until it clicks so that it will be secured firmly Push the multi color display board onto the corresponding connector so that it will be secured firmly When inserting a CF card into the GOT push it into the insertion slot until the CF card eject button will pop out Failure to do so may cause a malfunction due to poor contact When inserting removing a CF card into from the GOT turn the CF card access switch off in advance Failure to do so may corrupt data within the CF card When removing a CF card from the GOT make sure to support the CF card by hand as it may pop out Failure to do so may cause the CF card to drop from the
602. tion 5 4 3 onward How to change modes Touch the MODE button Each time you touch this button the mode changes Touch the aoe button The current mode is displayed AND N In the case the mode cannot be changed In the following cases only READ mode is allowed If you try to change to other than READ mode an error message is displayed To change to other than READ mode take the action below Error Message Description Corrective action PLC is running The FX PLC is in the RUN status Stop the FX PLC The protect switch of the EEPROM memory Switch off the protect switch of the EEPROM cassette is on memory cassette a Tre EPROM memos castas ea Set a memory other than EPROM as the memory to write to 5 12 5 4 Operation Procedures 5 4 2 Selection and operation of modes 5 4 3 Sequence program display Sequence programs are read from the FX PLC to the GOT and displayed There are two displaying methods specifying the step number and scrolling one screen at a time z Display using cursor keys O 1 Operation Scroll with 4 or w de O Z O 2 Example i Scroll one line upward or downward gt 128 MPP 129 DIV D56 O K200 E A S lt E Scrolling one line upward a Scrolling one line downward 2 128 MPP 128 MPP 129 DIV 129 DIV S D lt im Display specifying the step number 3 1 Operation al 2 Example Displaying step number 123 E V m gt a Oo LU 9p KE m
603. tion of PLC manufactured by TOSHIBA MACHINE CO LTD Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co Ltd Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Hitachi Ltd Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Fuji Electric FA Components amp Systems Co Ltd Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Matsushita Electric Works Ltd Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by YASKAWA Electric Corporation Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Yokogawa Electric Corporation Abbreviation of Allen Bradley PLC manufactured by Rockwell Automation Inc Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by GE Fanuc Automation Corporation Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by LS Industrial Systems Co Ltd Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Schneider Electric SA Abbreviation of PLC manufactured by Siemens AG Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by OMRON Corporation Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by Shinko Technos Co Ltd Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by CHINO CORPORATION Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by Fuji Electric Systems Co Ltd Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by Yamatake Corporation Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by Yokogawa Electric Corporation Abbreviation of temperature controller manufactured by RKC INSTRUMENT INC Abbreviation of PC CPU Unit manufactured by CONTEC CO LTD Abbreviation of GOTs that use the server function Abbreviation of G
604. tion selection menu screen Exits the servo amplifier monitor Stores the displayed screen to the memory card in BMP JPEG file format or prints it with a printer For further information about hard copies refer to the following 9 4 8 Hard copy output The touch operation of this key is invalid 1 This is displayed only when the MR J2M P8A is connected 9 42 9 4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens 9 4 7 Test operations de 9 4 8 Hard copy output This section describes how to store a screen to the memory card in BMP JPEG file format or print it with a printer when executing the amplifier monitor Hard copy methods differ depending on the GOT to be used 1 GOT with VGA or higher resolution Hard copy output operations are performed by touching the Print Screen or Cancel Print key displayed on the screen oc uu a lt O gt oc Lu 0 oc O Z le o O 56 2 WBE Cnt mode reg brake select A5 1 Function selection 1 SE 2 Auto tuning 3 Com pulse multiply numer 4 Com pulse multiply denom 5 In position range 0 pulse 6 Position control gain 1 268 rad s LU 7 Pos com acc dec time cons O ms 5 8 Internal speed command 1 r min a 9 Internal speed command 2 r min LU O Internal speed command 3 r min Acceleration time constant QO ms gt 2 Deceleration time constant 0 ms 3 S pattern acc dec time cons O ms a Cycle am
605. tive power in e The permissible regenerative power differs depending on the presence absence of the regenerative brake 8 Regenerative load ratio v option Set parameter No 0 correctly according to the regenerative brake option Set to 80 or lower as a guide Displays the continuous effective load torque 9 Effective load ratio o e The effective value is displayed on the assumption that the rated torque is 100 Displays the maximum torque generated 10 Peak load ratio l l e The maximum value for the past 15 seconds is displayed on the assumption that the rated torque is 100 l Displays the instantaneous torque k w Instantaneous torque E t S e The value of the generated torque is displayed in real time on the assumption that the rated torque is 100 Within one revolution Displays the within one revolution position in the servo motor in pulse units of the encoder position e When the value exceeds the maximum pulse count it returns to 0 o Displays the estimated ratio of the servo motor shaft equivalent load inertia moment to the servo motor s 14 Load inertia moment ratio inertia moment 15 Bus voltage Displays the voltage between P and N of the main circuit converter 2 Key functions The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations on the monitor screen Key Function Clear Clears the values of Cumulative feedback pulses and Cumulative command pu
606. to 13 162 to 163 C to D A2 to A3 gt ane lt E 312 to 313 462 to 463 138 to 139 1CE to 1CF gt 102 HT ae range it 14 to 15 164 to 165 E to F A4 to A5 Cine S IE 3 lear sein 1 314 to 315 464 to 465 13Ato 13B 1D0 to 1D1 oa TEE se bwe t e Z Vy O TES ASE 2 Setting range S EEE EEE EE E 2 dp oa O Zz Qs EN 17 167 317 467 11 A7 11 A7 13D 1D3 1D3 6 o FE gt 18 to 19 168 to 169 12 to 13 M 32 QD75MH Detailed parameters 1 1 318 to 319 468 to 469 13E to 13F 1D4 to 1D5 Si S ss Sa s ETE s 20 to 21 170 to 171 14 to 15 AA to AB LONE 320 to 321 470 to 471 140to 141 1D6 to 1D7 S E Oi nV E JE Spl alo aes 7 ange S E ee 22 172 322 472 16 AC 142 1D8 0 SSI 23 173 323 473 17 AD 143 1D9 S LU eS 26 176 326 476 1A BO 146 1DC 10 Cinch 10 E Vinal ae EG Bie Tepe EJE 9 SEFE Bae mw 0 to 35999999 degrees O Vie Vile A 33 Wier 7 PA C Og LU T 4 97 177 327 477 1B B1 147 1DD QD75MH Detailed parameters 1 2 28 178 328 478 1C B2 148 1DE E pa p ee ZEE 29 179 329 479 1D B3 149 1DF EEA 324 to 325 474 t0 475 144 to 145 1DA to 1DB tting AOD Cinch 10 O EDN E TF b DST BY at Mt E 14 7 7 e Z DST lbs mx 1 29 CN 1 j e a i 0 Do Not 1 Do 2 Clear Cy ER z DS lt 4 ASN 24 5 VS 3 s L fi a Er A ana 6 5 Intelligent Module Monitor Screens 6 101 6 5 36 QD75MH module monitoring O UU gt Q
607. touching the key S Z O 5 The keyboard closes by touching the x key S z Z o E 6 6 2 O 2 9 Test Operation 2 53 2 9 4 Test operation procedure Point Operating the set values of timers and counters 1 Time up Count up status Even if a set value or present value is changed after a timer or counter is up the time up or count up status does not change The present status is retained 2 Changing an index qualifier Only the constant part of a T C set value with a qualifier can be changed The index qualifier cannot be changed Example Change the set value of T5 from 300 to 200 E ChNo 1 NetNe ST FFICPUNe CO BEC DEVICEL T 5 VL DRG Change the set value of T5 from K300 to K200 Program before change Program after change Constant part The index qualifier cannot be changed 3 Operation when a password is entered for the controller When the target controller is a QCPU the Keyword Release screen appears Enter the password 1 G Enter the password entered in the sequence program as at 1 ae x key Touch this key to enter alphabetic A O O ee characters A to Z uppercase EI S A A A x key Touch this key to enter alphabetic onl Sa characters a to z lowercase R MIrA o Touch this key to enter numbers 1 to 9 Use this key to delete an entered character e key Use this key to delete all characters under the cursor E Entry is completed by touching the ke
608. tting the drive for collectively reading comment data Enables settings for the backup trigger setting and the maximum number of 2 73B x backup data X X xX l Designation of the channel No used for l Clock Setting Ba o l 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 x x adjusting and broadcasting is possible Function for setting any screen for the gt 00K Standard monitor OS 01 02 GOT startup screen l Boot OS 01 02 C O Startup Logo Enables displaying a BMP data stored in the A drive as the startup logo when the 2 73B Boot OS 03 09 S x x OS boot drive is set to the A drive Handy GOT Setting of the grip switch LED of handy 2 18U Standard monitor OS 02 02 O Setting System messages to be displayed on Dialog window GOT can be customized or created by the 2 27D Standard monitor OS 02 04 O user Standard monitor OS 03 00 2 32J Option OS X Operation Log 03 00 Function to save the GOT operation performed by the user as a history 7 Cc gt O O h O O O gt lt 9 3 e gt O 9 gt D LU N D de lt o x The binary format file output can be Operation log converted to CSV Unicode format file by 2 43V x external control Standard monitor OS 03 03 Option OS Enables saving the operation log for the SaS 2 58L Operation Log 03 03 x operator authentication Extended function OS Operator authentication 0
609. ty For how to display the utility refer to the following GT16 User s Manual 8 3 Utility Display GT15 User s Manual 9 3 Utility Display How to make PLC reading unnecessary when turning the GOT power on again With the MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor you can save ladder monitor data to a memory card or internal flash memory If you save the data beforehand it is not necessary to read the PLC when switching the GOT power on again gt 3 3 2 Setting and deleting media for saving ladder data If the project data has not been downloaded The ladder monitor can be started from the utility even if the project data has not been downloaded to the GOT 3 3 1 Outline until the start 2 Searching from the monitor screen The following describes the operation procedures of ladder search using the advanced alarm display alarm list display alarm history display and touch switch PLC reading screen e SEL READ S Select Cancel All All Read the ladder data to be searched from the PLC reading screen Alarm list Alarm history Touch switch Advanced alarm Time Message 10 35 42 STB error Time Message 10 35 42 STB error Lifter 1 down Lifter up Lifter 2 dowx When an alarm occurs the error device can be searched for with coil defect search and displayed on the ladder monitor by touching the Ladder key for alarms When an alarm occurs the error device can be searched for
610. u Menu window Dev Sea Xref Cnt Cont Sea 16 32Bit rip 0 0 0 0 256 25 30 SG Print Screen device monftor not executed Local de E Sea Print Cancel JUMP Y JUMP J Screen Print l Display example of 32 characters of comment A comment is displayed in eight characters on four lines 3 48 3 5 Switching the Display Format 3 5 4 Displaying 32 characters of comments E Touch Menu Touch Gmnt32 E Comments are displayed in 32 characters A comment is displayed in eight characters on four lines 2 Comment display when the MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor is executed Comments are displayed as shown below when you touch each of the and keys Present comment display status Comment display after key operation S o Lu Touch the key Comments displayed Z No comments displayed Touch the Cmnt 32 key 32 characters of comments displayed Touch the key No comments displayed O Comments displayed Z Touch the Cmnt 32 key 32 characters of comments displayed kE s 09 Touch the key Comments displayed gt 32 characters of comments displayed Cmnt 32 key No 32 characters of comments displayed 3 3 Numbers of lines and contact points that can be displayed when the MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor is executed The table below shows the numbers of lines and contact points that can be displayed in the statuses of no comments displayed comments displayed and 32 characters of comments displayed
611. ues in the device current value display area as 32 bit g 32 bit integer HEX 13 4 4 2 hexadecimal numbers m Displays the device values in the device current value display area as 32 bit Se bit real number l l l l E 13 4 4 floating point numbers with the exponential representation e lt lt Q O zZ O o O E z O O LL Ww ep UU O Q Zz UU A A lt X lt ULU Q 13 7 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen 13 37 13 7 3 Menus 13 8 Test Operation In the device test mode of the SFC monitor device values can be changed on the screen For setting the device test mode refer to the following 13 6 2 Key functions 13 7 2 Key functions The test operation of devices is available by touching devices on the following screens in the device test mode Screen applicable to device test mode Reference section Block information list on the block list screen 13 6 1 SFC diagram display area on the SFC diagram monitor screen Device current value display area on the SFC diagram monitor screen Ladder program display area in the zoom window Touching a device displays the device test window 1 When touching bit devices A bit device is switched between ON and OFF states in the device test window 2 When touching word devices The GOT writes the value input in the device test window into the selected word device How to operate device test window 1 Bit devices a Displayed screen Dev ice ON OFF
612. uired z KANJI regions O E Stroke Font JPN 1037KB 1037KB Not required m E LU Z Stroke Font China GB5 1248KB 1248KB Not required 5 2 Stroke Font China Big5 1680KB 1680KB Not required Operation Log 384KB 1221KB Not required Operation log oc Z Document display Document Display 150KB 3072KB Not required z Kana kanji conversion KANA KANJI JPN l Z 242KB 1274KB Not required Q enhanced version Enhanced Version Logging Logging 380KB 710KB Not required Recipe 70KB 100K8 Not required O Advanced Recipe Advanced Recipe 310KB 1187KB Not required O gt Continued to next page O gt O 1 1 Before Using Each Function 1 1 2 Hardware and OS required for each function Function name Object Script Ladder monitor A list editor FX list editor Intelligent module monitor Network monitor Q motion monitor Servo amplifier monitor CNC monitor SFC monitor Gateway MES interface Extended function OS option OS name Object Script Ladder monitor for MELSEC A Ladder monitor for MELSEC FX Ladder monitor for MELSEC Q QnA List editor for MELSEC A List editor for MELSEC FX Intelligent module monitor Network monitor Q motion monitor Servo amplifier monitor CNC monitor GOT Platform Library SFC monitor GOT Function Expansion Library Gateway Server Client Gateway Mail Gateway FTP MES Interface OS memory space user area Built in flash memory ROM 180KB 342KB 342KB 590KB
613. umber 19 This error may occur when the ACPU is reset during monitoring Perform the monitor setting again Remote error 24 Although remote stop pause is performed from the computer link Perform the remote run stop pause from either unit unit remote run stop is additionally performed J Refer to the next page for error messages and actions After confirming the device value explained at the next page with the system monitor function take action Link error 32 While the slave station is monitoring the master station the Perform the monitor setting again master station is reset EEPROM failure l 34 Replace the EEPROM with a new one Detailed description of error No 25 If error number 25 appears the following causes are possible Check the details and the corrective actions 1 When connected to the master station Device S l Description Details number The control depends on whether there is an error at the Link card error Normal M9210 hardware of the link card The link card in the CPU link unit for master station Error i l l is judged at the CPU Replace the link unit Online TERE l l The control depends on whether the master station itself is l Offline station to M9224 Link status online or offline or in the station to station mode or the self station test or self l loopback mode Check the mode switch loopback test Not executed Forward loop test ore The control depends on whether the
614. unction Connection form between GOT and controller Direct Computer MELSEC CC Link connection Reference Bus Ethernet section Description l CPU link E NET 10 connection connection 2 4 5 connection connection connection ID G4 Device search defect Displaying word Displaying device If the total capacity of parameters sequence programs T C set values comments and extension comments is 144 Kbytes or over comments cannot be correctly displayed The present value of V and Z cannot be changed Subprograms 2 and 3 of the A4UCPU in computer link connection cannot be ladder monitored Indicates CC Link connection Intelligent device station Indicates CC Link connection via G4 4 When the GOT is connected to an FXCPU Name Search operation Display switching Test operation Hard copy 1 2 O Available A Partly restricted x Unavailable Function Connection form between GOT and controller Reference section Device search defect search 36 etc Displaying word devices in DEC or HEX 3 5 Displaying device comments etc Storing ladder monitor screen in BMP JPEG format or 3 4 2 printing it with a printer The present value of V and Z cannot be changed The set values of T and C cannot be changed 3 2 Specifications 3 2 1 System configuration 5 When the GOT is connected to a CNC a When the GOT is connected to a CNC C70 O Available A Partly restricted x U
615. unction indicated at the upper part of each key is aree Z Function indicated at the lower part of each key is available Example key r771 TO m Z e O E 0 cm O ey 0 GO ey Z mle lt AM O z TD U TO Function indicated at the upper part of the key is available FROM lt JI 0 pr aea y Function indicated at the lower part of the key is available p X Ta lt Z lt O S NZ oz lt WO I y 09 gt as O U T u I gt On CD gt C U O O O l OC Point To switch between two functions of keys functions indicated at upper and lower parts of the keys press the and keys Section 4 4 3 Switching valid keys upper lower functions 4 12 4 4 Operation Methods 4 4 2 Display format of the display area 2 The cursor appears The cursor appears M and is highlighted during data input Indication of the selected line When a program list is displayed the line currently selected for editing is indicated by P gt S appearing immediately after the step number S The 3rd line in the display area is selected for editing oc 2 6 You can use the and keys to move up and down S Step number display A step number is displayed as a decimal number z On the 1st and 2nd lines in the display area significant digits in the lower four digits of a step z number are displayed z
616. upt pointers e Constant K constant H constant E e Bit devices with specifying numbers only e Special function unit block buffer memory e Devices specified with the operand of an applied instruction Pointers and interrupt pointers can be searched for with command searches gt Command search in this section 5 16 5 4 Operation Procedures 5 4 4 Searching commands and devices 5 4 5 Writing commands Writes a sequence program to the FX PLC Overwrite Insert m Writing basic commands E gt O 1 Operations a Inputting command only Ex ANB ORB command etc Stop the FX PLC gt MODE gt Input the command O For overwriting WRITE mode 6 For insertion INSERT mode 2 b Inputting command and device LD AND commands etc 0 J Stop the FX PLC gt MODE gt i Input the command For overwriting WRITE mode me For insertion INSERT mode O Doo a a a a aa Z Input the device name and device number p gt S Z iiz c Inputting command No 1 device No 2 device MC OUT T C commands etc 25 Stop the FX PLC gt MODE gt Input the command gt Input the device name and device number eee ee A A TEA E aa O e a e z For overwriting WRITE mode O For insertion INSERT mode O A A II ee ee L ee O UU 2 ULU gt Point f Moving the cursor to the position to write the command al When starting to write a command place the cursor on the com
617. uring ladder monitoring is described below oc O E Z le oc T Q G lt l Z O H O Z LL GD Touch Menu o levice monitor not executed O v1C6 x TT 5 lt O UU S UU Touch TEST OV D102 G G E Dev Sea r Xref mt S Cont Sea 16 32Bit Cunt 32 is coil sea Dec Hex Note fe l Step Sea m a End Sea gt a O gt O FF 0 Program Memory i P 3 Ena The test menu screen is displayed ne MOV KO K6 O Change device values by operating the mz AAA gt win d Ow A BMOV tb ATAO K2 poe Ka For further information about the operation G procedure see the following n O L gt Section 2 9 Test Operation z S device monitor not executed S Point mms Zz The present and set values of word devices are hidden behind the test menu screen R EE You can display hidden present and set values by S scrolling them to the right or left using the or Z key E O kE S O 3 7 Test Operation 3 69 3 7 1 Displaying the test menu screen 3 8 Local Device Monitor The GOT can monitor local devices with the MELSEC Q ladder monitor For local devices refer to an applicable programmable controller manual Point Monitoring local devices Local devices can be monitored only with the ladder monitor Operations for monitoring local devices cannot be executed on the user created screen 3 8 1 Operation procedure for local device monitor Every time the key is pressed th
618. ut the MELSAP L program display mode the GOT displays an Enter operation output transition condition sequence program corresponding to the step or transition condition with the device in the zoom window HT Remark Precautions for device contact coil search window Searching for any bits in word devices is not available Specify word devices for searching for any bits 13 30 13 7 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen 13 7 3 Menus 2 Step No transition condition No search window The GOT can search for steps and transition conditions in a block LC U a Displayed screen Ze of Z as oc 3 58 26 25 O lL Step No search window Transition condition No search window uw 7 LC The following table shows the displayed contents O O l Set the block No of the block to be searched E 1 Block No input area a AN The GOT searches for a step or transition condition in the set block 2 Step No transition Set the step No or transition condition No of the step or transition condition to be condition No input area searched Keys for operations in the step No transition condition No search window shown in Q 3 Keys l lt b Touch input lt S i O b Key functions 3 Key Function a K Moves the cursor among the input areas e When the cursor is in the block No input area Moves the cursor to the step No transition condition No input area oc O E Z le O LL 7
619. utility even if the project data has not been downloaded to the GOT Changing screens This section describes how to change the screen BACKUP RESTORE O At the second or ap lt Utility later startup S or O user created monitor screen At the first startup Communication a setting window O Ch No TH S gt ChNo Comm Driver AIK Q 1 MELSEC FX dp 2 E71 Connection 3 A QnA QCPU QU7 1024 H RET O a Z LU A A x l l LZ When exiting the CNC monitor function by touching RET the last exited screen will be displayed when the CNC monitor function is started next time INDEX 10 3 Display 10 7 10 4 Operation Procedures This section describes the display data of the CNC monitor screen and the key functions displayed on the screen DIAGN TOOL MONI TOR IN OUT PARAM Bees E LO lT e Function switching area Monitor area e ee A TA Ta MEMORY MEM SIT 4 sl el 2 sl el o 9 f sfulele r u pole lt i BBD Sia BERR ESE ltem Display data Function switching area Selects the function to be displayed and CNC monitor termination MON TOR Switches the monitor area to position display monitor Wee Switches the monitor area to alarm diagnosis monitor U Switches the monitor area to tool compensation parameter dl Switches the monitor area to program monitor Switches the monitor area to the APLC screen
620. utively UN Touching the button completes searching When the searched half device is not found allway gt If the searched device is not found in the read Tha user created program the message DEVICE NOT FOUND screen is appears and searching is completed displayed The ladder monitor screen is displayed After searching the program that has been read first is displayed on the ladder monitor screen Continued to next page After coil search monitoring of the displayed ladder starts automatically During MELSEC A FX ladder monitor touching the monitor key starts the same operation 3 32 3 3 Display 3 3 4 Searching from the monitor screen From previous page End of searching search other programs Cancel The ladder monitor screen is displayed OK 1 O FF O Program Memory MAIN1 153STEP Dl gt E RST Local device monitor not exec uted S Sea EHH Print Cancel JUMP 1 f JUMP 1 Screen Print When the searched device is found When the searched device is not found The ladder The user created monitor screen screen is is displayed displayed After coil search monitoring of the ladder displayed is started automatically When multiple read programs exist the dialog box which asks about searching for other programs appears Touching the button starts searching to all other read programs According to the order of the programs that have been read
621. ve actions see the MELSECNET 10 Network System Reference Manual If an error code not listed in the previous page is displayed contact the nearest of our system service centers agents and branch offices 4 38 4 7 Error Messages and Corrective Actions 4 7 3 Error using list editor function on the link system 9 MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR RI me Gorio00 The MELSEC FX list editor enables you to change the sequence program in the FX PLC This function is intended to troubleshoot the PLC system and to streamline maintenance operations By installing list editor for MELSEC A an Option OS from GT Designer2 into the GOT you can edit the FX PLC program The features of the MELSEC FX list editor are described below OVERVIEW 5 1 Features SYSTEM MONITOR Parameters and sequence programs are easy to maintain You can check or partly correct change or add FX PLC CPU parameters and sequence programs simply by operating keys You can easily edit sequence programs without preparing any peripheral unit other than the GOT LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION oc O E T Example of changing sequence program commands 7 Changed lt LD X000 LD X000 M OUT YO20 OUT Y030 a LD X001 LD X001 2 5 5 al Combination with the ladder monitor You can open the MELSEC FX List Editor window from the Ladder Monitor screen with a single touch You can edit PLC program while checking the ladder You can also display a list from
622. ved station and the statuses of stations beyond the maximum communication stations or when a MELSECNET II local station has been selected in the line monitor 2 Key functions The table below shows the function of keys that are used for the operations of the other station CPU RUN status monitor Key Function RET Returns to the other station monitor Exits the other station CPU RUN status monitor screen and returns to the screen where the network monitor was started VO Switches the screen display of stations 1 to 80 stations 81 to 120 stations 7 28 7 4 Operation Procedures 7 4 8 Other station CPU RUN status monitor 7 4 9 Other station loop status monitor This section describes the screen configuration of the other station loop status monitor and the function of on screen keys The other station loop status monitor is not available in the following conditions gt e When a local station on the MELSECNET Il network system is selected using the line monitor gt e When a MELSECNET network system with coaxial cables is used e When a station on the CC Link IE controller network is selected using the line monitor 1 Displayed contents c Z 3 S Lu kE 09 4 LC O E 2 6 teversing part is feversing part is E Aasa E h mA S ion SS 2 1 32 iT LC No Display contents 2 Q 1 The F loop forward loop status and the R loop reverse loop status are displayed 2 The station numbers displayed do not indicate the
623. vomtorccd top Ea ala AXIS AXTS2 Awet cR CTE VAE 0 EE ES STET A 3 RTT E EI E MED l A A JA R a2 yee AKT 52 Kae fead CTET AK 52 DST AX 2 fie vali TS Rp IAN AAA ia ZT EZ f Avic we A NK S Ae SD Qo 27TYU gt FAA LAS Z T GEETE Ge brake imterlockOmtepue UNO relation to TN Motor speed SUPL any EZL EEIZ Wien tie moron speed j Speed 1s fir EA AK aT A Wine meted EAU COMA E Cotto Ranan y pi ji er bet 31 hye NWA CA D KI AX SE AK DD Hi er Manmre yibration control Sa l Ses ZI S Ee Wie Pens R a y A D mal re SH ADO pi Ser y SENS IIE E Ca NK 15a ay r Analog monitor i El SEL ES AE GR MOTO EEE Z ES Barn adare Samp HR Eme HET 15 Bme 3 14 22 ms 4 28 44 ms ME 2 0 E Presalarm data HH l TDD AO Mana Current GULP AO Mana ae a JADOO pu SZ GSE y 16 aoirean P 54 data 114 el y k 5 las Ip 6 98 ljana n PRSPEZA Droop pulees1y4 SDR Gop pill ses 1 32 nye E q AA A 1 A ries ms oe Sia L D TST angna data 2 AIST Ams AX 10000 te ui Axisl AER AX AXI S E Z 223 F Pen Pi ATA AN Error excessive alarm level 1000 Kpls E L 14 F 2 a XK or 217 l inz SAO que Wna d HIP pasea SW beni he ls valma i Position Contra EN control 1s always vya Rojan Ay 63 Ay ol AK Se T A Zier MAES servo retrieve character aras en ven mes UA A DA R re
624. w El 200 LIL Ta Tj 8 9 Aj Bla ASS 6 h a 112J3 EJF 4 O Enter Del U f AAA LhNo IES O ST a 6 DEC DEVICE 200 YLID a T 8 9 RT aly URI 6 Cid al K AL 2 SE E TE TRR Enter a new device value by operating the key window In this example enter 100 For the operation of the key window see the following Subsection 3 2 4 3 Key window setting columns and operation procedure DEVICE ENTRY f Continued to next page 2 28 2 4 Operation Procedure Common to the System Monitor Screens 2 4 5 Quick test operation of monitor devices From previous page L L ChNo 1 NetNo O ST FE CPUNo 0 DEC DEVICE W 200 LID 1i Touch TTU lola a LIR HED al K 112 3 B Fl gt O Enter Del AC OVERVIEW NO oc O E Z O Lu E L gt nw DEVICE MONITOR am E 6 2E ma ae ir The device value of W200 is changed from 43 to 100 A e m D lt 0 09 Point Effective number of digits of device values that can be changed If an entered value exceeds the corresponding number of digits specified below the device value cannot be changed Decimal number 16 bit one word module Six digits including a digit for a sign z 32 bit two word module Ten digits including a digit for a sign pa 09 Hexadecimal number nfa 16 bit one word module Four digits 32 bit two word module Eight digits gt 35
625. ware 2 82L Connection with multiple GT11s 2 09K Standard monitor OS 01 02 Extended function OS Supporting connection to external I O Sent External I O Operation Panel 03 03 Supporting connection to the RFID azab Extended function OS controller l RFID 03 09 devices A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 MELDAS C6 02 02 AJ71QC24 MELDAS CG 03 09 QJ71E71 AJ71 Q E71 Q17nNC Standard monitor OS 01 02 Standard monitor OS 01 02 Standard monitor OS 02 04 2 32J Standard monitor OS 03 00 fof x o Standard monitor OS 03 12 Standard monitor OS 03 13 GT Soft GOT1000 Bus GT11 Serial O O O x O O X O O O O O O Added GT Designer2 functions LC LL 1 ForGT16 Aa e ion Version of GT OF Item Description Version of OS oe Designer2 m O Function for GT Designer2 de ia melee SC oy ei dere uate eee 2 90U Standard monitor OS 04 02 earlier are available 2 For GT15 GT SoftGOT1000 and GT 11 O He Version of GT i GT GT Soft GT ES Item Description Version of OS 50 Designer2 15 GOT1000 11 5 OZ Ethernet download Downloading the project data via Ethernet 2 09K Standard monitor OS 01 02 Jo x x om Copying comments in column unit on 2 09K O Basic Comment or Comment Group etc Basic comment Enables editing the comment group cc comment group O directly in settings for lam
626. window shown in b Touch input Displays the block numbers and block titles of active blocks in the read SFC 2 Active block list program Selecting a block displays the block data on the SFC diagram monitor screen b Key functions Key Function Displays the block list screen di C gt 13 6 How to Operate Block List Screen de Y Scrolls the display area up and down by one line Point Precautions for active block list window When the statuses of blocks change the displayed contents of the active block list in the active block list window change Therefore selecting a block may be difficult depending on the frequency of the block status change When selecting a block is difficult select a block from the block list on the block list screen 13 6 How to Operate Block List Screen 13 36 13 7 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen 13 7 3 Menus o U m oni toring Mode T aa 16 bit integer DEC O E LC O 16 bit integer HEX DS 32 bit integer DECO 32 bit integer HEY Se bit real number a O kE a gt Z O Displays the device values in the device current value display area as 16 bit add z S Displays the device values in the device current value display area as 16 bit l6 bit integer HEX 13 4 4 hexadecimal numbers m LC Displays the device values in the device current value display area as 32 bit O 32 bit integer DEC 13 4 4 4 decimal numbers u o Displays the device val
627. wing way a The AD71 is treated as the AD72 and AD72 is displayed on the System Configuration screen In this case select AD72 that corresponds to the actual installed position b The monitor screen that displays as shown a above is a screen for the AD72 The number obtained by subtracting 10H from the I O signal number on the display is the number for when installing the AD71 in slot 0 To prevent the AD71 from being treated as the AD72 execute Shift the installation position of AD71 forward or In the I O assignments assign 16 points to the previous empty slot of the AD71 6 2 Specifications 6 2 3 Precautions 2 When monitoring the A68AD A68ADN or A68RD used with a small building block type PLC CPU The GOT recognizes the intelligent function module installed in a large building block type extension base unit connected to a small building block type PLC CPU e g A1SCPU as a small building block type intelligent function module to monitor it Hence there are the following precautions for the A68AD A68ADN and A68RD Intelligent function module Precautions The A68AD cannot be displayed correctly because the buffer A68AD memory configuration differs between the A68AD and A1S68AD AGSADN Among CH1 to CH8 of the A68ADN CH5 to CH8 cannot be displayed because the A1S64AD has only CH1 to CH4 Among CH1 to CHB of the A68RD CH3 to CHB cannot be A68RD displayed because the A1S62RD has only CH1 to CH2 The above i
628. with coil search and displayed on the ladder monitor by touching the Ladder key for alarms In a case such that any device is ON the specified device can be searched for with coil defect search and displayed on the ladder monitor Local device monitor not executed gt Sea Cancel JUMP T f JUMP 1 Print The search result is displayed on the ladder monitor For operations after search refer to the following gt Section 3 3 3 Didplay End When the automatic PLC read setting is not made ladder data must be read in advance 3 3 Display 3 3 1 Outline until the start OVERVIEW SYSTEM MONITOR O oc O E Z le oc T Q G lt l Z O H O Z LL MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR MELSEC A LIST EDITOR NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 3 18 Point 0 3 3 Display Before searching When searching program files and displaying the result from the advanced alarm or touch switch with the Q QnA ladder monitor programs are read automatically and searched by using the automatic PLC read setting Programs need not be read in advance When powering on the GOT again When searching program files with the A FX ladder monitor or with the Q QnA ladder monitor for which the automatic PLC read setting is made with None set as the data storage destination PLC reading is required every time powering on the GOT For the Q QnA ladder monitor setting data stor
629. wo word modules 3 5 2 Display switching of decimal numbers hexadecimal numbers During monitoring the present values of word devices and the present values upper values and set values lower values of timers counters are displayed in decimal or hexadecimal numbers The display formats switch alternately each time you press the key Example of operation Switching the decimal display to the hexadecimal display GD Touch Sea _ JUMP T J JUMP 1 List Touch Menu X70 g fm Touch Menu i 0 CO 1102 0 0 0 K Local device monitor not executed Print Cancel JUMP 1 Screen Print Menu window Touch Dec Hex TO CO D103 D102 0 0 0 25 5 Coil Sea Step Sea Print J Screen End Sea Dec Hex D The values are displayed in hexadecimal numbers D103 D102 H00000000 evice monitor not execu 00 Ol 0005 Local d ted S Sea Print Cancel JUMP T JUMP J Screen Print 3 46 3 5 Switching the Display Format 3 5 2 Display switching of decimal numbers hexadecimal numbers 3 5 3 Switching comment no comment display Comments written in the target controller are displayed Comment display and no comment display switch alternately each time you press the key Local device monitor not executed o 0 25 a Sea S JUMP T JUMP 1 List Touch Menu Touch Cmnt Y Dev Sea Xref Cont Sea 16 32Bit Cunt 32 1 Coil Se
630. ximum 10 per process is displayed according to the memory capacity to be clearec As the clearing process proceeds each is deleted One shows 10 of memory capacity The memory capacity total number of bytes to be cleared is displayed in kbytes As the clearing process proceeds 1 kbyte is decreased Completion of PC memory all clear process When the GOT completes the clearing process the screen in the left appears status before the mode selection MODE SELECTION READ INS PARAM PRESS MODE KEY O If necessary start the next operation 4 5 Basic Operation 4 27 4 5 6 PLC memory all clear LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR oc O E m Li E 9 mr q 6 Ll 104 I H OVERVIEW SYSTEM MONITOR NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 4 6 4 6 1 Basic operation Command input operation List of Operation Procedures Common operation Details Input of keyword at start up Mode selection Switching of valid key Switching of valid key Action for incorrect input Operation of command help function Display of Comment Command code only Command code and 1 device Other than above command key input Other than above device key input Input when the keyword is registered in the ACPU Select the mode Switch the valid key function indicated at the upper lower part of the key b
631. y Many of the option functions require an Option OS to be installed For a description of each function see the appropriate manual listed below Manuals describing functions and how to set them Category Function name Reference Bar code S GT Designer 2 Version O Screen Design Manual System monitor Chapter 2 Stroke font Video display RGB display GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual Remote personal computer operation Multimedia Backup restore Chapter11 CNC data I O Chapter12 Operator authentication Sound output GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual External l O operation panel Device data transfer Maintenance timing setting GT15 User s Manual Multi channel KANJI regions Extended functions Operation log Document display Kana kanji conversion 1 Kana kanji conversion enhanced version GT Designer 2 Version O Screen Design Manual Historical Trend Graph Logging Recipe Advanced Recipe Object Script Ladder monitor Chapter 3 A list editor Chapter 4 FX list editor Chapter 5 Intelligent module monitor Chapter 6 Network monitor Chapter 7 Q motion monitor Chapter 8 Continued to next page 1 1 Before Using Each Function 1 1 1 Each function and related manuals Category Function name Reference Servo amplifer monitor Chapter 9 CNC monitor Chapter 10 Option functions SFC monitor Chapter 13 Gateway GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual MES interface GOT1000 Series MES Interface Function Manual
632. y ROM User memory RAM option OS name GT16 MESB L gt Ec m gt O Bar code 84KB 84KB Not required RFID RFID 166KB 166KB Not required System monitor 746KB 746KB Not required O Report 150KB 235KB Not required 2 Printer 522KB 1104KB Not required kE Stroke Font Support Data 400 KB 400 KB Not required gt Stroke Standard Font JPN 2160KB 2160KB Not required Stroke Standard 3175KB 3175KB Not required S Font JPN supporting Hangul Stroke font 7 O Stroke Standard Font China l 1474KB 1474KB Not required 5 GB SZ rO Stroke Standard Font China DO 2016KB 2016KB Not required G Z GB supporting Hangul fie Video display Video RGB 292KB 474KB Not required RGB display O Multimedia 292KB 1074KB Not required G kE Remote personal computer Video RGB 292KB 474KB Not required 2 lt operation PC Remote Operation 50KB 84KB Not required O ep Backup restore Backup Restore 420KB 766KB Not required m Operator Authentication 460KB 730KB Not required Sound Output Sound Output 100KB 200KB Not required External I O Operation Panel External I O Operation Panel 70KB 100KB Not required CNC Data I O 210KB 383KB Not required D CNC data I O Z GOT Platform Library 77KB 200KB Not required T L Device data transfer Device Data Transfer SOKB 100KB Not required D 2 wo Standard Font China GB 1280KB 1280KB Not required Standard Font China Big5 1920KB 1920KB Not required O Standard Font Japanese 1280KB 1280KB Not req
633. y and the keyboard closes 2 54 2 9 Test Operation 2 9 4 Test operation procedure 2 9 5 Test operation basic procedure Device Entry screen DEVICE MONITOR ChNo 1 NetNe JST FF CPUNO 0 PRESS SET KEY SELECT ITEM THEN ENTER DEVICE TYPE amp No Chio 1 Neto GJST FFICPUNO 0 If necessary change bit device on off or word device values on the setting key window screen For further information about each setting key window screen see the following gt Subsection 2 9 3 Information and set items displayed on each setting key window screen 2 9 Test Operation 2 9 5 Test operation basic procedure 2 59 OVERVIEW NO LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC FX LIST EDITOR INTELLIGENT MODULE MONITOR oc O E Z O Lu E L gt nw MELSEC A LIST EDITOR NETWORK MONITOR Q MOTION MONITOR 2 10 Error Messages and Corrective Action This section describes the error messages displayed when the system monitor function is executed and corrective action Error message Description Corrective action 1 Connections between the PLC CPU and the GOT disconnected or cut cables 2 Has an error occurred in the Communication could not be PLC CPU MA EMO established with the PLC CPU 3 Refer to the following manual for confirming whether the error has occurred in network lt gt GT16 User s Manual GT15 User s Manual GT11 User s Manual 2 56 2
634. y O DW Indicates that the device value is a 32 bit two word module T 10 Data range u Nothing displayed Indicates that the device value is a 16 bit one word module When no comments are displayed Up to 16 devices can be displayed at a time monitor module one word l Up to eight devices can be displayed at a time monitor module two word T 11 Monitor display area l 5 When comments are displayed Up to eight devices can be displayed at a time monitor module one word A Up to four devices can be displayed at a time monitor module two word Zz 1 Indicates CC Link connection Intelligent device station O c c c ode 2 Indicates CC Link connection via G4 m Z ZS oc O Z O gt SE or O kE LULU Z oc O Z O gt zZ O kE O gt O 2 6 Batch Monitor 2 39 2 6 1 Information displayed on the Batch Monitor screen and key functions 2 6 2 Procedure for batch monitor basic operation When no devices Sl are entered When devices are entered SS TESTE MENUS FORMES SETA BATCH MONITOR TES TEMEN JF ORE ChNo 1 NetNo OIST FFICPUNo 0 B00 3234 PRESS SET KEY SELECT ITEM THEN ENTER DEVICE TYPE amp Ho If necessary perform Quick test If necessary switch the screen display operation lt Subsection 2 4 4 Switching the L gt Subsection 2 4 5 Quick test display format DEC HEX and operation of monitor devices comment no comment display If nec
635. y a user Perform the operation for incorrect key input Perform operation with the Help function command specification Display the comment stored in the ACPU Input the command code only Input the command code and 1 device Input the command other than above with the command key Input the command other than above without the command key Keyword gt GO Mode key READ INSERT PARAM Procedures key input sequence SHIFT gt Mode key WRITE DELETE OTHERS SHIFT CLEAR Perform program display gt HELP 1 operation in the Write Insert mode Perform program display operation gt in the Write Read Insert Delete mode or SET Mode key or SHIFT Mode key gt 1 gt 1 Input the capital letter of the command E 1 T Input the capital Input the corresponding gt o 117 letter of the command command number HELP Reus N Command gt Command gt Device Device No gt Input the SP between the device the source data and the destination Input the between the command the device the source data and the destination 4 6 List of Operation Procedures 4 6 1 Common operation 4 6 2 Operation in write mode W Details Procedures key input sequence
636. y screen The following describes the display data of the DI DO display screen and the key functions displayed on the screen 1 Displayed contents A on L TP Input Signal Output Signal CNIB 16 CNIB 17 NE CNIB 5 CNIB 14 CNIA 8 CNIB CNIB 8 CN1B 9 mb A Screen Print No Description 1 Input Output Signal Displays whether the DI DO signal is ON lit or OFF not lit 2 Key functions The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operations of the DI DO display screen Key Function Displays the DI DO signal of the extension lO unit Changes to the function device screen This section ES Changes to the amplifier information screen 5 This section EJ Changes to the unit composition list screen 2 3 This section 5 E Changes to the ABS data screen lt _ gt This section EJ Returns to the function selection menu screen Exits the servo amplifier monitor Stores the displayed screen to the memory card in BMP JPEG file format or prints it with a printer For further information about hard copies refer to the following 9 4 8 Hard copy output 6 The touch operation of this key is invalid 1 This is displayed only when the MR J2M A series is connected 9 24 9 4 Operations of Servo Amplifier Monitor Screens 9 4 5 Diagnostics function de Function device display screen The following describes the display data of the function device di
637. y the block list screen L gt 13 6 How to Operate Block List Screen Specifying SFC Diagram for Display Screen in the SFC monitor detail settings of the special function switch Select a block on the block list screen to display the SFC diagram monitor screen 2 gt 13 7 How to Operate SFC Diagram Monitor Screen End Point f 1 How to display the utility For how to display the utility refer to the following GT16 User s manual 8 3 Utility Display GT15 User s manual 9 3 Utility Display 2 Reading data from PLC when reclosing GOT Reading data from the PLC is not required when reclosing the GOT power because SFC programs and comment files are stored in a CF card for the SFC monitor function L gt 13 3 2 Setting SFC data storage location 3 When GOT has no project data The SFC monitor can be started with the utility even though the GOT has no project data 13 10 13 3 Display Operation 13 3 1 Outline before starting Changing screens o The following describes how to change the screen S Aa lt 5 OF e as Utility Main Menu or user created monitor screen v o i At the first startup A O mmx Ze HR ia SE ae 173 oF 1 8 9 AJ Bl a block list window 1 Comment file list o2 415 6 L h gt Sd AA window O
638. yed does not indicate the station number in the network rather the maximum number of communication oc O stations 2 Any station that stays in an abnormal condition or out of operation is highlighted 7 3 Reserved stations and unconnected stations are displayed as normal stations a S ULU gt 2 Key functions The table below shows the function of keys that are used for the operations of the other station CPU operation status monitor D Key Function is me RET Returns to the other station monitor 2 2 Q Z UU Exits the other station CPU operation status monitor screen and returns to the screen where the network monitor was started UU VO Switches the screen display of stations 1 to 80 stations 81 to 120 stations z S kE im oc 32 W Z 2 md ec O Z G x GC GO LI zZ Q MOTION MONITOR 7 4 Operation Procedures 7 27 7 4 7 Other station CPU operation status monitor 7 4 8 Other station CPU RUN status monitor This section describes the other station CPU RUN status monitor and the function of on screen keys This screen cannot be displayed for a remote I O network system 1 Displayed contents CPU RUN Status 1 2 RUN RUN No Display contents Displays the CPU operation status by station number RUN STOP 1 DOWN is displayed for stations with communication errors Up to 64 stations are displayed regardless of the number of stations in a network is displayed for a reser
639. ys when the loopback is operating normally of Loop Switching Indicates the cumulative number of times for which loops have been switched x Parameter Setting Not displayed is displayed x Reserved Sta Indicates the availability of a reserved station Have None 6 TsSt Sta Communication Mode Indicates either Normal mode or Constant LS Transmission Mode Indicates either Normal Trans or Multiple Trans Transmission Stat Indicates either Normal Trans or Multiple Trans 1 is displayed when coaxial bus connections are established 2 Key functions The table below shows the function of keys that are used on the detailed monitor Key Function RET Returns to the line monitor Exits the detailed monitor and returns to the screen where the network monitor function was started 7 4 Operation Procedures 7 4 2 Detailed monitor Display contents and keys functions acting as a MELSECNET II master station This section describes the screen configuration of the detailed monitor and the function of on screen keys when the host acts as the master station on the MELSECNET Il 1 Displayed contents 3 2 No Item Display contents This Station s This shows the station number of the host 1 TsSti Info o This Station s Indicates the category of the host Indicates the maximum number of the stations to be linked which is defined by common 2 D Link Info paramet
640. ystem no stations can be monitored The GOT cannot monitor stations on the MELSECNET G network system O The access range other than above is the same as the access range when the GOT is connected to a Z controller Refer to the following manual for details of the access range gt gt GT Designer2 Version U Screen Design Manual 2 7 Controllers that can be monitored and the Access Range E LC 7 2 4 Precautions E O 1 Station monitored as the host 32 The station monitored as the host differs depending on the connection type S Connection type Station monitored as the host E Bus connection direct CPU connection computer link S l Connected station target T connection l Station set as the host with the Ethernet setting of GT z Ethernet connection l O Designer2 m MELSECNET H connection MELSECNET 10 connection Control station CC Link IE controller network connection CC Link connection Intelligent device station Master station E CC Link connection Via G4 2 x lt 2 When the network monitor cannot be displayed correctly DS The network monitor cannot be displayed correctly in the following cases os a When the network module is performing offline testing The network monitor cannot be displayed correctly during offline testing uw Set the network module mode to online a b When the network parameter has been changed 6 The network monitor cannot be displayed correctly when the network parameter is changed 29 W Z Resta
641. ystem configuration This section describes the system configuration of the intelligent module monitor S For connection type settings and precautions regarding the communication unit cable and connection type see the following manual lt GOT1000 Series Connection Manual o Targeted equipments for the intelligent module monitor us 1 PLC CPU gt PLC QCPU Q mode QSCPU S QnACPU Ss ACPU QCPU A mode S 5 1 You cannot use Q4ARCPU 2 2 Intelligent module cc O For QCPU A mode QnACPU and ACPU For QCPU Q mode E A62DA S1 A68AD Q64AD Q68ADV A68ADN A68RD Q68ADI QD62 O A84AD A616AD Q64DA Q62DA 2 A616TD A616DAV QD62D QD62E a A616DAI A61LS QD75D QD75P A62LS AD61 QD75MH QD75M AD70 AD70D Output module Input module AD71 AD72 D A1SD71 A1SD61 it A1S64AD A1S62DA us A1SD70 A1S62RD wo A1SJ71PT32 S3 A1S63ADA 6 AJ71PT32 S3 AD75P p A1SD75P AJ711D1 R4 2 AJ711D2 R4 A1SJ71ID1 R4 S A1SJ711D2 R4 A1S68DAV Z s A1S68DAI A1S68AD 29 A1S64TCTT BW S1 A1S64TCRT BW S1 E S Input module Output module 1 AD75M1 M2 M3 can be monitored in the range of AD75P1 P2 P3 2 A1SD75M1 M2 M3 can be monitored in the range of A1SD75P1 P2 P3 You can use the system monitor BM MONITOR to monitor intelligent function modules other than those listed above oc O Z O x X e kE Lu Z Q MOTION MONITOR 6 2 Specifications 6 3 6 2 1 System configuration 4 Connection ty
642. ystem monitor function Section 2 4 6 Changing screens Switches the screen to the display format switching screen to change the value display format DEC HEX on the Batch Monitor screen or comment no comment display Section 2 4 4 Switching the display format DEC HEX and comment no comment display Switches the screen to the Device entry screen to enter or test monitor devices Entering monitor devices _ Section 2 4 2 Entering monitor devices specifying monitor stations and devices Test operation lt Section 2 9 Test Operation Scroll displayed information upward or downward by a line to display the preceding or next monitor device that is not currently displayed When five or more monitor devices are entered these switches are available when their comments are displayed A Scrolls information upward by a line Y Scrolls information downward by a line 2 6 Batch Monitor 2 6 1 Information displayed on the Batch Monitor screen and key functions 3 The following table below describes the range of display of items 1 to 11 displayed Description of setting MELSECNET H CC Link No Item Bus Direct CPU sera Ethernet connection connection j i i MELSECNET 10 connection connection conned connection TE connection 1 Channel No Sets the channel number of the controller targeted to the batch monitor 0 Host loop 2 Net No 1 to 239 0 FF When the host station is FF When the host station g

"user manual"

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

&quot;user manual&quot;

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

"user manual"